DSR-5716P DSR-5709P
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
DSR-5716P
DSR-5709P
Digital Video Recorder
with Multiplexer Function
About this manual
Before installing and using this unit,
please read this manual carefully.
Be sure to keep it handy for later reference.
z Refer to the included CD-ROM for the German, French, Spanish and Italian “INSTRUCTION MANUAL”.
z Die “BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG” in den Sprachen Deutsch, Französisch, Spanisch und Italienisch
finden Sie auf der beiliegenden CD-ROM.
z Utilisez le CD-ROM fourni pour consulter le “MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS” en allemand, français,
espagnol et italien.
z Consulte en el CD-ROM suministrado el “MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES” en alemán, francés, español e
italiano.
z Per il “MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI” in Tedesco, Francese, Spagnolo e Italiano, fare riferimento al CDROM allegato.
PRECAUTION
WEEE Symbol Information
WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS
APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR OTHER MOISTURE.
To avoid electrical shock, do not open the cabinet.
Refer servicing to qualified personnel only.
If the power supply cord (AC power cord) of this
appliance is damaged, it must be replaced. Return to a
SANYO Authorised Service Centre for replacement of the
cord.
Please note:
Your SANYO product is designed and
manufactured with high quality materials
and components which can be recycled
and reused.
This symbol means that electrical and
electronic equipment, at their end-of-life,
should be disposed of separately from your
household waste.
Please dispose of this equipment at your
local community waste collection/recycling
centre.
In the European Union there are separate
collection systems for used electrical and
electronic products.
Please help us to conserve the
environment we live in!
Location
For safe operation and satisfactory performance of your
unit, keep the following in mind when selecting a place for
its installation:
Shield it from direct sunlight and keep it away from sources
of intense heat.
Avoid dusty or humid places.
Avoid places with insufficient ventilation for proper heat
dissipation. Do not block the ventilation holes at the top and
bottom of the unit. Do not place the unit on a carpet
because this will block the ventilation holes.
Install the unit in a horizontal position only.
Avoid locations subject to strong vibrations.
Avoid moving the unit between cold and hot locations.
Do not place the unit directly on top of a monitor TV, as this
may cause playback or recording problems.
This symbol mark and recycle
system are applied only to EU
countries and not applied to the
countries in the other area of the
world.
Avoiding Electrical Shock and Fire
Do not handle the power cord with wet hands.
Do not pull on the power cord when disconnecting it from
an AC wall outlet. Grasp it by the plug.
If any liquid is spilled on the unit, unplug the power cord
immediately and have the unit inspected at a factoryauthorised service centre.
Do not place anything directly on top of this unit.
SERVICE
This unit is a precision instruments and if treated with care,
will provide years of satisfactory performance. However, in
the event of a problem, the owner is advised not to attempt
to make repairs or open the cabinet. Servicing should
always be referred to your dealer or Sanyo Authorized
Service Centre.
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
Discard used batteries according to the manufacture’s
instructions.
English
1
INTRODUCTION
Main features
Accessories
„ The digital video recorder records video from
monitoring cameras to its internal hard disk,
and it can display real video being monitored
in four, six, nine, 13 or 16 screens. Recorded
video can also be played back with multiple
screens.
Check that you have all the parts shown below.
Power cord
The DSR-5709P can only display split screen video in four,
six or nine screens.
Power cord tie
„ In addition to the two internal hard disks,
expansion units can be added for four hard
disks. The hard disks can also be used for
mirroring.
„ Complete range of recording and playback
functions
z Instruction Manual
(DVR/Network)
z Quick Guide
z CD-ROM Manual
z Simultaneous recording and playback of video at a
maximum 100 frames per second.
z Timer recording allows recordings to be made at different
times each day.
z Alarm recording allows the actions of intruders to be recorded.
z Zoom allows a certain section of monitored and playback
video to be magnified.
z The video from specific cameras can be masked using a
black pattern to prevent it being monitored.
z Motion sensing can be used with each camera. Alarms can
be set up to record moving images.
z ROI allows recordings to be made with different picture
quality for each area on the screen.
Symbols used in this manual
Information describing operation methods or
how to get the most out of functions.
Information describing the correct use of the
digital video recorder.
„ Search function allows instant display of the
desired recording. (JP.37)
(JP.xx) indicates the page to be referred to.
z Alarm log search allows efficient searching of large
volumes of alarms.
z Search in order of alarm occurrence.
z Search by thumbnail using alarm search.
z Search by date/time.
z Search within the archive area.
z Search for intruder motion using motion detection search.
Copyright
z This manual and software are copyrighted by Sanyo
Electric Co., Ltd.
z Brand and product names used in this manual are the
trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
companies.
„ Four-level user level function allows
restriction of users for data and equipment
management. (JP.115)
Except for personal use, copyright law prohibits the use of
recorded copyrighted images without the permission of the
copyright holder.
„ Expandable and can be connected to a PC.
z Connect a recordable CD drive or DVD drive (VA-EXD1),
sold separately, to enable copying of recordings to a USB
memory, CD-R/RW or DVD+R/+RW.
z A built-in LAN terminal provides support for network
control, thus facilitating live monitoring, playback, searches
and menu settings.
z Information on alarms and device malfunctions as well as
alarm images can be sent by e-mail.
z Dome cameras can be controlled by button operations on
the digital video recorder.
MD5 License
RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm.
2
English
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
1 BEFORE USE ................................................ 7
3 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS ...... 13
Notes on handling the internal HDD .............. 7
Notes on installation locations ....................... 7
The HDD and cooling fan are consumable
components. .................................................. 7
Important recordings ...................................... 7
Protection of the HDD .................................... 7
Backup battery ............................................... 8
Basic connections ........................................ 13
Connecting RS-485 control terminals .......... 14
Connecting to a 2ND RS485/422
terminal ........................................................ 15
Connecting a LAN terminal .......................... 16
Connecting an amplifier ............................... 16
Connecting alarm input terminals ................. 16
Connecting SENSOR ALARM OUT
terminals ....................................................... 17
Connecting control terminals ........................ 17
Connecting the power cord .......................... 17
2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS ........ 9
Front panel ..................................................... 9
Rear panel ................................................... 11
OPERATION
1 PREPARING FOR USE ............................... 18
4 PLAY ............................................................ 32
Operation display ......................................... 18
Changing the display position of the
operation display area .................................. 19
Changing the language ................................ 19
Setting the time ............................................ 20
Hard disk archive area ................................. 21
Playing video on a full screen ...................... 32
Fast-forward and fast-rewind playback ........ 32
Changing the playback speed ...................... 32
Magnifying the playback video ..................... 33
Viewing still images ...................................... 34
Frame advance (forward/reverse) ................ 34
Bookmarking video while playing .................. 34
Playing video on multiple screens ................ 35
2 MONITORING VIDEO FROM A CAMERA . 22
Viewing on a full screen ............................... 22
Viewing on quad screens ............................. 23
Viewing on multi 9 or multi 16 screens ........ 24
Enlarging video ............................................ 24
Automatic camera selection ......................... 25
Viewing on monitor 2 ................................... 26
5 SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO ..... 37
Alarm log search .......................................... 38
Alarm search ................................................ 39
Alarm thumbnail search ............................... 42
Time/date search ......................................... 44
Searching within the archive area ................ 46
Motion detection search ............................... 47
Bookmark search .......................................... 50
3 RECORDING ............................................... 29
Normal recording ......................................... 29
Timer recording ............................................ 29
Alarm recording ............................................ 30
Pre-alarm recording ..................................... 30
Bookmarking video while recording ............. 31
English
6 SAVING (COPYING) RECORDED VIDEO .. 52
Copying video to the hard disk’s
archive area ................................................. 53
Copying to a USB memory ........................... 54
Copying to a CD-R/RW or DVD+R/+RW ..... 57
Folder structure of copied video.................... 62
3
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
SETTINGS
3 GENERAL SET .......................................... 111
MENU CONFIGURATION AND
OPERATIONS .................................................. 63
1 INITIAL SET ................................................ 66
Configuration ................................................ 66
Setting the language .................................... 67
Setting the time ............................................ 67
Setting the summer time .............................. 67
External clock setting ................................... 68
Detecting connected cameras ..................... 69
Setting camera titles .................................... 70
Setting holidays ............................................ 71
Setting time periods ..................................... 72
OPERATION
Configuration .............................................. 111
Setting data display .................................... 112
Setting for control terminal output ............... 113
Setting the buzzer ...................................... 114
Setting the security lock ............................. 115
Setting RS-485 ........................................... 120
Hard disk initialization and mirroring .......... 122
Expanding (Replacing) and initializing
the hard disk ............................................... 124
Network settings ......................................... 125
Making network control settings ................. 128
Basic menu operations ................................ 63
Resetting menu items .................................. 64
Sub-menu configuration ............................... 65
4 SCREEN SET ............................................ 132
SETTINGS
Setting quad and multi 9/16 display ........... 132
Setting the interval and monitors
for automatic screen selection ................... 134
Setting masks ............................................. 136
Setting the color level ................................. 138
2 RECORD SET ............................................. 76
Configuration ................................................ 76
Normal recording easy setup ....................... 77
Displaying the recording areas .................... 82
Changing recording areas ............................ 83
Setting overwrite permission ........................ 84
Setting recording conditions ......................... 85
Setting auto deleting .................................... 87
Setting normal recording .............................. 88
Setting program recording ........................... 90
Timer settings .............................................. 92
Setting alarm recording ................................ 98
Setting the motion sensors ........................ 105
Setting alarm operation and display ........... 108
Canceling an alarm .................................... 110
5 POWER LOSS/USED TIME ...................... 139
7 COPY MENU SETTINGS .......................... 141
Saving menu settings ................................. 141
Loading menu settings ............................... 142
NETWORK
CONTROL
6 INITIALIZATION LOG ............................... 140
8 ADVANCED MENU SET ........................... 144
3 OPERATION PANEL FUNCTIONS AND
RESTRICTIONS ........................................ 165
1 GETTING PREPARED .............................. 159
Operations possible with PC control .......... 159
Digital video recorder network settings ...... 159
NETWORK
SETTINGS
NETWORK CONTROL
NETWORK
OPERATION
Configuration .............................................. 144
Setting ROI ................................................. 145
Setting alarm notification ............................ 149
Camera control settings ............................. 150
How to Register Preset Positions ............... 153
Time zone/NTP setting ............................... 154
Operation panel .......................................... 165
Camera operation panel ............................. 166
2 NETWORK CONTROL .............................. 162
OTHER
Controlling from a PC ................................. 162
Disconnecting ............................................ 163
Messages displayed when connected ....... 163
4
English
CONTENTS
NETWORK OPERATION
1 RECORDING IMAGES .............................. 168
3 SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO ... 175
Normal recording ....................................... 168
Timer recording .......................................... 168
Alarm recording .......................................... 168
Pre-alarm recording ................................... 168
Basic operation .......................................... 175
Search menu .............................................. 175
1. ALARM LOG SEARCH .......................... 176
2. ALARM SEARCH ................................... 177
3. ALARM THUMBNAIL SEARCH ............. 177
4. TIME/DATE SEARCH ............................ 178
5. ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH .................... 178
6. MOTION DETECTION SEARCH ........... 179
2 WATCHING IMAGES ................................ 169
The various ways of displaying
live images ................................................. 169
Performing operations in play mode .......... 170
Adjusting the image and audio ................... 171
Screen display items .................................. 172
Downloading live images to a PC .............. 173
4 SAVING (COPYING)
RECORDED VIDEO .................................. 180
Copying to the archive area ....................... 180
Downloading to a PC ................................. 181
NETWORK SETTINGS
1 SETTINGS ................................................. 183
5 SCREEN SET ............................................ 202
Making menu selections ............................ 183
Menu structure ........................................... 184
1. SEQUENCE SET ................................... 202
2. MASK SET ............................................. 203
2 INITIAL SET .............................................. 185
6 POWER LOSS/USED TIME ...................... 204
1. CLOCK SET ........................................... 185
2. SUMMER TIME SET/EXT. CLOCK SET 185
3. HOLIDAY SET ....................................... 186
1. POWER LOSS/USED TIME .................. 204
7 INITIALIZATION LOG ............................... 205
INITIALIZATION LOG ................................ 205
3 RECORD SET ........................................... 187
8 COPY MENU SETTINGS .......................... 206
1. RECORDING AREA SET ...................... 187
2. RECORDING CONDITIONS SET ......... 188
3. NORMAL REC MODE SET ................... 189
4. PROGRAM REC SET ............................ 190
5. TIMER SET ............................................ 191
6. ALARM REC MODE SET ...................... 192
SAVING MENU SETTINGS ....................... 206
LOADING MENU SETTINGS .................... 206
9 ADVANCED MENU SET ........................... 207
1. ALARM NOTICE SET ............................ 207
2. CAMERA CONTROL SET ..................... 209
4. NTP SET ................................................ 210
4 GENERAL SET ......................................... 195
1. DISPLAY SET ........................................ 195
2. BUZZER SET ......................................... 195
3. SECURITY LOCK SET .......................... 196
4. USER ID SET ........................................ 197
5. RS-485 SET ........................................... 198
6. HDD SET ............................................... 198
7. NETWORK SET ..................................... 199
8. NETWORK CONTROL SET .................. 200
English
5
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
OTHER
3 Specifications ........................................... 219
1 DVR VIEWER2 .......................................... 211
OPERATION
Specifications ............................................. 219
Dimensions ................................................ 220
Table of recording rates and times ............. 221
Table of recording rate settings .................. 223
Table of pre-alarm recording times ............ 224
Terminal board specifications .................... 225
Before Using DVR Viewer2 ........................ 211
Structure of the Screen and the Function of each
Section ....................................................... 212
Opening Image Files .................................. 213
Switching the Display Pattern
of the Screen .............................................. 214
Selecting the Channel Displayed
on the Screen ............................................. 214
Functions of the Viewer Operating Panel .. 215
Saving and Printing Images ....................... 216
Setting the Date and Time Display Format 216
INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS ................ 217
RS-485 specifications ................................ 217
DVR/VCR command table ......................... 218
4 MENU SETTING SEQUENCE ................... 227
OpenSSL License........................................... 230
INDEX .............................................................. 232
SETTINGS
2 INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS ............... 217
RS-485 specifications ................................ 217
DVR/VCR command table ......................... 218
NETWORK
CONTROL
NETWORK
OPERATION
NETWORK
SETTINGS
OTHER
6
English
1
BEFORE USE
Notes on handling the internal HDD
Notes on installation locations
This digital video recorder uses an internal HDD.
Be sure to observe the following points carefully when
operating, setting-up, or servicing the digital video recorder.
Avoid subjecting the HDD to sudden impact or vibration. In
addition, avoid using it in dusty locations or near magnetic
objects. The following precautions should be observed in
order to prevent the loss of recorded data:
z Do not subject the digital video recorder to sudden impact.
z Do not use the digital video recorder on a vibrating or
unstable surface.
z Do not disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet
during recording or playback.
z Do not use the digital video recorder in areas with extreme
temperature changes (i.e., 10ºC or more per hour).
z Condensation may occur if the digital video recorder is
moved to an area with a significantly different temperature
or high humidity. If the digital video recorder is used with
condensation inside, operating problems may occur.
z Do not install the digital video recorder inside motor
vehicles, trains, or other areas with constant vibration.
z The digital video recorder has ventilation holes on its left,
rear, and bottom panels. Ensure that these holes are not
blocked after installation.
z Do not use the digital video recorder in a bookshelf, box, or
any other area with poor ventilation.
z This digital video recorder is designed for use in a
horizontal orientation, and vertical setup may result in
malfunction.
z When installing the digital video recorder in a rack, ensure
that a gap of at least 5 cm at the back and sides and 1 cm
at the top and bottom is provided.
„ Do not subject the digital video recorder to
sudden impact or vibration.
If the digital video recorder is subjected to sudden impact or
vibration, it may damage the hard disk or cause corruption of
the data stored within it.
z Do not move the digital video recorder while the power is
turned on. Always ensure that the power is turned off
before removing the digital video recorder from or placing it
in a rack.
z When transporting the digital video recorder, pack it
securely using the specified materials. In addition, choose
a method of transportation that minimizes vibration.
z When placing the digital video recorder on the floor or
another similar surface, attach the specified pads to its
base and place it down gently.
„ Do not move the digital video recorder for 30
seconds after turning off the power.
After the power is turned off, the disk inside the HDD
continues to spin for a brief period due to inertia and the
heads are in an unstable condition.
During this period, the digital video recorder is even more
susceptible to damage from sudden impact and vibration than
when it is turned on. Make sure that the digital video recorder
is not subjected to even gentle vibration for at least 30
seconds after turning off the power.
Notes on handling the hard disk drive
„ Do not operate the digital video recorder when
condensation has formed on it.
„ Replacement time of worn or deteriorated
components
If the digital video recorder is operated in this type of
condition, there is a possibility that it may become
permanently damaged.
If the temperature around the digital video recorder changes
suddenly, wait for it to stabilize before operating the digital
video recorder.
A hard disk is a component that wears out or deteriorates from
use; its service life depends on the usage environment. If
used at a temperature of 25°C, for example, it becomes prone
to writing errors when the total power feeding time exceeds
two years. If used further, it may reach the end of its service
life due to deterioration of the head and/or motor.
For worry-free use of your hard disk drive, it is recommended
as a general rule of thumb to use at an ambient temperature
of 25°C and replace it with new one every two years.
(This replacement time span, however, is just a rough guide
and does not guarantee the service life.)
„ Notes on replacing the HDD
Be sure to follow the correct procedure when replacing the
HDD.
z HDDs that have been removed from their packing may not
operate correctly if they are subjected to sudden impact or
vibration. It is recommended that you place the HDD on a
soft, level surface with the printed circuit board facing
upward after it has been unpacked.
z Take care to avoid subjecting the HDD to sudden impact or
vibration when removing and tightening screws as part of
the HDD replacement procedure.
Tighten all screws securely to ensure that they do not
loosen.
z The HDD is sensitive to static electricity; accordingly, you
should take the appropriate precautions to prevent the
buildup of static charges.
„ Hard disk service life
As a hard disk is precision mechanical equipment, handle it
with care to avoid a physical shock.
z Shock or vibration may cause the hard disk to malfunction.
z Do not move or install the hard disk immediately after
turning it on or off, i.e. for approximately 30 seconds,
because its operation is still unstable.
z Do not block the ventilation holes or stop the cooling fan.
Temperature rise inside may shorten the service life of the
hard disk drive.
„ Handling a detached HDD unit
If transporting or storing the HDD unit in a detached condition,
be sure to first of all pack it using the specified materials.
In addition, choose a method of transportation that minimizes
vibration.
English
7
1
BEFORE USE
INTRODUCTION
„ Automatic verification function of the hard
disk drive and cooling fan operation
You can confirm the operation status of the hard disk drive by
viewing the flashing of the ALARM indicator on the front
panel. Check the ALARM indicator before contacting the
dealer.
z Lamp off: Normal operation
z Fast flashing: Abnormal condition of hard disk
z Slow flashing: Abnormal condition of cooling fan
OPERATION
„ Replacement time of main components or
parts
SETTINGS
With continuous operation of the digital video recorder at a
temperature of 25°C, for example, its components and/or
parts may wear out or deteriorate depending on the usage
environment. To keep the performance of the digital video
recorder, it is recommended as a general rule of thumb to
replace components and parts based on the following time
spans. However, note that each replacement time span is just
a rough guide and does not
z Hard disk: Two years
As time goes by, the head and motor wear out or
deteriorate. When replacing a hard disk, it is also
recommended to replace the damper, or vibration absorber
as well.
z Cooling fan: Three years
Malfunction of the fan cause temperature inside the
equipment to rise, and this may lead to hard disk failure.
Important recordings
NETWORK
CONTROL
NETWORK
OPERATION
z Always perform test recording in advance to confirm
whether the playback of the digital video recorder is
normal.
z Note that Sanyo accepts no responsibility for losses
occurring as a result of recording or playback problems
caused by malfunction of this digital video recorder or any
connected devices.
z As a precaution against malfunction or accidents, it is
advisable to periodically back up important recordings or to
perform mirroring.
Protection of the HDD
The HDD is checked automatically when the power is turned
on. If an abnormality is detected, the ERROR indicator begins
to flash. To initialize the HDD or to save images stored on it,
contact the dealer from whom this digital video recorder was
purchased.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
Backup battery
The digital video recorder comes with a built-in lithium battery.
If power is supplied continuously for at least 48 hours after
setting the date and time, the clock continues to operate
normally for up to 30 days without a supply of power.
When disposing of this digital video recorder, contact the
dealer from whom it was purchased for information on how to
dispose of the lithium battery.
OTHER
8
English
2
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS
DSR-5716P
1
2
3
4
5
9
10
8
16
13
MENU
14 15
17
18
EXIT/OSD
25
SHUTTLE
PLAY/STOP
C
POWER
FULL
1
ERROR
2
LOCK
4
3
5
ALARM
6
7
FUNC.
8
QUAD
MULTI
PRESET
MON 2
AUTO PAN
PLUS
SEQUENCE
TOUR
MENU
ENTER
AF
ZOOM
SEARCH
STILL
AR
LE
JOG
EN
T
ER
IRIS
SEQUENCE MARK/COPY SHUTTLE HOLD
9
10
12
11
13
14
15
16
FOCUS
REC/STOP
USB
TIMER
ALARM
ZOOM/I/FO
6
7
11
Front panel
19
20
22 23
MENU
RESET
26
24 21
8. [FUNC.] button
Activates dome camera operation mode. The operation of
other buttons changes. (JP.150) Use also for advanced
menu functions.
1. POWER indicator
Lights up when the power is on.
2. FULL indicator (JP.86)
Flashes when the amount of available memory in the hard
disk’s recording area drops to the percentage specified using
menu settings.
In addition, recording stops automatically when no more
memory is available, and the FULL indicator switches to a
permanently lit condition.
The indicator can then be turned off by performing “AREA
FULL RESET”.
9. [QUAD] button and indicator (JP.23)
Displays video in quad screens. The indicator lights up while
in quad screen display.
The indicator turns off when using a different screen display
mode.
10. [MULTI] button and indicator (JP.24)
Displays video in multi 9 or multi 16 screen display.
The indicator lights up while in multi 9 or multi 16 screen
display.
The indicator turns off when using a different screen display
mode.
The DSR-5709P can only display video in nine screens.
3. ERROR indicator (JP.17)
This indicator flashes if the HDD or fan begins to malfunction.
4. LOCK indicator (JP.118)
Lights up when operations have been locked.
The LOCK indicator turns off when the lock condition is
cancelled.
11. [MON2] button and indicator (JP.26)
If the [MON2] button is pressed while a monitor is connected
to the MON2 output terminal on the rear panel, it is possible to
change the monitor 2 video. The [CAMERA SELECT],
[SEQUENCE] and [QUAD] buttons can be used. The indicator
lights up when this mode is selected.
5. ALARM indicator
Flashes during alarm recording.
The ALARM indicator lights up during pre-alarm recording.
12. [PLUS] button (JP.24)
Changes the video from a single camera to quad screen size
during multi 9, multi 16, full screen or quad screen display.
For DSR-5709P, this operation is available when in multi 9,
quad and full screen display.
6. USB terminal (JP.57)
Connects to a recordable CD/DVD drive or a USB memory.
For compatibility, refer to the SANYO homepage.
http://www.sanyosecurity.com/
When the USB port on the rear panel is also connected at the
same time, only the front port will be used preferentially.
13. [MENU] button and indicator
Displays the menu screens (i.e., setting screens), and the
indicator lights up while any of these screens is being
displayed.
7. [CAMERA SELECT] buttons and indicators
When one or more cameras have been connected to the
VIDEO IN terminals on the digital video recorder’s rear panel
and the appropriate [CAMERA SELECT] button is pressed,
the corresponding indicator lights up and the video feed from
that camera is displayed on-screen.
z During quad, multi 9, or multi 16 screen display:
The indicators corresponding to the cameras being
displayed on the monitor light up.
z During video loss:
The indicator starts to flash.
z If an alarm occurs:
The indicator for the corresponding camera starts to flash.
English
12
PAN
9
2
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS
1
2
3
4
5
9
10
8
16
13
MENU
14 15
17
18
EXIT/OSD
25
SHUTTLE
PLAY/STOP
C
POWER
FULL
2
3
LOCK
4
5
ALARM
6
7
FUNC.
8
9
QUAD
MULTI
PRESET
MON 2
AUTO PAN
PLUS
SEQUENCE
TOUR
MENU
ENTER
AF
ZOOM
SEARCH
STILL
AR
LE
JOG
EN
T
ER
OPERATION
1
ERROR
INTRODUCTION
DSR-5709P
IRIS
SEQUENCE MARK/COPY SHUTTLE HOLD
FOCUS
REC/STOP
USB
TIMER
ALARM
ZOOM/I/FO
6
7
11
14. [EXIT/OSD] button and indicator
z EXIT:
Exits the main menu or a sub-menu. When a menu is
displayed, the indicator turns off.
(The EXIT operation is disabled while the WARNING screen
is displayed or a setting for menu item is being selected (with
light flashing) on the menu screen.)
z OSD:
Each time the [OSD] button is pressed while the digital video
recorder is recording, playing, or stopped, the operation
display area changes position between the top and bottom of
the screen or becomes hidden; furthermore, the indicator
lights up whenever this information is being displayed.
12
19
PAN
MENU
RESET
26
20
24 21
22 23
SETTINGS
21. [SHUTTLE HOLD] button and indicator (JP.32)
Locks shuttle dial operation for a constant speed during
playback or slow playback.
The indicator lights up while the shuttle dial is locked.
22. [REC/STOP] button and indicator (JP.29)
Starts normal recording, and the indicator lights up during this
process.
Press this button for at least three seconds to stop recording
and turn off the indicator.
15. [PLAY/STOP] button and indicator (JP.32)
When the [PLAY/STOP] button is pressed, the video from the
recording area is played and the indicator lights. When
pressed during playback, this button stops the digital video
recorder.
24. [ALARM] button (JP.42)
When an [ALARM] button is pressed during playback or still,
the digital video recorder skips to the next earlier or next later
alarm.
17. [SEARCH] button and indicator (JP.38)
When the [SEARCH] button is pressed while the digital video
recorder is recording or stopped, the search menu is
displayed and the indicator lights up. Press this button again
to close the search menu.
18. [STILL] button and indicator (JP.34)
When the [STILL] button is pressed during playback, the
current frame is displayed as a still image and the indicator
lights up. Press this button again to cancel.
26. [MENU RESET] button (JP.64)
Restores displayed menus to default menu settings.
19. [SEQUENCE] button and indicator (JP.25)
Automatically switches the camera video during monitoring.
When this button is pressed, the indicator begins flashing and
the display is changed automatically. The [CAMERA
SELECT] button indicator lights in accordance with screen
changes.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
25. Jog dial (inside) and shuttle dial (outside)
z During playback:
Use the jog dial to change the playback speed.
Use the shuttle dial to perform fast-forward or fast-reverse
playback.
z During menu display:
Use the jog dial to move the cursor and to change setting
values. Use the shuttle dial to confirm settings.
NETWORK
OPERATION
16. [ZOOM] button and indicator (JP.33)
When the [ZOOM] button is pressed during playback or
monitoring of camera video on a full screen, a portion of the
playback video is magnified and the indicator lights.
NETWORK
CONTROL
23. [TIMER] button and indicator (JP.29)
If the [TIMER] button is pressed while the recording is
stopped, timer recording standby mode is selected and
recording starts automatically at the set time. The indicator
lights up while in timer recording standby mode.
If the button is pressed during timer recording, this process is
stopped and the indicator turns off. Furthermore, if the
[TIMER] button is pressed when in timer recording standby
mode, timer recording is cancelled.
OTHER
20. [MARK/COPY] button and indicator (JP.53)
z MARK
You can bookmark any video images during recording or
playback.
z COPY
Copies recorded video onto the hard disk archive area, USB
memory, CD-R/RW disk, DVD+R/+RW disk or other media.
The indicator lights up during the copy process.
10
English
2
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS
DSR-5716P
The number of terminals for the DSR-5709P may differ. For more details, see below.
5
4
1
17
AC IN
ALARM IN
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
IN
18
UT
B
M
AR
AL
2
UT
TP
OU T 1
U
TP
OU L
L
FU
T
OU
ING
RN T
WA RESE
M IN
K IN
A
ER
DO NOT CONNECT TO PHONE LINE
OUTPUT 1 :
NON REC OUT/VIDEO LOSS
OUTPUT 2 :
ARACHIVE FULL/TIMER REC OUT
2ND
RS-485/422 REMOTE
KO
MONITOR OUT
8
9
10 11
12
13
14
Rear panel
C R1 R2
OUT C
EXCEPT SANYO SSP
16
6
Pin
2. VIDEO IN terminals
Connects to video cameras.
The DSR-5709P has nine terminals.
3. VIDEO OUT terminals
Connects to a monitor to view camera images.
The DSR-5709P has nine terminals.
4. ALARM IN terminals (1 to 16)
Connects to an externally installed alarm switch. Operate the
alarm switch for alarm recording.
The DSR-5709P has nine terminals.
Pin
15
Ground
ALARM IN 1
Alarm input No. 1
ALARM IN 2
Alarm input No. 2
ALARM IN 3
Alarm input No. 3
ALARM IN 4
Alarm input No. 4
ALARM IN 5
Alarm input No. 5
ALARM IN 6
Alarm input No. 6
ALARM IN 7
Alarm input No. 7
ALARM IN 8
Alarm input No. 8
ALARM IN 9
Alarm input No. 9
ALARM IN 10
Alarm input No. 10
ALARM IN 11
Alarm input No. 11
ALARM IN 12
Alarm input No. 12
ALARM IN 13
Alarm input No. 13
ALARM IN 14
Alarm input No. 14
ALARM IN 15
Alarm input No. 15
ALARM IN 16
Alarm input No. 16
11
Signal
C
Ground
SENSOR ALARM OUT 1
Output of an alarm signal for
Camera No. 1
SENSOR ALARM OUT 2
Output of an alarm signal for
Camera No. 2
SENSOR ALARM OUT 3
Output of an alarm signal for
Camera No. 3
SENSOR ALARM OUT 4
Output of an alarm signal for
Camera No. 4
SENSOR ALARM OUT 5
Output of an alarm signal for
Camera No. 5
SENSOR ALARM OUT 6
Output of an alarm signal for
Camera No. 6
SENSOR ALARM OUT 7
Output of an alarm signal for
Camera No. 7
SENSOR ALARM OUT 8
Output of an alarm signal for
Camera No. 8
SENSOR ALARM OUT 9
Output of an alarm signal for
Camera No. 9
SENSOR ALARM OUT 10
Output of an alarm signal for
Camera No. 10
SENSOR ALARM OUT 11
Output of an alarm signal for
Camera No. 11
SENSOR ALARM OUT 12
Output of an alarm signal for
Camera No. 12
SENSOR ALARM OUT 13
Output of an alarm signal for
Camera No. 13
SENSOR ALARM OUT 14
Output of an alarm signal for
Camera No. 14
SENSOR ALARM OUT 15
Output of an alarm signal for
Camera No. 15
SENSOR ALARM OUT 16
Output of an alarm signal for
Camera No. 16
Signal
C
CONTROL
5. SENSOR ALARM OUT terminals
The terminals are used when motion sensors have been set
(JP.105) to output an alarm signal to a connected device
upon detection of motion.
The DSR-5709P has nine terminals.
1. Optional board slot
You can use the slot to add on a RAID unit using a SCSI
(VZU-SCB1) interface or to connect an expansion unit via an
S-ATA (VZU-SATB1) board. You cannot use a RAID unit and
an expansion unit at the same time.
Please contact the dealer for details.
When handling and connecting, be sure to read the instruction
manual included with the option board.
English
SENSOR
ALARM OUT
SELECTABLE
AUDIO
7
RS-485
A SANYO SSP B
OC
ALL
RESET
RS-485
TERMINATE
OFF
ON
IM
MON2
OC
MAIN
CL
VGA OUT
OUT
TT
IN
CL
LAN
AR
USB
EX
OUT
AL
3
2
6.
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS
Control terminals
17. AC power socket (AC IN)
Insert the supplied power cord securely into this socket.
Signal
2ND RS485/422 A
Control terminal (A)
2ND RS485/422 B
Control terminal (B)
C
Common terminal
REMOTE R1
Remote input 1
REMOTE R2
Remote input 2
Clock adjust input terminal
CLOCK OUT
Clock adjust output terminal
EXT TIMER IN
External timer input terminal
ALARM RESET
Alarm reset signal input
WARNING OUT
Warning output for abnormal
conditions of hard disk drive or fan
FULL
Remaining-space warning output
for recording area
NON REC OUT/VIDEO LOSS
OUTPUT 2*
ARCHIVE FULL/TIMER REC OUT
ALARM OUT
Alarm output
ALARM C
Common terminal for alarm output
SETTINGS
OUTPUT 1*
18. Power cord holder
Secure the power card to the holder using the power cord tie
(accessory) as shown in the illustration.
OPERATION
CLOCK IN
INTRODUCTION
Pin
* Specify the output settings for the OUTPUT 1 and
OUTPUT 2 terminals on the <DISPLAY SET> screen.
7. [ALL RESET] button
When the [ALL RESET] button is pressed, the digital video
recorder is reset and the time is returned to its default setting.
NETWORK
CONTROL
8. USB terminal
Connects to a recordable CD/DVD drive (e.g. VA-EXD1, sold
separately) or a USB memory. For information about
supported CD/DVD drives, visit the SANYO website at:
http://www.sanyosecurity.com/
When the USB port on the front panel is also inserted at the
same time, only the front port will be used preferentially.
9. LAN terminal (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)
Connect to switching hubs, routers and PCs.
NETWORK
OPERATION
10. AUDIO IN terminal
Connect a microphone via an amplifier in order to record
audio.
11. AUDIO OUT terminal
Connect speakers via an amplifier in order to output audio.
12. VGA OUT terminal
Connect a VGA monitor to this terminal so that it obtains highresolution video output at XGA (1024 x 768) / 75Hz.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
13. MAIN MONITOR output terminal
Connects to the main monitor.
14. MON2 output terminal
Connects to monitor 2.
15. RS-485 termination switch
Used when connecting multiple devices from the RS-485
control connectors.
OTHER
16. RS-485 control connectors (A) (B)
Connects to a system controller or dome cameras.
12
English
3
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
The digital video recorder shall be installed by qualified service technician only.
This section describes how to connect the digital video recorder to video cameras and other devices. Be sure to read the instruction
manuals for each connected device.
z Improper connections may result in malfunction or smoke emission.
z A separate power supply is required for operation of each camera.
z Manage power for all expansion units with a single power source. Otherwise, data may be lost.
Basic connections
DSR-5716P
Only nine cameras can be connected to the DSR-5709P.
The following diagram shows the connections for cameras, monitors, a PC and a system controller.
Cameras
(sold separately)
1 - 16
VGA monitor
(sold separately)
MENU
AUTO
MODE
POWER
AC IN
ALARM IN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
IN
UT
B
M
AR
AL
2
UT
TP
OU T 1
U
TP
OU L
L
FU
T
OU
ING
RN T
WA RESE
M IN
K IN
A
ER
2ND
RS-485/422 REMOTE
KO
SENSOR
ALARM OUT
OC
RS-485
A SANYO SSP B
IM
RS-485
TERMINATE
OFF
ON
OC
MON2
CL
MAIN
VGA OUT
TT
OUT
CL
IN
AR
LAN
EX
USB
ALL
RESET
AL
OUT
C R1 R2
OUT C
EXCEPT SANYO SSP
SELECTABLE
MONITOR OUT
AUDIO
DO NOT CONNECT TO PHONE LINE
OUTPUT 1 :
NON REC OUT/VIDEO LOSS
OUTPUT 2 :
ARACHIVE FULL/TIMER REC OUT
CONTROL
The RS-485 connector is
connected to A or B according
to the type of cable.
120 V – 240 V AC
(50/60 Hz)
PC
(commercially-available)
Video input
terminal
Video input
terminal
01
02
03
04
Monitor
Monitor 2
(sold separately) (sold separately)
z If you connect an outdoor camera to the digital video
recorder, make sure to establish a ground for the shielded
portion of the connection cable.
z Make sure to use a wall socket with ground fault protection.
English
13
System controller
(sold separately)
3
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
Connecting RS-485 control terminals
INTRODUCTION
RJ-11 Pin locations
A system controller or another DVR can be connected to the
RS-485 control terminal. Perform settings in the <RS-485
SET> screen (JP.120) when connecting system controller.
Control a connected SANYO camera with an RS-485 control
terminal using a system controller or the digital video recorder
itself. To control a camera equipped with an RS-485 control
terminal, perform settings in the <CAMERA CONTROL SET>
screen (JP.150).
1
6
OPERATION
\
System
controller
z Do not connect to phone line.
Connector A signal
Connector B signal
1
Not used
Not used
2
Not used
Not used
3
A
B
4
B
A
5
Not used
Not used
6
Not used
Not used
SETTINGS
Pin
number
(A is left and B is right, viewed from the back.)
A: Non-inverting driver output/receiver input
B: lnverting driver output/receiver input
The digital video recorder supports both straight type and
crossed type connection cables.
When using a straight type connection cable, connect the RS485 connector pin A to the pin A socket, or pin B to the pin B
socket.
When using a crossed type connection cable, connect the RS485 connector pin A to the pin B socket, or pin B to the pin A
socket.
z Connect as shown above and set to full screen in the
<CAMERA CONTROL SET> screen to control camera with
the digital video recorder.
z Control a camera by directly entering the camera address
with the system controller regardless of the <CAMERA
CONTROL SET> screen settings when the cameras and
the system controller are connected as shown above.
R
DO NOT CONNECT TO PHONE LINE
To other
connector A
To other
connector A
Straight type cable
Crossed type cable
Straight type:
Not used
Not used
Not used
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
1
2
3
4
5
6
OTHER
Not used
Crossed type:
NETWORK
SETTINGS
Cable types
1
2
3
4
5
6
NETWORK
OPERATION
RS-485
A SANYO SSP B
-485
INATE
ON
NETWORK
CONTROL
Connection
z Perform settings in the <RS-485 SET> screen when a
system controller is connected (JP.120).
14
English
3
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
Connecting to a 2ND RS485/422
terminal
RS-485 termination switch settings
When connecting multiple devices, it is necessary to make
termination settings on both end devices.
z Set the RS-485 termination switch of both end devices to
ON.
z Be sure to set the RS-485 termination switches of all
devices in between (devices other than the first and last
devices) to OFF.
Connect camera to the 2ND RS485/422 terminal with a
twisted-pair cable and perform settings in the <CAMERA
CONTROL SET> screen (JP.150) to control the camera with
the connected system controller or with the digital video
recorder.
System
controller
z If the termination settings are not correctly made, the
incorrect data is transmitted to each device.
Example:
System controller
SW
COM
A TELEMETRY B
VIDEO
1 2 3 4
ON
12V
SW
1 2 3 4
ON
Termination
switch
Other companies’ cameras
z Connect as shown above and set to full screen in the
<CAMERA CONTROL SET> screen to control camera with
the digital video recorder.
z If connected as shown above, settings must be made in
<CAMERA CONTROL SET> screen.
z Connect other companies’ cameras to the 2ND RS-485/
422 terminals.
RS-485
TERMINATE
OFF
ON
Digital video recorder
RS-485
TERMINATE
OFF ON
RS485
Termination
switch
Operation
1
Connect as above.
Connect SSP dome cameras to VIDEO IN 1 and 2.
2
RS-485
TERMINATE
OFF ON
English
RS485
Termination
switch
3
15
Set the camera numbers and protocols
in the <CAMERA CONTROL SET>
screen. (JP.150)
Operate the dome cameras with the
front panel buttons. (JP.153)
3
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
Connecting an amplifier
INTRODUCTION
Connecting a LAN terminal
Connect to a PC for control of the digital video recorder over a
network with a switch or connect to the Internet.
Connect a microphone and speakers via an amplifier in order
to input or output audio.
LAN connection
Audio input
terminal
Audio output
terminal
PC
Ethernet cable
IN
OPERATION
To enable control of the digital video recorder over a network,
connect to the switch via Ethernet cable or make a similar
connection.
You may use either a straight or cross type Ethernet cable.
Amplifier
(sold separately)
OUT
SETTINGS
AUDIO
Switch
Connecting alarm input terminals
Internet connection
When using external alarms (i.e., intruder sensors), connect
external switches to the ALARM IN terminals.
16
Internet
1
Connect external
switches to ALARM IN
terminals.
NETWORK
CONTROL
Connect to the Internet via a router or similar device.
When connecting to a router, you may use either a straight or
cross type Ethernet cable.
To connect to an ADSL modem and other devices, be sure to
read the instruction manuals for each connected device.
Ethernet cable
NETWORK
OPERATION
Router, ADSL
modem, etc.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
Only terminals 1 to 9 are available on the DSR-5709P.
OTHER
16
English
3
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
Connecting SENSOR ALARM OUT
terminals
Connecting the power cord
1
The SENSOR ALARM OUT terminals are used to relay alarm
signals whenever one of the digital video recorder’s motion
sensors is triggered. Normally in an open condition, a terminal
adopts a low condition when a sensor for the corresponding
camera number has been triggered.
1K
After all other connections are made,
make sure the voltage is 120 V-240 V AC
and then insert the power plug into the
wall outlet.
There is no power switch. The display indicators flash, and
after a few moments, the monitor screen displays the camera
video.
Rated value of terminals
z Maximum current: 10 mA
z Maximum power: 1/10 W
120 V-240 V AC
(50/60 Hz)
Connecting control terminals
The connections for a remote control circuit are shown below.
This digital video recorder can be remotely controlled when a
remote-control circuit similar to that shown here is connected
to the remote-input control terminals.
z When turning the power on for the first time
“PLEASE SET THE CLOCK” is displayed on the monitor
screen. Set the clock. (JP.20)
z If the clock is already set
The operation display area is displayed.
REMOTE
C R1 R2
Operation
display area
01-01-07 00:00:00
EN A
0
02
R1
R2
(When operated (When combined
independently) with R2 FUNC key)
SW 1 :Camera 1:INDEX+
SW 17 :REC/STOP
SW 2 :Camera 2:INDEX-
SW 18 :PLAY/STOP
SW 3 :Camera 3:AUTO FOCUS
SW 19 :STILL
SW 4 :Camera 4 :Automatic selection display
SW 20 :SEARCH
SW 5 :Camera 5:Monitor2
SW 21 :SHIFT (Doubles with R1)
SW 6 :Camera 6:Plus display
SW 22 :PLAY
SW 7 :Camera 7:QUAD
SW 23 :REC
SW 8 :Camera 8:MULTI
SW 24 :MENU
SW 9 :Camera 9:MENU RESET
SW 25 :MENU EXIT(EXIT)
SW 10 :Camera 10:Not used
SW 26 : +
SW 11 :Camera 11:PAN left
SW 27 : -
SW 12 :Camera 12:PAN right
SW 28 : +
SW 13 :Camera 13:TILT down
SW 29 : -
SW 14 :Camera 14:TILT up
SW 30 :ZOOM
SW 15 :Camera 15:ZOOM wide
SW 31 :COPY
SW 16 :Camera 16:ZOOM tele
SW 32 :TIMER
z If the ERROR indicator starts flashing
The digital video recorder has a self-diagnostic function to
find malfunctions. If a malfunction occurs while the power
is on, the ERROR indicator flashes in a cycle to indicate
the malfunction.
If the ERROR indicator flashes, contact a Sanyo service
center.
When flashing at 4Hz (Four times per second):
The hard disk is checked automatically when the power is
turned on. The POWER indicator flashing indicates that a
malfunction has been found on the hard disk and the hard
disk must be replaced or initialized. If you need to save
video stored on the disk, contact a Sanyo service center.
When flashing at 1Hz (Once per second):
A fan malfunction has occurred.
z The power cord’s ground terminal is not provided for
enhanced safety; rather, it is used to reduce the level of
interference when the digital video recorder is connected to
analog devices.
If a large amount of noise is generated when the digital
video recorder is connected to analog devices, connect
this terminal to the building earth ground.
z Use a resistance of 1/10 ohms or more and with a D
ranking (Precision within ±0.5%).
z The remote control cable should be no more than 5 m long.
* The DSR-5709P can operate up to nine cameras.
English
17
1
PREPARING FOR USE
When the power is turned on, the operation display is shown
at the top of the monitor screen. This area indicates the date,
time, picture quality and other information needed for
operation.
Operation
display area
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
0
01-01-07 00:00:00 REC REPEAT EN A ALARM 0000000
(3)
(4)
(5)(6)
Normal
Enhanced
FI
Fine
SF
Super Fine
(7)
: Fast-forward playback
: Fast-rewind playback
: Slow playback
: Reverse slow playback
NETWORK
SETTINGS
z During simultaneous recording and playback, the display
indicates playback ( ).
NETWORK
OPERATION
z Although operations such as playback, copying and data
transfer are possible while recording, this unit gives priority
to recording, and other operations may be delayed as a
result.
z The digital video recorder uses the date and time to
manage recording and playback points. Accordingly, if the
time has not been set correctly, it is not possible to
effectively search for video data.
NETWORK
CONTROL
(8)
* The above is an example display. This is not the default.
(1) Date display (JP.20)
Be sure to specify the correct date using menu settings.
(2) Time display (JP.20)
Make sure to specify the time using menu settings. Recording
is not possible until the time is set.
(3) Operation symbol display
Displays the current operation, such as recording or playback.
SETTINGS
(6) Audio recording display
“A” is displayed when audio is being recorded. “A” is displayed
when audio is being played back if audio is recorded.
(7) Alarm display and alarm count display (JP.98)
When an alarm is set using the “ALARM REC MODE SET”
menu item, the following information is displayed.
z When alarm recording is set;
“ALARM” and the alarm number are displayed in stand-by
mode.
“ALARM” flashes during alarm recording.
z When pre-alarm recording is in progress;
“PRE” and the alarm number are displayed in stand-by
mode.
When an alarm occurs, “PRE” disappears and “ALARM”
and the alarm number are displayed.
z When performing playback from the archive area;
“ARCHIV” and the backup number are displayed.
(8) Camera title display
The camera number or camera title is displayed. Also, when
an alarm occurs the camera number and alarm “EA”, “SA”, or
“ES” are displayed.
z When an external alarm signal is activated;
“EA” flashes to the left of the camera number.
z When a motion sensor alarm signal is activated;
“SA” flashes to the left of the camera number.
z When an external alarm signal and motion sensor signal
are activated;
“ES” flashes to the left of the camera number.
01-01-07 00:00:00 REC REPEAT EN A ALARM 0000000
02
REC: Recording
EXT: External timer recording
: Normal playback
: Reverse playback
: Still
Basic
NO
OPERATION
(2)
BA
‹EN
02
(1)
INTRODUCTION
(5) Picture quality display (JP.88, P.99)
Displays the quality of the video that can be recorded on the
hard disk. Set to “EN” (Enhanced) by default setting.
Operation display
(4) Remaining memory in recording area (JP.85)
It is displayed while recording.
Displays the remaining area memory as a percentage when
overwriting in the recording area is not permitted. If
overwriting is permitted, “REPEAT” is displayed.
OTHER
18
English
1
PREPARING FOR USE
[MENU] button
[EXIT/OSD] button
Changing the display position of the
operation display area
1
Changing the language
The language displayed on the monitor can be changed.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
Item
EXIT/OSD
LANGUAGE
Each time the [EXIT/OSD] button is pressed, the operation
display moves to a different location or is hidden.
Top (default setting)
Bottom
01-01-07 00:00:00
01
1
EN A1
03
FRANCAIS
Sets the language to French.
DEUTSCH
Sets the language to German.
ESPAÑOL
Sets the language to Spanish.
Press the [MENU] button.
02
MENU
01-01-07 00:00:00
Description
Sets the language to English.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
Hidden
Operation
display area
Setting
‹ENGLISH
EN A1
04
<MAIN MENU>
1.INITIAL SET
2.RECORD SET
3.GENERAL SET
4.SCREEN SET
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME
6.INITIALIZATION LOG
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS
8.ADVANCED MENU SET
MOVE:JOG
2
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Turn the jog dial to select “1.INITIAL
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <INITIAL SET> screen is displayed.
<INITIAL SET>
1.LANGUAGE/CLOCK SET
2.CAMERA DETECT
3.TITLE SET
4.HOLIDAY SET
5.TIME PERIOD SET
MOVE:JOG
English
19
->
->
->
->
->
SELECT:SHUTTLE
1
3
PREPARING FOR USE
Turn the jog dial to select
“1.LANGUAGE/CLOCK SET” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
INTRODUCTION
Setting the time
(Default setting: 01-01-2007 MON 00:00:00)
Be sure to set the correct date and time as these settings are
used during playback and searching.
The <LANGUAGE/LANGUE/SPRACHE/IDIOMA> screen is
displayed.
Example: Setting 8:30 on 26 January, 2007.
<LANGUAGE/LANGUE/SPRACHE/IDIOMA>
ENGLISH
<CLOCK SET>
01-01-2007 MON 00:00:00
<SUMMER TIME SET>
MODE
:
USE
WEEK MONTH TIME
ON LST-SUN
03
02:00
OFF LST-SUN
10
02:00
<EXT.CLOCK SET>
ADJUST. TIME
01:00
MENU
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“ENGLISH” flashes.
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
SETTINGS
2
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Turn the jog dial to select “1.INITIAL
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <INITIAL SET> screen is displayed.
Turn the jog dial to select the language
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
MOVE:JOG
3
->
->
->
->
->
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Turn the jog dial to select
“1.LANGUAGE/CLOCK SET” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <LANGUAGE/LANGUE/SPRACHE/IDIOMA> screen is
displayed.
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
EXIT/OSD
NETWORK
SETTINGS
<LANGUAGE/LANGUE/SPRACHE/IDIOMA>
ENGLISH
<CLOCK SET>
01-01-2007 MON 00:00:00
<SUMMER TIME SET>
MODE
:
USE
WEEK MONTH TIME
ON LST-SUN
03
02:00
OFF LST-SUN
10
02:00
<EXT.CLOCK SET>
ADJUST. TIME
01:00
NETWORK
OPERATION
<REGL.LANGUE>
FRANCAIS
<REGL.HORLOGE>
01-01-2007 LUN 00:00:00
<HEURE D'ETE>
MODE
:
MARCHE
SEMAINE MOIS HEURE
ON DER-DIM
03
02:00
OFF DER-DIM
10
02:00
<REGL.HORLOGE EXTERNE>
REGL.DE L'HEURE
01:00
NETWORK
CONTROL
<INITIAL SET>
1.LANGUAGE/CLOCK SET
2.CAMERA DETECT
3.TITLE SET
4.HOLIDAY SET
5.TIME PERIOD SET
The language is selected and the cursor moves to the next
item.
6
<MAIN MENU>
1.INITIAL SET
2.RECORD SET
3.GENERAL SET
4.SCREEN SET
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME
6.INITIALIZATION LOG
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS
8.ADVANCED MENU SET
MOVE:JOG
<LANGUAGE/LANGUE/SPRACHE/IDIOMA>
ENGLISH
<CLOCK SET>
01-01-2007 MON 00:00:00
<SUMMER TIME SET>
MODE
:
USE
WEEK MONTH TIME
ON LST-SUN
03
02:00
OFF LST-SUN
10
02:00
<EXT.CLOCK SET>
ADJUST. TIME
01:00
5
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
OPERATION
4
1
OTHER
20
English
1
4
PREPARING FOR USE
Turn the jog dial to select “01” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Hard disk recording areas
B Archive area
“01” flashes (indicating the day).
20%
20
<LANGUAGE/LANGUE/SPRACHE/IDIOMA> [KEY]
ENGLISH
<CLOCK SET>
01-01-2007 MON 00:00:00
<SUMMER TIME SET>
MODE
:
USE
WEEK MONTH TIME
ON LST-SUN
03
02:00
OFF LST-SUN
10
02:00
<EXT.CLOCK SET>
ADJUST. TIME
01:00
5
80%
A Recording
area
[A] Recording area
Recording
mode
Turn the jog dial to select “26” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The day is set to “26” and the month “01” flashes.
26-01-2007 FRI 00:00:00
6
Use the same procedure to set the
month (01), year (2007), hour (08) and
minute (30).
When the minutes are set, the cursor moves to the next item.
26-01-2007 FRI 08:30:00
Manual
When monitoring, recording is
performed by pressing the [REC/
STOP] button.
Timer
recording
Automatic
Recording is carried out in
accordance with timer settings.
Alarm
recording
Recording is carried out when alarm
recording is set to “ENABLED”.
Alarm images are recorded in
Automatic response to either the operation of a
switch connected to an ALARM IN
terminal or to the detection of an
intruder via motion sensors.
Pre-alarm
recording
When pre-alarm recording is set to
“ON”, it is possible to record video
Automatic from before the occurrence of an
alarm based on the corresponding
settings.
Recording
mode
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
Copy
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
EXIT/OSD
Hard disk archive area
Hard disk recorder internal
hard disk capacity display
Hard disk recorder
external hard disk
capacity display
[A] Recording area
[B] Archive area
<RECORDING AREA SET>
TOTAL CAPACITY
:
INTERNAL HDD
:
EXTERNAL HDD
:
RECORDING AREA
:
AREA FULL RESET ->
ARCHIVE AREA
:
AREA FULL RESET ->
Recording method
This area is used to store important
video data copied from the normal
Manual
recording area and/or alarm
or
recording area. Changes can be
Automatic
made to the recording area to
determine the capacity. (1% - 99% )
z If the memory allocations for the hard disk recording areas
are changed after recording, all stored recordings are
deleted and the hard disk is initialized; accordingly, special
care should be taken. (JP.82)
z The total hard disk capacity displayed on the menu screen
may differ from the actual hard disk capacity.
The hard disk contains a recording area and an archive area.
Refer to P.82 for operations.
English
Normal
recording
[B] Archive area
z The day of the week is set automatically.
z The clock stops during date and time settings.
z The clock starts counting from 00 seconds.
7
Recording method
1500GB
500GB
1000GB
80 %
20 %
CAUTION: WHEN THE AREA SETTING IS CHANGED,
THE WHOLE AREA WILL BE INITIALIZED !
21
2
MONITORING VIDEO FROM A CAMERA
[MULTI] button
[ZOOM] button
INTRODUCTION
[SEQUENCE] button
Shuttle dial
OPERATION
[PLUS] button
[CAMERA SELECT] button
Jog dial
[MON2] button
[QUAD] button
2
Viewing on a full screen
Example: Selecting Camera 2
z Turn the jog dial to move the zoom frame to the left or right.
SETTINGS
1
Move the zoom frame to the area to be
magnified.
Press the No. 2 [CAMERA SELECT]
button.
The CAMERA SELECT indicator lights up and video from
Camera 2 is displayed on a full screen.
z Turn the shuttle dial clockwise and then turn the jog dial to
move the zoom frame vertically.
NETWORK
CONTROL
Move the zoom frame to the area to be magnified.
02
Viewing enlarged live images
NETWORK
OPERATION
1
Press the [ZOOM] button during
monitoring of camera video.
Press the button corresponding to the camera for which video
is being magnified.
The ZOOM indicator lights up and a blue zoom frame appears
in the center of the screen.
3
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
The area enclosed by the zoom frame is magnified (by a
factor of 2).
ZOOM
OTHER
02
22
English
2
4
MONITORING VIDEO FROM A CAMERA
Press the [ZOOM] button to return to
normal magnification.
Viewing on quad screens
Images from multiple connected cameras can be displayed
simultaneously.
Magnification is cancelled and the display returns to the
normal screen.
The ZOOM indicator turns off.
1
ZOOM
Press the [QUAD] button.
The QUAD indicator lights up and video from four separate
cameras is displayed simultaneously.
Video from Camera No. 1 through Camera No. 4 is initially
displayed.
QUAD
02
01
02
03
04
z Magnified video has a slightly coarser appearance when
compared with normal video.
2
z Images cannot be enlarged in multi-screen format.
To view video from other cameras,
press the [QUAD] button again.
Each time this button is pressed, the four images on the quad
screen change, in order of cameras No. 1-4, 5-8, 9-12 and 1316 (default setting).
On the DSR-5709P, the images change in order of cameras
No. 1-4, 5-8, 9-3, etc.
QUAD
3
05
06
07
08
To return to full screen display, press a
[CAMERA SELECT] button.
-
On the DSR-5709P, press the [CAMERA SELECT] 1-9
button.
English
23
2
MONITORING VIDEO FROM A CAMERA
1
Enlarging video
INTRODUCTION
Viewing on multi 9 or multi 16 screens
Enlarges the video from a single camera to quad screen size
during multi 9 or multi 16 screen display. (enlarged video)
In addition, video can also be enlarged during full screen and
quad screen displays.
For DSR-5709P, this operation is available when in multi 9,
quad and full screen display.
Press the [MULTI] button.
The MULTI indicator lights up and video from 16 separate
cameras is displayed simultaneously. Press the [MULTI]
button again to display multi 9 screens.
The DSR-5709P can only display video from nine cameras.
Example: Enlarging video during multi 9 screen display
MULTI
02
03
06
02
07
03
08
09 04 10
05
11
1206
13
15
08
16
01
05
04
1
MULTI
14
07
OPERATION
01
Press the [PLUS] button during multi 9
screen display.
The PLUS indicator lights up and the video from one camera
is enlarged.
09
PLUS
2
To return to full screen display, press a
[CAMERA SELECT] button.
2
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
03
06
02
07
SETTINGS
z In the case of both quad and multi 9/16 screen display, you
can change the positions in which video from the various
cameras is displayed. (JP.132)
01
08
09
Press a [CAMERA SELECT] button.
The video from the selected camera is enlarged.
01
On the DSR-5709P, press the [CAMERA SELECT] 1-9
button.
04
02
07
02
03
05
06
08
09
NETWORK
OPERATION
3
NETWORK
CONTROL
-
Press the [MULTI] button during plus
screen display to change display.
MULTI
03
02
07
08
08
09
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Press the [PLUS] button to return to the
screen from before enlarging video.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
4
04
06
02
07
03
PLUS
OTHER
24
English
2
MONITORING VIDEO FROM A CAMERA
Automatic camera selection
Setting automatic quad-screen selection
1
Setting automatic full screen selection
The QUAD indicator lights up and video from four separate
cameras is displayed simultaneously.
The camera video on a full screen can be changed
automatically based on the camera number.
1
Press the [QUAD] button.
Press the [SEQUENCE] button.
QUAD
The SEQUENCE indicator flashes and the displayed video
changes automatically based on the camera number.
The current camera number indicator lights sequentially.
01-01-05 00:00:00
2
EN A
01
01-01-05 00:00:00
ENA
03
01-01-05 00:00:00
02
03
04
Press the [SEQUENCE] button.
The four images on the quad screen automatically change in
order of cameras No. 1-4, 5-8, 9-12 and 13-16.
On the DSR-5709P, the video changes automatically in order
of cameras No. 1-4, 5-8, 9-3, etc.
ENA
02
01-01-05 00:00:00
01
ENA
04
z It is possible to specify the cameras for which automatic
selection is to be carried out. (JP.73)
02
01
2
Press the [SEQUENCE] button to end
automatic selection.
04
03
Automatic selection ends and the display returns to the
normal screen.
z Pressing a [CAMERA SELECT] button, the [QUAD] button,
the [MULTI] button or [PLUS] button also ends automatic
selection.
08
07
12
11
16
15
3
Press the [SEQUENCE] button to return
to normal quad-screen display.
Automatic selection ends and the display returns to the
normal quad-screen.
Pressing the following buttons displays the respective
screens:
[CAMERA SELECT] J Full screen; [QUAD] J Quad screen;
[MULTI] J Multi screen; [PLUS] J Plus screen
z If all channels in a quad screen are not set yet in the
<SCREEN SET> screen, the screen is excluded from the
display change sequence in the SEQUENCE operation.
CH1
CH2
CH5
CH6
--
--
--
--
CH3
CH4
CH7
--
--
--
--
--
z Automatic selection cannot be used with playback video.
English
25
2
MONITORING VIDEO FROM A CAMERA
Viewing on monitor 2
2
If you connect a monitor to the MON2 output terminal on the
rear panel of the digital video recorder, you can view video in
quad-screen and allow the screen to change automatically
regardless of the display status on the main monitor. In
addition, it is also possible to display video on monitor 2
automatically from any camera for which an alarm has
occurred. By default, automatic full screen selection is
performed.
Use the [MON2] button to change the monitor 2 setting.
Press the [QUAD] button.
The video from cameras No. 1 through 4 is displayed in quad
screen on monitor 2.
Monitor 2
01-01-07
OPERATION
z The playback image cannot be viewed on Monitor 2.
1
INTRODUCTION
Viewing on a quad screen
Main monitor
00:00:00
Press the [MON2] button.
03
The MON2 indicator lights up.
01
06
04
07
08
SETTINGS
MON2
09
QUAD
01
02
03
04
3
z Monitor 2 is not available while a menu screen is being
displayed, search menu is being operated or camera is
being controlled.
To view video from another camera,
press the [QUAD] button again.
Example: Selecting Camera 4
QUAD
Press the No. 4 [CAMERA SELECT]
button.
The video from Camera No. 4 is displayed in full screen on
monitor 2.
Monitor 2
01-01-07
Main monitor
06
07
08
To return to full screen display, press a
[CAMERA SELECT] button.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
4
05
NETWORK
OPERATION
Each time this button is pressed, the four images on the quad
screen change, in order of cameras No. 1-4, 5-8, 9-12 and 1316.
On the DSR-5709P, the images change in order of cameras
No. 1-4, 5-8, 9-3, etc.
Viewing on a full screen
2
NETWORK
CONTROL
[MON2] button
00:00:00
-
03
04
07
On the DSR-5709P, press the [CAMERA SELECT] 1-9
button.
06
08
OTHER
01
09
26
English
2
MONITORING VIDEO FROM A CAMERA
Setting automatic full screen selection
2
Setting automatic quad-screen selection
2
Press the [SEQUENCE] button.
The video displayed on monitor 2 changes automatically.
Press the [SEQUENCE] button once again to cancel
automatic selection.
Even if the [CAMERA SELECT] or [QUAD] button are
pressed, automatic selection is cancelled.
Press the [QUAD] button.
The video from the cameras is displayed in quad screen on
monitor 2.
Main monitor
Monitor 2
01-01-07
Monitor 2
01-01-07
00:00:00
Main monitor
03
00:00:00
01
03
04
01
04
01-01-07
07
07
06
08
06
08
09
QUAD
09
00:00:00
3
01
02
03
04
Press the [SEQUENCE] button.
The four images of the quad screen on monitor 2
automatically change in order of cameras No. 1-4, 5-8, 9-12
and 13-16.
On the DSR-5709P, the video changes automatically in order
of cameras No. 1-4, 5-8, 9-3, etc.
Monitor 2
02
01
04
03
08
07
12
11
15
4
16
Press the [SEQUENCE] or [QUAD]
button to return to normal quad-screen
display.
Automatic selection ends and normal quad-screen display
returns.
or
English
27
QUAD
2
MONITORING VIDEO FROM A CAMERA
2
INTRODUCTION
Displaying alarm video in full screen format
Set “MON.2 DISPLAY” from the
<ALARM OPERATION SET> screen to
“SWITCH”, “LAST” or “FIRST”.
(JP.108)
When an alarm occurs, the corresponding video is displayed
in full screen on monitor 2.
OPERATION
01-01-07
00:00:00
04
SETTINGS
3
Press the [MON2] button to end the
monitor 2 setting procedure.
The MON2 indicator turns off.
MON2
NETWORK
CONTROL
NETWORK
OPERATION
NETWORK
SETTINGS
OTHER
28
English
3
RECORDING
FULL indicator
[REC/STOP] button
Normal recording
Timer recording
Use the following procedure to record monitored video.
Use the following procedure to record monitored video for a
preset length of time.
z Be sure to set the time when using the digital video
recorder for the first time. Recording is not possible until
the time is set. (JP.20)
1
z Be sure to set the time when using the digital video
recorder for the first time. Recording is not possible until
the time is set. (JP.20)
Press the [REC/STOP] button.
1
2
The REC/STOP indicator lights up, “REC” (i.e., the recording
symbol) appears in the operation display and recording starts.
REC/STOP
[TIMER] button
Recording symbol
01-01-07 00:00:00 REC REPEAT EN A
Set timer recording. (JP.92)
Press the [TIMER] button.
The TIMER indicator lights up and the digital video recorder
enters timer recording standby mode.
0
TIMER
01-01-07 00:00:00
EN A
0
02
02
z At the time specified for the start of timer recording, the
REC/STOP indicator lights up, “REC” (i.e., the recording
symbol) appears in the operation display and recording
starts.
z At the time specified for the end of timer recording, the
REC/STOP indicator turns off and recording ends. The
TIMER indicator remains lit. If the [TIMER] button is
pressed, the TIMER indicator turns off.
z When recording for the first time, the default settings are
used. (JP.88)
z When “OVERWRITE” on the <RECORDING
CONDITIONS SET> screen is set to “OFF” and the space
remaining in the recording area becomes insufficient, the
FULL indicator begins to flash. If recording is continued
beyond this point, the recording area becomes full and
recording stops. Perform AREA FULL RESET to enable
recording. (JP.84)
z Playback is possible even while recording. (JP.18)
2
z When “OVERWRITE” on the <RECORDING
CONDITIONS SET> screen is set to “OFF” and the space
remaining in the recording area becomes insufficient, the
FULL indicator begins to flash. If recording is continued
beyond this point, the recording area becomes full and
recording stops. Perform AREA FULL RESET to enable
recording. (JP.84)
z Playback is possible even while recording.
Press and hold the [REC/STOP] button
for approximately 3 seconds to end
normal recording.
“REC” disappears from the operation display and recording
ends.
REC/STOP
3
Press the [TIMER] button to end timer
recording before the end time.
The TIMER indicator turns off and recording ends.
TIMER
English
29
3
RECORDING
INTRODUCTION
FULL indicator
Set alarm recording. (JP.98)
When an alarm signal is detected
z When an alarm signal is detected, “ALARM” flashes in the
operation display and alarm recording starts (indicated by
“REC”.)
z Whenever an alarm occurs, the number of alarms
indicated in the operation display is incremented.
01-01-07 00:00:00 REC REPEAT EN A ALARM 0000001
Pre-alarm recording
Use the following procedure to record video immediately
before the occurrence of an alarm.
1
Counts the number of
alarms.
Displays up to
9999999.
After 9999999, the
counter returns to
0000000 and
resumes counting
from 1.
“PRE” appears in the operation display. Pre-alarm recording
starts (without the “REC” symbol being displayed).
2
If an alarm is detected
Pre-alarm recording is automatically ended and alarm
recording starts.
z “PRE” disappears from the operation display and “ALARM”
begins to flash.
z If an alarm occurs during normal recording or timer
recording, recording ends.
z A maximum of 1,000,000 alarm recordings can be made
on one hard disk. The number of maximum recordings can
be increased to 6,000,000 by expanding the optional hard
disk. However, the maximum number of recordings is
affected by set recording conditions. Be sure to check the
menu settings and display content.
01-01-07 00:00:00 REC REPEAT EN A ALARM 0000001
NETWORK
OPERATION
3
Set pre-alarm recording. (JP.102)
NETWORK
CONTROL
02
SETTINGS
z When “OVERWRITE” on the <RECORDING
CONDITIONS SET> screen is set to “OFF” and the space
remaining in the recording area becomes insufficient, the
FULL indicator begins to flash. If recording is continued
beyond this point, the recording area becomes full and
recording stops. Perform AREA FULL RESET to enable
recording. (JP.84)
Use the following procedure to record alarm video when an
alarm signal is detected.
1
2
OPERATION
Alarm recording
02
End alarm recording.
z Be sure to set the time when using the digital video
recorder for the first time. Recording is not possible until
the time is set. (JP.20)
z When alarm recording total exceeds 1,000,000 and
“OVERWRITE” on the <RECORDING CONDITIONS SET>
screen (JP.85) is set to “ON”, older recordings are
overwritten even if the hard disk has remaining memory
capacity.
Alarm recording is not performed when “OFF” is set.
30
English
OTHER
z When recording for the first time, the default settings are
used. The image quality and recording rate can be
changed. (JP.103)
z When “OVERWRITE” on the <RECORDING
CONDITIONS SET> screen is set to “OFF” and the space
remaining in the recording area becomes insufficient, the
FULL indicator begins to flash. If recording is continued
beyond this point, the recording area becomes full and
recording stops. Perform AREA FULL RESET to enable
recording. (JP.84)
NETWORK
SETTINGS
When the alarm duration has expired (default setting: 20
seconds), both “REC” and “ALARM” stop flashing on the
operation display and recording stops.
3
RECORDING
[MARK/COPY] button
Bookmarking video while recording
You can bookmark any video images while recording so that
you may easily search for them afterward for playback from
the bookmark list. (JP.84)
Bookmarking can be performed on full, quad and multi
screens.
1
Press the [MARK/COPY] button while
recording video.
The “BOOKMARK SUCCESS!” message is displayed, and
the recording point when the button is pressed is registered in
the bookmark list.
MARK/COPY
z You can register up to 64 bookmarks. If the limit is
exceeded, data is renewed by writing over from the oldest
bookmark.
English
31
4
PLAY
Use the following procedure to play normal or timer recording video stored in the hard disk.
POWER indicator
[QUAD] button
INTRODUCTION
[MULTI] button
[PLAY/STOP] button
[ZOOM] button
Shuttle dial
[STILL] button
[SHUTTLE HOLD] button
Playing video on a full screen
1
01-01-07 00:00:00
EN A
z Press the [SHUTTLE HOLD] button while either
or
is
displayed to fix the speed of fast-forward or fast-rewind
playback without having to hold the shuttle dial.
Press the [SHUTTLE HOLD] button again to continue
normal playback.
NETWORK
OPERATION
z Video playback begins at the playback point where the
previous recording ended.
z If the playback point has been reset, video playback begins
from the earliest recording.
z If playback is stopped, the playback point is reset and
playback resumes from that point when the [PLAY/STOP]
button is next pressed.
z When playback ends, the operating display automatically
indicates that playback is paused ( ) and the STILL
indicator lights up.
z Playback video and audio may not be in sync.
In this case, press the [PLAY/STOP] button and play back
again.
NETWORK
CONTROL
Turn the shuttle dial to use fast-forward and fast-rewind
playback.
When turned clockwise,
appears in the operation display
and fast-forward playback begins.
When turned counter-clockwise,
appears in the operation
display and fast-rewind playback begins.
Fast-forward and fast-rewind speed increase the more the
shuttle dial is turned.
Return the shuttle dial to continue normal playback.
02
Changing the playback speed
Starting fast-forward or slow playback
(1) Performing fast-forward.
When the jog dial is turned clockwise, fastforward playback begins and
appears in
the operation display.
Fast-forward speed increases the more the
jog dial is turned clockwise and decreases
as it is returned.
Press the [PLAY/STOP] button to end
playback.
Playback ends.
PLAY/STOP
NETWORK
SETTINGS
2
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise or
counter-clockwise during video
playback.
SETTINGS
1
The PLAY/STOP indicator lights up and
appears in the
operation display. Normal or timer recording video is played
back. To view video from another camera, press the
[CAMERA SELECT] button of the desired camera.
Operation
display area
Jog dial
Fast-forward and fast-rewind
playback
Press the [CAMERA SELECT] button for
the camera to play and then press the
[PLAY/STOP] button.
PLAY/STOP
OPERATION
[PLUS] button
[CAMERA SELECT] button
„ Playing video near the point of recording
The digital video recorder priorities recording operations, and
as a result, video playback may pause temporarily.
32
English
OTHER
(2) Performing slow playback.
When the jog dial is turned counterclockwise, slow playback begins and
appears in the operation display.
Slow playback speed decreases the more
the jog dial is turned counter-clockwise and
increases as it is returned.
4
PLAY
(3) Returning to normal playback.
Press the [SHUTTLE HOLD] button while
the SHUTTLE HOLD indicator is lit to
release the lock status.
is displayed in the operation display area
when the jog dial is turned.
Magnifying the playback video
1
Press the [ZOOM] button during
playback.
Press the button corresponding to the camera for which video
is being magnified.
The ZOOM indicator lights up and a blue zoom frame appears
in the center of the screen.
z Audio is not played during fast-forward, fast-rewind, slow,
reverse-slow and reverse playback.
ZOOM
Using reverse playback, fast-rewind, and
reverse-slow playback
(1) Performing reverse playback.
Turn the shuttle dial slightly counterclockwise during playback to use reverse
playback at normal speed.
is displayed
in the operation display area.
2
Move the zoom frame to the area to be
magnified.
z Turn the jog dial to move the zoom frame to the left or right.
z Press the [SHUTTLE HOLD] button while is displayed to
fix the reverse playback speed without having to hold the
shuttle dial.
(2) Performing fast-rewind playback.
While in reverse playback, turn the jog dial
counter-clockwise to use fast rewind.
is
displayed in the operation display area.
Fast-rewind speed increases the more the
jog dial is turned counter-clockwise and
decreases as it is returned.
z Turn the shuttle dial clockwise and then turn the jog dial to
move the zoom frame vertically.
(3) Performing reverse-slow playback.
While in reverse playback, turn the jog dial
clockwise to use reverse slow playback.
is displayed in the operation display
area.
Reverse slow playback speed decreases
the more the jog dial is turned clockwise
and increases as it is returned.
Move the zoom frame to the area to be magnified.
(4) Returning to normal playback.
Press the [SHUTTLE HOLD] button while
the SHUTTLE HOLD indicator is lit to
release the lock status.
is displayed in
the operation display area when the jog dial
is turned.
3
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The area enclosed by the zoom frame is magnified (by a
factor of 2).
02
English
33
4
4
PLAY
Press the [ZOOM] button to return to
normal magnification.
1
Magnification is cancelled and the display returns to the
normal screen.
The ZOOM indicator turns off.
INTRODUCTION
Frame advance (forward/reverse)
Turn the jog dial while playback is
paused.
Clockwise: The still image is moved forward by one frame or
field.
Counter-clockwise: The still image is moved back by one
frame or field.
ZOOM
OPERATION
01-01-07 00:00:00
EN A
02
02
SETTINGS
z Magnified video has a slightly coarser appearance when
compared with normal video.
z If normal, fast-forward or fast-rewind playback is performed
either for playback during alarm recording or for continuous
playback from the normal recording area and alarm
recording area, the image may appear to pause in certain
cases.
z Images cannot be enlarged in multi-screen format.
z If a [CAMERA SELECT] button is pressed or playback is
stopped, magnification is cancelled.
Viewing still images
1
z The jog dial can be turned to increase the speed of frame
advance.
Press the [STILL] button during
playback.
Bookmarking video while playing
The STILL indicator lights up and playback video is paused.
appears in the operation display.
STILL
01-01-07 00:00:00
You can bookmark any video images during playback so
that you may easily search for them afterward for playback
from the bookmark list. (JP.50)
EN A
Press the [MARK/COPY] button during
playback on a full screen.
The “BOOKMARK SUCCESS!” message is displayed, and
the playback point of the video marked when the button is
pressed is registered in the bookmark list.
02
NETWORK
OPERATION
1
2
NETWORK
CONTROL
Pause playback and display still images.
MARK/COPY
NETWORK
SETTINGS
Press the [STILL] button again to
resume normal playback.
Normal playback is resumes.
STILL
02
34
English
OTHER
z You can register up to 64 bookmarks. If the limit is
exceeded, data is renewed by writing over from the oldest
bookmark.
4
PLAY
Playing video on multiple screens
Playing video on multi 9 or multi 16 screens
1
When recording video from a number of different cameras, the
following procedures can be used to play the recorded video
in multi-screen format.
The MULTI indicator lights up and video from 16 separate
cameras is displayed simultaneously. Press the [MULTI]
button again to display multi 9 screens.
The DSR-5709P can only display video from nine cameras.
Playing video on quad screens
1
Press the [MULTI] button during
playback.
Press the [QUAD] button during
playback.
MULTI
The QUAD indicator lights up and video from four separate
cameras is displayed simultaneously.
02
03
06
02
07
03
08
09 04 10
05
11
1206
13
15
08
16
01
01
05
MULTI
QUAD
01
03
To return to full screen display, press a
[CAMERA SELECT] button.
-
To view video from other cameras,
press the [QUAD] button again.
On the DSR-5709P, press the [CAMERA SELECT] 1-9
button.
z In the case of both quad and multi 9/16 screen display, you
can change the positions in which playback video from the
various cameras is displayed. (JP.132)
QUAD
05
06
07
08
To return to full screen display, press a
[CAMERA SELECT] button.
-
On the DSR-5709P, press the [CAMERA SELECT] 1-9
button.
English
09
04
Each time this button is pressed, the four images on the quad
screen change, in order of cameras No. 1-4, 5-8, 9-12 and 1316.
On the DSR-5709P, the images change in order of cameras
No. 1-4, 5-8, 9-3, etc.
3
14
07
02
2
2
04
35
4
PLAY
1
Using flash playback
By using this function, you can play back video images of any
single camera on nine screens in proper time sequence. This
is especially useful when you need to confirm the stream of
video images, as the function provides a series of nine images
that are successively refreshed.
Press the [PLUS] button during playing
video on full, quad, multi 9 or multi 16
screens.
On the DSR-5709P, press the button on full, quad or multi 9
screens.
The PLUS indicator lights up and one camera image is enlarged.
1
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
2
03
06
02
07
08
09
The full screen changes to multi 9 screens and flash playback
is started.
Press a [CAMERA SELECT] button.
Example: Selecting camera #2 for flash playback.
Example: Select Camera No. 2.
The selected camera image is enlarged.
01
02
02
07
3
Press and
hold the
button for
a while.
03
05
06
08
09
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
You can use fast-forward, fast-rewind and slow playbacks
during flash playback.
3
Press the [MULTI] button during plus
screen display to change display.
To stop flash playback, press either the
[PLAY/STOP], [MULTI], [CAMERA
SELECT], [PLUS] or [QUAD] button.
Flash playback stops and the display returns to the normal full
screen playback.
02
04
07
08
PLAY/STOP MULTI
,
06
02
07
03
08
09
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
QUAD
PLUS
,
to
,
or
NETWORK
OPERATION
MULTI
03
NETWORK
CONTROL
04
Press and hold for a while the
[CAMERA SELECT] button
corresponding to the number of the
camera being played back.
SETTINGS
2
02
Play video from the camera you want to
view using flash playback, on a full
screen.
OPERATION
PLUS
01
INTRODUCTION
Playing enlarged video
On the DSR-5709P, pressing the [MULTI] button does not
change the display.
5
NETWORK
SETTINGS
4
Press the [PLUS] button during plus
screen display to leave the enlarged
camera image as is and to switch to
monitoring video (live image) for other
camera numbers.
OTHER
Press the [PLUS] button to return to the
screen from before enlarging video.
PLUS
z When playing back all videos, “PLUS” is displayed for
channels that are played back in enlarging video.
36
English
5
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO
[FUNC.] button
[SEARCH] button
Shuttle dial
Jog dial
[CAMERA SELECT] button
[ALARM] button
Video stored in the recording area or archive area can be
located by searching and then played back. Use one of six
search methods to locate the required video.
Archive area
(2) ALARM SEARCH (JP.39)
Search and play back alarm video
from the recording list. Search
also by alarm or camera number.
Recording area
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
< ALARM SEARCH >
DATE TIME CH TOTAL ALARMS :0000028
10-05 19:15 01
SEARCH :0000028
10-05 18:57 02
CHANNEL :
10-05 18:55 03
10-05 18:52 03
10-05 22:05 01
10-05 21:59 05
10-05 21:33 04
10-05 21:25 06
MOVE:JOG
SELECT:SHUTTLE
(3) ALARM THUMBNAIL SEARCH (JP.42)
Search and play back alarm video
using a thumbnail list. Search
also by alarm or camera number.
<SEARCH> screen
SEARCH
NO
0000028
0000027
0000026
0000025
0000024
0000023
0000022
0000021
<SEARCH>
ALARM LOG SEARCH
ALARM SEARCH
ALARM THUMBNAIL SEARCH
TIME/DATE SEARCH
ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH
MOTION DETECTION SEARCH
BOOKMARK SEARCH
MOVE:JOG
0000028
0000027
0000026
0000025
0000024
0000023
0000022
0000021
0000020
0011
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
(4) TIME/DATE SEARCH (JP.44)
Search and play back recorded
video by date and time.
SELECT:SHUTTLE
< TIME/DATE SEARCH >
RECORDING TOP :
24-10-06 18:00
RECORDING END :
30-10-06 19:00
CHANNEL : 01
SEARCH
:
DATE
TIME
25-10-06 12:32
PREVIEW ->
VIEW
->
z During playback, use the shuttle dial, jog dial or operation
buttons to perform operations, such as to pause or fastforward playback.
z When changes to menu settings and alarms coincide, two
alarms may be set for the same alarm number to prioritize
changes to menu settings.
z It may take more than one minute to search video
depending on the size of the hard disk and/or stored data.
z With a video image specified in the list or with a thumbnail
during [ALARM SEARCH], [ALARM THUMBNAIL
SEARCH], [ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH] or [BOOKMARK
SEARCH] operation pressing the [MARK/COPY] button
brings up the copy setting screen, thereby enabling copy
operation to be smoothly implemented.
(5) ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH (JP.46)
Playback video that has been
< ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH >
stored in the archive area. Search
NO DATE START CH
CAPACITY
0000001 20-10 14:15 01
TOTAL - 800MB
also by archive or camera
0000002 20-10 15:15 01
USED 105MB
number.
0000003 20-10 16:15 01
(1) ALARM LOG SEARCH (JP.38)
Search with reduced alarm
image time.
01-01-07
(6) MOTION DETECTION SEARCH (JP.47)
Search and play back video of moving objects detected by
motion sensors.
CHANGE:JOG
0000004 20-10 17:15 01
0000005 20-10 18:15 01
0000006 20-10 19:15 01
MOVE:JOG
< ALARM LOG SEARCH > TERM : MONTH
1 5 10 15 20 25 30
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
SRARCH:ALARM
< MOTION
SEARCH FROM
START
END
DETECTION SEARCH >
: ALARM
: 12-09-06 09:25
: 20-10-06 15:50
CHANNEL
: --
SELECT:SHUTTLE
START PREVIEW ->
MOVE:JOG
English
SET:SHUTTLE
37
SELECT:SHUTTLE
LEVEL:OFF
EXIT
5
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO
4
(7) BOOKMARK SEARCH (JP.42)
NO
0000001
0000002
0000003
0000004
0000005
0000006
0000007
0000008
<BOOKMARK SEARCH>
DATE TIME CH
10-05 19:15 01
10-06 18:40 02
10-07 18:52 03
10-07 18:55 03
10-08 22:05 01
10-10 21:59 05
10-15 21:33 04
10-20 21:25 06
MOVE:JOG
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Turn the jog dial to select “TERM” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The screen display changes to reflect the specified period.
Press the
or
[ALARM] button to change the month/
week/date/time.
< ALARM LOG SEARCH > TERM:DAY
01-01-07 00 06
12
18
Use the following procedure to perform an alarm search or
alarm thumbnail search by defining the period (month, week,
day or time) of the alarm recorded video.
SEARCH:ALARM
Press the [SEARCH] button while the
digital video recorder is recording or
stopped.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
Displays one month.
WEEK
Displays one week.
2
5
< ALARM LOG SEARCH > TERM:MONTH
1 5 10 15 20 25 30
< ALARM LOG SEARCH > TERM:DAY
01-01-07 00 06
12
18
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
SEARCH:ALARM
SEARCH:ALARM
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
NETWORK
OPERATION
Press the [FUNC.] button for approximately 3 seconds to
search for normal recording. A blue mark is displayed at the
top left of the screen, and normally recorded parts are
displayed in blue. (The search for normal recording may take
some time.)
To abort the search, turn the shuttle dial counter-clockwise.
On the DSR-5709P, cameras No. 01-09 are displayed.
3
Turn the jog dial to select the date, time
or minute and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
„ To confirm normal recording
The <ALARM LOG SEARCH> screen is displayed.
Date, day or time
Camera
number
Displays one hour.
The selected day (or hour or minutes) is indicated with a
yellow frame.
Alarm recording areas are indicated in red and areas with no
recordings in gray.
Reselecting the area cancels the original selected area.
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Turn the jog dial to select “ALARM LOG
SEARCH” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
01-01-07
Displays one day.
HOUR
NETWORK
CONTROL
MOVE:JOG
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
DAY
SETTINGS
<SEARCH>
ALARM LOG SEARCH
ALARM SEARCH
ALARM THUMBNAIL SEARCH
TIME/DATE SEARCH
ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH
MOTION DETECTION SEARCH
BOOKMARK SEARCH
Description
‹MONTH
The SEARCH indicator lights up and the <SEARCH> screen
is displayed.
SEARCH
OPERATION
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Alarm log search
1
INTRODUCTION
Bookmarked video can be
selected from the bookmark list
for playback.
(The [BOOKMARK SEARCH]
function is available only on the
digital video recorder, and it
cannot be used through network
operation.)
The “TERM” setting flashes.
01-01-07
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OTHER
z If “MONTH” is selected in step 4 above, each frame
represents one day. If “WEEK” is selected, four frames
represent one day. If “DAY” is selected, each frame
represent one hour. If “HOUR” is selected, each frame
represents two minutes.
< ALARM LOG SEARCH > TERM:MONTH
1 5 10 15 20 25 30
SEARCH:ALARM
38
English
5
6
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO
Turn the jog dial to select “SEARCH”
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Alarm search
Use the following procedure to search and play back alarm
video. If pre-alarm video is being recorded, video from
immediately before the alarm can also be played back.
“ALARM” flashes.
< ALARM LOG SEARCH > TERM:DAY
01-01-07 00 06
12
18
1
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
The SEARCH indicator lights up and the <SEARCH> screen
is displayed.
SEARCH
SEARCH:ALARM
7
Press the [SEARCH] button while the
digital video recorder is recording or
stopped.
<SEARCH>
ALARM LOG SEARCH
ALARM SEARCH
ALARM THUMBNAIL SEARCH
TIME/DATE SEARCH
ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH
MOTION DETECTION SEARCH
BOOKMARK SEARCH
Turn the jog dial to select “ALARM” or
“THUMBNAIL” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
Now perform alarm search (JP.39) or alarm thumbnail search
(JP.42).
MOVE:JOG
2
‹ALARM
THUMBNAIL
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Turn the jog dial to select “ALARM
SEARCH” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <ALARM SEARCH> screen is displayed.
This screen lists the eight most recent alarm recordings.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
Description
(1)
The <ALARM SEARCH> screen (JP.39)
is displayed and the search results are
displayed in a list.
NO
0000028
0000027
0000026
0000025
0000024
0000023
0000022
0000021
The <ALARM THUMBNAIL SEARCH>
screen (JP.42) is displayed and the
search results are displayed in a list.
(2)
(3)
(4)
< ALARM SEARCH >
DATE TIME CH TOTAL ALARMS :0000028
10-05 19:15 01
SEARCH :0000028
10-05 18:57 02
CHANNEL :
10-05 18:55 03
10-05 18:52 03
10-05 22:05 01
10-05 21:59 05
10-05 21:33 04
10-05 21:25 06
MOVE:JOG
SELECT:SHUTTLE
(1) NO:
Indicates the alarm number.
(2) DATE/TIME:
Indicates the date and time at which the alarm video was
recorded.
(3) CH:
Indicates the alarm video’s channel (or camera number).
(4) TOTAL ALARMS:
Indicates the total number of alarm video recordings.
(5) SEARCH:
Search by specifying an alarm number. (JP.40)
(6) CHANNEL:
Search by specifying a camera number. (JP.41)
(7) Preview:
Displays the selected alarm video.
English
39
(5)
(6)
(7)
5
3
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO
Turn the jog dial to select the video for
playback from the list.
A preview of the selected alarm video is displayed in the
preview screen. In this case, the video at the time the alarm
occurred is displayed.
< ALARM SEARCH >
DATE TIME CH TOTAL ALARMS :0000028
10-05 19:15 01
SEARCH :0000028
10-05 18:57 02
CHANNEL :
10-05 18:55 03
10-05 18:52 03
10-05 22:05 01
10-05 21:59 05
10-05 21:33 04
10-05 21:25 06
MOVE:JOG
SELECT:SHUTTLE
In the search screen, press the [FUNC.]
button and select “SEARCH”.
FUNC.
NO
0000028
0000027
0000026
0000025
0000024
0000023
0000022
0000021
z To display the next or previous recording
Turn the jog dial clockwise or counter-clockwise
accordingly.
z Press the
[ALARM] button to display the next eight
recordings, and
for the previous eight recordings.
2
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
3
The selected recording is played back on multi 16 screens.
Playback is also available for another camera image being
recorded simultaneously.
On the DSR-5709P, the recording is played back on multi 9
screens.
Turn the jog dial and shuttle dial to
select an alarm number.
Turn the shuttle dial to move through the field and turn the jog
dial to select individual numbers (0 through 9).
EN A ALARM 0000028
SA 01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Numbers can be entered
with the camera number
1-9 buttons or the [QUAD]
button (0).
NO
0000028
0000027
0000026
0000025
0000024
0000023
0000022
0000021
< ALARM SEARCH >
DATE TIME CH TOTAL ALARMS :0000028
10-05 19:15 01
SEARCH :0000028
10-05 18:57 02
CHANNEL :
10-05 18:55 03
10-05 18:52 03
10-05 22:05 01
10-05 21:59 05
10-05 21:33 04
10-05 21:25 06
MOVE:JOG
SELECT:SHUTTLE
NETWORK
OPERATION
01-01-07 00:00:00
< ALARM SEARCH >
DATE TIME CH TOTAL ALARMS :0000028
10-05 19:15 01
SEARCH :0000028
10-05 18:57 02
CHANNEL :
10-05 18:55 03
10-05 18:52 03
10-05 22:05 01
10-05 21:59 05
10-05 21:33 04
10-05 21:25 06
MOVE:JOG
SELECT:SHUTTLE
NETWORK
CONTROL
NO
0000028
0000027
0000026
0000025
0000024
0000023
0000022
0000021
SETTINGS
The “SEARCH” input field flashes.
z To switch to the copy setting screen
Press the [MARK/COPY] button with a video specified in
the list. (JP.52)
z To end search mode
Press the [SEARCH] button. The SEARCH indicator turns
off.
4
< ALARM SEARCH >
DATE TIME CH TOTAL ALARMS :0000028
10-05 19:15 01
SEARCH :0000028
10-05 18:57 02
CHANNEL :
10-05 18:55 03
10-05 18:52 03
10-05 22:05 01
10-05 21:59 05
10-05 21:33 04
10-05 21:25 06
MOVE:JOG
SELECT:SHUTTLE
OPERATION
NO
0000028
0000027
0000026
0000025
0000024
0000023
0000022
0000021
1
INTRODUCTION
Entering an alarm number to search for an
alarm video
NETWORK
SETTINGS
z When searching by specifying a camera number, playback
is performed on a full screen.
„ To view pre-alarm video
After beginning playback of an alarm video identified by an
alarm search, use the shuttle dial to reverse playback.
OTHER
40
English
5
4
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Entering a camera number to search for an
alarm video
The alarm video with the specified number is displayed in the
preview screen.
Image numbers before the selected number are displayed in a
list on the left of the screen.
NO
0000028
0000027
0000026
0000025
0000024
0000023
0000022
0000021
5
1
< ALARM SEARCH >
DATE TIME CH TOTAL ALARMS :0000028
10-05 19:15 01
SEARCH :0000028
10-05 18:57 02
CHANNEL :-10-05 18:55 03
10-05 18:52 03
10-05 22:05 01
10-05 21:59 05
10-05 21:33 04
10-05 21:25 06
MOVE:JOG
SELECT:SHUTTLE
FUNC.
NO
0000028
0000027
0000026
0000025
0000024
0000023
0000022
0000021
Press the [FUNC.] button.
The cursor moves to the list.
FUNC.
NO
0000028
0000027
0000026
0000025
0000024
0000023
0000022
0000021
6
2
< ALARM SEARCH >
DATE TIME CH TOTAL ALARMS :0000028
10-05 19:15 01
SEARCH :0000028
10-05 18:57 02
CHANNEL :-10-05 18:55 03
10-05 18:52 03
10-05 22:05 01
10-05 21:59 05
10-05 21:33 04
10-05 21:25 06
MOVE:JOG
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
NO
0000028
0000027
0000026
0000025
0000024
0000023
0000022
0000021
Turn the jog dial to select the alarm
video for playback and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
01-01-07 00:00:00
3
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
< ALARM SEARCH >
DATE TIME CH TOTAL ALARMS :0000028
10-05 19:15 01
SEARCH :0000028
10-05 18:57 02
CHANNEL :
10-05 18:55 03
10-05 18:52 03
10-05 22:05 01
10-05 21:59 05
10-05 21:33 04
10-05 21:25 06
MOVE:JOG
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Press the [CAMERA SELECT] button for
the camera number to search.
The alarm video with the specified number is displayed in the
preview screen.
EN A ALARM 0000028
SA 01
< ALARM SEARCH >
DATE TIME CH TOTAL ALARMS :0000028
10-05 19:15 01
SEARCH :0000028
10-05 18:57 02
CHANNEL :
10-05 18:55 03
10-05 18:52 03
10-05 22:05 01
10-05 21:59 05
10-05 21:33 04
10-05 21:25 06
MOVE:JOG
SELECT:SHUTTLE
The “CHANNEL” input field flashes.
The selected recording is played back on multi 16 screens.
Playback is also available for another camera image being
recorded simultaneously.
On the DSR-5709P, the recording is played back on multi 9
screens.
-
z When searching by specifying a camera number, playback
is performed on a full screen.
English
In the search screen, press the [FUNC.]
button and select “CHANNEL” with the
jog dial.
41
NO
0000028
0000027
0000026
0000025
0000024
0000023
0000022
0000021
< ALARM SEARCH >
DATE TIME CH TOTAL ALARMS :0000028
10-05 19:15 07
SEARCH :0000028
10-05 18:57 07
CHANNEL : 7
10-05 18:55 07
10-05 18:52 07
10-05 22:05 07
10-05 21:59 07
10-05 21:33 07
10-05 21:25 07
MOVE:JOG
SELECT:SHUTTLE
5
4
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO
Press the [FUNC.] button.
FUNC.
5
Use the following procedure to select alarm videos in the
recording area from a thumbnail list.
< ALARM SEARCH >
DATE TIME CH TOTAL ALARMS :0000028
10-05 19:15 07
SEARCH :0000028
10-05 18:57 07
CHANNEL : 7
10-05 18:55 07
10-05 18:52 07
10-05 22:05 07
10-05 21:59 07
10-05 21:33 07
10-05 21:25 07
MOVE:JOG
SELECT:SHUTTLE
1
Press the [SEARCH] button while the
digital video recorder is recording or
stopped.
The SEARCH indicator lights up and the <SEARCH> screen
is displayed.
SEARCH
<SEARCH>
ALARM LOG SEARCH
ALARM SEARCH
ALARM THUMBNAIL SEARCH
TIME/DATE SEARCH
ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH
MOTION DETECTION SEARCH
BOOKMARK SEARCH
Turn the jog dial to select the alarm
video for playback and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
EN A ALARM 0000000
MOVE:JOG
2
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Turn the jog dial to select “ALARM
THUMBNAIL SEARCH” and then turn
the shuttle dial clockwise.
To view alarm video before or after the current
playback
Press the [ALARM] button during
playback.
0000028
01 0000027
02 0000026
0000025
04 0000024
05 0000023
06
0000022
07 0000021
08 0000020
09
NETWORK
CONTROL
The nine latest alarm video thumbnails are displayed.
An alarm number and camera number are indicated together
with each alarm recording, and the number of the currently
selected recording flashes.
02
1
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
SETTINGS
01-01-07 00:00:00
OPERATION
NO
0000028
0000027
0000026
0000025
0000024
0000023
0000022
0000021
INTRODUCTION
Alarm thumbnail search
The cursor moves to the list.
03
0011
ALARM
01-01-07 00:00:00
EN A ALARM 0000000
NETWORK
SETTINGS
z Each time the
button is pressed, playback skips to the
preceding alarm video.
z Each time the
button is pressed, playback skips to the
subsequent alarm video.
NETWORK
OPERATION
02
OTHER
z When playback is performed after an alarm search, the
frame at the start and end of each alarm recording is
paused.
Press the [ALARM] button to play the previous or next
recording.
z Use the front-panel buttons, the shuttle dial and the jog dial
to perform operations such as pause and fast-forward.
42
English
5
3
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO
Turn the jog dial to select the video for
playback.
Search by entering an alarm number
1
The alarm number for the selected video flashes.
In the search screen, press the [FUNC.]
button.
The “SEARCH” and “CHANNEL” input fields are displayed.
0000028
01 0000027
02 0000026
0000025
04 0000024
05 0000023
06
0000022
07 0000021
08 0000020
09
FUNC.
03
0011
0000028
2
0000025
04 0000024
05 0000023
06
0000022
07 0000021
08 0000020
09
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
0000028
01 0000027
02 0000026
03
SEARCH :0000028
CHANNEL :--
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
3
The selected recording is played back on multi 16 screens.
Playback is also available for another camera image being
recorded simultaneously.
On the DSR-5709P, the recording is played back on multi 9
screens.
SA 01
03
The “SEARCH” input field flashes.
z To switch to the copy setting screen
Press the [MARK/COPY] button with a video specified in
the list. (JP.52)
z To end search mode
Press the [SEARCH] button. The SEARCH indicator turns
off.
01-01-07 00:00:00
02 0000026
SEARCH :0000028
CHANNEL :--
z To display the next or previous recording
Turn the jog dial clockwise or counter-clockwise
accordingly.
z Press the
[ALARM] button to display the next nine
recordings, and
for the previous nine recordings.
4
01 0000027
0000025
04 0000024
05 0000023
06
0000022
07 0000021
08 0000020
09
Select alarm number by turning the jog
dial and shuttle dial.
Move the unit place with the shuttle dial and select numbers 09 with the jog dial.
EN A ALARM 0000028
02
03
04
0000028
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
01 0000027
02 0000026
03
SEARCH :0000028
CHANNEL :--
Numbers can be entered
with the camera number
1-9 buttons or the
[QUAD] button (0).
4
0000025
04 0000024
05 0000023
06
0000022
07 0000021
08 0000020
09
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The specified number alarm is searched for and thumbnails
are displayed.
Press the [FUNC.] button to cancel SEARCH and CHANNEL
input fields.
z In the same way as for alarm searching, only alarm
recordings can be played back. Press the [ALARM] button
to play the previous or next recording.
z When searching by specifying a camera number, playback
is performed on a full screen. (JP.44)
0000028
01 0000027
02 0000026
03
SEARCH :0000028
CHANNEL :-0011
English
43
0000025
04 0000024
05 0000023
06
0000022
07 0000021
08 0000020
09
5
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO
1
Search and play back video in the recording area (normal
recording, timer recording, alarm recording) by specifying
camera number, date, or time.
Example: To search for a recording from camera 5 from
8:30 pm on 26 October, 2006
In the search screen, press the [FUNC.]
button and select “CHANNEL” with the
jog dial.
1
FUNC.
01 0000027
02 0000026
03
SEARCH :0000028
CHANNEL :-0000025
04 0000024
05 0000023
06
0000022
07 0000021
08 0000020
09
Press the [SEARCH] button while the
digital video recorder is recording or
stopped.
The SEARCH indicator lights up and the <SEARCH> screen
is displayed.
SEARCH
2
The “CHANNEL” input field flashes.
MOVE:JOG
01 0000027
02 0000026
03
2
SEARCH :0000028
CHANNEL :-04 0000024
05 0000023
06
0000022
07 0000021
08 0000020
09
Turn the jog dial to select “TIME/DATE
SEARCH” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <TIME/DATE SEARCH> screen is displayed.
(1)
Press the [CAMERA SELECT] button for
the camera number to search.
(3)
(5)
(2)
(4)
(6)
< TIME/DATE SEARCH >
RECORDING TOP :
24-10-06 18:00
RECORDING END :
30-10-06 19:00
CHANNEL : 01
SEARCH
:
DATE
TIME
25-10-06 12:32
PREVIEW ->
VIEW
->
CHANGE:JOG
07 0000027
07 0000026
SEARCH :0000028
CHANNEL :-7
0011
4
07 0000024
07 0000023
07
0000022
07 0000021
07 0000020
07
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
(1) RECORDING TOP:
Indicates the date/time of the earliest video recording.
(2) RECORDING END:
Indicates the date/time of the most recent video recording.
(3) CHANNEL:
Input a camera number to search.
(4) SEARCH:
Input date and time to search.
(5) PREVIEW:
Select this option and turn the shuttle dial clockwise to display
the preview screen.
(6) VIEW:
Select this option and turn the shuttle dial clockwise to play
the recording.
07
0000025
SET:SHUTTLE
NETWORK
OPERATION
The specified camera number alarm is searched for and
thumbnails are displayed.
Press the [FUNC.] button to cancel SEARCH and CHANNEL
input fields.
0000028
SELECT:SHUTTLE
NETWORK
CONTROL
3
0000025
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
SETTINGS
<SEARCH>
ALARM LOG SEARCH
ALARM SEARCH
ALARM THUMBNAIL SEARCH
TIME/DATE SEARCH
ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH
MOTION DETECTION SEARCH
BOOKMARK SEARCH
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
0000028
OPERATION
0000028
INTRODUCTION
Time/date search
Search by entering a camera number
OTHER
44
English
5
3
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO
6
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise while
“CHANNEL” is selected.
The “CHANNEL” input field flashes.
< TIME/DATE SEARCH >
RECORDING TOP :
24-10-06 18:00
RECORDING END :
30-10-06 19:00
CHANNEL : -SEARCH
:
DATE
TIME
25-10-06 12:32
PREVIEW ->
VIEW
->
CHANGE:JOG
4
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“SEARCHING” is displayed and then the preview screen for
the date and time settings is displayed.
< TIME/DATE SEARCH >
RECORDING TOP :
24-10-06 18:00
RECORDING END :
30-10-06 19:00
CHANNEL : 05
SEARCH
:
DATE
TIME
26-10-06 20:30
PREVIEW ->
VIEW
->
[KEY]
CHANGE:JOG
SET:SHUTTLE
SET:SHUTTLE
z If no recording exists for the specified time
The closest recording to the specified time is displayed.
Press the [CAMERA SELECT] 5 button.
The cursor moves to “DATE TIME”.
z To end search mode
Press the [SEARCH] button to end search mode. The
SEARCH indicator turns off.
< TIME/DATE SEARCH >
RECORDING TOP :
24-10-06 18:00
RECORDING END :
30-10-06 19:00
CHANNEL : 05
SEARCH
:
DATE
TIME
25-10-06 12:32
PREVIEW ->
VIEW
->
CHANGE:JOG
5
7
The selected recording is played back on the full screen.
SET:SHUTTLE
Specify the date and time.
(1) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise and turn the jog dial to “26”
(day).
(2) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise and turn the jog dial to “10”
(month).
(3) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise and turn the jog dial to “06”
(year).
(4) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise and turn the jog dial to “20”
(hour).
(5) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise, turn the jog dial to “30”
(minutes) and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise again.
The cursor moves to “PREVIEW”
Date and time for
searching
26-10-06
20 : 30
(1) (2) (3)
(4) (5)
z The retrieved recording can be displayed on the full screen
without displaying the preview screen by entering the date
and time and then selecting “VIEW”.
z If “CHANNEL” is set to “- -” and playback is started, the
recording is displayed on the multi 16 screens (on multi 9
screens for the DSR-5709P).
Press the [CAMERA SELECT] button to view on a full
screen.
< TIME/DATE SEARCH >
RECORDING TOP :
24-10-06 18:00
RECORDING END :
30-10-06 19:00
CHANNEL : 05
SEARCH
:
DATE
TIME
26-10-06 20:30
PREVIEW ->
VIEW
->
CHANGE:JOG
SET:SHUTTLE
z Also use the [CAMERA SELECT] 1-9 button, or the
[QUAD] button (0) to input.
English
Turn the jog dial to select “VIEW” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
45
5
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO
3
Use the following procedure to playback video that has been
stored in the archive area.
1
The selected image is displayed on the preview screen.
Press the [SEARCH] button while the
digital video recorder is recording or
stopped.
<SEARCH>
ALARM LOG SEARCH
ALARM SEARCH
ALARM THUMBNAIL SEARCH
TIME/DATE SEARCH
ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH
MOTION DETECTION SEARCH
BOOKMARK SEARCH
2
MOVE:JOG
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
z To display the next or previous screen
Turn the jog dial clockwise or counter-clockwise
accordingly.
z Press the
[ALARM] button to display the next eight
recordings, and
for the previous eight recordings.
SELECT:SHUTTLE
The <ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH> screen is displayed.
This screen lists the eight most recent recordings in the order
in which archiving was performed.
(3)
(4)
< ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH >
DATE START CH
CAPACITY
20-10 14:15 01
TOTAL - 800MB
20-10 15:15 01
USED - 105MB
20-10 16:15 01
20-10 17:15 01
20-10 18:15 01
20-10 19:15 01
MOVE:JOG
4
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The selected recording is played back on the full screen.
(5)
(6)
NETWORK
OPERATION
NO
0000001
0000002
0000003
0000004
0000005
0000006
(2)
NETWORK
CONTROL
z Up to eight recordings can be displayed in the <ARCHIVE
AREA SEARCH> screen.
z To switch to the copy setting screen
Press the [MARK/COPY] button with a video specified in
the list. (JP.52)
z To end search mode
Press the [SEARCH] button. The SEARCH indicator turns
off.
z Search also by entering the camera number.
Turn the jog dial to select “ARCHIVE
AREA SEARCH” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
(1)
SELECT:SHUTTLE
SETTINGS
MOVE:JOG
< ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH >
DATE START CH
CAPACITY
20-10 14:15 01
TOTAL - 800MB
20-10 15:15 01
USED - 105MB
20-10 16:15 01
20-10 17:15 01
20-10 18:15 01
20-10 19:15 01
OPERATION
NO
0000001
0000002
0000003
0000004
0000005
0000006
The SEARCH indicator lights up and the <SEARCH> screen
is displayed.
SEARCH
Turn the jog dial to select the video for
playback from the list.
INTRODUCTION
Searching within the archive area
SELECT:SHUTTLE
NETWORK
SETTINGS
(1) NO:
Indicates the archive number.
(2) DATE:
Indicates the date of the recording.
(3) START:
Indicates the start time for the recording.
(4) CH:
Indicates the camera number for the stored recording.
(5) TOTAL:
Indicates the total capacity of the archive area.
(6) USED:
Indicates the amount of the archive area that has been used.
OTHER
46
English
5
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO
4
Entering an archive number to search for an
alarm video
1
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Data with the specified archive numbers are searched for and
displayed in a list.
In the search screen, press the [FUNC.]
button and select “SEARCH”.
NO
0000001
0000002
0000003
0000004
0000005
0000006
The cursor moves to “SEARCH”.
FUNC.
NO
0000001
0000002
0000003
0000004
0000005
0000006
< ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH >
DATE START CH
20-10 14:15 01 SEARCH :
20-10 15:15 01 CHANNEL :
20-10 16:15 01
20-10 17:15 01
20-10 18:15 01
20-10 19:15 01
MOVE:JOG
0000028
--
MOVE:JOG
z When a camera number is specified, searching can only be
performed for that camera.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
NO
0000001
0000002
0000003
0000004
0000005
0000006
1
MOVE:JOG
3
0000028
--
SEARCH
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Turn the shuttle dial to move through the field and turn the jog
dial to select a individual numbers (0 through 9).
< ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH >
DATE START CH
20-10 14:15 01 SEARCH :
20-10 15:15 01 CHANNEL :
20-10 16:15 01
20-10 17:15 01
20-10 18:15 01
20-10 19:15 01
MOVE:JOG
Press the [SEARCH] button while the
digital video recorder is recording or
stopped.
The SEARCH indicator lights up and the <SEARCH> screen
is displayed.
Turn the jog dial and shuttle dial to
select an archive number.
NO
0000001
0000002
0000003
0000004
0000005
0000006
<SEARCH>
ALARM LOG SEARCH
ALARM SEARCH
ALARM THUMBNAIL SEARCH
TIME/DATE SEARCH
ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH
MOTION DETECTION SEARCH
BOOKMARK SEARCH
MOVE:JOG
2
0000028
--
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Turn the jog dial to select “MOTION
DETECTION SEARCH” and then turn
the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <MOTION DETECTION SEARCH> screen is displayed.
SELECT:SHUTTLE
z Also use 1-9 on the [CAMERA SELECT] button or the
[QUAD] button (0) to input.
< MOTION
SEARCH FROM
START
END
DETECTION SEARCH >
: ALARM
: 12-09-06 09:25
: 20-10-06 15:50
CHANNEL
: --
START PREVIEW ->
MOVE:JOG
English
SELECT:SHUTTLE
By setting the motion sensor for normal, timer or alarm
recordings, variations from normal images as a result of the
presence of an intruder or the like can be detected, and the
corresponding video can be played back.
The “SEARCH” input field flashes.
< ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH >
DATE START CH
20-10 14:15 01 SEARCH :
20-10 15:15 01 CHANNEL :
20-10 16:15 01
20-10 17:15 01
20-10 18:15 01
20-10 19:15 01
0000028
--
Motion detection search
SELECT:SHUTTLE
z When the cursor is positioned on “SEARCH”, turn the jog
dial to move the cursor to “CHANNEL”.
2
< ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH >
DATE START CH
20-10 14:15 01 SEARCH :
20-10 15:15 01 CHANNEL :
20-10 16:15 01
20-10 17:15 01
20-10 18:15 01
20-10 19:15 01
47
SELECT:SHUTTLE
5
3
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO
6
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The screen changes and the preview screen for the selected
camera number is displayed.
< MOTION
SEARCH FROM
START
END
DETECTION SEARCH >
: ALARM
: 12-09-06 09:25
: 20-10-06 15:50
CHANNEL
: --
< MOTION DETECTION SEARCH >
SEARCH FROM : NORMAL
/ CHANNEL : --
(1)
(2)
START PREVIEW ->
(4)
SELECT:SHUTTLE
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
‹ALARM
Searches alarm recording area.
ALARM &
NORMAL
Searches normal and alarm recording
areas.
ARCHIVE*1
Search the archive area.
(2) END:
The last date and time of the selected recording is displayed.
(3) MOTION SENSOR:
The motion sensor setting screen is displayed.
(4) PREVIEW:
Displays the selected start image.
(5) VIEW:
Plays the selected recording on the full screen.
*1 “ARCHIVE” can only be selected when “MODE” in
“ARCHIVE AREA” in the <RECORDING CONDITIONS
SET> screen is set to “AUTO ALARM COPY”. (JP.86)
4
z Press the [SEARCH] button to end search mode. The
SEARCH indicator turns off.
Setting the motion sensor for searching
< MOTION
SEARCH FROM
START
END
DETECTION SEARCH >
: NORMAL
: 12-09-06 09:25
: 20-10-06 15:50
CHANNEL
: --
1
SELECT:SHUTTLE
< MOTION DETECTION SEARCH >
SEARCH FROM : NORMAL
/ CHANNEL : --
Press a [CAMERA SELECT] button and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “START PREVIEW”.
< MOTION
SEARCH FROM
START
END
DETECTION SEARCH >
: NORMAL
: 12-09-06 09:25
: 20-10-06 15:50
CHANNEL
: --
START :
12-09-06 10:00
END :
20-10-06 15:50
MOTION SENSOR ->
PREVIEW
->
VIEW
->
MOVE:JOG
SELECT:SHUTTLE
NETWORK
SETTINGS
-
Set the
start date
and time.
NETWORK
OPERATION
(1) Turn the jog dial to set the start date and time for motion
sensing (i.e., 10 AM on the same day) and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
The recording for the selected time is displayed in the
preview screen. The cursor moves to “END”.
START PREVIEW ->
MOVE:JOG
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise while
video is being displayed on the preview
screen.
NETWORK
CONTROL
Turn the jog dial to select the “SEARCH
FROM” setting and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise twice.
The camera number input field flashes.
5
SELECT:SHUTTLE
SETTINGS
Searches normal recording area.
(5)
(1) START:
The date and time of the first screen of the selected recording
is displayed.
Description
NORMAL
(3)
START :
12-09-06 09:25
END :
20-10-06 15:50
MOTION SENSOR ->
PREVIEW
->
VIEW
->
MOVE:JOG
OPERATION
MOVE:JOG
Setting
INTRODUCTION
“SEARCH FROM” input field flashes.
(2) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
START PREVIEW ->
SELECT:SHUTTLE
OTHER
MOVE:JOG
48
English
5
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO
(3) Turn the jog dial to set the end date and time for motion
sensing (i.e., 8 PM on the same day) and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “MOTION SENSOR”.
(5) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The yellow areas change to gray.
< MOTION DETECTION SEARCH >
SEARCH FROM : NORMAL
/ CHANNEL : --
Set the
end date
and time.
2
START :
12-09-06 10:00
END :
12-09-06 20:00
MOTION SENSOR ->
PREVIEW
->
VIEW
->
MOVE:JOG
LEVEL:OFF
3
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The motion sensor setting screen is displayed.
Use the following procedure to set to detect a given range with
the motion sensor.
(1) Turn the jog dial to move the starting position to the
desired detection range and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
“ ” changes to a yellow “„”.
Press the [FUNC.] button, turn the jog
dial to select “LEVEL” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
“OFF” flashes.
LEVEL:OFF
4
LEVEL:OFF
EXIT
EXIT
Turn the jog dial to select sensitivity
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
After the sensitivity level is set, the cursor moves to “EXIT”.
EXIT
(2) Turn the jog dial to move left and right.
(3) Press the [FUNC.] button.
Cursor movements can be changed from left and right to
up and down.
LEVEL:OFF
EXIT
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
FUNC.
Setting
‹OFF
1 to 10
LEVEL:OFF
5
EXIT
Description
Motion sensing is not performed.
Motion sensing is performed. Lower
numbers correspond to higher levels of
sensitivity.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The display returns to the <MOTION DETECTION SEARCH>
screen.
(4) Turn the jog dial to move up and down.
< MOTION DETECTION SEARCH >
SEARCH FROM : NORMAL
/ CHANNEL : -START :
12-09-06 10:00
END :
12-09-06 20:00
MOTION SENSOR ->
PREVIEW
->
VIEW
->
MOVE:JOG
English
49
SELECT:SHUTTLE
5
6
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO
Turn the jog dial to select “PREVIEW”.
Searches a bookmarked video to play it back.
< MOTION DETECTION SEARCH >
SEARCH FROM : NORMAL
/ CHANNEL : --
7
1
Press the [SEARCH] button while the
digital video recorder is recording or
stopped.
The SEARCH indicator lights up and the <SEARCH> screen
is displayed.
SELECT:SHUTTLE
SEARCH
<SEARCH>
ALARM LOG SEARCH
ALARM SEARCH
ALARM THUMBNAIL SEARCH
TIME/DATE SEARCH
ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH
MOTION DETECTION SEARCH
BOOKMARK SEARCH
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Each time the shuttle dial is turned clockwise, a different
motion sensor screen is displayed on the preview screen.
< MOTION DETECTION SEARCH >
SEARCH FROM : ALARM
/ CHANNEL : --
MOVE:JOG
2
SELECT:SHUTTLE
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Turn the jog dial to select “BOOK MARK
SEARCH” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <BOOKMARK SEARCH> screen is displayed.
The eight bookmarks are displayed in a list.
„ If “NOT FOUND!” is displayed
Viewing video detected by the motion sensor
Turn the jog dial to select “VIEW” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Normal playback begins for the specified recording.
(3)
<BOOKMARK SEARCH>
DATE TIME CH
10-05 19:15 01
10-06 18:40 02
10-07 18:52 03
10-07 18:55 03
10-08 22:05 01
10-10 21:59 05
10-15 21:33 04
10-20 21:25 06
MOVE:JOG
SELECT:SHUTTLE
(4)
NETWORK
OPERATION
NO
0000001
0000002
0000003
0000004
0000005
0000006
0000007
0000008
(2)
NETWORK
CONTROL
(1)
Set the motion sensor again.
8
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
SETTINGS
START :
12-09-06 10:00
END :
12-09-06 20:00
MOTION SENSOR ->
PREVIEW
->
VIEW
->
MOVE:JOG
OPERATION
START :
12-09-06 10:00
END :
12-09-06 20:00
MOTION SENSOR ->
PREVIEW
->
VIEW
->
MOVE:JOG
INTRODUCTION
Bookmark search
(1) NO
The number of the bookmark is displayed (1 up to 64).
(2) DATE/TIME
The date and time of bookmarked video are displayed.
(3) CH
The recording camera number is displayed.
(For video bookmarked during recording, “--” is displayed for
CH.)
(4) Preview screen
The selected video is displayed.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
z If “- -” is specified for “CHANNEL”, the videos are displayed
on multi 16 screens (on multi 9 screens for the DSR5709P). If “01” to “16” (“01” to “09” for the DSR-5709P) is
specified for “CHANNEL”, playback can be performed for
only the specified camera number.
In such a case, the title information, date information and/
or time information may not be displayed completely.
z To playback a recording from a different camera, stop the
current playback and then repeat the setting process from
the beginning.
OTHER
50
English
5
3
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO
Turn the jog dial to select the video for
playback from the list.
The selected image is displayed on the preview screen.
NO
0000001
0000002
0000003
0000004
0000005
0000006
0000007
0000008
<BOOKMARK SEARCH>
DATE TIME CH
10-05 19:15 01
10-06 18:40 02
10-07 18:52 03
10-07 18:55 03
10-08 22:05 01
10-10 21:59 05
10-15 21:33 04
10-20 21:25 06
MOVE:JOG
SELECT:SHUTTLE
z To display the next or previous screen
Turn the jog dial clockwise or counter-clockwise
accordingly.
z Press the
[ALARM] button to display the next eight
recordings, and
for the previous eight recordings.
z To switch to the copy setting screen
Press the [MARK/COPY] button with a video specified in
the list. (JP.52)
z To exit the search mode
Press the [SEARCH] button. The [SEARCH] lamp goes off.
English
51
6
SAVING (COPYING) RECORDED VIDEO
INTRODUCTION
Use the procedures described below to copy important normal, timer or alarm recordings to the digital video recorder’s archive area,
a USB memory, a CD-R/RW or a DVD+R/+RW.
Copying video to the hard disk’s archive area (JP.53)
Copy
Archive
area
OPERATION
Recording area
SETTINGS
Copying video to a USB memory (JP.54)
USB
NETWORK
CONTROL
Recording area
USB memory
Copying video to a CD-R/RW or DVD+R/+RW (JP.57)
NETWORK
OPERATION
USB
Recording area
External recordable
CD/DVD drive
NETWORK
SETTINGS
OTHER
z Copied data is stored as continuous still images.
z If audio is recorded, audio can also be copied.
52
English
6
SAVING (COPYING) RECORDED VIDEO
6
Copying video to the hard disk’s
archive area
Turn the jog dial to select “TIME” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “HOW MANY”.
[PLAY/STOP] button
COPY TO
UNIT
AUDIO
HOW MANY
COPY CH
ARCHIVE AREA
TIME
OFF
00:00:00
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SELECT COPY CHANNEL
COPY START
->
FORMAT/ERASE: USB MEMORY
FORMAT/ERASE START
->
[STILL] button
Shuttle dial
Jog dial
:
:
:
:
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
[MARK/COPY] button
Example: Copying 10 seconds of video
1
2
‹PICTURES
Play video to be copied.
Press the [STILL] button when the frame
to be copied is displayed.
TIME
The specified duration after the specified
location is copied (time:minutes:seconds).
(Specify hours/minutes/seconds next to
“HOW MANY”.)
EVENTS
The specified number of events is copied.
(Specify the number of events next to
“HOW MANY”. You can set any number
from 1 to 99.)
STILL
3
Press the [MARK/COPY] button.
The COPY indicator lights up and the copy setting screen is
displayed.
“ARCHIVE AREA” is displayed for “COPY TO”.
z An event means a continuous record (or a recording unit
set by “DURATION” in the case of alarm recording).
z You can only select “EVENTS” when copying alarm
recording video.
z You can specify “ON/OFF” for “AUDIO” when recording
audio.
MARK/COPY
COPY TO
UNIT
AUDIO
HOW MANY
COPY CH
ARCHIVE AREA
PICTURES
OFF
1
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SELECT COPY CHANNEL
COPY START
->
FORMAT/ERASE: USB MEMORY
FORMAT/ERASE START
->
4
:
:
:
:
7
Set the time.
(1) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“00” (hour) flashes.
(2) Turn the jog dial to select “00” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
“00” (minutes) flashes.
(3) Turn the jog dial to select “00” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
“00” (seconds) flashes.
(4) Turn the jog dial to select “10” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “COPY START”.
Turn the jog dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “UNIT”.
5
Description
The specified number of images after the
specified location are copied.
(Specify the number of images next to
“HOW MANY”. You can set any number
from 1 to 99.)
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“PICTURES” flashes.
COPY TO
UNIT
AUDIO
HOW MANY
COPY CH
COPY TO
UNIT
AUDIO
HOW MANY
COPY CH
ARCHIVE AREA
TIME
OFF
00:00:10
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SELECT COPY CHANNEL
COPY START
->
FORMAT/ERASE: USB MEMORY
FORMAT/ERASE START
->
ARCHIVE AREA
PICTURES
OFF
1
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SELECT COPY CHANNEL
COPY START
->
FORMAT/ERASE: USB MEMORY
FORMAT/ERASE START
->
English
:
:
:
:
53
:
:
:
:
6
8
SAVING (COPYING) RECORDED VIDEO
Specify the channel to copy
„ To cancel copying
INTRODUCTION
Press the [MARK/COPY] button.
You can copy video from multiple channels at the same time.
Use the [CAMERA SELECT] button on the front panel to
specify the channel(s) you want to copy.
The specified channel(s) turns white from grey.
COPY CANCELED ! < 0% >
z The channel(s) that was playing back when the [MARK/
COPY] button was pressed turns green, and it is fixed as
the copy channel(s).
z Pressing the [MULTI] button selects all channels. Pressing
the button once again will deselect all channels except the
fixed one(s).
Copying to a USB memory
OPERATION
Copies video saved in recording area or archive area onto a
USB memory.
[PLAY/STOP] button
[MULTI] button
[STILL] button
Shuttle dial
COPY TO
UNIT
AUDIO
HOW MANY
COPY CH
ARCHIVE AREA
TIME
OFF
00:00:10
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SELECT COPY CHANNEL
COPY START
->
FORMAT/ERASE: USB MEMORY
FORMAT/ERASE START
->
:
:
:
:
[MARK/COPY] button
Example: Copying 20 images
1
Insert a USB memory.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Copying to the archive area begins.
The message “COPY TO ARCHIVE AREA !” is displayed onscreen during the copy procedure.
COPY TO ARCHIVE AREA ! < 56% >
When copying is completed, “COPY FINISHED !” is
displayed.
Play video to be copied on a full screen.
Press the [STILL] button when the frame
to be copied is displayed.
STILL
COPY FINISHED ! < 100% >
NETWORK
SETTINGS
2
3
NETWORK
OPERATION
z The digital video recorder has one USB port each on the
front and rear panels; however, you cannot use them at the
same time. Insert a USB memory in either the front or rear
port. If memories are inserted into both ports, the front port
takes precedence.
z Requirements for USB memory:
USB2.0 High speed compliant device
Total space of 2GB or less
Prior to use, format a USB memory using the digital video
recorder.
NETWORK
CONTROL
9
SETTINGS
Jog dial
[CAMERA SELECT] button
OTHER
54
English
6
4
SAVING (COPYING) RECORDED VIDEO
7
Press the [MARK/COPY] button.
The COPY indicator lights up and the copy setting screen is
displayed.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“PICTURES” flashes.
MARK/COPY
COPY TO
UNIT
AUDIO
HOW MANY
COPY CH
COPY TO
UNIT
AUDIO
HOW MANY
COPY CH
USB MEMORY
PICTURES
OFF
1
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SELECT COPY CHANNEL
COPY START
->
FORMAT/ERASE: USB MEMORY
FORMAT/ERASE START
->
ARCHIVE AREA
PICTURES
OFF
1
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SELECT COPY CHANNEL
COPY START
->
FORMAT/ERASE: USB MEMORY
FORMAT/ERASE START
->
5
:
:
:
:
8
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“ARCHIVE AREA” flashes.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise while
“PICTURES” is flashing.
The cursor moves to “HOW MANY”.
COPY TO
UNIT
AUDIO
HOW MANY
COPY CH
ARCHIVE AREA
PICTURES
OFF
1
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SELECT COPY CHANNEL
COPY START
->
FORMAT/ERASE: USB MEMORY
FORMAT/ERASE START
->
6
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
COPY TO
UNIT
AUDIO
HOW MANY
COPY CH
USB MEMORY
PICTURES
OFF
1
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SELECT COPY CHANNEL
COPY START
->
FORMAT/ERASE: USB MEMORY
FORMAT/ERASE START
->
Turn the jog dial to select “USB
MEMORY” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
The cursor moves to “UNIT”.
‹PICTURES
COPY TO
UNIT
AUDIO
HOW MANY
COPY CH
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
USB MEMORY
PICTURES
OFF
1
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SELECT COPY CHANNEL
COPY START
->
FORMAT/ERASE: USB MEMORY
FORMAT/ERASE START
->
z Up to 40,000 images can be copied in a single operation.
When specifying the number of images using “TIME”,
copying ends after 40,000 images are copied.
z Alarm recordings can only be copied one event at a time.
Description
The specified number of images after the
specified location are copied.
(Specify the number of images next to
“HOW MANY”. You can set any number
from 1 to 99.)
TIME
The specified duration after the specified
location is copied (TIME:minutes:seconds).
(Specify hours/minutes/seconds next to
“HOW MANY”.)
MAXIMUM
The maximum number of images allowable
in the copy destination is copied or all the
data from the copy source is copied.
EVENTS
The specified number of events are
copied.
(Specify the number of events next to
“HOW MANY”. You can set any number
from 1 to 99.)
EVENTS (MAX)
Images are copied on an event basis onto
the destination until it becomes full or the
last data of the copy source is copied.
z An event means a continuous record (or a recording unit
set by “DURATION” for the alarm recording).
z You can only select “EVENTS” or “EVENTS (MAX)” when
copying video saved in the archive area or alarm recording
video.
z If audio is recorded, “ON” or “OFF” can be set for “AUDIO”.
English
55
6
9
SAVING (COPYING) RECORDED VIDEO
12 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
INTRODUCTION
“1” flashes.
The copy data and the capacity of the copy destination are
checked.
COPY TO
UNIT
AUDIO
HOW MANY
COPY CH
:
:
:
:
USB MEMORY
PICTURES
OFF
1
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SELECT COPY CHANNEL
CHECKING DATA SIZE ! < 56% >
10 Turn the jog dial to select “20” and then
OPERATION
The available space and write capacity are checked.
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “COPY START”.
COPY TO
: USB MEMORY
TYPE
: ----FREE AREA
: 200MB
DATA SIZE
: 130MB
COPY START
->
The available space and write capacity are displayed and the
cursor moves to “COPY START”.
You can copy multiple channel videos at the same time.
Use the [CAMERA SELECT] button on the front panel to
specify a channel(s) whose video you want to copy.The
specified channel(s) turns white from grey.
13 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
SETTINGS
11 Specify the channel to copy
Copying begins. The message “COPY TO USB MEMORY !”
is displayed on-screen during the copy procedure.
NETWORK
CONTROL
z The channel(s) which was playing the video when the
[MARK/COPY] button was pressed turns green, and it is
fixed as a copy channel(s).
z All channels are selected if the [MULTI] button is pressed.
Pressing the button once again will deselect all channels
except the fixed one(s).
COPY TO USB MEMORY ! < 56% >
When copying is completed, “COPY FINISHED !” is
displayed.
[MULTI] button
NETWORK
OPERATION
COPY FINISHED ! < 100% >
„ To cancel copying
Press the [MARK/COPY] button.
[CAMERA SELECT] button
COPY CANCELED ! < 0% >
:
:
:
:
USB MEMORY
PICTURES
OFF
20
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SELECT COPY CHANNEL
COPY START
->
FORMAT/ERASE: USB MEMORY
FORMAT/ERASE START
->
56
English
OTHER
z When a USB memory becomes full during a copy
operation, a message will appear before the operation
stops. By making any control action, the display returns to
the normal screen. Replace the USB memory with a new
one and repeat the copy operation. Even if the previous
operation is aborted due to the lack of storage space, the
data that was copied before the operation stopped is saved
in the copy destination.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
COPY TO
UNIT
AUDIO
HOW MANY
COPY CH
6
SAVING (COPYING) RECORDED VIDEO
4
Copying to a CD-R/RW or DVD+R/
+RW
Press the [MARK/COPY] button.
The COPY indicator lights up and the copy setting screen is
displayed.
Use the following procedure to copy recording area or archive
area video to a CD-R/RW or DVD+R/+RW.
MARK/COPY
COPY TO
UNIT
AUDIO
HOW MANY
COPY CH
ARCHIVE AREA
PICTURES
OFF
1
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SELECT COPY CHANNEL
COPY START
->
FORMAT/ERASE: USB MEMORY
FORMAT/ERASE START
->
[PLAY/STOP] button
[STILL] button
Shuttle dial
Jog dial
5
:
:
:
:
Turn the jog dial to select “COPY TO”
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“ARCHIVE AREA” flashes.
[MARK/COPY] button
Example: Copying the maximum video to the copy
destination
COPY TO
UNIT
AUDIO
HOW MANY
COPY CH
ARCHIVE AREA
PICTURES
OFF
1
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SELECT COPY CHANNEL
COPY START
->
FORMAT/ERASE: USB MEMORY
FORMAT/ERASE START
->
z For compatibility, refer to the SANYO homepage.
http://www.sanyosecurity.com/
1
Connect a recordable CD or DVD drive
and insert a disc.
6
USB
:
:
:
:
Turn the jog dial to select “DISC
WRITER” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The cursor moves to “UNIT”.
COPY TO
UNIT
AUDIO
HOW MANY
COPY CH
DISC WRITER
PICTURES
OFF
1
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SELECT COPY CHANNEL
COPY START
->
FORMAT/ERASE: USB MEMORY
FORMAT/ERASE START
->
7
z The digital video recorder has one USB terminal on the
front and one on the back, but they cannot be used
simultaneously. Connect recordable drive to either
terminal. If both sides have devices connected, the front
terminal is prioritized.
2
3
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“PICTURES” flashes.
COPY TO
UNIT
AUDIO
HOW MANY
COPY CH
DISC WRITER
PICTURES
OFF
1
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SELECT COPY CHANNEL
COPY START
->
FORMAT/ERASE: USB MEMORY
FORMAT/ERASE START
->
Play video to be copied on a full screen.
Press the [STILL] button when the frame
to be copied is displayed.
STILL
English
:
:
:
:
57
:
:
:
:
6
8
SAVING (COPYING) RECORDED VIDEO
9
You can copy multiple channel videos at the same time.
Use the [CAMERA SELECT] button on the front panel to
specify a channel(s) whose video you want to copy.The
specified channel(s) turns white from grey.
The cursor moves to “COPY START”.
COPY TO
UNIT
AUDIO
HOW MANY
COPY CH
Specify the channel to copy
DISC WRITER
MAXIMUM
OFF
--01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SELECT COPY CHANNEL
COPY START
->
FORMAT/ERASE: USB MEMORY
FORMAT/ERASE START
->
:
:
:
:
‹PICTURES
[MULTI] button
Description
The specified number of images after the
specified location are copied.
(Specify the number of images next to
“HOW MANY”. You can set any number
from 1 to 99.)
[CAMERA SELECT] button
The specified duration after the specified
location is copied (TIME:minutes:seconds).
(Specify hours/minutes/seconds next to
“HOW MANY”.)
The maximum number of images allowable
in the copy destination is copied or all the
data from the copy source is copied.
EVENTS
The specified number of events are
copied.
(Specify the number of events next to
“HOW MANY”. You can set any number
from 1 to 99.)
EVENTS (MAX)
Images are copied on an event basis onto
the destination until it becomes full or the
last data of the copy source has been
copied.
COPY TO
UNIT
AUDIO
HOW MANY
COPY CH
:
:
:
:
DISC WRITER
MAXIMUM
OFF
--01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SELECT COPY CHANNEL
COPY START
->
FORMAT/ERASE: USB MEMORY
FORMAT/ERASE START
->
NETWORK
CONTROL
MAXIMUM
SETTINGS
TIME
OPERATION
z The channel(s) which was playing the video when the
[MARK/COPY] button was pressed turns green, and it is
fixed as a copy channel(s).
z All channels are selected if the [MULTI] button is pressed.
Pressing the button once again will deselect all channels
except the fixed one(s).
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
INTRODUCTION
Turn the jog dial to select “MAXIMUM”
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
10 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
COPY TO : DISC
TYPE
FREE AREA
NO. OF COPY
FINALIZE
VALIDATE
z An event means a continuous record (or a recording unit
set by “DURATION” for the alarm recording).
z You can select “EVENTS” or “EVENTS (MAX)” only when
copying video saved in archive area or alarm recording
video.
z If audio is recorded, “ON” or “OFF” can be set for “AUDIO”.
COPY START
WRITER
: DVD+R
: 5000MB
:
1
: ON
: OFF
NETWORK
OPERATION
The display switches to the disc details screen to show the
media type and free space of the copy destination. The cursor
is placed on “NO. OF COPY”.
->
NETWORK
SETTINGS
OTHER
58
English
6
SAVING (COPYING) RECORDED VIDEO
11 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The number of images flashes.
COPY TO : DISC
TYPE
FREE AREA
NO. OF COPY
FINALIZE
VALIDATE
COPY START
z You can carry out up to 99 write sessions to a CD-R/
DVD+R, or up to 99 write sessions within the same date to
a CD-RW/DVD+RW.
z Copying data requires at least 20MB of free space on a
disc.
z When the copy destination is a DVD+RW, the “FINALIZE”
setting is fixed to “OFF”.
z Data copied to a DVD+R in multi-session mode can only
be retrieved under environments that satisfy the following:
Drive:
Drive with DVD multi-session/multi-border retrieval support
OS:
Windows 2000 (with SP3 or later), Windows XP
WRITER
: DVD+R
: 5000MB
:
1
: ON
: OFF
->
12 Turn the jog dial to set the number of
14 Specify the disc validation function
discs to copy, and turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
settings
If you want to use “Verify” and/or “Compare” functions during
a copy operation, you need to configure “VALIDATE” using
the jog dial.
Once the setting is done, turn the shuttle dial clockwise to
move the cursor to “COPY START”.
The cursor appears on “FINALIZE”.
COPY TO : DISC
TYPE
FREE AREA
NO. OF COPY
FINALIZE
VALIDATE
COPY START
WRITER
: DVD+R
: 5000MB
:
1
: ON
: OFF
COPY TO : DISC
TYPE
FREE AREA
NO. OF COPY
FINALIZE
VALIDATE
->
13 Set “ON/OFF” for the “FINALIZE”
COPY START
WRITER
: DVD+R
: 5000MB
:
1
: ON
: OFF
->
process, and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
If you want to write additional data on the same medium, turn
the jog dial to specify “OFF" for "FINALIZE”.
Once the setting is done, turn the shuttle dial clockwise to
move the cursor to “VALIDATE”.
COPY TO : DISC
TYPE
FREE AREA
NO. OF COPY
FINALIZE
VALIDATE
COPY START
Setting
‹OFF
WRITER
: DVD+R
: 5000MB
:
1
: ON
: OFF
Setting
OFF
English
VERIFY
Verifies the disc to make sure that the data
residing on it can be retrieved.
VERIFY+
COMPARE
Both verifies and compares the disc to make
sure that the data written onto the target disc is
identical to that on the source disc.
z When an error is detected during disc verification, you are
presented with a warning message that states either
“VERIFY ERROR” or “COMPARE ERROR”. Chances are
that your medium is defective or corrupted; replace it with a
new disc and try again.
z Warning messages can be dismissed by pressing any
button on the front panel or turning the jog or shuttle dial.
->
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
‹ON
Description
Does not verify or compare the disc.
Description
Finalizes the disc (disables multi-session writes).
Does not finalize the disc (enables multi-session
writes).
59
6
SAVING (COPYING) RECORDED VIDEO
15 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Existing
data
1st disc
Existing
data
CD-R
(multi-session)
300MB
Existing
data
3rd disc
CD-R
(multi-session)
200MB
OPERATION
DVD+R
(multi-session)
2500MB
COMPOSING IMAGE DATA ! < 56% >
2nd disc
INTRODUCTION
Example 3: This example illustrates how 3000MB data
can be multi-session written onto one DVD+R
(with 2500MB free space), CD-R (with 300MB
free space), and CD-R (with 500MB free
space):
Copying begins. The message “COMPOSING IMAGE DATA!”,
then “COPY TO DISC WRITER” is displayed on screen during
copying.
When “COPY TO DISC WRITER <99%>” is displayed,
finalizing may take 3 to 4 minutes.
Example 4: This example illustrates how 1500MB data
can be copied to 9 CD-R discs (650MB each)
with “NO. OF COPY” set to 3:
When copying is completed, “COPY FINISHED !” is displayed
and the tray opens.
1st disc
Copy 1
2nd disc
3rd disc
CD-R
650MB
CD-R
200MB
CD-R
650MB
CD-R
650MB
CD-R
200MB
CD-R
650MB
CD-R
650MB
CD-R
200MB
SETTINGS
CD-R
650MB
Copy 2
COPY FINISHED ! < 100% >
NO. OF COPY :
1/2
COPY START
->
PLEASE SET A NEW DISC !
Copy 3
NETWORK
OPERATION
There are occasions when your data does not fit into one disc.
Now you can successively copy the remaining data to new
discs in such cases.
When the current disc becomes full, the disc tray is
automatically ejected and you are prompted to replace the
disc with a new one.
Example 1: This example illustrates how 1500MB data
can be copied across three CD-R (650MB)
discs:
2nd disc
3rd disc
CD-R
650MB
CD-R
650MB
CD-R
200MB
NETWORK
SETTINGS
1st disc
Example 2: This example illustrates how 5000MB data
can be copied to DVD+R (4700MB) and CD-R
(650MB) discs (one each):
2nd disc
DVD+R
4700MB
CD-R
300MB
OTHER
1st disc
NETWORK
CONTROL
When you copy data across multiple discs with “NO. OF
COPY” set to a number larger than 1:
z All discs must be blank. This feature does not support
multi-session writes.
z Second and subsequent copies must be written onto discs
that are in capacity equal to or larger than the disc for the
first copy.
Copying data onto multiple discs
z Support for copying across multiple discs is available
regardless of the target medium type (DVD or CD).
60
English
6
SAVING (COPYING) RECORDED VIDEO
4
Formatting a USB memory, CD-RW or DVD+RW
It is possible to format a USB memory, CD-RW or DVD+RW.
Turn the jog dial to select the “FORMAT/
ERASE” setting and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “FORMAT/ERASE START”.
COPY TO
UNIT
AUDIO
HOW MANY
COPY CH
ARCHIVE AREA
PICTURES
OFF
1
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SELECT COPY CHANNEL
COPY START
->
FORMAT/ERASE: USB MEMORY
FORMAT/ERASE START
->
1
2
:
:
:
:
COPY TO
UNIT
AUDIO
HOW MANY
COPY CH
ARCHIVE AREA
PICTURES
OFF
1
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SELECT COPY CHANNEL
COPY START
->
FORMAT/ERASE: USB MEMORY
FORMAT/ERASE START
->
Insert a USB memory, CD-RW or
DVD+RW.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
Press the [MARK/COPY] button.
‹USB MEMORY
DISC WRITER
The COPY indicator lights up and the copy setting screen is
displayed.
MARK/COPY
3
COPY TO
UNIT
AUDIO
HOW MANY
COPY CH
5
Description
Formats a USB memory.
Formats a CD-RW or DVD+RW.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <WARNING> screen is displayed.
:
:
:
:
ARCHIVE AREA
PICTURES
OFF
1
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SELECT COPY CHANNEL
COPY START
->
FORMAT/ERASE: USB MEMORY
FORMAT/ERASE START
->
<WARNING>
FORMAT
: USB MEMORY
VOLUME : 122MB
STORED DATA ON THE USB MEMORY
WILL BE ERASED !
FORMAT START
Turn the jog dial to select “FORMAT/
ERASE” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
6
“USB MEMORY” flashes.
COPY TO
UNIT
AUDIO
HOW MANY
COPY CH
ARCHIVE AREA
PICTURES
OFF
1
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SELECT COPY CHANNEL
COPY START
->
FORMAT/ERASE: USB MEMORY
FORMAT/ERASE START
->
->
Turn the jog dial to select “FORMAT
START” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
:
:
:
:
FORMAT USB MEMORY !
z “FORMAT/ERASE” cannot be selected when a disc writer
is not connected.
English
:
:
:
:
z Be sure to use USB memory that have been formatted
using FAT16. The digital video recorder does not
recognize FAT32 USB memorys.
61
6
SAVING (COPYING) RECORDED VIDEO
Folder hierarchy for data copied onto a USB
memory
2nd layer
3rd layer
SANYO
_VIEWER
IJL15.DLL
J2KCOREX.DLL
VIEWER2.EXE
VIEWER2.INI
IMG00001
00000001.JP2
IMG00002
00000200.JP2
00000201.JP2
IMG00200
00000400.JP2
00039801.JP2
SOUND
INFO
IMG00001
00040000.JP2
SOUND.WAV
DDMMYY01.INF
00000001.JP2
DDMMYY01
One data
saving
DDMMYY02
Year
Month
Day
4th layer
1st layer
SANYO
IMG00002
00000200.JP2
00000201.JP2
IMG00200
00000400.JP2
00039801.JP2
SOUND
INFO
00040000.JP2
SOUND.WAV
DDMMYY02.INF
AUTORUN.INF
IJL15.DLL
J2KCOREX.DLL
VIEWER2.EXE
VIEWER2.INI
2nd layer
DDMMYY01
One data
saving
DDMMYY02
DDM M YY
Year
Month
Day
3rd layer
4th layer
IMG00001
00000001.JP2
IMG00002
00000200.JP2
00000201.JP2
IMG00200
00000400.JP2
00039801.JP2
SOUND
INFO
00040000.JP2
SOUND.WAV
DDMMYY01.INF
IMG00001
00000001.JP2
IMG00002
00000200.JP2
00000201.JP2
IMG00200
00000400.JP2
00039801.JP2
SOUND
INFO
00040000.JP2
SOUND.WAV
DDMMYY02.INF
SETTINGS
DDMMYY
Folder hierarchy for data copied onto a CD-R/
RW or DVD+R/RW
OPERATION
1st layer
INTRODUCTION
Folder structure of copied video
1. The first layer consists of a single folder named “SANYO”,
under which a number of session-specific folders are
created as the second layer.
2. The second layer consists of a number of session-specific
folders that are named in this format: DDMMYY (the
recording date for the first image copied in the copy
session) followed by a two-digit serial number.
2. The second layer consists of a number of session-specific
folders that are named in this format: DDMMYY (the
recording date for the first image copied in the copy
session) followed by a two-digit serial number.
3. The third layer consists of a number of image storage
folders that are named in this format: IMG followed by a 5digit serial number. Each of these folders can contain up to
200 image files that make up the fourth layer.
4. For image files with sound, the corresponding WAV files are
stored in the “SOUND” folder.
4. For image files with sound, the corresponding WAV files are
stored in the “SOUND” folder.
5. The “INFO” folder is created on a session by session basis,
and it contains configuration information files.
5. The “INFO” folder is created on a session by session basis,
and it contains configuration information files.
6. Viewer-related files including “AUTRUN.INF”, “IJL15.DLL”,
“J2KCOREX.DLL”, “VIEWER2.EXE”, and “VIEWER2.INI”
are directly placed in the first layer.
z To view images on your PC, open the “DDMMYYXX” folder
using the dedicated viewer. To open the viewer, doubleclick “Viewer2.exe”.
(The dedicated viewer and JPEG2000 plug-in are
downloaded to the media with the images.)
NETWORK
SETTINGS
6. As part of the second layer, a folder named “VIEWER” is
created, and it contains viewer-related files including
“IJL15.DLL”, “J2KCOREX.DLL”, “VIEWER2.EXE”, and
“VIEWER2.INI”.
NETWORK
OPERATION
3. The third layer consists of a number of image storage
folders that are named in this format: IMG followed by a 5digit serial number. Each of these folders can contain up to
200 image files that make up the fourth layer.
NETWORK
CONTROL
1. The first layer consists of a single folder named “SANYO”,
under which a number of session-specific folders are
created as the second layer.
OTHER
62
English
MENU CONFIGURATION AND OPERATIONS
3
[EXIT/OSD] button
[MENU] button
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The sub-menus appear.
The cursor is positioned on the first setting item.
Shuttle dial
<RECORD SET>
1.NORMAL REC EASY SET
2.RECORDING AREA SET
3.RECORDING CONDITIONS SET
4.NORMAL REC MODE SET
5.PROGRAM REC SET
6.TIMER SET
7.ALARM REC MODE SET
8.ALARM OPERATION SET
MOVE:JOG
Jog dial
4
This section describes the menu configuration and the menu
items to be selected for each operation.
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Turn the jog dial to select an item and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The setting screen is displayed. The cursor is positioned on
the first setting item.
Basic menu operations
1
<RECORDING AREA SET>
TOTAL CAPACITY
:
INTERNAL HDD
:
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
MENU
<MAIN MENU>
1.INITIAL SET
2.RECORD SET
3.GENERAL SET
4.SCREEN SET
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME
6.INITIALIZATION LOG
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS
8.ADVANCED MENU SET
MOVE:JOG
2
RECORDING AREA
AREA FULL RESET
ARCHIVE AREA
AREA FULL RESET
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
:
80 %
:
20 %
->
->
CAUTION: WHEN THE AREA SETTING IS CHANGED,
THE WHOLE AREA WILL BE INITIALIZED !
„ To return to the previous menu
Turn the shuttle dial counter-clockwise.
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Turn the jog dial to select a function.
Example: “2.RECORD SET”
The cursor moves.
Cursor
position
5
<MAIN MENU>
1.INITIAL SET
2.RECORD SET
3.GENERAL SET
4.SCREEN SET
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME
6.INITIALIZATION LOG
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS
8.ADVANCED MENU SET
MOVE:JOG
English
500GB
500GB
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
EXIT/OSD
SELECT:SHUTTLE
63
MENU CONFIGURATION AND OPERATIONS
Suspending video recording
You cannot change menu settings during video recording.
You must temporarily suspend recording in order to change
settings.
If you want to resume recording without changing the current
settings, follow the steps below to suspend and resume.
Use the jog dial and shuttle dial to move through the submenus and setting screens and to confirm the settings.
(2)
<RECORDING AREA SET>
TOTAL CAPACITY
:
INTERNAL HDD
:
RECORDING AREA
AREA FULL RESET
ARCHIVE AREA
AREA FULL RESET
To suspend video recording:
Open the <MAIN MENU> screen, and press and hold the
[SHUTTLE HOLD] button for approximately three seconds.
The recording lamp goes off and all the recording functions
(normal, timer and alarm recordings) switch to the suspend
mode. You can change menu settings during the suspend
mode.
500GB
500GB
:
80 %
:
20 %
(3)
->
->
While recording is suspended, you see the <-->
mark displayed on the menu screen.
CAUTION: WHEN THE AREA SETTING IS CHANGED,
THE WHOLE AREA WILL BE INITIALIZED !
<-->
(2)
To move the cursor
Turn the shuttle dial
right or to confirm
clockwise.
an item
<MAIN MENU>
1.INITIAL SET
2.RECORD SET
3.GENERAL SET
4.SCREEN SET
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME
6.INITIALIZATION LOG
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS
8.ADVANCED MENU SET
MOVE:JOG
(3)
SELECT:SHUTTLE
To resume video recording:
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
Recording resumes under the same conditions that existed
when it was suspended.
Turn the jog dial.
Resetting menu items
Use the following procedure to restore only those items in the
displayed setting screen to their default values.
2
Open the menu screen containing the
items to be returned to default settings.
Press the [MENU RESET] button.
The displayed settings are restored to their default values.
LE
AR
EN
T
NETWORK
SETTINGS
SHUTTLE
C
NETWORK
OPERATION
1
z While the recording is suspended, the digital video
recorder does not accept any new recording operation.
z If the menu setting file is uploaded or power supply is
interrupted while recording is suspended, the original
recording conditions will not be restored.
NETWORK
CONTROL
To change a
setting value
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
SETTINGS
(1)
To move the cursor
Turn the jog dial.
up or down
OPERATION
(1)
INTRODUCTION
Movement and confirmation in sub-menus and
setting screens
ER
MENU
RESET
[MENU RESET] button
OTHER
64
English
MENU CONFIGURATION AND OPERATIONS
Sub-menu configuration
MAIN MENU
<MAIN MENU>
1.INITIAL SET
2.RECORD SET
3.GENERAL SET
4.SCREEN SET
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME
6.INITIALIZATION LOG
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS
8.ADVANCED MENU SET
MOVE:JOG
Turn the jog dial to select the setting
item and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Sub-menus
<RECORD SET>
1.NORMAL REC EASY SET
2.RECORDING AREA SET
3.RECORDING CONDITIONS SET
4.NORMAL REC MODE SET
5.PROGRAM REC SET
6.TIMER SET
7.ALARM REC MODE SET
8.ALARM OPERATION SET
MOVE:JOG
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
SELECT:SHUTTLE
The following settings can be made with the sub-menus.
Press the [MENU] button in any sub-menu to scroll through the sub-menus.
1. INITIAL SET (JP.66)
Sets display language,
time, title, holiday, time
period and other settings.
<INITIAL SET>
1.LANGUAGE/CLOCK SET
2.CAMERA DETECT
3.TITLE SET
4.HOLIDAY SET
5.TIME PERIOD SET
MOVE:JOG
2. RECORD SET (JP.76)
Sets the basic recording
settings, hard disk capacity
and recording area,
overwriting conditions,
image quality, recording
rate, timer and alarm
recording settings, and
alarm settings.
3. GENERAL SET (JP.111)
Sets the monitor display
setting, buzzer setting,
security lock, RS-485
SETtings, hard disk
initialization and mirroring
settings, network settings
and other settings.
English
----- --:-- --------- --:-- --------- --:-- --------- --:-- --------- --:-- --------- --:-- ----USED TIME ->
SELECT:SHUTTLE
6. INITIALIZATION LOG (JP.140)
Displays a record of hard
< INITIALIZATION LOG >
disk initialization and
DATE
TIME AREA
ACTION
resetting of recording
----- --:-- ------- ( ------ )
areas.
----- --:-- ------- ( ------ )
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
-----------------------------
SELECT:SHUTTLE
--:---:---:---:---:---:---:--
-------------------------------------------
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
------------------------------------
--:---:---:---:---:---:--
USER
----------------------------------------------------------------
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
7. COPY MENU SETTINGS (JP.141)
Stores and loads menu
<COPY MENU SETTINGS>
settings.
<GENERAL SET>
1.DISPLAY SET
2.BUZZER SET
3.SECURITY LOCK SET
4.RS-485 SET
5.HDD SET
6.NETWORK SET
7.NETWORK CONTROL SET
MOVE:JOG
4. SCREEN SET (JP.132)
Sets the camera display
position on quad and multi
9/16 screens, automatic
camera selection setting,
mask setting and color
level setting.
->
->
->
->
->
<RECORD SET>
1.NORMAL REC EASY SET
2.RECORDING AREA SET
3.RECORDING CONDITIONS SET
4.NORMAL REC MODE SET
5.PROGRAM REC SET
6.TIMER SET
7.ALARM REC MODE SET
8.ALARM OPERATION SET
MOVE:JOG
5. POWER LOSS/USED TIME (JP.139)
Displays the date and time
<POWER LOSS/USED TIME>
of power losses and the
POWER
LOSS
RECOVER
amount of hard disk
#001
03-02 00:05 03-02 06:37
usage.
----- --:-- ----- --:--
DVR TYPE VER. SA16-04.00
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
SAVE MENUS TO USB MEMORY
->
LOAD MENUS FROM USB MEMORY ->
COPY USER ID SETTIGS
: NO
COPY RECORDING AREA SETTINGS : NO
*IF YOU CHOOSE 'YES' FOR 'AREA SETTINGS',
HARD DISK WILL BE INITIALIZED !
SELECT:SHUTTLE
8. ADVANCED MENU SET (JP.144)
Sets the ROI setting, alarm
<ADVANCED MENU SET>
notification by e-mail
1.ROI SET
setting and camera control
2.ALARM NOTICE SET
settings.
3.CAMERA CONTROL SET
<SCREEN SET>
1.MULTI SCREEN
: NORMAL
QUAD POSITION SET
->
MULTI 9 POSITION SET
->
MULTI 16 POSITION SET
->
2.SEQUENCE SET
FULL : 1S
QUAD : 1S
MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET
->
3.MASK
: OFF
MASK SET
->
4.COLOR LEVEL SET
->
4.TIME ZONE/NTP SET
->
->
->
->
MOVE:JOG
65
SELECT:SHUTTLE
1
INITIAL SET
[EXIT/OSD] button
Shuttle dial
[QUAD] button
<MAIN MENU>
1.INITIAL SET
2.RECORD SET
3.GENERAL SET
4.SCREEN SET
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME
6.INITIALIZATION LOG
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS
8.ADVANCED MENU SET
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
OPERATION
MOVE:JOG
INTRODUCTION
[MENU] button
MAIN MENU
SELECT:SHUTTLE
[CAMERA SELECT] button
3. TITLE SET (JP.70)
Sets a unique title for each
camera so that these can
be displayed on-screen.
Configuration
The following settings can be made with <INITIAL SET>.
MOVE:JOG
->
->
->
->
->
CAMERA NO.01 ________01
SELECT:SHUTTLE
4. HOLIDAY SET (JP.71)
Sets specific dates as
holidays to enable the
same operation as on
Sundays.
SET>
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
-----------------------------------------
5. TIME PERIOD SET (JP.72)
Uses a pair of time periods
<TIME PERIOD SET>
to set a time band for
TIME PERIOD
T-1
T-2
T-3
automatic camera
TIME PERIOD A 00:00 00:00 00:00
selection and the switching
TIME PERIOD B 00:00 00:00 00:00
of masking and motion
sensor operations.
SELECT TIME PERIOD
z More languages can be added. Contact the dealer for
details.
SEQUENCE
MASK
MOTION SENSOR
<WARNING>
CAMERA DETECT
CONTINUE?
NO
TIME PERIOD A
TIME PERIOD A
TIME PERIOD A
T-4
00:00
00:00
NETWORK
SETTINGS
2. CAMERA DETECT (JP.69)
Automatically detects
cameras that are
connected.
<HOLIDAY
-----------------------------------------
NETWORK
OPERATION
<LANGUAGE/LANGUE/SPRACHE/IDIOMA>
ENGLISH
<CLOCK SET>
01-01-2007 MON 00:00:00
<SUMMER TIME SET>
MODE
:
USE
WEEK MONTH TIME
ON LST-SUN
03
02:00
OFF LST-SUN
10
02:00
<EXT.CLOCK SET>
ADJUST. TIME
01:00
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
NETWORK
CONTROL
1. LANGUAGE/CLOCK SET
Sets the language
displayed on the monitor.
(JP.19)
Sets the date and time
displayed on the normal
screen and summer time.
(JP.20, 67) Automatically
aligns the time of all digital
video recorders when
multiple recorders are
connected. (JP.68)
<TITLE SET>
SETTINGS
<INITIAL SET>
1.LANGUAGE/CLOCK SET
2.CAMERA DETECT
3.TITLE SET
4.HOLIDAY SET
5.TIME PERIOD SET
Jog dial
OTHER
66
English
1
INITIAL SET
4
Setting the language
Sets the language displayed on the monitor. (JP.19)
Turn the jog dial to select “MODE”
under <SUMMER TIME SET>.
Setting the time
<LANGUAGE/LANGUE/SPRACHE/IDIOMA>
ENGLISH
<CLOCK SET>
01-01-2007 MON 00:00:00
<SUMMER TIME SET>
MODE
:
USE
WEEK MONTH TIME
ON LST-SUN
03
02:00
OFF LST-SUN
10
02:00
<EXT.CLOCK SET>
ADJUST. TIME
01:00
Set the time and date of the digital video recorder. (JP.20)
Setting the summer time
Set the start and end date and time for summer time.
1
Press the [MENU] button.
5
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
MENU
2
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“USE” flashes.
<LANGUAGE/LANGUE/SPRACHE/IDIOMA>
ENGLISH
<CLOCK SET>
01-01-2007 MON 00:00:00
<SUMMER TIME SET>
MODE
:
USE
WEEK MONTH TIME
ON LST-SUN
03
02:00
OFF LST-SUN
10
02:00
<EXT.CLOCK SET>
ADJUST. TIME
01:00
Turn the jog dial to select “1.INITIAL
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <INITIAL SET> screen is displayed.
6
3
Turn the jog dial to select “USE” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to the date/time at which to switch to
summer time.
Turn the jog dial to select
“1.LANGUAGE/CLOCK SET” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
<LANGUAGE/LANGUE/SPRACHE/IDIOMA>
ENGLISH
<CLOCK SET>
01-01-2007 MON 00:00:00
<SUMMER TIME SET>
MODE
:
USE
WEEK MONTH TIME
ON LST-SUN
03
02:00
OFF LST-SUN
10
02:00
<EXT.CLOCK SET>
ADJUST. TIME
01:00
The <LANGUAGE/LANGUE/SPRACHE/IDIOMA> screen is
displayed.
<LANGUAGE/LANGUE/SPRACHE/IDIOMA>
ENGLISH
<CLOCK SET>
01-01-2007 MON 00:00:00
<SUMMER TIME SET>
MODE
:
USE
WEEK MONTH TIME
ON LST-SUN
03
02:00
OFF LST-SUN
10
02:00
<EXT.CLOCK SET>
ADJUST. TIME
01:00
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
‹USE
NO USE
English
67
Description
Time is automatically adjusted to summer
time.
Time is not automatically adjusted to
summer time.
1
7
INITIAL SET
Set the date and time.
(2)
(3)
Use the following procedure to align the time of all digital
video recorders daily when multiple recorders are connected.
(Default setting: OFF)
When time signal is input through the “CLOCK IN” terminal on
the rear panel, the internal clock of the digital video recorder is
automatically adjusted according to the time signal.
(4)
z If you use this function, connect the digital video recorder
to an external device that provides an accurate time signal.
z If the time difference is 30 minutes or longer between the
input time from the external signal and the time set on the
digital video recorder, time adjustment does not take place.
z If you do not use this function, leave the initial setting
(OFF) unchanged to prevent malfunction.
WEEK MONTH TIME
ON LST-SUN
03 02:00
OFF LST-SUN
10 02:00
(5)
(6)
(7)
Connect the CLOCK OUT terminal on
the rear of the first digital video
recorder to the CLOCK IN of the second
recorder.
CLOCK OUT
CLOCK IN
C
CLOCK OUT
C
C
To C terminal
To CLOCK IN
terminal
2
Press the [MENU] button.
NETWORK
CONTROL
(1) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“LST” for “ON” flashes.
(2) Turn the jog dial to select the week summer time begins
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “SUN” for “ON”.
(3) Turn the jog dial to select the day of the week summer
time begins and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “03”.
(4) Turn the jog dial to select the month summer time begins
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “02”.
(5) Turn the jog dial to select the hour summer time begins
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “00”.
(6) Turn the jog dial to select the minute summer time begins
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to the end date and time.
(7) Use the same procedure to set the date and time summer
time ends.
SETTINGS
1
(8)
Summer time begins
(1) Week, (2) Day of the week, (3) Month, (4) Time
Summer time ends
(5) Week, (6) Day of the week, (7) Month, (8) Time
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
MENU
3
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
NETWORK
OPERATION
8
OPERATION
(1)
INTRODUCTION
External clock setting
Example: Set the summer time to begin at
25 March, 2007, 02:00.
Set the summer time to end
28 October, 2007, 02:00.
The clock display jumps forward one hour from 25 March,
2007, 01:59 to 03:00.
The clock display jumps back one hour from 28 October,
2007, 01:59 to 01:00.
Turn the jog dial to select “1.INITIAL
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <INITIAL SET> screen is displayed.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
4
NETWORK
SETTINGS
EXIT/OSD
Turn the jog dial to select
“1.LANGUAGE/CLOCK SET” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
<LANGUAGE/LANGUE/SPRACHE/IDIOMA>
ENGLISH
<CLOCK SET>
01-01-2007 MON 00:00:00
<SUMMER TIME SET>
MODE
:
USE
68
English
OTHER
The <LANGUAGE/LANGUE/SPRACHE/IDIOMA> screen is
displayed.
1
5
INITIAL SET
Turn the jog dial to select “ADJUST.
TIME” under <EXT. CLOCK SET> and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Detecting connected cameras
Automatically detect connected cameras and adjust the
following settings depending on the presence or absence of
cameras.
z Program record set (JP.90)
All settings for programs No. 1-4 are set to “1FPS” for
channels with cameras connected and “OFF” for channels
with no cameras connected.
z Automatic screen selection time period and monitor
settings (JP.134)
All settings for time periods T1-4 are set to “1S” for
channels with cameras connected and “OFF” for channels
with no cameras connected.
z Setting masks (JP.136)
All settings for time period T1 - 4 including main monitor,
monitor 2, and network are set to “OFF” for each channel.
“OFF” (default setting) flashes.
<LANGUAGE/LANGUE/SPRACHE/IDIOMA>
ENGLISH
<CLOCK SET>
01-01-2007 MON 00:00:00
<SUMMER TIME SET>
MODE
:
USE
WEEK MONTH TIME
ON LST-SUN
03
02:00
OFF LST-SUN
10
02:00
<EXT.CLOCK SET>
ADJUST. TIME
OFF
6
Turn the jog dial to select the time and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
1
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
Example: Set to 05:00.
MENU
<LANGUAGE/LANGUE/SPRACHE/IDIOMA>
ENGLISH
<CLOCK SET>
01-01-2007 MON 00:05:00
<SUMMER TIME SET>
MODE
:
USE
WEEK MONTH TIME
ON LST-SUN
03
02:00
OFF LST-SUN
10
02:00
<EXT.CLOCK SET>
ADJUST. TIME
05:00
7
Press the [MENU] button.
2
Turn the jog dial to select “1.INITIAL
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <INITIAL SET> screen is displayed.
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting procedure for the first digital video recorder is
ended and the display returns to the normal screen.
EXIT/OSD
3
8
Use the same procedure to set the time
on the second recorder.
Turn the jog dial to select “2.CAMERA
DETECT” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <WARNING> screen is displayed.
<WARNING>
CAMERA DETECT
z Set the time to the same time of the first digital video
recorder.
z If you use the CLOCK OUT (output for time adjustment) /
IN (input) terminals to adjust time, use a single power
supply for all the digital video recorders. When you shut
down the power, do it simultaneously for all the digital
video recorders. If you shut down the power separately, the
recorders will become unsynchronized.
CONTINUE?
NO
z The minutes and seconds cannot be set for “ADJUST.
TIME”.
English
69
1
4
INITIAL SET
Turn the jog dial to select “YES” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Example: Setting the title “HALL-1STFL” for Camera No. 3.
INTRODUCTION
1
Connected cameras are automatically detected.
When detection is completed, the display returns to the
<INITIAL SET> screen.
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
MENU
Turn the jog dial to select “1.INITIAL
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
OPERATION
2
CAMERA DETECT !
The <INITIAL SET> screen is displayed.
5
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The display returns to the normal screen.
3
Setting camera titles
SETTINGS
EXIT/OSD
Turn the jog dial to select “3.TITLE SET”
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The title setting field is displayed on the monitoring screen.
The default setting is “-----01” (camera No.).
Use the following procedure to set a unique title for each
camera so that these titles can be displayed on-screen.
<TITLE SET>
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
QUAD
0
4
Press the No. 3 [CAMERA SELECT]
button.
The video from Camera No. 3 is displayed on-screen.
<TITLE SET>
CAMERA NO.03 ________03
5
z The display limits for monitor 2 camera title is 8 characters
for multi 9 screen display and 6 characters for multi 16
screen display.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
Characters that can be entered
1
NETWORK
OPERATION
[CAMERA SELECT] Buttons
CAMERA NO.01 ________01
NETWORK
CONTROL
z Titles can be up to 10 characters in length per camera.
The following characters can be used.
z Letters: A to Z
z Numbers: 0 to 9
z Symbols: - : . / * _ (space)
z Numbers can also be entered by using the [CAMERA
SELECT] buttons 1 through 9 or the [QUAD] button.
The first character position in the title flashes.
OTHER
CAMERA NO.03 ________03
70
English
1
6
INITIAL SET
Turn the jog dial to select “H”.
Setting holidays
Characters change in the following sequence as the jog dial is
turned.
<TITLE SET>
Use the following procedure to set specific dates as holidays
to enable the same timer recording operation for Sunday to be
used on those days.
Dates such as national holidays and company holidays should
be set as holidays when those dates are to have the same
security as Sundays.
[KEY]
CAMERA NO.03 H_______03
z Be sure to always switch “SET” to “ON” after completing
timer settings for Sunday. (JP.191)
A
Z
(space)
7
0
*
-
9
/
.
Settings for
Sunday
:
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The character is set and the cursor moves one position to the
right.
WEEK
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
DLY
EXT
START
--:---:---:---:---:---:---:---:-*****
<TIMER SET>
STOP PROGRAM
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
*****
OFF
FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
SET
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Example: Setting 26 October as a holiday
1
CAMERA NO.03 H_______03
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
MENU
z When changing a character in the title, move the cursor to
that character by turning the shuttle dial clockwise or
counter-clockwise and then re-enter the character.
8
9
2
Repeat the above steps to enter the
remaining characters.
Turn the jog dial to select “1.INITIAL
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <INITIAL SET> screen is displayed.
Press [EXIT/OSD] button after all digits
are set.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
3
EXIT/OSD
Turn the jog dial to select “4.HOLIDAY
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <HOLIDAY SET> screen is displayed.
The default setting is “-----”.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
English
71
<HOLIDAY
-----------------------------------------
SET>
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
-----------------------------------------
1
4
INITIAL SET
Set the day and month for item 1.
1. -----
INTRODUCTION
Holiday setting
number
Setting time periods
Use the following procedure to specify four different time
periods per day (for instance, early morning, morning,
lunchtime and evening) to set up automatic screen selection,
masking and motion sensor operations, and other operations.
Use TIME PERIOD A and TIME PERIOD B to make operation
settings. For example, it is possible to set TIME PERIOD A for
automatic screen selection and TIME PERIOD B for the
masking of monitor video using a gray pattern.
Month
Day
(1) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“--” (day) flashes.
1. -----
OPERATION
Example: For DSR-5716P
„ Morning to lunchtime: 6:00 to 11:00
(2) Turn the jog dial to select “26” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
“--” (month) flashes.
Cameras No. 2, 4, 5, 7, 10 and 16 are masked.
1. 26---
1. 26-10
2. -----
6
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
„ Lunchtime: 11:00 to 13:00
Cameras No. 1, 4, 6, 11, 12, 13 and 14 are masked.
Use the same procedure to set other
holidays.
01
02
03
04
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
16
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
NETWORK
CONTROL
5
02
SETTINGS
(3) Turn the jog dial to select “10” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “2”.
01
EXIT/OSD
„ Lunchtime to evening: 13:00 to 20:00
z If a day is selected in February, April, June, September or
November that does not exist (see table below), this is
changed automatically to the last day of the month.
Month
Non-existent day
2
30, 31
29
4, 6, 9, 11
31
30
01
05
09
12
„ Evening to morning: 20:00 to 6:00
Automatic selection is performed for Cameras No. 1, 8 and
16.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
Day changed to
(last day of the
month)
NETWORK
OPERATION
Automatic selection is performed for Cameras No. 1, 5, 9 and
12.
OTHER
01
08
16
72
English
1
INITIAL SET
The above examples are set as follows.
Operations during the specified time periods
<TIME PERIOD SET> screen
z TIME PERIOD A
T-1=6:00, T-2=13:00, T-3=20:00, T-4=00:00
z TIME PERIOD B
T-1=6:00, T-2=11:00, T-3=13:00, T-4=00:00
z SEQUENCE
“TIME PERIOD A”
z MASK
“TIME PERIOD B”
The following menu settings must be made to enable
operation of the time periods. After completing these settings,
be sure to then carry out the timer setting.
„ Setting automatic selection of camera video
Select the camera to be automatically selected to display
video and set the switching interval.
To do this, set “SEQUENCE SET” from the <SCREEN SET>
screen. (JP.134)
<MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET> screen
z T-1
All “OFF”
z T-2
“OFF” except cameras No. 1, 5, 9 and 12
z T-3
“OFF” except cameras No. 1, 8 and 16
<SCREEN SET>
1.MULTI SCREEN
: NORMAL
QUAD POSITION SET
->
MULTI 9 POSITION SET
->
MULTI 16 POSITION SET
->
2.SEQUENCE SET
FULL : 1S
QUAD : 1S
MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET
->
3.MASK
: OFF
MASK SET
->
4.COLOR LEVEL SET
->
<MASK SET> screen
z T-1
“ON” for cameras No. 2, 4, 5, 7, 10 and 16.
z T-2
“ON” for cameras No. 1, 4, 6, 11, 12, 13 and 14.
z T-3
All “OFF”
„ Masking camera video using a gray pattern
Use “MASK” from the <SCREEN SET> screen to specify
which cameras are to be displayed on the monitor and which
are not. (JP.136)
<SCREEN SET>
1.MULTI SCREEN
: NORMAL
QUAD POSITION SET
->
MULTI 9 POSITION SET
->
MULTI 16 POSITION SET
->
2.SEQUENCE SET
FULL : 1S
QUAD : 1S
MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET
->
3.MASK
: OFF
MASK SET
->
4.COLOR LEVEL SET
->
„ Alarm recording using motion sensors
Set “MOTION SENSOR” from the <ALARM REC MODE
SET> screen. (JP.105)
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE: 15FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: ***
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
English
73
1
INITIAL SET
4
Example 1: Setting periods using TIME PERIOD A and
TIME PERIOD B
1
“00:” for T-1 flashes (indicating the hour).
<TIME PERIOD SET>
TIME PERIOD
T-1
T-2
T-3
T-4
TIME PERIOD A 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00
TIME PERIOD B 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00
SELECT TIME PERIOD
SEQUENCE
MASK
MOTION SENSOR
<TIME PERIOD SET>
[KEY]
TIME PERIOD
T-1
T-2
T-3
T-4
TIME PERIOD A 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00
TIME PERIOD B 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00
SELECT TIME PERIOD
TIME PERIOD A
TIME PERIOD A
TIME PERIOD A
5
Set the time for T-1.
(1) Turn the jog dial to select “06” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
“:00” for T-1 flashes (indicating the minutes).
(2) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“00:” for T-2 flashes (indicating the hour).
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
Set the time for T-2.
(1) Turn the jog dial to select “11” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
“:00” for T-2 flashes (indicating the minutes).
Turn the jog dial to select “1.INITIAL
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
<TIME PERIOD SET>
[KEY]
TIME PERIOD
T-1
T-2
T-3
T-4
TIME PERIOD A 06:00 11:00 00:00 00:00
TIME PERIOD B 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00
The <INITIAL SET> screen is displayed.
7
Turn the jog dial to select “5.TIME
PERIOD SET” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
8
<TIME PERIOD SET>
TIME PERIOD
T-1
T-2
T-3
T-4
TIME PERIOD A 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00
TIME PERIOD B 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00
SELECT TIME PERIOD
SEQUENCE
MASK
MOTION SENSOR
Use the same procedure to set the hour
and minutes for T-1 to T-4 in TIME
PERIOD B.
: TIME PERIOD A
: TIME PERIOD A
: TIME PERIOD A
For both TIME PERIOD A and TIME PERIOD B, all settings
are “00:00” by default setting.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
z Settings for T-1 through T-4 cannot be made in such a way
that they extend over two days (i.e., include midnight). If
“00:00” (midnight) must be set, this should be done using
T-1.
Any setting of “00:00” for T-2 through T-4 is skipped.
Example: T-1
T-2
T-3
T-4
06:00
12:00
18:00
00:00
In the above example, T-4 (00:00) is skipped and T-3
operates between 18:00 and 06:00.
z Furthermore, when T-1 through T-4 are all set to “00:00”,
all but T-1 are ignored and T-1 operates from midnight to
midnight the next day.
NETWORK
OPERATION
The <TIME PERIOD SET> screen is displayed.
Use the same procedure to set the hour
and minutes for T-3 and T-4.
NETWORK
CONTROL
(2) Turn the jog dial to select “30” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
“00:” for T-3 flashes (indicating the hour).
3
SETTINGS
6
MENU
2
OPERATION
z TIME PERIOD A
T-1=6:00
T-2=11:30
T-3=13:30
T-4=18:00
z TIME PERIOD B
T-1=6:00
T-2=8:00
T-3=14:30
T-4=20:00
Turn the jog dial to select “TIME
PERIOD A” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
INTRODUCTION
Timer period settings
OTHER
74
English
1
INITIAL SET
11 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
Timer period operations settings
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
Example 2: Setting time period operation as follows.
Automatic selection and monitor masking for “TIME
PERIOD A”. (default setting)
Motion sensing for “TIME PERIOD B”.
9
EXIT/OSD
Turn the jog dial to select “MOTION
SENSOR” within “SELECT TIME
PERIOD” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
z Automatic selection, masking, and motion sensors are all
set to “TIME PERIOD A” by default setting.
z For the above settings, “SEQUENCE” indicates automatic
screen selection period and monitor settings (JP.134),
“MASK” indicates mask settings (JP.136), and “MOTION
SENSOR” indicates motion sensor settings (JP.105).
“TIME PERIOD A” flashes.
<TIME PERIOD SET>
TIME PERIOD
T-1
T-2
T-3
T-4
TIME PERIOD A 06:00 11:30 13:30 18:00
TIME PERIOD B 06:00 08:00 14:30 20:00
SELECT TIME PERIOD
SEQUENCE
MASK
MOTION SENSOR
TIME PERIOD A
TIME PERIOD A
TIME PERIOD A
10 Turn the jog dial to select “TIME
PERIOD B” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “TIME PERIOD A”.
<TIME PERIOD SET>
TIME PERIOD
T-1
T-2
T-3
T-4
TIME PERIOD A 06:00 11:30 13:30 18:00
TIME PERIOD B 06:00 08:00 14:30 20:00
SELECT TIME PERIOD
SEQUENCE
MASK
MOTION SENSOR
TIME PERIOD A
TIME PERIOD A
TIME PERIOD B
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
Description
‹TIME PERIOD A Applies the setting of “TIME PERIOD A”
TIME PERIOD B Applies the setting of “TIME PERIOD B”
Applies the same setting for a whole day,
rather than different settings for different
times.
ALL DAY LONG
z SEQUENCE, MASK:
Fixed to “T1 (00:00 - 24:00)”.
z MOTION SENSOR:
Depends on the setting of “T1”.
English
75
2
RECORD SET
[EXIT/OSD] button
Shuttle dial
[FUNC.] button
<MAIN MENU>
1.INITIAL SET
2.RECORD SET
3.GENERAL SET
4.SCREEN SET
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME
6.INITIALIZATION LOG
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS
8.ADVANCED MENU SET
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
OPERATION
MOVE:JOG
[MENU] button
INTRODUCTION
FULL indicator
MAIN MENU
SELECT:SHUTTLE
[CAMERA SELECT] button
The following settings can be made with <RECORD SET>.
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE : 12.5 FPS ( 166H)
REC PROGRAM GROUP
: OFF
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
SELECT:SHUTTLE
RECORDING DURATION BASE
->
REC RATE BASE
->
<PROGRAM REC SET>
PROGRAM : P-1
SELECT INDIVIDUAL CAMERA RATE (FPS)
01:1
02:1
03:1
04:1
05:1
06:1
07:1
08:1
09:1
10:1
11:1
12:1
13:1
14:1
15:1
16:1
CAUTION !
CONNECT CAMERA AND SET TIME
BEFORE SETUP
:
:
20 %
->
->
CAUTION: WHEN THE AREA SETTING IS CHANGED,
THE WHOLE AREA WILL BE INITIALIZED !
START
--:---:---:---:---:---:---:---:-*****
<TIMER SET>
STOP PROGRAM
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
*****
OFF
FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
7. ALARM REC MODE SET (JP.98)
Sets alarm recording, pre<ALARM REC MODE SET>
alarm recording, and
ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
motion sensors.
PICTURE QUALITY
PICTURE QUALITY SET
AUDIO RECORDING
ALARM INTERLEAVE
REC RATE: 12.5FPS,
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
REC RATE: ***** FPS,
ALARM TRIGGER
MOTION SENSOR
: OFF
76
SET
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
: ENHANCED
->
: OFF
: ONLY
DURATION: 20SEC
: ***
DURATION: *****
: ALARM
->
English
OTHER
3. RECORDING CONDITIONS SET (JP.85)
Sets whether overwriting is
<RECORDING CONDITIONS SET>
performed (by deleting old
RECORDING AREA
video) or recording is
OVERWRITE
: ON
stopped when the hard
ARCHIVE AREA
disk recording areas
MODE
: MANUAL COPY
become full. Also sets the
REMAINING DISK WARNING : 1%
auto delete.
AUTO DELETE
WEEK
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
DLY
EXT
57H
NETWORK
SETTINGS
RECORDING AREA
AREA FULL RESET
ARCHIVE AREA
AREA FULL RESET
1200GB
500GB
700GB
80 %
6. TIMER SET (JP.92)
Makes timer settings so
that operations can be
started at a specified time
or on a specified day.
NORMAL REC :
NETWORK
OPERATION
2. RECORDING AREA SET (JP.82)
Displays the total capacity
<RECORDING AREA SET>
of the hard disk and sets
TOTAL CAPACITY
:
the ratio of the recording
INTERNAL HDD
:
area to the archive area.
EXTERNAL HDD
:
NETWORK
CONTROL
5. PROGRAM REC SET (JP.90)
Sets program recording for
cameras.
1. NORMAL REC EASY SET (JP.77)
Makes basic settings
<NORMAL REC EASY SET>
based on a number of
days or a recording rate.
SETTINGS
MOVE:JOG
Jog dial
4. NORMAL REC MODE SET (JP.88)
Sets the picture quality,
<NORMAL REC MODE SET>
audio recording, recording
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
rate, and program period.
Configuration
<RECORD SET>
1.NORMAL REC EASY SET
2.RECORDING AREA SET
3.RECORDING CONDITIONS SET
4.NORMAL REC MODE SET
5.PROGRAM REC SET
6.TIMER SET
7.ALARM REC MODE SET
8.ALARM OPERATION SET
[TIMER] button
2
RECORD SET
3
8. ALARM OPERATION SET (JP.108)
Makes settings for
<ALARM OPERATION SET>
operation and display upon
ALARM RETRIGGER
: OFF
detecting an alarm.
Turn the jog dial to select “1.NORMAL
REC EASY SET” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
The <NORMAL REC EASY SET> screen is displayed.
MAIN MON. DISPLAY
ALARM PRIORITY
MON.2 DISPLAY
: FULL
: LAST
: NC
<NORMAL REC EASY SET>
->
REC RATE BASE
->
CAUTION !
CONNECT CAMERA AND SET TIME
BEFORE SETUP
Normal recording easy setup
Use the following procedure to make simple recording
settings. Two different setting methods may be used -- one
based on recording days, the other based on recording rate.
4
Turn the jog dial to select “RECORDING
DURATION BASE” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
The <RECORDING DURATION BASE> screen is displayed.
The number of detected cameras is indicated by “NUMBER
OF CAMERAS”.
z When easy setup settings and individual settings are both
set, the most recent settings override previous settings.
z Easy setup settings are cancelled as a result of the
following operations.
(1) When the number of cameras detected using “CAMERA
DETECT” differs from the number of cameras previously
set in the digital video recorder.
(2) When menu settings are loaded from a USB memory.
(3) When a new easy setup setting is performed.
(4) When setting values are changed for normal recording or
timer recording.
(5) When the recording area is changed using the
<RECORDING AREA SET> screen.
(6) When the mirroring setting is changed using the <HDD
SET> screen.
(7) When replacing or expanding the hard disk.
<RECORDING DURATION BASE>
RECORDING DURATION : -- DAYS
TIMER RECORDING(DLY) : OFF
START --:-- STOP --:-PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
REC RATE
:2
: ---- FPS/CAM
z Confirm that the number of cameras connected to the
digital video recorder is the same as the number of
displayed recording cameras. If this is not the case, check
the wiring between cameras and the digital video recorder
and then perform “CAMERA DETECT”. (JP.69)
Setting based on recording days
1
RECORDING DURATION BASE
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
5
MENU
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“1” flashes.
2
<RECORDING DURATION BASE>
RECORDING DURATION : 1 DAYS
TIMER RECORDING(DLY) : OFF
START --:-- STOP --:-PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
Turn the jog dial to select “2.RECORD
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <RECORD SET> screen is displayed.
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
REC RATE
English
77
:2
: 30.000FPS/CAM
2
6
RECORD SET
10 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“ENHANCED” flashes.
<RECORDING DURATION BASE>
RECORDING DURATION : 1 DAYS
TIMER RECORDING(DLY) : ON
START 08:00 STOP 20:00
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
The cursor moves to “TIMER RECORDING (DLY)”.
<RECORDING DURATION BASE>
RECORDING DURATION : 1 DAYS
TIMER RECORDING(DLY) : OFF
START --:-- STOP --:-PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
REC RATE
:2
: 60.000FPS/CAM
OPERATION
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
REC RATE
INTRODUCTION
Turn the jog dial to select the
“RECORDING DURATION” setting and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
:2
: 60.000FPS/CAM
11 Turn the jog dial to select the “PICTURE
7
QUALITY” setting and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “AUDIO RECORDING”.
“OFF” flashes.
<RECORDING DURATION BASE>
RECORDING DURATION : 1 DAYS
TIMER RECORDING(DLY) : ON
START 08:00 STOP 20:00
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
REC RATE
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
REC RATE
:2
: 60.000FPS/CAM
BASIC
Basic
NORMAL
Normal
‹ENHANCED
9
Enhanced
FINE
Fine
SUPER FINE
Super Fine
12 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
:2
: 60.000FPS/CAM
“OFF” flashes.
Set the time for timer recording.
Example: Timer recording from 8 AM to 8 PM
(1) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise and then turn the jog dial
to select “08” (hour).
(2) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise and then turn the jog dial
to select “00” (minutes).
(3) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise and then turn the jog dial
to select “20” (hour).
(4) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise, turn the jog dial to select
“00” (minutes) and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise
again.
The cursor moves to “PICTURE QUALITY”.
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
REC RATE
:2
: 60.000FPS/CAM
NETWORK
SETTINGS
<RECORDING DURATION BASE>
RECORDING DURATION : 1 DAYS
TIMER RECORDING(DLY) : ON
START 08:00 STOP 20:00
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
NETWORK
OPERATION
<RECORDING DURATION BASE>
RECORDING DURATION : 1 DAYS
TIMER RECORDING(DLY) : ON
START --:-- STOP --:-PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
Description
NETWORK
CONTROL
Setting
The cursor moves to “START”.
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
REC RATE
:2
: 60.000FPS/CAM
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
To activate timer operation, turn the jog
dial to select “ON” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
SETTINGS
8
<RECORDING DURATION BASE>
RECORDING DURATION : 1 DAYS
TIMER RECORDING(DLY) : OFF
START --:-- STOP --:-PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
OTHER
78
English
2
RECORD SET
13 Turn the jog dial to select “ON” or
16 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
“OFF” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
Example: ON
EXIT/OSD
<RECORDING DURATION BASE>
RECORDING DURATION : 1 DAYS
TIMER RECORDING(DLY) : ON
START 08:00 STOP 20:00
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: ON
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
REC RATE
z The recording rate is automatically calculated based on
recording settings and the number of connected cameras,
and this is indicated by “REC RATE”. All cameras record at
this rate. If a valid figure cannot be calculated, “ERROR!” is
displayed.
z When easy setup settings and individual settings are both
set, the most recent settings override previous settings.
z Easy setup settings cannot be used with program
recording or day-specific timer recording.
:2
: A60.000FPS/CAM
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
‹OFF
ON
Description
Audio is not recorded.
Audio is recorded.
Setting based on recording rate
(For recording rates that do not support audio recording, “--” is
displayed.)
1
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
z Audio recording can only be specified when the recording
rate is 1 FPS or greater.
z When set to “ON”, the letter “A” (indicating that audio is
recorded) is displayed in front of the recording rate. As
both video and audio is stored in the recording area, the
recording capacity decreases.
2
14 Turn the shuttle dial counter-clockwise.
The <RECORD SET> screen is displayed.
MENU
Turn the jog dial to select “2.RECORD
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <WARNING> screen is displayed.
<WARNING>
REC RATE SETTING IN THE MENU WILL BE
AUTOMATICALLY ADJUSTED.
3
ARE YOU SURE ?
NO
CHANGE:JOG
SET:SHUTTLE
The <NORMAL REC EASY SET> screen is displayed.
15 Turn the jog dial to select “YES” and
<NORMAL REC EASY SET>
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The display returns to the <NORMAL REC EASY SET>
screen.
<NORMAL REC EASY SET>
RECORDING DURATION BASE
->
REC RATE BASE
->
RECORDING DURATION BASE
->
REC RATE BASE
->
CAUTION !
CONNECT CAMERA AND SET TIME
BEFORE SETUP
CAUTION !
CONNECT CAMERA AND SET TIME
BEFORE SETUP
English
Turn the jog dial to select “1.NORMAL
REC EASY SETUP” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
79
2
4
RECORD SET
Turn the jog dial to select “REC RATE
BASE” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
[Settings] (“----” indicates default setting)
The <REC RATE BASE> screen is displayed.
The number of detected cameras is indicated by “NUMBER
OF CAMERAS”.
z Available recording rates differ depending on the number
of cameras connected.
The table above indicates recording rates that are
available when one camera is connected.
z When mirroring or pre-alarm recording is set to “ON”,
recording rates that can be set are limited.
:1
: ---- DAYS
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“OFF” flashes.
<REC RATE BASE>
REC RATE
: 25 FPS/CAM
TIMER RECORDING (DLY) : OFF
START --:-- STOP --:-PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“25” flashes.
8
:1
: 11 DAYS
:1
: 11 DAYS
To activate timer operation, turn the jog
dial to select “ON” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
NETWORK
CONTROL
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
RECORDING DURATION
<REC RATE BASE>
REC RATE
:25 FPS/CAM
TIMER RECORDING (DLY) : OFF
START --:-- STOP --:-PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
RECORDING DURATION
SETTINGS
7
z Confirm that the number of cameras connected to the
digital video recorder is the same as the number of
displayed recording cameras. If this is not the case, check
the wiring between cameras and the digital video recorder
and then perform “CAMERA DETECT”. (JP.69)
5
Description
OPERATION
<REC RATE BASE>
REC RATE
: ---- FPS/CAM
TIMER RECORDING (DLY) : OFF
START --:-- STOP --:-PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
RECORDING DURATION
INTRODUCTION
Setting
25, 16.67, 12.5, 8.333,
6.25, 5, 4.167, 3.571,
3.125, 2.778, 2.5, 2.273,
Recording is performed at the
1.923, 1.667, 1.471,
selected recording rate (unit: FPS).
1.316, 1.19, 1.087, 1, 0.5,
0.333, 0.25, 0.2, 0.1, 0.05,
0.033
The cursor moves to “START”.
<REC RATE BASE>
REC RATE
: 25 FPS/CAM
TIMER RECORDING (DLY) : ON
START --:-- STOP --:-PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
Turn the jog dial to select the “REC
RATE” setting and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “TIMER RECORDING (DLY)”.
Set the recording rate for each individual camera.
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
RECORDING DURATION
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
RECORDING DURATION
:1
: 11 DAYS
NETWORK
SETTINGS
<REC RATE BASE>
REC RATE
: 25 FPS/CAM
TIMER RECORDING (DLY) : OFF
START --:-- STOP --:-PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
NETWORK
OPERATION
6
:1
: 11 DAYS
OTHER
80
English
2
9
RECORD SET
12 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Set the time for timer recording.
Example: Timer recording from 8 AM to 8 PM
(1) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise and then turn the jog dial
to select “08” (hour).
(2) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise and then turn the jog dial
to select “00” (minutes).
(3) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise and then turn the jog dial
to select “20” (hour).
(4) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise, turn the jog dial to select
“00” (minutes) and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise
again.
The cursor moves to “PICTURE QUALITY”.
“OFF” flashes.
<REC RATE BASE>
REC RATE
: 25 FPS/CAM
TIMER RECORDING (DLY) : ON
START 08:00
STOP 20:00
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
RECORDING DURATION
13 Turn the jog dial to select “ON” or
<REC RATE BASE>
REC RATE
: 25 FPS/CAM
TIMER RECORDING (DLY) : ON
START 08:00
STOP 20:00
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
RECORDING DURATION
“OFF” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise. (JP.79)
For recording rates that do not support audio recording, “--” is
displayed.
:1
: 23 DAYS
<REC RATE BASE>
REC RATE
: 25 FPS/CAM
TIMER RECORDING (DLY) : ON
START 00:00 STOP 20:00
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
10 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“ENHANCED” flashes.
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
RECORDING DURATION
<REC RATE BASE>
REC RATE
: 25 FPS/CAM
TIMER RECORDING (DLY) : ON
START 08:00 STOP 20:00
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
RECORDING DURATION
:1
: 23 DAYS
:1
:
23 DAYS
14 Turn the shuttle dial counter-clockwise.
The <WARNING> screen is displayed.
:1
: 23 DAYS
<WARNING>
11 Turn the jog dial to select the “PICTURE
REC RATE SETTING IN THE MENU WILL BE
AUTOMATICALLY ADJUSTED.
QUALITY” setting and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise. (JP.78)
ARE YOU SURE ?
NO
The cursor moves to “AUDIO RECORDING”.
CHANGE:JOG
<REC RATE BASE>
REC RATE
: 25 FPS/CAM
TIMER RECORDING (DLY) : ON
START 08:00 STOP 20:00
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
RECORDING DURATION
SET:SHUTTLE
15 Turn the jog dial to select “YES” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The display returns to the <NORMAL REC EASY SET>
screen.
:1
: 23 DAYS
<NORMAL REC EASY SET>
RECORDING DURATION BASE
->
REC RATE BASE
->
CAUTION !
CONNECT CAMERA AND SET TIME
BEFORE SETUP
English
81
2
RECORD SET
16 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
3
Turn the jog dial to select
“2.RECORDING AREA SET” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <RECORDING AREA SET> screen is displayed.
EXIT/OSD
1200GB
500GB
700GB
80 %
20 %
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
OPERATION
<RECORDING AREA SET>
TOTAL CAPACITY
:
INTERNAL HDD
:
EXTERNAL HDD
:
RECORDING AREA
:
AREA FULL RESET ->
ARCHIVE AREA
:
AREA FULL RESET ->
z The recording duration is automatically calculated based
on recording settings and the number of connected
cameras, and this is indicated by “RECORDING
DURATION”. If a valid figure cannot be calculated,
“ERROR!” is displayed.
z When easy setup settings and individual settings are both
set, the most recent settings override previous settings.
z Easy setup settings cannot be used with program
recording or day-specific timer recording.
CAUTION: WHEN THE AREA SETTING IS CHANGED,
THE WHOLE AREA WILL BE INITIALIZED !
(2)
Displays the internal
hard disk capacity.
Use the following procedures to confirm the hard disk’s total
recording capacity and also the allocation for each recording
area.
(3)
Displays the expansion
unit hard disk capacity.
1
(4)
Sets the capacity of the
recording areas.
(5)
Displays the capacity of
the archive area
Displaying the recording areas
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
MENU
Turn the jog dial to select “2.RECORD
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
Recording
area
NETWORK
CONTROL
Displays the total
capacity of the hard disk.
SETTINGS
(1)
2
INTRODUCTION
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
Archive
area
The <RECORD SET> screen is displayed.
z The capacity of each hard disk can be checked using the
<HDD SET> screen. (JP.122, 124)
NETWORK
OPERATION
z When the recording area allocation is changed, the hard
disk is initialized and all previous recordings are deleted. It
is important, therefore, to store recorded video on a PC or
some other storage media before modifying recording
areas.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
OTHER
82
English
2
RECORD SET
4
„ Default hard disk settings
B Archive area
“80%” flashes.
20%
20
<RECORDING AREA SET>
TOTAL CAPACITY
:
INTERNAL HDD
:
EXTERNAL HDD
:
RECORDING AREA
:
AREA FULL RESET ->
ARCHIVE AREA
:
AREA FULL RESET ->
80%
A Recording
area
Hard disk recording areas
1200GB
500GB
700GB
80 %
20 %
CAUTION: WHEN THE AREA SETTING IS CHANGED,
THE WHOLE AREA WILL BE INITIALIZED !
Changing recording areas
5
„ Recording area allocations
The maximum allocation for the recording area is 99%.
The allocation for the archive area cannot be set manually.
When the recording area is modified, the archive area is
automatically reconfigured (minimum of 1%).
Turn the jog dial to set the
“RECORDING AREA” to “50” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The archive area is automatically set to 50%.
The <WARNING> screen is displayed. A message is
displayed indicating that the hard disk is to be initialized.
Example: Setting the recording area to 50%
1
Turn the jog dial to select “RECORDING
AREA” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
<WARNING>
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
THIS CHANGE WILL INITIALIZE THE DISK.
ALL RECORDING WILL BE ERASED.
ARE YOU SURE ?
MENU
NO
2
CHANGE:JOG
Turn the jog dial to select “2.RECORD
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
6
SET:SHUTTLE
Turn the jog dial to select “YES”.
The <RECORD SET> screen is displayed.
<WARNING>
THIS CHANGE WILL INITIALIZE THE DISK.
ALL RECORDING WILL BE ERASED.
ARE YOU SURE ?
3
YES
Turn the jog dial to select
“2.RECORDING AREA SET” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
CHANGE:JOG
SET:SHUTTLE
The <RECORDING AREA SET> screen is displayed.
<RECORDING AREA SET>
TOTAL CAPACITY
:
INTERNAL HDD
:
EXTERNAL HDD
:
RECORDING AREA
:
AREA FULL RESET ->
ARCHIVE AREA
:
AREA FULL RESET ->
z If the shuttle dial is turned clockwise with “NO” selected,
the <RECORDING AREA SET> screen is displayed. In
other words, the new settings are not applied.
1200GB
500GB
700GB
80 %
20 %
CAUTION: WHEN THE AREA SETTING IS CHANGED,
THE WHOLE AREA WILL BE INITIALIZED !
English
83
2
7
RECORD SET
3
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Turn the jog dial to select
“2.RECORDING AREA SET” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
INTRODUCTION
After the hard disk is initialized, the <RECORD SET> screen
appears and the new recording capacity setting is applied.
The <RECORDING AREA SET> screen is displayed.
HDD INITIALIZING !
8
1200GB
500GB
700GB
80 %
OPERATION
<RECORDING AREA SET>
TOTAL CAPACITY
:
INTERNAL HDD
:
EXTERNAL HDD
:
RECORDING AREA
:
AREA FULL RESET ->
ARCHIVE AREA
:
AREA FULL RESET ->
20 %
CAUTION: WHEN THE AREA SETTING IS CHANGED,
THE WHOLE AREA WILL BE INITIALIZED !
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
4
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
EXIT/OSD
Turn the jog dial to select “AREA FULL
RESET” under “RECORDING AREA”
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
SETTINGS
The <WARNING> screen is displayed.
To perform “AREA FULL RESET” for the archive area, select
“AREA FULL RESET” under “ARCHIVE AREA”.
Setting overwrite permission
<WARNING>
When “OVERWRITE” is set to “OFF” for recording conditions
and the recording areas become full, recording is
automatically stopped. In this case, overwrite permission can
be used to overwrite previous recordings.
ARE YOU SURE ?
Press the [MENU] button.
NO
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
MOVE:JOG
MENU
2
NETWORK
CONTROL
1
AREA FULL RESET
ARCHIVE AREA
5
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Turn the jog dial to select “YES” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Recordings can now be made to the recording area.
NETWORK
OPERATION
Turn the jog dial to select “2.RECORD
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
<RECORDING AREA SET>
TOTAL CAPACITY
: 1200GB
INTERNAL HDD
:
500GB
EXTERNAL HDD
:
700GB
RECORDING AREA
:
80%
AREA FULL RESET
->
ARCHIVE AREA
:
20%
AREA FULL RESET
->
The <RECORD SET> screen is displayed.
CAUTION : WHEN THE AREA SETTING IS CHANGED,
THE WHOLE AREA WILL BE INITIALIZED !
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
6
EXIT/OSD
OTHER
84
English
2
RECORD SET
4
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“ON” flashes for “OVERWRITE” under “RECORDING AREA”.
z When “AREA FULL RESET” is performed for
“RECORDING AREA”, the recordings in the recording area
are overwritten.
z When “AREA FULL RESET” is performed for “ARCHIVE
AREA”, the recordings in the archive area are deleted.
<RECORDING CONDITIONS SET>
RECORDING AREA
OVERWRITE
: ON
ARCHIVE AREA
MODE
: MANUAL COPY
Setting recording conditions
Use the following procedure to set whether to overwrite the
old video with the new one or stop recording when the hard
disk recording area becomes full. In the latter case, the
remaining capacity is shown as a percentage on the operation
display. A setting can also be made so that the FULL indicator
flashes when the remaining capacity falls to a specific
percentage.
Also set to copy images to the archive area manually (JP.53)
or automatically copy only alarm recordings.
5
Press the [MENU] button.
OFF
‹ON
6
Turn the jog dial to select
“3.RECORDING CONDITIONS SET” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <RECORDING CONDITIONS SET> screen is displayed.
<RECORDING CONDITIONS SET>
RECORDING AREA
OVERWRITE
: ON
ARCHIVE AREA
MODE
: MANUAL COPY
English
AUTO DELETE
: OFF
Recording is stopped when the normal
recording area becomes full.
Overwriting automatically starts from the
beginning of the recording area when it
becomes full.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
<RECORDING CONDITIONS SET>
RECORDING AREA
OVERWRITE
: ON
ARCHIVE AREA
MODE
: MANUAL COPY
The <RECORD SET> screen is displayed.
: 1%
Description
“MANUAL COPY” flashes.
Turn the jog dial to select “2.RECORD
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
REMAINING DISK WARNING
: OFF
Turn the jog dial to select “ON” or
“OFF” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
Setting
MENU
3
AUTO DELETE
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
2
: 1%
The cursor moves to “MODE” in “ARCHIVE AREA”.
Example: The recording areas and archive area are set so
as not to perform overwriting.
1
REMAINING DISK WARNING
85
REMAINING DISK WARNING
: 1%
AUTO DELETE
: OFF
2
7
RECORD SET
9
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
INTRODUCTION
Turn the jog dial to select the mode
value and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
“1%” flashes.
When “AUTO ALARM COPY” is selected, the <WARNING>
screen is displayed.
<RECORDING CONDITIONS SET>
RECORDING AREA
OVERWRITE
: ON
ARCHIVE AREA
MODE
: MANUAL COPY
<WARNING>
REMAINING DISK WARNING : 1 %
AUTO DELETE
: OFF
OPERATION
REC RATE SETTING IN THE MENU WILL BE
AUTOMATICALLY ADJUSTED.
ARCHIVE AREA INITIALIZE!
ARE YOU SURE ?
NO
CHANGE:JOG
10 Turn the jog dial to select the
SET:SHUTTLE
“REMAINING DISK WARNING” setting
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
The remaining capacity can be set anywhere between 1%
(default setting) and 10%.
Description
‹MANUAL COPY Manually copy recording images (JP.53).
Automatically copy alarm recordings to the
archive area.
SETTINGS
AUTO ALARM
COPY
<RECORDING CONDITIONS SET>
RECORDING AREA
OVERWRITE
: ON
ARCHIVE AREA
MODE
: MANUAL COPY
When “AUTO ALARM COPY” is changed to “MANUAL
COPY” the following <WARNING> screen is displayed.
REMAINING DISK WARNING : 1 %
<WARNING>
AUTO DELETE
: OFF
11 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
ARE YOU SURE ?
NO
MOVE:JOG
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
SELECT:SHUTTLE
EXIT/OSD
If “MANUAL COPY” is unchanged, the cursor moves to
“REMAINING DISK WARNING”. Proceed to step 9.
The FULL indicator flashes when the remaining capacity for
the recording areas reaches the specified percentage value.
When the FULL indicator flashes or the recording areas
become full, use overwrite permission. (JP.84)
To initialize, select “YES” with the jog
dial and turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
FULL indicator
Operation display
Remaining
capacity
display
01-01-07 00:00:00 REC 5% EN A ALARM 0000000
02
NETWORK
SETTINGS
To not initialize, select “NO” and turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
NETWORK
OPERATION
8
NETWORK
CONTROL
AREA FULL RESET
ARCHIVE AREA
OTHER
86
English
2
RECORD SET
Setting auto deleting
z The archive area cannot be automatically overwritten. Set
overwrite permission (JP.84) when the recording area is full.
Use the following procedure to set the storage period for
recorded data.
When the set period has expired, the corresponding data
cannot be played back.
1
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
MENU
2
Turn the jog dial to select “2.RECORD
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <RECORD SET> screen is displayed.
3
Turn the jog dial to select
“3.RECORDING CONDITIONS SET” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <RECORDING CONDITIONS SET> screen is displayed.
<RECORDING CONDITIONS SET>
RECORDING AREA
OVERWRITE
: ON
ARCHIVE AREA
MODE
: MANUAL COPY
4
REMAINING DISK WARNING
:1%
AUTO DELETE
: OFF
Turn the jog dial to select “AUTO
DELETE” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
“OFF” flashes.
<RECORDING CONDITIONS SET>
RECORDING AREA
OVERWRITE
: ON
ARCHIVE AREA
MODE
: MANUAL COPY
REMAINING DISK WARNING : 1 %
AUTO DELETE
English
87
: OFF
2
5
RECORD SET
3
Set the storage period for recorded data to “OFF” or within the
range of “1 DAY - 99 DAYS” (full days).
Turn the jog dial to select “4.NORMAL
REC MODE SET” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
INTRODUCTION
Turn the jog dial to select the storage
period for the data and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
The <NORMAL REC MODE SET> screen is displayed.
OPERATION
<NORMAL REC MODE SET>
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE : 12.5 FPS ( 166H)
REC PROGRAM GROUP
: OFF
<RECORDING CONDITIONS SET>
RECORDING AREA
OVERWRITE
: ON
ARCHIVE AREA
MODE
: MANUAL COPY
REMAINING DISK WARNING : 1 %
AUTO DELETE
6
: OFF
4
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“ENHANCED” flashes.
SETTINGS
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
<NORMAL REC MODE SET>
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE : 12.5 FPS ( 166H)
REC PROGRAM GROUP
: OFF
EXIT/OSD
Setting normal recording
1
5
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
Turn the jog dial to select the “PICTURE
QUALITY” setting and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “AUDIO RECORDING”.
NETWORK
CONTROL
Use the following procedure to make normal recording
settings for picture quality, audio recording and recording rate.
Alternatively, a program number set using “PROGRAM REC
SET” can be specified to set these parameters.
MENU
Turn the jog dial to select “2.RECORD
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
The <RECORD SET> screen is displayed.
Description
BASIC (BA)
Basic
NORMAL (NO)
Normal
‹ENHANCED (EN)
NETWORK
OPERATION
2
<NORMAL REC MODE SET>
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE : 12.5 FPS ( 166H)
REC PROGRAM GROUP
: OFF
Enhanced
Fine
SUPER FINE (SF)
Super Fine
INDIV.
Picture quality is set for each camera.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
FINE (FI)
OTHER
88
English
2
RECORD SET
„ Setting the picture quality for each camera
(1) Select “INDIV.” and turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “PICTURE QUALITY SET”.
(2) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <PICTURE QUALITY SET> screen is displayed.
On the DSR-5709P, cameras No. 01-09 are displayed.
z Set when the audio recording rate range is set to above A1
FPS.
z When set to “ON”, the letter “A” (indicating that audio will
be recorded) is displayed in front of “REC RATE”. As both
video and audio is stored in the recording area, the
recording capacity decreases.
z Audio can only be played back at the same rate during
recording.
z Playback of audio and video may be out of sync in some
areas.
<PICTURE QUALITY SET>
CHANNEL
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
NORMAL REC EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN
ALARM REC EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN
8
CHANNEL
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
NORMAL REC EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN
ALARM REC EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN
“12.5 FPS” flashes.
<NORMAL REC MODE SET>
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: ON
REC RATE :A 12.5 FPS ( 156H)
REC PROGRAM GROUP
: OFF
(3) Turn the jog dial to select the camera number and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“EN” flashes.
(4) Turn the jog dial to select the picture quality and then turn
the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to the next camera number.
(5) Set the picture quality for the other cameras in the same
way.
(6) Turn the shuttle dial counter-clockwise.
The display returns to the <NORMAL REC MODE SET>
screen.
6
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
9
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“OFF” flashes.
Turn the jog dial to select the “REC
RATE” setting and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “REC PROGRAM GROUP”.
(Default setting: 12.5 FPS)
The allowable recording time depends on the “PICTURE
QUALITY” setting. (JP.88)
<NORMAL REC MODE SET>
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE : 12.5 FPS ( 166H)
REC PROGRAM GROUP
: OFF
Allowable
recording
time
7
Turn the jog dial to select the “AUDIO
RECORDING” setting (ON/OFF) and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
(Default setting: OFF)
<NORMAL REC MODE SET>
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: ON
REC RATE : A 12.5 FPS ( 156H)
REC PROGRAM GROUP
: OFF
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
‹OFF
ON
English
<NORMAL REC MODE SET>
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: ON
REC RATE : A 12.5 FPS ( 156H)
REC PROGRAM GROUP
: OFF
Description
Audio is not recorded.
Audio is recorded.
89
Setting
Description
100, 50, 25, 16.67,
‹12.5, 8.333, 6.25, 5,
4.167, 3.571, 3.125,
2.778, 2.5, 2.273, 1.923,
1.667, 1.471, 1.316, 1.19,
1.087, 1, 0.5, 0.333, 0.25,
0.2, 0.1, 0.05, 0.033
Recording is performed at the
selected recording rate (unit: FPS).
2
RECORD SET
Use the following procedure to program the camera numbers
for recording. Four programs can be set. For example,
Program No. 1 could be setup to record from cameras No. 1
through No. 4 only, whereas Program No. 2 could be setup to
record from cameras No. 3 through No. 6. In addition, these
programs can also be used for timer recording.
“OFF” flashes.
<NORMAL REC MODE SET>
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: ON
REC RATE : A 12.5 FPS ( 156H)
REC PROGRAM GROUP
: OFF
<PROGRAM REC SET>
PROGRAM GROUP” number and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Example: Setting Program No. 1 to record video only from
cameras No. 1 through No. 3 at a recording rate of 5
Description
Video from all cameras is recorded at the
same rate.
Used when recording with Program No. 3.
P-4
Used when recording with Program No. 4.
MENU
2
12 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
Turn the jog dial to select “2.RECORD
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <RECORD SET> screen is displayed.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
Used when recording with Program No. 2.
P-3
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
NETWORK
OPERATION
1
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Used when recording with Program No. 1.
NETWORK
CONTROL
<NORMAL REC MODE SET>
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: ON
REC RATE : ***** FPS (
0H)
REC PROGRAM GROUP
: P-1
P-2
57H
(1) PROGRAM
Selects Program No. 1 through Program No. 4.
(2) SELECT INDIVIDUAL CAMERA RATE
Sets which of the connected cameras to record from.
Recording rates can also be set for each camera.
Example: P-1
P-1
PROGRAM : P-1
SELECT INDIVIDUAL CAMERA RATE (FPS)
01:1
02:1
03:1
04:1
05:1
06:1
07:1
08:1
09:1
10:1
11:1
12:1
13:1
14:1
15:1
16:1
NORMAL REC :
11 Turn the jog dial to select the “REC
SETTINGS
(1)
(2)
‹OFF
OPERATION
z Even if audio recording is set to “ON” using the <NORMAL
REC MODE SET> screen, certain settings for program
recording may make audio recording impossible. Set more
than one of the 16 channels to 1 FPS or greater to record
audio.
On the DSR-5709P, set more than one of the nine
channels.
10 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Setting
INTRODUCTION
Setting program recording
z When only one camera is connected, recording is
performed at 25 FPS even if 50 or 100 FPS is set.
z When four cameras are connected and 100 FPS is set,
recording is performed at the recording rate close to the set
rate (100 FPS) divided by the number of cameras.
(Example: When 8 cameras are connected and the
recording rate setting is 100 FPS, the actual recording rate
is 12.5 FPS)
z When mirroring or pre-alarm recording is set to “ON”,
recording rates that can be set are limited.
EXIT/OSD
OTHER
90
English
2
3
RECORD SET
7
Turn the jog dial to select “5.PROGRAM
REC SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
Turn the jog dial to select “5” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Camera No. 1 is now set to record at a rate of 5.
The cursor moves to “02”.
The <PROGRAM REC SET> screen is displayed.
<PROGRAM REC SET>
<PROGRAM REC SET>
PROGRAM : P-1
SELECT INDIVIDUAL CAMERA RATE (FPS)
01:5
02:1
03:1
04:1
05:1
06:1
07:1
08:1
09:1
10:1
11:1
12:1
13:1
14:1
15:1
16:1
PROGRAM : P-1
SELECT INDIVIDUAL CAMERA RATE (FPS)
01:1
02:1
03:1
04:1
05:1
06:1
07:1
08:1
09:1
10:1
11:1
12:1
13:1
14:1
15:1
16:1
NORMAL REC :
4
NORMAL REC :
57H
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Setting
“P-1” flashes for “PROGRAM”.
OFF
PROGRAM : P-1
SELECT INDIVIDUAL CAMERA RATE (FPS)
01:1
02:1
03:1
04:1
05:1
06:1
07:1
08:1
09:1
10:1
11:1
12:1
13:1
14:1
15:1
16:1
NORMAL REC :
Recording rate is not set.
z For program recording, set recording rate per channel.
Recording rates that can be set per channel are
automatically calculated.
z When mirroring or pre-alarm recording is set to “ON”,
recording rates that can be set are limited.
57H
Turn the jog dial to select a
“PROGRAM” number (for example, P-1)
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
8
The cursor moves to “01” under “SELECT INDIVIDUAL
CAMERA RATE (FPS)”.
Use the same procedure to set the
recording rates for cameras No. 2 and 3,
and set the recording rate to “OFF” for
cameras No. 4 through 16.
On the DSR-5709P, set the recording rate to “OFF” for
cameras No. 4 through 9.
<PROGRAM REC SET>
PROGRAM : P-1
SELECT INDIVIDUAL CAMERA RATE (FPS)
01:1
02:1
03:1
04:1
05:1
06:1
07:1
08:1
09:1
10:1
11:1
12:1
13:1
14:1
15:1
16:1
NORMAL REC :
6
<PROGRAM REC SET>
PROGRAM : P-1
SELECT INDIVIDUAL CAMERA RATE
01:5
02:5
03:5
05:OFF
06:OFF
07:OFF
09:OFF
10:OFF
11:OFF
13:OFF
14:OFF
15:OFF
57H
NORMAL REC :
(FPS)
04:OFF
08:OFF
12:OFF
16:OFF
57H
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
9
“1” flashes.
PROGRAM : P-1
SELECT INDIVIDUAL CAMERA RATE (FPS)
01:1
02:1
03:1
04:1
05:1
06:1
07:1
08:1
09:1
10:1
11:1
12:1
13:1
14:1
15:1
16:1
NORMAL REC :
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
<PROGRAM REC SET>
English
Description
25, 12.5, 6.25, 3.125,
Recording is performed at the
1.563, ‹1, 0.5, 0.333,
selected recording rate (unit: FPS).
0.25, 0.2, 0.1, 0.05, 0.033
<PROGRAM REC SET>
5
57H
EXIT/OSD
57H
91
2
RECORD SET
Timer settings
Use the following procedures to set recording start and stop
times using the timer function.
1
Timer setting items
<TIMER SET>
STOP PROGRAM
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
*****
OFF
(6)
FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
SET
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
2
Turn the jog dial to select “2.RECORD
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <RECORD SET> screen is displayed.
3
Turn the jog dial to select “6.TIMER
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <TIMER SET> screen is displayed.
4
START
--:---:---:---:---:---:---:---:-*****
<TIMER SET>
STOP PROGRAM
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
*****
OFF
SET
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
SET
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“SUN” flashes.
WEEK
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
DLY
EXT
(7) Settings for timer recording of over 24 hours
Use these lines for timer recording spanning more than 24
hours.
<TIMER SET>
STOP PROGRAM
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
*****
OFF
OTHER
z The settings made using <NORMAL REC MODE SET>
are used to set picture quality and audio recording for timer
recording. (JP.88)
z Ensure that start and end times are input using 24-hour
notation.
z If the start and end times are on different days (i.e.,
midnight is included), a “T” is displayed to the left of the
end time.
START
--:---:---:---:---:---:---:---:-*****
NETWORK
SETTINGS
FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
NETWORK
OPERATION
WEEK
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
DLY
EXT
NETWORK
CONTROL
(1) WEEK
This column is used to select the days of the week for timer
settings. Select “DLY” to perform timer recording for the same
duration at the same rate every day. The 7th (default: “SAT”)
and 8th (default: “DLY”) lines are used for timer recording
settings of over 24 hours.
(2) START
This column is used to enter the 24-hour time at which to start
timer recording.
(3) STOP
This column is used to enter the 24-hour time at which to stop
timer recording.
If the start and end times are on different days (i.e., midnight
is included), a “T” is displayed to the left of the end time.
(4) PROGRAM
This column is used to enable timer recording using the
program function “P-1” through “P-4”. (JP.90)
(5) FPS
This column is used to set the recording rate.
No setting is required here when using program recording.
(6) SET
This column is used to set timer recording to “ON” or “OFF”.
When set to “OFF”, timer recording is disabled.
SETTINGS
START
--:---:---:---:---:---:---:---:-*****
(5)
MENU
OPERATION
(7)
WEEK
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
DLY
EXT
(4)
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
Timer setting items can be used to set times at which to start
and stop recording and the recording rate on each specified
day of the week.
(1) (2) (3)
INTRODUCTION
Making timer reservations every day or every
week for the same duration with the same
recording rate
92
English
2
5
RECORD SET
8
Turn the jog dial to set the day, and turn
the shuttle dial clockwise.
“--” (indicating the hour) from “START” flashes.
WEEK
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
DLY
EXT
6
START
--:---:---:---:---:---:---:---:-*****
<TIMER SET>
STOP PROGRAM
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
*****
OFF
“OFF” flashes for “SET”.
FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
SET
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
WEEK
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
DLY
EXT
Turn the jog dial to select the
“PROGRAM” value and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
START
18:30
--:---:---:---:---:---:---:-*****
<TIMER SET>
STOP PROGRAM
23:15
OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
*****
OFF
FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
‹OFF
SET
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Description
Recording is performed at the
selected recording rate (unit: FPS).
Turn the jog dial to set the timer “ON”/
“OFF”, and turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The cursor appears in the bottom line.
English
WEEK
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
DLY
EXT
Video from all cameras is recorded at the
same rate.
Used when recording with Program No. 1.
P-2
Used when recording with Program No. 2.
P-3
Used when recording with Program No. 3.
P-4
Used when recording with Program No. 4.
SET
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Setting
9
Description
P-1
FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
100, 50, 25, 16.67,
‹12.5, 8.333, 6.25, 5,
4.167, 3.571, 3.125,
2.778, 2.5, 2.273, 1.923,
1.667, 1.471, 1.316, 1.19,
1.087, 1, 0.5, 0.333, 0.25,
0.2, 0.1, 0.05, 0.033
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
<TIMER SET>
STOP PROGRAM
23:15
OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
*****
OFF
z When only one camera is connected, recording is
performed at 25 FPS even if 50 or 100 FPS are set.
z When two or more cameras are connected and 50 or 100
FPS is set, the actual recording rate is roughly the
recording rate divided by the number of cameras.
(Example: When 8 cameras are connected and the
recording rate setting is 100 FPS, the actual recording rate
is 12.5 FPS)
z When mirroring or pre-alarm recording is set to “ON”,
recording rates that can be set are limited.
“12.5” flashes when “OFF” is selected.
When something other than “OFF” is selected, “FPS”
becomes “*****” and “OFF” flashes for “SET”.
Proceed to step 9.
WEEK
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
DLY
EXT
START
18:30
--:---:---:---:---:---:---:-*****
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting the “START” and “STOP” time.
Example: Setting a start time of 6:30 PM and an end time
of 11:15 PM
(1) Turn the jog dial and set “18” (indicating the hour), and
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
(Also use 1-9 on the [CAMERA SELECT] button or the
[QUAD] button (0) to input.)
(2) Turn the jog dial and set “30” (indicating the minutes),
and turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
(3) Set the hours and minutes likewise for “STOP”
“OFF” flashes.
7
Turn the jog dial to set the recording
rate and turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
93
START
18:30
--:---:---:---:---:---:---:-*****
<TIMER SET>
STOP PROGRAM
23:15
OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
*****
OFF
FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
SET
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
2
RECORD SET
10 Use the same procedure to set other
1
„ To change a setting item
Turn the shuttle dial to select the item to be changed and then
turn the jog dial to change the setting.
INTRODUCTION
To cancel all set timer reservations
items.
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
MENU
START
18:30
09:00
--:---:---:---:---:---:-*****
FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
SET
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
2
OPERATION
WEEK
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
DLY
EXT
<TIMER SET>
STOP PROGRAM
23:15
OFF
21:00
OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
*****
OFF
Turn the jog dial to select “2.RECORD
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <RECORD SET> screen is displayed.
11 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
3
EXIT/OSD
SETTINGS
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
Turn the jog dial to select “6.TIMER
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <TIMER SET> screen is displayed.
Individual reservations
(High)
“DLY”
Priority
WEEK
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
DLY
EXT
“EXT”
(Low)
z If a reservation for a particular day or a daily reservation
overlaps with each other, priority is given to that with the
earliest start time. If both have the same start time, priority
is given to that with the highest setting position in the
menu.
<TIMER SET>
STOP PROGRAM
21:00
OFF
21:00
OFF
21:00
OFF
21:00
OFF
21:00
OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
*****
OFF
FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
Press the [MENU RESET] button.
All setting items are cleared.
SHUTTLE
C
LE
AR
EN
T
SET
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
NETWORK
OPERATION
4
z Set specific dates as holidays to enable the same
operation as on Sunday. (JP.71)
START
09:00
09:00
09:00
09:00
09:00
--:---:---:-*****
NETWORK
CONTROL
z If timer settings overlap, recording is performed in the
following priority order.
ER
NETWORK
SETTINGS
[MENU RESET] button
MENU
RESET
OTHER
94
English
2
RECORD SET
4
Timer recordings spanning more than 24 hours
Use the following procedures to set timer recordings spanning
more than 24 hours. Perform in line 7 (default: “SAT”) and line
8 (default: “DLY”) of the <TIMER SET> screen.
Turn the jog dial to select line 7 (SAT)
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“SAT” in the “WEEK” column flashes.
WEEK
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
DLY
EXT
Example: A Program No. 1 timer recording from 10:30 AM
on Monday to 8:30 PM on Wednesday with a recording
rate of 5 FPS
1
Press the [MENU] button.
Line 7
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
MENU
2
5
START
--:---:---:---:---:---:---:---:-*****
<TIMER SET>
STOP PROGRAM
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
*****
OFF
FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
SET
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Make settings in the “WEEK” and
“START” columns.
(1) Turn the jog dial to select “MON” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
“---” (hour) flashes.
Turn the jog dial to select “2.RECORD
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
MON
The <RECORD SET> screen is displayed.
--:--
--:--
OFF 12.5 FPS
OFF
(2) Turn the jog dial to select “10” (hour) and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
(3) Turn the jog dial to select “30” (minutes) and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
3
MON
Turn the jog dial to select “6.TIMER
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
6
The <TIMER SET> screen is displayed.
WEEK
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
DLY
EXT
START
--:---:---:---:---:---:---:---:-*****
<TIMER SET>
STOP PROGRAM
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
*****
OFF
FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
SET
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
--:--
OFF 12.5 FPS
OFF
Turn the jog dial to set the end time to
“**” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The “DLY” item on line 8 automatically changes to “TUE” (i.e.,
the day after that set on line 7) and flashes. Items that do not
need to be set are indicated with asterisks (*).
MON
TUE
English
10:30
95
10:30
**:**
**:**
--:--
*** *****FPS
OFF 12.5 FPS
***
OFF
2
7
RECORD SET
Set “WEEK” and “STOP” to stop
recording and make the settings for
“FPS” and “SET”.
(1)
10:30
**:**
**:**
20:30
*** *****FPS
OFF
5FPS
***
ON
(2) (3)
(4)
(6)
(5)
Use the following procedure to control the start and end of
recording in response to signals received via the EXT TIMER
IN terminal on the rear of the digital video recorder.
Example: Recording at a rate of 5 FPS using the EXT
TIMER IN terminal
1
Connect the signal line from the
external timer to the EXT TIMER IN
terminal within the rear panel control
terminal block.
OPERATION
(1) Turn the jog dial to select “WED” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
(2) Turn the jog dial to select “20” (hour) and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
(3) Turn the jog dial to select “30” (minutes) and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
(4) Turn the jog dial and set “OFF” (indicating program
recording) to “P-1” and turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
(5) Turn the jog dial to set “FPS” (recording rate) to “5” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
(6) Turn the jog dial to select “ON” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
External timer signal
External timer input
(with a pulse width of at least 1 second)
2
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
SETTINGS
8
INTRODUCTION
MON
WED
Timer recording using an external timer
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
MENU
EXIT/OSD
NETWORK
CONTROL
3
Turn the jog dial to select “2.RECORD
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <RECORD SET> screen is displayed.
NETWORK
OPERATION
4
Turn the jog dial to select “6.TIMER
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <TIMER SET> screen is displayed.
START
--:---:---:---:---:---:---:---:-*****
<TIMER SET>
STOP PROGRAM
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
*****
OFF
FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
SET
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
NETWORK
SETTINGS
WEEK
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
DLY
EXT
OTHER
96
English
2
5
RECORD SET
9
Turn the jog dial to select line 9 (EXT)
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
“OFF” flashes.
EXIT/OSD
WEEK
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
DLY
EXT
6
START
--:---:---:---:---:---:---:---:-*****
<TIMER SET>
STOP PROGRAM
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
*****
OFF
FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
SET
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Setting timer recording
Use the following procedure to activate or cancel timer
recording.
1
TIMER
Turn the jog dial to select “OFF” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
z The TIMER indicator lights up and the digital video
recorder enters timer recording standby mode.
z Press the [TIMER] button once again to cancel timer
recording.
z “REC” is displayed in the operation display when a signal is
received (with a pulse width of at least 1 second) via the
EXT TIMER IN terminal, and monitoring video is recorded
in the recording area.
“12.5” flashes.
EXT
7
*****
*****
OFF
12.5 FPS OFF
z External timer recording and normal timer recording can be
combined.
z Connect the signal line from the external timer to the EXT
TIMER IN terminal. External timer recording is not possible
until a timer is connected.
Turn the jog dial to select “5” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“OFF” flashes.
EXT
8
*****
*****
OFF
5FPS
OFF
Turn the jog dial to select “ON” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to line 1.
EXT
English
*****
*****
OFF
Press the [TIMER] button.
5FPS
ON
97
2
RECORD SET
5
To set alarm recording
Turn the jog dial to select the “ALARM
RECORDING” setting and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “PICTURE QUALITY”.
Use the following procedure to select the picture quality, audio
recording and recording rate for alarm recording.
1
Press the [MENU] button.
MENU
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Turn the jog dial to select “2.RECORD
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
Setting
‹OFF
Alarm recording is enabled regardless of
whether or not timer recording is enabled.
AL-REC ON
TIMER
Alarm recording is enabled only during
timer recording.
AL-REC OFF
TIMER
Alarm recording is enabled only when
timer recording is disabled.
OLY AL-RC
ON TMR
Alarm recording is enabled only during the
time set in the timer setting. Normal
recording is not enabled.
* “OLY AL-RC ON TMR” can be enabled simply by making a
timer setting. Accordingly, there is no need to press the
[TIMER] button.
The <ALARM REC MODE SET> screen is displayed.
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: ***
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
z When “ALARM RECORDING” is set to “OFF” the cursor
cannot move to another item.
6
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“ENHANCED” flashes.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“OFF” flashes for “ALARM RECORDING”.
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: ***
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
NETWORK
SETTINGS
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
NETWORK
OPERATION
4
ENABLED
NETWORK
CONTROL
Turn the jog dial to select “7.ALARM
REC MODE SET” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
Description
Alarm recording is disabled.
SETTINGS
The <RECORD SET> screen is displayed.
3
OPERATION
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE: 15FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
2
INTRODUCTION
Setting alarm recording
OTHER
98
English
2
7
RECORD SET
8
Turn the jog dial to select the “PICTURE
QUALITY” setting and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “AUDIO RECORDING”.
Turn the jog dial to select “AUDIO
RECORDING” and turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
“OFF” flashes.
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
9
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
Description
BASIC (BA)
Basic
NORMAL (NO)
Normal
‹ENHANCED (EN)
Turn the jog dial to select “ON” or
“OFF” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The cursor moves to “ALARM INTERLEAVE”.
Enhanced
FINE (FI)
Fine
SUPER FINE (SF)
Super Fine
INDIV.
Picture quality is set for each camera.
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: ON
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE:A12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
„ Setting the picture quality for each camera
(1) Select “INDIV.” and turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “PICTURE QUALITY”.
(2) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <PICTURE QUALITY SET> screen is displayed.
On the DSR-5709P, cameras No. 01-09 are displayed.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
<PICTURE QUALITY SET>
‹OFF
CHANNEL
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
NORMAL REC EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN
ALARM REC EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN
ON
CHANNEL
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
NORMAL REC EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN
ALARM REC EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN
Audio is recorded.
z The settings for audio recording are restricted by the
settings for “ALARM INTERLEAVE (Step 11)” as follows:
ONLY/SW/ALL:
Audio recording is enabled when “REC RATE (Step 13)” is
set to 1 FPS or more.
ALL (P-1 – 4):
Audio recording is enabled when “REC RATE” for any one
of the program-registered cameras is set to 1 FPS or more.
ONLY (P-1 – 4):
Audio recording is disabled.
z You see an “A” (audio recording mark) displayed next to
“REC RATE” whenever audio recording is enabled.
(3) Turn the jog dial to select the camera number and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“EN” flashes.
(4) Turn the jog dial to select the picture quality and then turn
the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to the next camera number.
(5) Set the picture quality for the other cameras in the same
way.
(6) Turn the shuttle dial counter-clockwise.
The display returns to the <ALARM REC MODE SET>
screen.
English
Description
Audio is not recorded.
99
2
RECORD SET
10 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
* Example of recording pattern for SW and ONLY
SW
01
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: ON
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE:A12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
Alarm
02
03
02
Alarm
04
02
01
02
Alarm
03
02
02
02
02
02
04
13 Turn the jog dial to select the “REC
RATE” setting and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “DURATION”.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Description
Recording is performed at the
selected recording rate (unit: FPS).
NETWORK
SETTINGS
<“ALL” program mode>
When any one of the connected cameras
registered in the program recording setting
receives an alarm, video recording starts for all
the connected cameras at a recording rate
which was independently specified for each
connected camera in the program.
z Specify a program you want to apply from
“P-1 to P-4”.
z Audio recording is available only when any
one of the cameras has a recording rate of 1
FPS or more.
Setting
50, 25, 16.67, ‹12.5,
8.333, 6.25, 5, 4.167,
3.571, 3.125, 2.778, 2.5,
2.273, 1.923, 1.667,
1.471, 1.316, 1.19, 1.087,
1, 0.5, 0.333, 0.25, 0.2,
0.1, 0.05, 0.033
NETWORK
OPERATION
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: ON
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE:A12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
NETWORK
CONTROL
ALL (P-1)
ALL (P-2)
ALL (P-3)
ALL (P-4)
02
SETTINGS
ONLY (P-1)
ONLY (P-2)
ONLY (P-3)
ONLY (P-4)
<“ONLY” program mode>
When a connected camera registered in the
program recording setting receives an alarm,
video recording starts at a recording rate
specified in the program.
z Specify the program you want to apply from
“P-1” to “P-4”.
z Audio recording is not available.
08
OPERATION
When any one of the cameras receives an
alarm, all connected cameras start recording
in order.
04
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: ON
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE:A12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
Description
ALL
07
If “ALARM INTERLEAVE (step 11)” is set to other than the
program mode, you see “A12.5FPS” flash for “REC RATE”,
indicating that setting is acceptable.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
SW
02
12 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: ON
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE:A12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
Recording is switched between video from a
camera for which an alarm has occurred and
video from all connected cameras.
06
Alarm is cancelled
The cursor moves to “REC RATE/DURATION”.
‹ONLY
04
Recording until alarm is cancelled
INTERLEAVE” setting and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
Video is recorded only from cameras with an
alarm occurring.
05
Alternate recording of multiple alarm recordings
ONLY
11 Turn the jog dial to select the “ALARM
Setting
INTRODUCTION
“ONLY” flashes.
100
OTHER
z If “ALARM INTERLEAVE (step 11)” is set to program
mode, “****” is displayed and you cannot select the
recording rate.
English
2
RECORD SET
16 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
“ALARM” appears in the operation display.
When an alarm occurs, the number of alarms is displayed.
z When only one camera is connected, recording is
performed at 25 FPS even if 50 FPS is set.
z Assuming that two or more cameras are connected and
“ALARM INTERLEAVE” is set to “ALL”, when 50 FPS is
set, the actual recording rate is roughly the recording rate
divided by the number of cameras. (Example: When four
cameras are connected and the recording rate setting is 50
FPS, the actual recording rate is 12.5 FPS.) It varies
depending on the setting of “ALARM INTERLEAVE” and
the number of alarms.
EXIT/OSD
Number of alarms
“ALARM” display
01-01-07 00:00:00 REC REPEAT EN A ALARM 0000001
14 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“20SEC” flashes.
02
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: ON
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE:A12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: ***
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
z When an additional alarm is received on another channel
while alarm recording is in progress, the number of alarms
is incremented, i.e.they are counted as two alarms.
However, when an additional alarm is received on the
same channel, both alarms are treated as one (e.g. an
additional alarm is received on CH1 while the channel is
being used for alarm recording.)
15 Turn the jog dial to select the
“DURATION” setting and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “PRE-ALARM RECORDING”.
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: ON
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE:A12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
Description
5SEC, 10SEC, ‹20SEC,
40SEC, 1MIN, 2MIN, 3MIN,
4MIN, 5MIN, 10MIN, 15MIN
Records for the set duration for
each alarm.
CC
Records while an alarm is
activated.
Recording continues for five
seconds even if entry is less than
five seconds.
English
101
2
RECORD SET
5
Use the following procedure to set the recording rate and
time.
Turn the jog dial to select “ON” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “REC RATE”.
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
MENU
Turn the jog dial to select “2.RECORD
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
ON
Pre-alarm recording is enabled.
6
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“12.5” flashes.
(Default setting: 12.5FPS)
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: ON
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 5SEC
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
Turn the jog dial to select “7.ALARM
REC MODE SET” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
The <ALARM REC MODE SET> screen is displayed.
NETWORK
OPERATION
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
4
Description
Pre-alarm recording is disabled.
NETWORK
CONTROL
3
Setting
‹OFF
SETTINGS
2
OPERATION
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: ON
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 5SEC
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
z Settings cannot be made for “PRE-ALARM RECORDING”
when “ALARM REC” is set to “OFF”.
1
INTRODUCTION
To set pre-alarm recording
NETWORK
SETTINGS
Turn the jog dial to select “PRE-ALARM
RECORDING” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
“OFF” flashes.
OTHER
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
102
English
2
7
RECORD SET
9
Turn the jog dial to select the “REC
RATE” setting and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
“PRE” appears in the operation display. When an alarm
occurs, “ALARM” is displayed.
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: ON
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 5SEC
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
EXIT/OSD
Number of alarms
“PRE” display
01-01-07 00:00:00 REC REPEAT EN A PRE 0000000
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
Description
100, 50, 25, 16.67,
‹12.5, 8.333, 6.25, 5,
4.167, 3.571, 3.125,
2.778, 2.5, 2.273, 1.923,
1.667, 1.471, 1.316, 1.19,
1.087, 1
Recording is performed at the
selected recording rate (unit: FPS).
02
z When “PRE-ALARM RECORDING” is set to “ON”, press
the [REC/STOP] button to record past video.
The alarm number next to “PRE” is not updated.
Refer to “Table of pre-alarm recording times” (JP.224) when
setting.
z Pre-alarm recording is performed during the period set by
“DURATION” before an alarm occurs. To play back prealarm recordings, perform alarm search (using the
[SEARCH] button). (JP.39)
Recordings are played back at the point the alarm occurs.
Use the shuttle dial to begin reverse playback.
z When mirroring is set to “ON”, configurable recording rates
are limited.
z When only one camera is connected, recording is
performed at 25 FPS even if 50 or 100 FPS are set.
z When four cameras are connected and 100 FPS is set,
recording is performed at the recording rate close to the set
rate (100 FPS) divided by the number of cameras.
(Example: When 8 cameras are connected and the
recording rate setting is 100 FPS, the actual recording rate
is 12.5 FPS)
8
Turn the jog dial to select the
“DURATION” setting and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “ALARM TRIGGER”.
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: ON
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 5SEC
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
‹5SEC, 10SEC, 20SEC,
40SEC, 1MIN, 2MIN, 3MIN,
4MIN, 5MIN, 10MIN, 15MIN
English
Description
Records for the set duration.
103
2
RECORD SET
5
Use this setting to indicate how alarms are to be detected.
1
Turn the jog dial to select an alarm
detection method and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “MOTION SENSOR”.
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
Turn the jog dial to select “2.RECORD
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
‹ALARM
Turn the jog dial to select “7.ALARM
REC MODE SET” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
Alarm recording is performed when
a motion sensor detects movement.
(JP.105)
ALARM AND SENSOR
Alarm recording is performed when
both the external alarm*1 and a
motion sensor are activated
simultaneously.
ALARM OR SENSOR
Alarm recording is performed when
either the external alarm*1 or a
motion sensor is activated.
*1 External alarm
z Switch is attached to the ALARM IN terminal on the rear
panel and alarm is detected by opening and closing the
switch.
NETWORK
CONTROL
[Setting conditions]
z When “SENSOR”, “ALARM AND SENSOR” or “ALARM
OR SENSOR” is selected, the motion sensors must be set.
6
Turn the jog dial to select “ALARM
TRIGGER” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
“ALARM” flashes.
EXIT/OSD
NETWORK
SETTINGS
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: ***
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
NETWORK
OPERATION
4
Alarm recording is performed when
an external alarm*1 occurs.
SENSOR
The <ALARM REC MODE SET> screen is displayed.
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: ***
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
Description
SETTINGS
3
OPERATION
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
MENU
2
INTRODUCTION
Setting alarm triggers
OTHER
104
English
2
RECORD SET
3
Setting the motion sensors
Use the following procedure to set motion sensors on video
from each camera so that alarms can be detected.
Turn the jog dial to select “2.RECORD
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <RECORD SET> screen is displayed.
(1)
(2)
4
CH01
T-1
LEVEL : OFF
MODE : A
(3)
(4)
(5)
The <ALARM REC MODE SET> screen is displayed.
(1) Motion sensor setting
Display changes in response to the sensor condition. Settings
are made using the jog dial.
-: Sensor off
A or B: Sensor on
(2) Camera number display
Changes when a [CAMERA SELECT] button is pressed. Use
this item to select the camera for which motion sensors are to
be set up.
(3) Time period
Select an interval set using “TIME PERIOD” (JP.74).
(4) LEVEL
Sets the sensitivity level of the motion sensors.
OFF: No motion sensor has been set.
1 to 10: A motion sensor is set. Lower values correspond to
higher sensitivity levels and vice versa.
(5) MODE
Sets the detection method for the motion sensors. (JP.107)
1
2
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: ***
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: SENSOR
MOTION SENSOR
->
5
Turn the jog dial to select “MOTION
SENSOR” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: SENSOR
MOTION SENSOR
->
Make timer settings for “TIME PERIOD
A” and “TIME PERIOD B” on the <TIME
PERIOD SET> screen. (JP.74)
Press the [MENU] button.
The <MOTION SENSOR>
screen is displayed.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
MENU
English
Turn the jog dial to select “7.ALARM
REC MODE SET” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor (reverse
highlighting) is displayed at
the top left position.
Cursor can be moved to the
left and right using the jog
dial if a mark indicating such
actions is displayed in the
upper right of the screen.
105
CH01
T-1
LEVEL : OFF
MODE : A
2
6
RECORD SET
Press a [CAMERA SELECT] button.
(1) Turn the jog dial to move the cursor (reverse highlighting)
to the start position and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
(2) Turn the jog dial to select “A” or “B” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise. (“A” or “B” are yellow.)
(3) Turn the jog dial to move the cursor (reverse highlighting)
to the end position and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
On the DSR-5709P, press the [CAMERA SELECT] 1-9
button.
Turn the jog dial to move the cursor
(reverse highlighting) to the position
where a sensor is to be set and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Start position
Turn the jog dial while pressing the [FUNC.] button to move
the cursor (reverse highlighting) vertically.
Cursor can be moved up and down using the jog dial if a mark
indicating such actions is displayed in the upper right of the
screen.
OPERATION
7
INTRODUCTION
„ To specify the start position and end position
together within a range
Press the button of the number of the camera for which
motion sensors are to be set up.
A A A A A A A A
A A A A A A A A
A A A A A A A A
End position
CH01
LEVEL : OFF
MODE : A
SETTINGS
FUNC.
T-1
Setting time periods
11 Turn the jog dial to select “T-1” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“T-1” flashes.
8
T-1
LEVEL : OFF
MODE : A
Turn the jog dial to select “A” or “B”.
NETWORK
CONTROL
CH01
A
CH01
T-1
LEVEL : OFF
MODE : A
A
CH01
9
T-1
LEVEL : OFF
period and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
MODE : A
The cursor moves to “LEVEL”.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise twice.
NETWORK
OPERATION
12 Turn the jog dial to select the time
“A” or “B” : Sensor set
“-”
: No sensor
The change is defined.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
A
A
CH01
CH01
T-1
LEVEL : OFF
T-1
LEVEL : OFF
MODE : A
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
MODE : A
10 Use the same procedure to set other
sensor positions.
Description
Time period T-1
T-2
Time period T-2
T-3
Time period T-3
T-4
Time period T-4
OTHER
Setting
‹T-1
If the time period is set to “ALL DAY LONG”, the display
depends on the setting of “T-1”.
106
English
2
RECORD SET
16 Turn the jog dial to select the “MODE”
Setting sensitivity levels
setting and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
13 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to the top left sensor.
“OFF” flashes.
A
A
CH01
T-1
LEVEL : OFF
CH01
MODE : A
Setting
sensitivity level between “1” to “10” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “MODE”.
LEVEL : OFF
Setting
B
The motion sensor alarm is triggered when a
moving object is detected in B.
A AND B
The motion sensor alarm is triggered when a
moving object is detected by a sensor in both A
and B.
A AND NB
By setting A to important points (moving objects)
and B to non-moving points, the motion sensor
alarm is not triggered when the overall screen
brightness changes. The motion sensor alarm
only activates when A experiences a change
and B does not.
A TO B
The motion sensor alarm is triggered when an
object is detected moving from A to B. (within 2
seconds from A to B)
B TO A
The motion sensor alarm is triggered when an
object is detected moving from B to A. (within 2
seconds from B to A)
1 to 10
Description
Motion sensing is disabled.
Motion sensing is enabled. Lower numbers
correspond to higher levels of sensitivity.
Description
‹A
MODE : A
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
‹OFF
MODE : A
The motion sensor alarm is triggered when a
moving object is detected in A.
A
T-1
LEVEL : OFF
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
14 Turn the jog dial to select “OFF” or a
CH01
T-1
17 Use the same procedure to set “LEVEL”
and “MODE” for “T-2” through “T-4”.
Setting sensor modes
15 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“A” flashes.
z Motion sensor positions are common for “T-1” through “T4” and different settings cannot be made.
18 Turn the shuttle dial counter-clockwise.
A
CH01
English
Motion sensor settings are confirmed and the <ALARM REC
MODE SET> screen is displayed once again.
T-1
LEVEL : OFF
MODE : A
107
2
RECORD SET
3
„ To stop motion sensor recording
Turn the jog dial to select “8.ALARM
OPERATION SET” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
INTRODUCTION
Press the [MENU] button and select “2.RECORD SET”, “7.
ALARM REC MODE SET”, and “MOTION SENSOR” and
when the motion sensor settings screen appears set “LEVEL”
to “OFF”.
The <ALARM OPERATION SET> screen is displayed.
<ALARM OPERATION SET>
ALARM RETRIGGER
: OFF
CH01
T-1
LEVEL : OFF
: FULL
: LAST
: NC
OPERATION
MAIN MON. DISPLAY
ALARM PRIORITY
MON.2 DISPLAY
A
MODE : A
4
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“OFF” flashes for “ALARM RETRIGGER”.
<ALARM OPERATION SET>
ALARM RETRIGGER
: OFF
MAIN MON. DISPLAY
ALARM PRIORITY
MON.2 DISPLAY
: FULL
: LAST
: NC
5
Setting alarm operation and display
Use the following procedure to display the main monitor and
monitor 2 when an alarm is detected.
The cursor moves to “MAIN MON. DISPLAY”.
Press the [MENU] button.
<ALARM OPERATION SET>
ALARM RETRIGGER
: ON
MAIN MON. DISPLAY
ALARM PRIORITY
MON.2 DISPLAY
MENU
Turn the jog dial to select “2.RECORD
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
The <RECORD SET> screen is displayed.
: FULL
: LAST
: NC
NETWORK
OPERATION
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
2
Turn the jog dial to select “ON” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
NETWORK
CONTROL
z The period for “T-1” through “T-4” as set in step 12
changes to that of “TIME PERIOD A” or “TIME PERIOD B”
on the <TIME PERIOD SET> screen.
1
SETTINGS
z The sensitivity level can be checked on the setting screen.
When motion is detected, the sensor color changes from
green to red, and a buzzer is sounded.
If detection is too sensitive, an alarm can be triggered even
by slight changes in lighting; accordingly, the sensitivity
level should be set to match the camera location.
OTHER
108
English
2
RECORD SET
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
‹OFF
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Description
Setting
Even if a new alarm is received on the same
channel during alarm recording, the duration is not
extended.
If a new alarm is received on the same channel
during alarm recording, the duration is extended
and both alarms are treated as one.
(Example: Even if alarms A and C are received in
succession, or alarms A, B and C are received in
order as shown below, alarm recordings A and C
are treated as one, provided that alarm C occurs
while alarm recording is in progress for alarm A.)
ON
CH 1
Alarm
Alarm recording A
Alarm recording C
6
9 *1
When an alarm is detected, the main monitor
displays multi 9 screens.
16*2
When an alarm is detected, the main monitor
displays multi 16 screens.
NC
The display on the main monitor does not change
when an alarm is detected.
8
Alarm
CH 2
‹FULL
*1 Multi screen display is laid out according to the settings on
P.132. Therefore, the image for the channel for which an
alarm was detected may not be displayed depending on
the settings when multi 9 screen display is selected.
Special care should be taken.
*2 Only for the DSR-5716P
Example:
Alarm
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“LAST” flashes.
Alarm recording B
<ALARM OPERATION SET>
ALARM RETRIGGER
: ON
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“FULL” flashes.
MAIN MON. DISPLAY
ALARM PRIORITY
MON.2 DISPLAY
<ALARM OPERATION SET>
ALARM RETRIGGER
: ON
MAIN MON. DISPLAY
ALARM PRIORITY
MON.2 DISPLAY
7
: FULL
: LAST
: NC
9
: FULL
: LAST
: NC
Turn the jog dial to select the “ALARM
PRIORITY” setting and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “MON.2 DISPLAY”.
Turn the jog dial to select the “MAIN
MON. DISPLAY” setting and then turn
the shuttle dial clockwise.
<ALARM OPERATION SET>
ALARM RETRIGGER
: ON
The cursor moves to “ALARM PRIORITY”.
MAIN MON. DISPLAY
ALARM PRIORITY
MON.2 DISPLAY
<ALARM OPERATION SET>
ALARM RETRIGGER
: ON
MAIN MON. DISPLAY
ALARM PRIORITY
MON.2 DISPLAY
: FULL
: LAST
: NC
: FULL
: LAST
: NC
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
‹LAST
English
Description
When an alarm is detected, the main monitor
displays in full screen format the video on the
channel containing the alarm.
109
Description
When a number of alarms occur, the most
recent alarm video is given priority and is
displayed.
FIRST
When a number of alarms occur, only the
video for the first alarm is displayed.
However, if the duration for the first alarm
expires, video for the next alarm is
displayed.
SWITCH
When a number of alarms occur, the
display switches between the video from
the corresponding cameras, showing each
for one second.
2
RECORD SET
12 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
EXIT/OSD
z “ALARM PRIORITY” cannot be selected when “MAIN
MON. DISPLAY” is set to “9”, “16” or “NC”.
Canceling an alarm
10 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
<ALARM OPERATION SET>
ALARM RETRIGGER
: ON
OPERATION
To forcibly cancel an alarm during alarm operation, press the
[CAMERA SELECT] button for the camera with the alarm and
hold it for approximately 3 seconds. Alternatively, connect a
switch between the ALARM RESET terminal and C terminal
(the grounded terminal), and turn on the switch to cancel an
alarm that occurs.
“NC” flashes.
MAIN MON. DISPLAY
ALARM PRIORITY
MON.2 DISPLAY
INTRODUCTION
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
z After an alarm duration has ended, the display returns to
the screen prior to the alarm.
ALARM
RESET
: FULL
: LAST
: NC
C
SETTINGS
11 Turn the jog dial to select the “MON.2
DISPLAY” value and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
NETWORK
CONTROL
<ALARM OPERATION SET>
ALARM RETRIGGER
: ON
MAIN MON. DISPLAY
ALARM PRIORITY
MON.2 DISPLAY
: FULL
: LAST
: NC
NETWORK
OPERATION
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
‹NC
Description
When an alarm is detected, Monitor 2 does
not change.
LAST
When a number of alarms occur, the most
recent alarm video is given priority and is
displayed.
FIRST
When a number of alarms occur, only the
video for the first alarm is displayed.
However, if the duration for the first alarm
expires, video for the next alarm is
displayed.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
SWITCH
When a number of alarms occur, the
display switches between the video from
the corresponding cameras, showing each
for one second.
OTHER
110
English
3
GENERAL SET
[EXIT/OSD] button
Main Menu
[MENU] button
<MAIN MENU>
1.INITIAL SET
2.RECORD SET
3.GENERAL SET
4.SCREEN SET
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME
6.INITIALIZATION LOG
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS
8.ADVANCED MENU SET
MOVE:JOG
Shuttle dial
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
Jog dial
SELECT:SHUTTLE
4. RS-485 SET (JP.120)
Makes settings when
connecting a controller,
etc. to the RS-485
terminal.
Configuration
The following settings can be made with <GENERAL SET>.
<GENERAL SET>
1.DISPLAY SET
2.BUZZER SET
3.SECURITY LOCK SET
4.RS-485 SET
5.HDD SET
6.NETWORK SET
7.NETWORK CONTROL SET
MOVE:JOG
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
5. HDD SET (JP.122)
Perform hard disk
initialization and mirroring
settings.
SELECT:SHUTTLE
1. DISPLAY SET (JP.112)
Specifies information
displayed on the monitor
and output of the control
terminal (OUTPUT1/2).
DATE
QUALITY
ALARM COUNT
TITLE
NO VIDEO
<DISPLAY SET>
: ON TIME
: ON AUDIO
: ON ALARM TYPE
: ON VIDEO LOSS
: ON
CONTROL OUT
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 2
: NON REC
: ARCHIVE FULL
:
:
:
:
ON
ON
ON
ON
6. NETWORK SET (JP.125)
Allows the digital video
recorder to be connected
to a PC via a network.
2. BUZZER SET (JP.114)
Turns the buzzer on or off.
<BUZZER SET>
ALARM
: OFF
DISK FULL
: ON
DISK ERROR
: ON
LOCK WARNING
: ON
KEY IN
: OFF
NON REC
: OFF
DISK TEMPERATURE: ON
<HDD SET>
DISK 1
: 250GB <- DISK 2
EX-DISK 1 : 250GB <- EX-DISK 2
EX-DISK 3 : 250GB <- EX-DISK 4
DISK INITIALIZE
CAUTION : ALL RECORDING WILL BE
MIRRORING
: OFF
PLAYBACK DRIVE : ***
: 250GB
: 250GB
: 250GB
->
ERASED!
<NETWORK SET>
: OFF
: 192.168. 0. 1
: 255.255.255. 0
: 0. 0. 0. 0
: 00080
: NO LIMIT
->
: 1500(ETHERNET)
:08-00-7B-81-22-4C
DHCP
IP ADDRESS
SUBNET MASK
GATEWAY
PORT
NETWORK SPEED
DNS SET
MTU SIZE
MAC ADDRESS
7. NETWORK CONTROL SET (JP.128)
Sets the method for
<NETWORK CONTROL SET>
remote control over a
NETWORK CONTROL
: ON
network.
3. SECURITY LOCK SET (JP.115)
Sets the key lock,
<SECURITY LOCK SET>
password lock and other
LOCK MODE
: KEY
lock modes, the user level
FREE ACCESS LEVEL
: NO
for copying and camera
control, and user ID.
OPERATION AUTHORITY
: NORMAL
COPY
CAMERA CONTROL
<RS-485 SET>
DATA SPEED
: 19200
STATUS INFO
: OFF
ALARM INFO
: OFF
ADDRESS
: 001
NETWORK STATUS
PICTURE QUALITY
OPERATION AUTHORITY
COPY/DOWNLOAD
CAMERA CONTROL
: LV2,3,4
: LV2,3,4
USER ID SET
:
:
:
:
:
ON
ENHANCED
NORMAL
LV3,4
LV2,3,4
->
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
USER ID SET
->
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
English
111
3
GENERAL SET
1
INTRODUCTION
Setting data display
z Settings (1) to (7) are indicated in the operation display
area on the monitor.
You can determine whether or not to display the information
including date and time on the monitor. The default setting is
“ON” for every item. Specify “OFF” according to necessity.
<Example>
(1)
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
(2)
(3)(4)
(6)
(5)
01-01-07 00:00:00 REC 1% EN A ALARM 0000000
02
OPERATION
MENU
(7)
2
4
Turn the jog dial to select “3.GENERAL
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“ON” flashes for “DATE”.
The <GENERAL SET> screen is displayed.
Turn the jog dial to select “1.DISPLAY
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
(1)
(5)
(9)
(3)
(7)
DATE
QUALITY
ALARM COUNT
TITLE
NO VIDEO
:
:
:
:
ON
ON
ON
ON
(2)
(6)
: NON REC
: ARCHIVE FULL
ON
ON
ON
ON
Turn the jog dial to select “ON ”or
“OFF” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The cursor moves to “TIME” and “ON” flashes. Select “ON” or
“OFF” using the jog dial.
(4)
(8)
: NON REC
: ARCHIVE FULL
(1) DATE
Displays and hides the date.
(2) TIME
Displays and hides the time.
(3) QUALITY
Displays and hides the picture quality mode.
(4) AUDIO
Displays and hides the audio recording mode.
(5) ALARM COUNT
Displays and hides the number of current alarms.
(6) ALARM TYPE
Displays and hides the type of alarm recording.
(7) TITLE
Displays and hides the camera titles.
(8) VIDEO LOSS
Specifies whether or not to flash the [CAMERA SELECT]
button lamp when video signal is interrupted.
(9) NO VIDEO
Specifies whether or not to display the “NO VIDEO” message
for channels not connected to a camera.
6
DATE
QUALITY
ALARM COUNT
TITLE
NO VIDEO
<DISPLAY SET>
: ON TIME
: ON AUDIO
: ON ALARM TYPE
: ON VIDEO LOSS
: ON
CONTROL OUT
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 2
: NON REC
: ARCHIVE FULL
:
:
:
:
ON
ON
ON
ON
NETWORK
OPERATION
CONTROL OUT
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 2
<DISPLAY SET>
: ON TIME
: ON AUDIO
: ON ALARM TYPE
: ON VIDEO LOSS
: ON
CONTROL OUT
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 2
:
:
:
:
NETWORK
CONTROL
5
The <DISPLAY SET> screen is displayed.
<DISPLAY SET>
: ON TIME
: ON AUDIO
: ON ALARM TYPE
: ON VIDEO LOSS
: ON
SETTINGS
3
DATE
QUALITY
ALARM COUNT
TITLE
NO VIDEO
Use the same procedure to set the other
items to “ON” or “OFF”.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
OTHER
112
English
3
GENERAL SET
8
z A maximum of 9,999,999 alarms can be displayed in the
operation display. When this number is exceeded, the
alarm count returns to 0000000.
z When “ALARM RECORDING” is set to “OFF” on the
<ALARM REC MODE SET> screen, the number of alarms
and type of alarm recording are not displayed.
z When “ALARM RECORDING” is set to “ENABLED” on the
<ALARM REC MODE SET> screen, the operation display
changes as follows.
z “ALARM” is displayed when alarm video is recorded or
played back.
z “PRE” is displayed when pre-alarm video is recorded or
played back.
z “ARCHIV” is displayed when video is played back from
the archive area.
The cursor moves to “OUTPUT 2”.
9
Setting for control terminal output
English
CONTROL OUT
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 2
: NON REC
: ARCHIVE FULL
:
:
:
:
CONTROL OUT
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 2
: VIDEO LOSS
: ARCHIVE FULL
:
:
:
:
ON
ON
ON
ON
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
FULL” or “TIMER REC OUT”, and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
11 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
EXIT/OSD
z After video loss is detected, the setting can be cancelled by
performing either of the following:
(1) Input the video signal.
(2) If no video input is required, use a [CAMERA SELECT]
button to select the camera for which video loss was
detected and then press the same button for
approximately 3 seconds.
z The output of “VIDEO LOSS” is provided independently,
even if you specify “OFF” for “VIDEO LOSS” in setting data
display. (JP.112)
You will see “NON REC” flash.
<DISPLAY SET>
: ON TIME
: ON AUDIO
: ON ALARM TYPE
: ON VIDEO LOSS
: ON
<DISPLAY SET>
: ON TIME
: ON AUDIO
: ON ALARM TYPE
: ON VIDEO LOSS
: ON
10 Turn the jog dial to select “ARCHIVE
Turn the jog dial to select “OUTPUT 1”,
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
DATE
QUALITY
ALARM COUNT
TITLE
NO VIDEO
DATE
QUALITY
ALARM COUNT
TITLE
NO VIDEO
You will see “ARCHIVE FULL” flash.
Next, specify setting for “CONTROL OUT”.
You can select output from the control terminal (OUTPUT 1/2)
on the rear panel.
(1) OUTPUT 1 terminal
z NON REC (default setting):
Outputs when recording is stopped.
z VIDEO LOSS:
Outputs when video signal is interrupted.
(2) OUTPUT 2 terminal
z ARCHIVE FULL (default setting):
Outputs when the remaining space of archive area
reaches the warning level.
z TIMER REC OUT:
Outputs when timer recording is stopped.
7
Turn the jog dial to select “NON REC” or
“VODEO LOSS”, and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
ON
ON
ON
ON
113
3
GENERAL SET
1
z Setting is invalid when the hard disk is operated in a RAID
unit.
z Select “OFF” if you use hard disks other than those
designated by SANYO, as this function may not properly
work on them.
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
4
MENU
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“OFF” flashes for “ALARM”.
<BUZZER SET>
ALARM
: OFF
DISK FULL
: ON
DISK ERROR
: ON
LOCK WARNING
: ON
KEY IN
: OFF
NON REC
: OFF
DISK TEMPERATURE: ON
Turn the jog dial to select “3.GENERAL
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <GENERAL SET> screen is displayed.
Turn the jog dial to select “2.BUZZER
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
Turn the jog dial to select “ON” or
“OFF” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The cursor moves to “DISK FULL”.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
‹OFF
ON
The buzzer sounds when an alarm occurs.
6
7
Use the same procedure to set the other
items to “ON” or “OFF”.
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
EXIT/OSD
NETWORK
SETTINGS
(1) ALARM (default setting: OFF)
Sounds a buzzer when an alarm occurs.
(2) DISK FULL (default setting: ON)
Sounds a buzzer when overwriting is not permitted and the
hard disk capacity becomes insufficient.
(3) DISK ERROR (default setting: ON)
Sounds a buzzer accompanied with a warning message,
when an abnormal condition has occurred in the hard disk
drive.
(4) LOCK WARNING (default setting: ON)
Sounds a buzzer if a button is pressed while the security lock
is on. Specifically, the buzzer sounds twice with an interval of
approximately 0.5 seconds.
(5) KEY IN (default setting: OFF)
Sounds a buzzer when a button is pressed.
(6) NON REC (default setting: OFF)
Sounds a buzzer when recording is stopped.
(7) DISK TEMPERATURE (default setting: ON)
Sounds a buzzer accompanied with a warning message,
when the temperature has exceeded a given value in the hard
disk drive.
Description
The buzzer does not sound when an alarm
occurs.
NETWORK
OPERATION
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
<BUZZER SET>
ALARM
: OFF
DISK FULL
: ON
DISK ERROR
: ON
LOCK WARNING
: ON
KEY IN
: OFF
NON REC
: OFF
DISK TEMPERATURE: ON
NETWORK
CONTROL
<BUZZER SET>
ALARM
: ON
DISK FULL
: ON
DISK ERROR
: ON
LOCK WARNING
: ON
KEY IN
: OFF
NON REC
: OFF
DISK TEMPERATURE: ON
The <BUZZER SET> screen is displayed.
(1)
SETTINGS
5
3
OPERATION
2
INTRODUCTION
Setting the buzzer
Use the following procedure to set a warning buzzer to sound
for alarms or when hard disk space becomes insufficient.
OTHER
z To stop a buzzer, press any button or turn either the jog
dial or shuttle dial.
114
English
3
GENERAL SET
5
Setting the security lock
Use the following procedure to restrict operation of the digital
video recorder based on the user level.
1
Turn the jog dial to select the mode and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
If “PASSWORD” is selected, the cursor moves to “FREE
ACCESS LEVEL”. Proceed to step 6.
If “KEY” or “NETWORK” is selected, the cursor moves to
“OPERATION AUTHORITY”. Proceed to step 7.
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
<SECURITY LOCK SET>
LOCK MODE
: PASSWORD
FREE ACCESS LEVEL
: NO
MENU
2
Turn the jog dial to select “3.GENERAL
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
USER ID SET
->
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
‹KEY
Turn the jog dial to select “3.SECURITY
LOCK SET” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
The <SECURITY LOCK SET> screen is displayed.
6
<SECURITY LOCK SET>
LOCK MODE
: KEY
FREE ACCESS LEVEL
: NO
OPERATION AUTHORITY
COPY
CAMERA CONTROL
: NORMAL
: LV2,3,4
: LV2,3,4
USER ID SET
->
Description
All key operations are locked. When keys
are pressed while locked, buzzer is
sounded.
PASSWORD
Password lock is enabled. When keys are
pressed while locked, the input screen for
user ID and password is displayed and
operation restrictions are restricted
according to ID level.
NETWORK
Control the DVR from a PC on a network.
If “LOCK MODE” is set to
“PASSWORD”, turn the jog dial to
select “FREE ACCESS LEVEL” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
<SECURITY LOCK SET>
LOCK MODE
: PASSWORD
FREE ACCESS LEVEL
: NO
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
4
: NORMAL
: LV2,3,4
: LV2,3,4
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
The <GENERAL SET> screen is displayed.
3
OPERATION AUTHORITY
COPY
CAMERA CONTROL
Turn the jog dial to select “LOCK
MODE” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
“KEY” flashes.
OPERATION AUTHORITY
COPY
CAMERA CONTROL
: NORMAL
: LV2,3,4
: LV2,3,4
USER ID SET
->
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
<SECURITY LOCK SET>
LOCK MODE
: KEY
FREE ACCESS LEVEL
: NO
Setting
‹NON
Description
Locks all operations.
OPERATION AUTHORITY
COPY
CAMERA CONTROL
: NORMAL
: LV2,3,4
: LV2,3,4
LV1
Excludes LV1 users from the password
lock.
USER ID SET
->
LV2
Excludes LV2 users from the password
lock.
LV3
Excludes LV3 users from the password
lock.
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
Refer to P.117 for details on user level and authorization.
English
115
3
7
GENERAL SET
10 Turn the jog dial to select the copy level
Turn the jog dial to select “OPERATION
AUTHORITY” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
INTRODUCTION
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “CAMERA CONTROL”.
“NORMAL” flashes.
<SECURITY LOCK SET>
LOCK MODE
: KEY
FREE ACCESS LEVEL
: NO
<SECURITY LOCK SET>
LOCK MODE
: PASSWORD
FREE ACCESS LEVEL
: NO
: NORMAL
: LV2,3,4
: LV2,3,4
USER ID SET
->
Setting
9
Allows users at Level 3 or higher to copy
images to external media.
LV4
Allows users at Level 4 to copy images to
external media.
Description
User privileges remain at the default
setting.
OPERATION AUTHORITY
COPY
CAMERA CONTROL
: CHANGE
: LV2,3,4
: LV2,3,4
USER ID SET
->
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
Changes copying to external media and
camera control privileges.
NETWORK
OPERATION
CHANGE
LV3, 4
<SECURITY LOCK SET>
LOCK MODE
: KEY
FREE ACCESS LEVEL
: NO
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
‹NORMAL
Allows users at Level 2 or higher to copy
images to external media.
“LV2, 3, 4” flashes for “CAMERA CONTROL”.
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
Setting
‹LV2, 3, 4
NETWORK
CONTROL
->
Description
11 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
<SECURITY LOCK SET>
LOCK MODE
: KEY
FREE ACCESS LEVEL
: NO
USER ID SET
->
SETTINGS
If no changes are to be made to user privileges, select
“NORMAL” and go to step 13.
The cursor moves to “COPY”.
: CHANGE
: LV2,3,4
: LV2,3,4
USER ID SET
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Turn the jog dial to select “NORMAL” or
“CHANGE” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
OPERATION AUTHORITY
COPY
CAMERA CONTROL
: CHANGE
: LV2,3,4
: LV2,3,4
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
8
OPERATION AUTHORITY
COPY
CAMERA CONTROL
OPERATION
OPERATION AUTHORITY
COPY
CAMERA CONTROL
If “OPERATION AUTHORITY” is set to
“CHANGE”, turn the jog dial to select
“COPY” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
“LV2, 3, 4” flashes for “COPY”.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
<SECURITY LOCK SET>
LOCK MODE
: KEY
FREE ACCESS LEVEL
: NO
OPERATION AUTHORITY
COPY
CAMERA CONTROL
: CHANGE
: LV2,3,4
: LV2,3,4
USER ID SET
->
OTHER
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
116
English
3
GENERAL SET
12 Turn the jog dial to select the camera
Registering a user
control level and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
Use the following procedure to set the user ID, password and
level.
The user ID must be between one and eight alphanumeric
characters, and the password between four and eight
alphanumeric characters.
Characters that can be entered: 0 to 9, A to Z
The cursor moves to “USER ID SET”.
<SECURITY LOCK SET>
LOCK MODE
: KEY
FREE ACCESS LEVEL
: NO
OPERATION AUTHORITY
COPY
CAMERA CONTROL
: CHANGE
: LV2,3,4
: LV2,3,4
USER ID SET
->
1
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
MENU
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
2
Description
‹LV2, 3, 4
Allows users at Level 2 or higher to control
cameras from the digital video recorder.
LV3, 4
Allows users at Level 3 or higher to control
cameras from the digital video recorder.
LV4
Allows users at Level 4 to control cameras
from the digital video recorder.
Turn the jog dial to select “3.GENERAL
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <GENERAL SET> screen is displayed.
13 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
3
EXIT/OSD
Turn the jog dial to select “3.SECURITY
LOCK SET” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
The <SECURITY LOCK SET> screen is displayed.
Setting user ID
<SECURITY LOCK SET>
LOCK MODE
: KEY
FREE ACCESS LEVEL
: NO
Set a user ID and password to restrict operation of the digital
video recorder directly or through the network.
„ User level and privileges
OPERATION AUTHORITY
COPY
CAMERA CONTROL
: NORMAL
: LV2,3,4
: LV2,3,4
Select from the following four user levels.
USER ID SET
->
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
Operation
privilege
Level
LV1
LV2
LV3
LV4
4
Monitoring
Playback/
searching
Turn the jog dial to select “USER ID
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <USER ID SET> screen is displayed.
Recording
Menu operation
English
<USER
USER ID PASSWORD LV
ID4----- 4444---- 4
ID3----- 3333---- 3
ID2----- 2222---- 2
ID1----- 1111---- 1
-------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY,
117
ID SET>
| USER ID PASSWORD LV
| -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
3
5
GENERAL SET
9
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
6
The password is confirmed.
<USER
USER ID PASSWORD LV
ID4----- 4444---- 4
ID3----- 3333---- 3
ID2----- 2222---- 2
ID1----- 1111---- 1
-------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY,
ID SET>
[KEY]
| USER ID PASSWORD LV
| -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
Enter a user ID.
Use the jog dial, shuttle dial or [CAMERA SELECT] buttons to
enter up to eight alphanumeric characters. Refer to “Setting
camera titles” (JP.70) for more details regarding how to enter
characters.
z The “LV” setting registered on line 1 cannot be changed
from “4” (the user ID and password can be changed). To
change the level, register a separate user on a different
line. After the password is confirmed for line 2 or any line
thereafter, the cursor moves to the “LV” setting. Set the
user level.
z The same “USER ID” cannot be registered more than
once.
ID SET>
| USER ID PASSWORD LV
| -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
10 Use the same procedure to register
other users.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
The first password entry bar “4” flashes.
ID SET>
[KEY]
| USER ID PASSWORD LV
| -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
Turning on the key lock, password lock and
network lock
NETWORK
OPERATION
8
EXIT/OSD
Enter a password.
[SHUTTLE HOLD] button
1
With the normal monitoring screen
displayed, press the [SHUTTLE HOLD]
button for approximately 3 seconds.
The LOCK indicator on the front panel lights up and a buzzer
sounds to indicate setting of key lock, password lock, or
network lock.
SHUTTLE HOLD
118
English
OTHER
ID SET>
| USER ID PASSWORD LV
| -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
NETWORK
SETTINGS
Use the jog dial, shuttle dial or [CAMERA SELECT] buttons to
enter between four and eight alphanumeric characters. Refer
to “Setting camera titles” (JP.70) for more details regarding
how to enter characters.
<USER
USER ID PASSWORD LV
ID4----- 4444---- 4
ID3----- 3333---- 3
ID2----- 2222---- 2
ID1----- 1111---- 1
-------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY,
NETWORK
CONTROL
11 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
<USER
USER ID PASSWORD LV
ID4----- 4444---- 4
ID3----- 3333---- 3
ID2----- 2222---- 2
ID1----- 1111---- 1
-------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY,
SETTINGS
<USER
USER ID PASSWORD LV
ID4----- 4444---- 4
ID3----- 3333---- 3
ID2----- 2222---- 2
ID1----- 1111---- 1
-------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY,
7
ID SET>
| USER ID PASSWORD LV
| -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
OPERATION
<USER
USER ID PASSWORD LV
ID4----- 4444---- 4
ID3----- 3333---- 3
ID2----- 2222---- 2
ID1----- 1111---- 1
-------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY,
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
INTRODUCTION
The first user ID entry bar “|” flashes.
3
GENERAL SET
Canceling the key lock
1
z The lock cannot be activated during the following
operations.
• While displaying the menu screen, search screen, or
copy screen
• While playing back recorded image
• While camera is being controlled
• While video is being magnified
During key lock, press the [SHUTTLE
HOLD] button for approximately 3
seconds.
The LOCK indicator on the front panel turns off and a buzzer
sounds to indicate deactivation of the key lock.
SHUTTLE HOLD
2
Confirm the lock status.
If any operation is made other than by pressing the
[SHUTTLE HOLD] button during key lock or network lock, the
following screen is displayed.
Canceling the password lock or network lock
Example: While password lock is activated
1
KEY LOCKED !
During password lock, press the
[SHUTTLE HOLD] button for
approximately 3 seconds.
The following screen is displayed.
SHUTTLE HOLD
If a user without privileges operates the digital video recorder
during password lock, the following screen is displayed.
[KEY]
PASSWORD LOCKED !
(LOCKED LEVEL: LV4,3,2,1)
PLEASE ENTER YOUR ID AND PASSWORD.
USER ID ________
PASSWORD ________
[KEY]
PASSWORD LOCKED !
(LOCKED LEVEL: LV4,3,2,1)
PLEASE ENTER YOUR ID AND PASSWORD.
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
2
USER ID ________
PASSWORD ________
Enter the user ID and password.
[KEY]
PASSWORD LOCKED !
(LOCKED LEVEL: LV4,3,2,1)
PLEASE ENTER YOUR ID AND PASSWORD.
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
If a user without privileges presses the [SHUTTLE HOLD]
button to operate the digital video recorder during network
lock, the following screen is displayed.
USER ID ***
PASSWORD ****
[KEY]
NETWORK LOCKED !
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
PLEASE ENTER YOUR ID AND PASSWORD.
Use the jog dial, shuttle dial or [CAMERA SELECT] buttons to
enter the characters. Refer to “Setting camera titles” (JP.70)
for more details regarding how to enter characters.
USER ID ________
PASSWORD ________
The LOCK indicator on the front panel turns off and a buzzer
sounds to indicate deactivation of the password lock.
LV4:MENU SET
English
119
3
GENERAL SET
5
Settings are required when the RS-485 terminals (A and B)
are connected with a system controller or other devices.
1
Turn the jog dial to select the “DATA
SPEED” setting and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “STATUS INFO”.
Press the [MENU] button.
<RS-485 SET>
DATA SPEED
: 19200
STATUS INFO
: OFF
ALARM INFO
: OFF
ADDRESS
: 001
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
MENU
Turn the jog dial to select “3.GENERAL
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
OPERATION
2
INTRODUCTION
Setting RS-485
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
The <GENERAL SET> screen is displayed.
Description
2400, 4800, 9600, ‹19200
SETTINGS
6
Sets the data speed.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“OFF” flashes for “STATUS INFO”.
3
<RS-485 SET>
DATA SPEED
: 19200
STATUS INFO
: OFF
ALARM INFO
: OFF
ADDRESS
: 001
Turn the jog dial to select “4.RS-485
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
<RS-485 SET>
DATA SPEED
: 19200
STATUS INFO
: OFF
ALARM INFO
: OFF
ADDRESS
: 001
7
Turn the jog dial to select “STATUS
INFO” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
NETWORK
CONTROL
The <RS-485 SET> screen is displayed.
The cursor moves to “ALARM INFO”.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“19200” flashes for “DATA SPEED”.
SET>
: 19200
: OFF
: OFF
: 001
NETWORK
OPERATION
4
<RS-485
DATA SPEED
STATUS INFO
ALARM INFO
ADDRESS
<RS-485 SET>
DATA SPEED
: 19200
STATUS INFO
: OFF
ALARM INFO
: OFF
ADDRESS
: 001
Setting
ON
‹OFF
Description
Status information is transmitted.
Status information is not transmitted.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
OTHER
120
English
3
8
GENERAL SET
11 Turn the jog dial to select the
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“ADDRESS” setting and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
“OFF” flashes for “ALARM INFO”.
<RS-485 SET>
DATA SPEED
: 19200
STATUS INFO
: OFF
ALARM INFO
: OFF
ADDRESS
: 001
9
<RS-485
DATA SPEED
STATUS INFO
ALARM INFO
ADDRESS
Turn the jog dial to select “ALARM
INFO” setting and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
[Settings] (The default setting is “001”)
Setting
000 - 127
The cursor moves to “ADDRESS”.
<RS-485
DATA SPEED
STATUS INFO
ALARM INFO
ADDRESS
SET>
: 19200
: OFF
: OFF
: 001
Description
Sets the address of the digital video recorder.
When connecting a camera with remote operation capability,
set this address between “001” and “008” and make camera
control settings. (JP.150)
SET>
: 19200
: OFF
: OFF
: 001
12 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
EXIT/OSD
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
ON
‹OFF
Description
Alarm information is transmitted.
Alarm information is not transmitted.
10 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“001” flashes for “ADDRESS”.
<RS-485 SET>
[KEY]
DATA SPEED
: 19200
STATUS INFO
: OFF
ALARM INFO
: OFF
ADDRESS
: 001
English
121
3
GENERAL SET
5
This section describes how to initialize the hard disk and
perform mirroring.
The internal hard disk capacity is displayed as DISK 1 and
DISK 2; the hard disk capacity for the expansion unit is
displayed as EX-DISK 1 to 4.
Turn the jog dial to select “YES” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
INTRODUCTION
Hard disk initialization and mirroring
The “HDD INITIALIZING !” screen is displayed and the hard
disk is initialized.
When initialization is completed, the display returns to the
<HDD SET> screen.
Initializing the hard disk
Press the [MENU] button.
OPERATION
1
HDD INITIALIZING !
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
MENU
2
6
Turn the jog dial to select “3.GENERAL
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
SETTINGS
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
EXIT/OSD
The <GENERAL SET> screen is displayed.
Setting mirroring
The <HDD SET> screen is displayed.
DISK 1
<HDD SET>
: 250GB
DISK 2
: 250GB
DISK INITIALIZE
->
CAUTION : ALL RECORDING WILL BE ERASED!
MIRRORING
: OFF
PLAYBACK DRIVE : ***
4
z Once mirroring is set, configurable recording rates are
limited for use in normal recording, pre-alarm recording
and program recording (including alarm program
recording).
z When using a RAID unit for mirroring, set “MIRRORING”
for the DVR unit to “OFF”.
NETWORK
OPERATION
Turn the jog dial to select “5.HDD SET”
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
NETWORK
CONTROL
3
Set mirroring when two hard disks are built-in or when hard
disk expansion has been carried out and even numbered hard
disks are set.
When mirroring has been set, the same image can be
recorded to two hard disks.
If there is a recording error, the <HDD SET> screen can be
used to select another hard disk to read the data. (JP.124)
When mirroring is set for hard disks of different capacities,
mirroring occurs on the hard disk with the smaller capacity.
Then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
1
The <WARNING> screen is displayed. “NO” flashes.
Press the [MENU] button.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
<WARNING>
MENU
THIS CHANGE WILL INITIALIZE THE DISK.
ALL RECORDING WILL BE ERASED.
ARE YOU SURE ?
2
NO
SET:SHUTTLE
The <GENERAL SET> screen is displayed.
122
English
OTHER
CHANGE:JOG
Turn the jog dial to select “3.GENERAL
SET”and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
3
3
GENERAL SET
7
Turn the jog dial to select “5.HDD SET”
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <HDD SET> screen is displayed.
Turn the jog dial to select “MASTER” or
“SLAVE” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The cursor moves to “DISK INITIALIZE”.
<HDD SET>
DISK 1
: 250GB
DISK 2
EX-DISK 1 : 250GB
EX-DISK 2
EX-DISK 3 : 250GB
EX-DISK 4
DISK INITIALIZE
CAUTION : ALL RECORDING WILL BE
MIRRORING
: OFF
PLAYBACK DRIVE : ***
4
: 250GB
: 250GB
: 250GB
->
ERASED!
<HDD SET>
DISK 1
: 250GB <- DISK 2
: 250GB
EX-DISK 1 : 250GB
EX-DISK 2 : 250GB
EX-DISK 3 : 250GB
EX-DISK 4 : 250GB
DISK INITIALIZE
->
CAUTION : ALL RECORDING WILL BE ERASED !
MIRRORING
: ON
PLAYBACK DRIVE : MASTER
CAUTION : RECORDING SPEED WILL BE
LIMITED BY MIRRORING !
Turn the jog dial to select “MIRRORING”
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
“OFF” flashes.
‹MASTER
SLAVE
<HDD SET>
DISK 1
: 250GB
DISK 2
EX-DISK 1 : 250GB
EX-DISK 2
EX-DISK 3 : 250GB
EX-DISK 4
DISK INITIALIZE
CAUTION : ALL RECORDING WILL BE
MIRRORING
: OFF
PLAYBACK DRIVE : ***
5
8
: 250GB
: 250GB
: 250GB
->
ERASED!
Playback from the slave disk.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <WARNING> screen is displayed.
<WARNING>
REC RATE SETTING IN THE MENU WILL BE
AUTOMATICALLY ADJUSTED.
HDD INITIALIZE !
Turn the jog dial to select “ON” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
ARE YOU SURE ?
NO
“MASTER” is displayed on the “PLAYBACK DRIVE”. An arrow
is displayed on the screen between the disks.
CHANGE:JOG
9
<HDD SET>
DISK 1
: 250GB <- DISK 2
: 250GB
EX-DISK 1 : 250GB
EX-DISK 2 : 250GB
EX-DISK 3 : 250GB
EX-DISK 4 : 250GB
DISK INITIALIZE
->
CAUTION : ALL RECORDING WILL BE ERASED !
MIRRORING
: ON
PLAYBACK DRIVE : MASTER
CAUTION : RECORDING SPEED WILL BE
LIMITED BY MIRRORING !
6
Description
Playback from the master disk.
SET:SHUTTLE
Turn the jog dial to select “YES” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The “HDD INITIALIZING !” screen is displayed and the hard
disk is initialized.
When initialization is completed, the display returns to the
<HDD SET> screen.
HDD INITIALIZING !
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“MASTER” flashes.
<HDD SET>
DISK 1
: 250GB <- DISK 2
: 250GB
EX-DISK 1 : 250GB
EX-DISK 2 : 250GB
EX-DISK 3 : 250GB
EX-DISK 4 : 250GB
DISK INITIALIZE
->
CAUTION : ALL RECORDING WILL BE ERASED !
MIRRORING
: ON
PLAYBACK DRIVE : MASTER
CAUTION : RECORDING SPEED WILL BE
LIMITED BY MIRRORING !
10 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
EXIT/OSD
z Set mirroring to automatically restrict the recording rate
upper limit (i.e., set to half of the normal value).
English
123
3
GENERAL SET
6
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
When mirroring is set to “ON” and a recording error occurs,
change the hard disk used for playback.
1
EXIT/OSD
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
Expanding (Replacing) and
initializing the hard disk
MENU
Please contact the dealer from whom you purchased this
digital video recorder regarding hard disk expansion
(replacement). An optional S-ATA board and an external hard
disk drive expansion unit (VA-EXH series), or optional SCSI
board and RAID unit can be used with this digital video
recorder. All of these optional components are sold
separately.
Turn the jog dial to select “3.GENERAL
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <GENERAL SET> screen is displayed.
Turn the jog dial to select “5.HDD SET”
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <HDD SET> screen is displayed.
<HDD SET>
DISK 1
: 250GB <- DISK 2
EX-DISK 1 : 250GB <- EX-DISK 2
EX-DISK 3 : 250GB <- EX-DISK 4
DISK INITIALIZE
CAUTION : ALL RECORDING WILL BE
MIRRORING
: ON
PLAYBACK DRIVE : ***
4
: 250GB
: 250GB
: 250GB
->
ERASED!
The <HDD SET> screen is displayed in the following manner
when hard disk expansion is carried out for the DVR or
external expansion unit.
“NEW” is displayed to
the right of the hard
disk capacity for new
hard disks.
“MASTER” flashes.
To initialize a recently expanded hard disk, select “NEW DISK
INITIALIZE”.
To initialize all connected hard disks, select “ALL DISK
INITIALIZE”.
Turn the jog dial to select “MASTER” or
“SLAVE” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
: 250GB
: 250GB
: 250GB
->
ERASED!
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
‹MASTER
SLAVE
Description
Playback from the master disk.
Playback from the slave disk.
124
English
OTHER
<HDD SET>
DISK 1
: 250GB <- DISK 2
EX-DISK 1 : 250GB <- EX-DISK 2
EX-DISK 3 : 250GB <- EX-DISK 4
DISK INITIALIZE
CAUTION : ALL RECORDING WILL BE
MIRRORING
: ON
PLAYBACK DRIVE : MASTER
z When a RAID unit is connected, “ARRAY” is displayed
instead of “EX-DISK”.
z When a RAID unit is connected, recording and playback
cannot be carried out on the internal hard disk of the DVR.
z The digital video recorder does not support the disk space
change of the RAID unit currently used for recording. When
you change disk space, you must separate ARRAY before
you start the reconfiguration of the system, regardless of
the functions of the RAID unit. Then reboot the digital video
recorder and initialize ARRAY.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
5
: 250GB
: 250GB
: 250GB
->
ERASED!
<HDD SET>
DISK 1
: 160GB NEW DISK 2
: 160GB NEW
EX-DISK 1 : 160GB NEW EX-DISK 2 : 160GB NEW
EX-DISK 3 : 160GB NEW EX-DISK 4 : 160GB NEW
NEW DISK INITIALIZE
->
PLEASE INITIALIZE THE NEW DISK
NETWORK
OPERATION
Turn the jog dial to select “PLAYBACK
DRIVE” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
<HDD SET>
DISK 1
: 250GB <- DISK 2
EX-DISK 1 : 250GB <- EX-DISK 2
EX-DISK 3 : 250GB <- EX-DISK 4
DISK INITIALIZE
CAUTION : ALL RECORDING WILL BE
MIRRORING
: ON
PLAYBACK DRIVE : MASTER
NETWORK
CONTROL
z Initialization must always be performed after expanding the
hard disk.
z All important recordings should be copied to USB memory or
other storage media before expanding the hard disk.
z When connecting an expansion unit to the DVR, install two
internal hard disks to the DVR. If internal hard disks are
installed after the expansion unit is connected, all hard disks
must be initialized.
z The expansion unit is not interchangeable on a single DVR
unit.
z When turning on the system in connection to an external
expansion unit, first turn power on to the external unit, and
then to the digital video recorder. When turning off the
system, first turn power off to the digital video recorder,
and then to the external unit.
SETTINGS
3
OPERATION
2
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
INTRODUCTION
Switching playback disks
3
GENERAL SET
Network settings
Making network settings
Use the following procedure to make menu settings for the
digital video recorder and to monitor video from a PC via a
network (LAN).
A LAN cable must be connected to the LAN terminal on the
rear panel before proceeding.
The setting is necessary for controlling the DVR from a PC on
a network.
Contact the network administrator for more details on setting
values.
z DHCP
Set whether the IP address is automatically acquired from the
DHCP server or manually set. Set “ON” when automatically
acquiring an IP address from an Internet service provider or
from a DHCP server on a LAN, and set “OFF” when using a
fixed IP address.
z IP ADDRESS
Select “OFF” for “DHCP” to set. Generally, a private IP
address is used when a fixed IP address is set in a LAN
(example: 192.168.0.0 – 192.168.255.255).
Be sure not to duplicate IP addresses from other devices.
z SUBNET MASK
Select “OFF” for “DHCP” to set. The same value is set
throughout the LAN.
z GATEWAY
Select “OFF” for “DHCP” to set. When connecting from a LAN
to a WAN or other differing network, specify the device IP
address (on the LAN side).
z PORT
Sets open port. Default value is “80”.
z NETWORK SPEED
Sets restrictions for traffic in the LAN. Normally, set it to “NO
LIMIT”.
z DNS SET
Settings relating to the Domain Name Server are performed in
another screen.
z DNS SERVER
Set whether the DNS server IP address is automatically
acquired or manually set. Generally this setting is “AUTO”
when “ON” is selected for “DHCP”. When the DNS server
address is specified by a network administrator or Internet
service provider, select “MANUAL” and set the following
items, “PRIMARY” and “SECONDARY”.
z PRIMARY
z SECONDARY
Set when “DNS SERVER” is set to “MANUAL”. Set the
DNS server address received from the network
administrator or Internet service provider.
Making network connections
z Connecting to a PC directly
(without using a switch)
1 - 16
IN
OUT
AUDIO
LAN cable
(10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Category 5)
1
2
3
4
Monitor
(sold separately)
PC
z Connecting to an intranet
(using a switch)
1 - 16
IN
OUT
AUDIO
Switch
1
2
3
4
Monitor
(sold separately)
PC
Intranet
LAN cable
(10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Category 5)
PC
PC
English
Switch
125
3
1
GENERAL SET
5
Press the [MENU] button.
MENU
2
Turn the jog dial to select “ON” or
“OFF” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
When “ON” is selected, proceed to step 9.
When “OFF” is selected, the cursor moves to “IP ADDRESS”.
<NETWORK SET>
: OFF
: 192.168. 0. 1
: 255.255.255. 0
: 0. 0. 0. 0
: 00080
: NO LIMIT
->
: 1500(ETHERNET)
:08-00-7B-81-22-4C
Turn the jog dial to select “3.GENERAL
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
6
<NETWORK SET>
[KEY]
: OFF
: 192.168. 0. 1
: 255.255.255. 0
: 0. 0. 0. 0
: 00080
: NO LIMIT
DHCP
IP ADDRESS
SUBNET MASK
GATEWAY
PORT
NETWORK SPEED
7
Set “SUBNET MASK”.
(Default setting: 255. 255. 255. 0)
Use the same procedure for setting “IP ADDRESS” to set the
subnet mask.
Set each field within the range of 0 to 255.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“ON” flashes for “DHCP”.
DHCP
IP ADDRESS
SUBNET MASK
GATEWAY
PORT
NETWORK SPEED
8
NETWORK
OPERATION
<NETWORK SET>
[KEY]
: OFF
: 192.168. 0. 1
: 255.255.255. 0
: 0. 0. 0. 0
: 00080
: NO LIMIT
<NETWORK SET>
DHCP
: ON
IP ADDRESS
: 0. 0. 0. 0
SUBNET MASK
: 0. 0. 0. 0
GATEWAY
: 0. 0. 0. 0
PORT
: 00080
NETWORK SPEED
: NO LIMIT
DNS SET
->
MTU SIZE
: 1500(ETHERNET)
MAC ADDRESS
:08-00-7B-81-22-4C
NETWORK
CONTROL
<NETWORK SET>
: ON
: 0. 0. 0. 0
: 0. 0. 0. 0
: 0. 0. 0. 0
: 00080
: NO LIMIT
->
: 1500(ETHERNET)
:08-00-7B-81-22-4C
SETTINGS
The <NETWORK SET> screen is displayed.
4
Set “IP ADDRESS”.
(Default setting: 192. 168. 0. 1)
(1) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
(2) Turn the jog dial to select the first number (0 to 255) and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise. (Also use the
[CAMERA SELECT] 1-9 buttons or the [QUAD] button (0)
to input.)
(3) Use the same procedure to enter the remaining numbers.
Turn the jog dial to select “6.NETWORK
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
DHCP
IP ADDRESS
SUBNET MASK
GATEWAY
PORT
NETWORK SPEED
DNS SET
MTU SIZE
MAC ADDRESS
OPERATION
DHCP
IP ADDRESS
SUBNET MASK
GATEWAY
PORT
NETWORK SPEED
DNS SET
MTU SIZE
MAC ADDRESS
The <GENERAL SET> screen is displayed.
3
INTRODUCTION
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
Set “GATEWAY”.
<NETWORK SET>
[KEY]
: OFF
: 192.168. 0. 1
: 255.255.255. 0
: 0. 0. 0. 0
: 00080
: NO LIMIT
DHCP
IP ADDRESS
SUBNET MASK
GATEWAY
PORT
NETWORK SPEED
NETWORK
SETTINGS
(Default setting: 0. 0. 0. 0)
Use the same procedure for setting “IP ADDRESS” to set the
gateway.
Set each field within the range of 0 to 255.
OTHER
126
English
3
9
GENERAL SET
13 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Set “PORT”.
(Default setting: 00080)
(1) Turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
(2) Turn the jog dial to
select the setting and
then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
DHCP
IP ADDRESS
SUBNET MASK
GATEWAY
PORT
NETWORK SPEED
DNS SET
MTU SIZE
MAC ADDRESS
When “DHCP” is set to “ON”, “AUTO” flashes.
When “DHCP” is set to “OFF”, the setting is fixed to
"MANUAL".
<NETWORK SET>
[KEY]
: OFF
: 192.168. 0. 1
: 255.255.255. 0
: 0. 0. 0. 0
: 00080
: NO LIMIT
->
: 1500(ETHERNET)
:12-34-5B-6C-78-9D
HOST NAME
DOMAIN SUFFIX
: VDH-5016
: SANYO.CO.JP
14 Turn the jog dial to select “AUTO” or
10 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“MANUAL” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
“NO LIMIT” flashes.
When “AUTO” is selected, proceed to step 16.
When “MANUAL” is selected, the cursor moves to
“PRIMARY”.
<NETWORK SET>
DHCP
: OFF
IP ADDRESS
: 192.168. 0. 1
SUBNET MASK
: 255.255.255. 0
GATEWAY
: 0. 0. 0. 0
PORT
: 00080
NETWORK SPEED
: NO LIMIT
DNS SET
->
MTU SIZE
: 1500(ETHERNET)
<DNS SET>
: AUTO
: 0. 0. 0. 0
: 0. 0. 0. 0
DNS SERVER
PRIMARY
SECONDARY
11 Turn the jog dial to select the
HOST NAME
DOMAIN SUFFIX
“NETWORK SPEED” setting and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
: VDH-5016
: SANYO.CO.JP
15 If “DNS SERVER” is set to “MANUAL”,
The cursor moves to “DNS SET”.
DHCP
IP ADDRESS
SUBNET MASK
GATEWAY
PORT
NETWORK SPEED
DNS SET
MTU SIZE
MAC ADDRESS
<DNS SET>
: AUTO
: 0. 0. 0. 0
: 0. 0. 0. 0
DNS SERVER
PRIMARY
SECONDARY
select the “PRIMARY” and
“SECONDARY” settings.
<NETWORK SET>
: OFF
: 192.168. 0. 1
: 255.255.255. 0
: 0. 0. 0. 0
: 00080
: NO LIMIT
->
: 1500(ETHERNET)
:08-00-7B-81-22-4C
Use the same procedure for setting “IP ADDRESS” to set the
primary and secondary settings.
<DNS SET>
: MANUAL
: 0. 0. 0. 0
: 0. 0. 0. 0
DNS SERVER
PRIMARY
SECONDARY
HOST NAME
DOMAIN SUFFIX
: VDH-5016
: SANYO.CO.JP
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
‹NO LIMIT
16 Turn the shuttle dial counter-clockwise.
Description
Network speed
No limit
1024KBPS
Network speed
Up to 1024KBPS
512KBPS
Network speed
Up to 512KBPS
256KBPS
Network speed
Up to 256KBPS
128KBPS
Network speed
Up to 128KBPS
64KBPS
Network speed
Up to 64KBPS
The display returns to the <NETWORK SET> screen.
17 Turn the jog dial to select the “MTU
SIZE” setting and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
“1500 (ETHERNET)” flashes.
12 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
<NETWORK SET>
: OFF
: 192.168. 0. 1
: 255.255.255. 0
: 0. 0. 0. 0
: 00080
: NO LIMIT
->
: 1500(ETHERNET)
:08-00-7B-81-22-4C
DHCP
IP ADDRESS
SUBNET MASK
GATEWAY
PORT
NETWORK SPEED
DNS SET
MTU SIZE
MAC ADDRESS
The <DNS SET> screen is displayed.
DNS SERVER
PRIMARY
SECONDARY
HOST NAME
DOMAIN SUFFIX
English
<DNS SET>
: AUTO
: 0. 0. 0. 0
: 0. 0. 0. 0
: VDH-5016
: SANYO.CO.JP
127
3
GENERAL SET
18 Turn the jog dial to select the “MTU
1
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
‹1500 (ETHERNET), 1492 (ADSL-1), 1454 (ADSL-2), 1300
(VPN), 576
INTRODUCTION
Making network control settings
SIZE” setting and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
MENU
2
19 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The <GENERAL SET> screen is displayed.
OPERATION
z The system reboots automatically when the settings for
“MTU SIZE” are changed.
Turn the jog dial to select “3.GENERAL
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
EXIT/OSD
SETTINGS
3
z “HOST NAME” and “DOMAIN SUFFIX” cannot be set on
the digital video recorder. Set these on a PC connected to
the network. (JP.199)
Turn the jog dial to select “7.NETWORK
CONTROL SET” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
The <NETWORK CONTROL SET> screen is displayed.
USER ID SET
NETWORK
CONTROL
<NETWORK CONTROL SET>
NETWORK CONTROL
: ON
NETWORK STATUS
: ON
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
OPERATION AUTHORITY
: NORMAL
COPY/DOWNLOAD
: LV3,4
CAMERA CONTROL
: LV2,3,4
->
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“ON” flashes for “NETWORK CONTROL”.
<NETWORK CONTROL SET>
NETWORK CONTROL
: ON
NETWORK STATUS
: ON
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
OPERATION AUTHORITY
: NORMAL
COPY/DOWNLOAD
: LV3,4
CAMERA CONTROL
: LV2,3,4
->
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
NETWORK
SETTINGS
USER ID SET
NETWORK
OPERATION
4
OTHER
128
English
3
5
GENERAL SET
8
Turn the jog dial to select “ON” or
“OFF” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“ENHANCED” flashes.
The cursor moves to “NETWORK STATUS”.
<NETWORK CONTROL SET>
NETWORK CONTROL
: ON
NETWORK STATUS
: ON
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
OPERATION AUTHORITY
: NORMAL
COPY/DOWNLOAD
: LV3,4
CAMERA CONTROL
: LV2,3,4
<NETWORK CONTROL SET>
NETWORK CONTROL
: ON
NETWORK STATUS
: ON
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
OPERATION AUTHORITY
: NORMAL
COPY/DOWNLOAD
: LV3,4
CAMERA CONTROL
: LV2,3,4
USER ID SET
USER ID SET
->
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
9
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
OFF
6
Description
The digital video recorder can be
controlled via a network.
‹ON
Turn the jog dial to select a picture
quality to be used during network
transmission, and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “OPERATION AUTHORITY”.
The digital video recorder cannot be
controlled via a network.
<NETWORK CONTROL SET>
NETWORK CONTROL
: ON
NETWORK STATUS
: ON
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
OPERATION AUTHORITY
: NORMAL
COPY/DOWNLOAD
: LV3,4
CAMERA CONTROL
: LV2,3,4
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“ON” flashes for “NETWORK STATUS”.
<NETWORK CONTROL SET>
NETWORK CONTROL
: ON
NETWORK STATUS
: ON
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
OPERATION AUTHORITY
: NORMAL
COPY/DOWNLOAD
: LV3,4
CAMERA CONTROL
: LV2,3,4
USER ID SET
USER ID SET
->
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
->
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
7
->
BASIC (BA)
Basic
NORMAL (NO)
Normal
‹ENHANCED (EN)
Turn the jog dial to select “ON” or
“OFF” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
Description
Enhanced
FINE (FI)
Fine
SUPER FINE (SF)
Super Fine
The cursor moves to “PICTURE QUALITY”.
z You can specify the picture quality of live video transmitted
through network.
If the recording rate for normal recording is set to “100
(FPS)”, however, the digital video recorder transmits video
in normal quality while recording is in progress.
<NETWORK CONTROL SET>
NETWORK CONTROL
: ON
NETWORK STATUS
: ON
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
OPERATION AUTHORITY
: NORMAL
COPY/DOWNLOAD
: LV3,4
CAMERA CONTROL
: LV2,3,4
USER ID SET
10 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
->
“NORMAL” flashes.
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
<NETWORK CONTROL SET>
NETWORK CONTROL
: ON
NETWORK STATUS
: ON
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
OPERATION AUTHORITY
: NORMAL
COPY/DOWNLOAD
: LV3,4
CAMERA CONTROL
: LV2,3,4
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
‹ON
OFF
English
Description
During network connection, the message
“NETWORK CONTROL” is displayed on
the monitor connected to the digital video
recorder.
USER ID SET
The message “NETWORK CONTROL” is
not displayed on the monitor connected to
the digital video recorder even during
network connection.
->
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
129
3
GENERAL SET
11 Turn the jog dial to select “NORMAL” or
13 Turn the jog dial to select copy or
The cursor moves to “COPY/DOWNLOAD”.
If no changes are to be made to user privileges, select
“NORMAL” and go to step 14.
Selects the level that can perform the following operations for
network connection. (JP.125)
Copy playback image to archive area (JP.180)
Download playback image to computer (JP.181)
The cursor moves to “CAMERA CONTROL”.
download level and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
<NETWORK CONTROL SET>
NETWORK CONTROL
: ON
NETWORK STATUS
: ON
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
OPERATION AUTHORITY
: CHANGE
COPY/DOWNLOAD
: LV3,4
CAMERA CONTROL
: LV2,3,4
<NETWORK CONTROL SET>
NETWORK CONTROL
: ON
NETWORK STATUS
: ON
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
OPERATION AUTHORITY
: CHANGE
COPY/DOWNLOAD
: LV3,4
CAMERA CONTROL
: LV2,3,4
->
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
USER ID SET
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
CHANGE
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
Description
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
User privileges remain at the default
setting.
Setting
Changes live image downloading
privileges and camera control privileges.
‹LV3, 4
LV4
12 If “OPERATION AUTHORITY” is set to
“CHANGE”, turn the jog dial to select
“COPY/DOWNLOAD” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
Description
Allows users at Level 3 or higher to copy
and download images.
Allows users at Level 4 to copy and
download images.
14 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
<NETWORK CONTROL SET>
NETWORK CONTROL
: ON
NETWORK STATUS
: ON
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
OPERATION AUTHORITY
: CHANGE
COPY/DOWNLOAD
: LV3,4
CAMERA CONTROL
: LV2,3,4
<NETWORK CONTROL SET>
NETWORK CONTROL
: ON
NETWORK STATUS
: ON
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
OPERATION AUTHORITY
: CHANGE
COPY/DOWNLOAD
: LV3,4
CAMERA CONTROL
: LV2,3,4
USER ID SET
->
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
NETWORK
OPERATION
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
->
NETWORK
CONTROL
“LV2,3,4” flashes for “CAMERA CONTROL”.
“LV3,4” flashes for “COPY/DOWNLOAD”.
USER ID SET
->
SETTINGS
‹NORMAL
OPERATION
USER ID SET
INTRODUCTION
“CHANGE” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
OTHER
130
English
3
GENERAL SET
15 Turn the jog dial to select the camera
Setting user ID
control level and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
Set a user ID and password to restrict operation of the digital
video recorder directly or through the network.
Select a level to control cameras from the digital video
recorder. (JP.117)
„ User levels and privileges
Select from the following four user levels.
<NETWORK CONTROL SET>
NETWORK CONTROL
: ON
NETWORK STATUS
: ON
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
OPERATION AUTHORITY
: CHANGE
COPY/DOWNLOAD
: LV3,4
CAMERA CONTROL
: LV2,3,4
Operation
privilege
USER ID SET
Playback/
searching
Monitoring
->
LV3, 4
Allows users at Level 3 or higher to control
cameras from the digital video recorder.
LV4
Allows users at Level 4 to control cameras
from the digital video recorder.
LV3
LV4
*1
Monitor control
Description
Allows users at Level 2 or higher to control
cameras from the digital video recorder.
LV2
Menu operation
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
‹LV2, 3, 4
LV1
Recording
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
Setting
Level
Concurrent
connection
restriction
16 users*2
3 users
1 user at LV3 or LV4
3 users at LV2, LV3 and LV4
16 users including a user for the DVR (1 user
for the DVR)
*1 Masked video cannot be monitored.
*2 However, the maximum number may not be possible
depending on the network conditions and the number of
screens displayed.
16 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
Setting user
EXIT/OSD
<USER
USER ID PASSWORD LV
ID4----- 4444---- 4
ID3----- 3333---- 3
ID2----- 2222---- 2
ID1----- 1111---- 1
-------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY,
ID SET>
| USER ID PASSWORD LV
| -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
Use the following procedure to set the user ID, password and
level.
The user ID must be between one and eight alphanumeric
characters, and the password between four and eight
alphanumeric characters.
Characters that can be entered: 0 to 9, A to Z
The operation is the same as “Setting user” (JP.117) from
“Security lock settings”.
Change “NETWORK CONTROL” user ID, password, and
level (settings described on this page) to change the values in
the “USER ID SET” screen of “SECURITY LOCK
SETTINGS”.
English
131
4
SCREEN SET
[EXIT/OSD] button
<MAIN MENU>
1.INITIAL SET
2.RECORD SET
3.GENERAL SET
4.SCREEN SET
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME
6.INITIALIZATION LOG
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS
8.ADVANCED MENU SET
Shuttle dial
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
OPERATION
MOVE:JOG
[MENU] button
INTRODUCTION
Main Menu
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Jog dial
3
Setting quad and multi 9/16 display
“NORMAL” flashes for “1.MULTI SCREEN”.
Use the following procedure to change the display positions
for cameras in quad and multi 9/16 screens. Different
positions can be set for both the main monitor and monitor 2.
On the DSR-5709P, display positions can be changed on
quad and multi 9 screens.
02
05
03
01
06
04
07
02
09
05
03
08
<SCREEN SET>
1.MULTI SCREEN
: NORMAL
QUAD POSITION SET
->
MULTI 9 POSITION SET
->
MULTI 16 POSITION SET
->
2.SEQUENCE SET
FULL : 1S
QUAD : 1S
MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET
->
3.MASK
: OFF
MASK SET
->
4.COLOR LEVEL SET
->
06
12
z Each camera can only be displayed in one position on any
screen.
The cursor moves to “QUAD POSITION SET”.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
Setting multiple screen positions
‹NORMAL
CHANGE
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
The display sequence for cameras
changes.
Turn the jog dial to select “4.SCREEN
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
5
The <SCREEN SET> screen is displayed.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
<SCREEN SET>
1.MULTI SCREEN
: CHANGE
QUAD POSITION SET
->
MULTI 9 POSITION SET
->
MULTI 16 POSITION SET
->
2.SEQUENCE SET
FULL : 1S
QUAD : 1S
MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET
->
3.MASK
: OFF
MASK SET
->
4.COLOR LEVEL SET
->
MENU
2
Description
The display sequence for cameras does
not change.
NETWORK
OPERATION
Example: Displaying Camera No. 05 in quad position 01
On the DSR-5709P, set for cameras No. 01 through 09.
1
Turn the jog dial to select “CHANGE”
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
NETWORK
CONTROL
4
14
SETTINGS
01
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <QUAD POSITION SET> screen is displayed.
QUAD2
05 06
07 08
QUAD3
09 10
11 12
QUAD4
13 14
OTHER
MAIN MON.
QUAD1
01 02
03 04
15 16
MON.2
QUAD1
QUAD2
QUAD3
QUAD4
01 02
05 06
09 10
13 14
03 04
07 08
11 12
15 16
CHECK THE MAIN MON.SCREEN ->
CHECK THE MON.2 SCREEN ->
132
English
4
6
SCREEN SET
Turn the jog dial to select “01” for
“QUAD1” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
Checking modified screen positions
Next, check the modified screen positions.
9
“01” flashes for “QUAD1”.
MAIN MON.
QUAD1
01 02
03 04
QUAD2
05 06
07 08
QUAD3
09 10
11 12
[KEY]
QUAD4
13 14
15 16
QUAD1 pattern is displayed. Turn the shuttle dial counterclockwise to return to the <QUAD POSITION SET> screen.
MON.2
QUAD1
QUAD2
QUAD3
QUAD4
01 02
05 06
09 10
13 14
03 04
07 08
11 12
15 16
CHECK THE MAIN MON.SCREEN ->
CHECK THE MON.2 SCREEN ->
7
Turn the jog dial to select either
“CHECK THE MAIN MON SCREEN” or
“CHECK THE MON.2 SCREEN” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
MAIN MON.
QUAD1
05 02
03 04
Turn the jog dial to select “05” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
QUAD2
05 06
07 08
QUAD3
09 10
11 12
15 16
05
02
03
04
10 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
To render a certain channel
unspecified:
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
EXIT/OSD
Turn the jog dial to select “--” in place of a channel number.
For an unspecified channel, no monitoring video or camera
title is displayed.
QUAD2
05 06
QUAD3
09 10
QUAD4
13 14
07 08
11 122
15 16
MON.2
QUAD1
QUAD2
QUAD3
QUAD4
01 02
05 06
09 10
13 14
03 04
07 08
11 122
15 16
CHECK THE MAIN MON.SCREEN ->
CHECK THE MON.2 SCREEN ->
z You can also render certain channels unspecified on multi
9 and 16 screens.
z The screens on which all channels are unspecified are not
displayed in the automatic SEQUENCE operation.
English
15 16
<CHECK DISPLAY POSITION>
MAIN MON. QUAD1
z The position of camera images on monitor 2 can be
changed in the same manner as on the main monitor.
MAIN MON.
QUAD1
05 -03 04
QUAD4
13 14
QUAD4
13 14
MON.2
QUAD1
QUAD2
QUAD3
QUAD4
01 02
05 06
09 10
13 14
03 04
07 08
11 12
15 16
CHECK THE MAIN MON.SCREEN ->
CHECK THE MON.2 SCREEN ->
8
07 08
QUAD3
09 10
11 12
MON.2
QUAD1
QUAD2
QUAD3
QUAD4
01 02
05 06
09 10
13 14
03 04
07 08
11 12
15 16
CHECK THE MAIN MON.SCREEN ->
CHECK THE MON.2 SCREEN ->
“01” changes to “05” for “QUAD1”.
MAIN MON.
QUAD1
05 02
03 04
QUAD2
05 06
133
4
SCREEN SET
4
Use the following procedure to scroll through video from all
cameras at a specified interval.
The interval for automatic selection can only be set for full
screen and quad display.
Turn the jog dial to set the interval to
“5S” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
Automatic selection is set to an interval of 5 seconds.
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
MENU
Turn the jog dial to select “4.SCREEN
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
“INDIV.” cannot be selected for “QUAD”.
The <SCREEN SET> screen is displayed.
z The interval applies to all cameras on the main monitor and
monitor 2. To set the interval for each camera when
displaying video at full screen, select “INDIV.” in step 4 and
then go to “MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET”.
z The interval can be set anywhere between 1 and 30
seconds.
6
Turn the jog dial to select “FULL” for
“2.SEQUENCE SET” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
“1S” flashes for “FULL”.
NETWORK
CONTROL
3
Use the same operation to set the
switching interval for quad screen
display.
SETTINGS
2
5
OPERATION
<SCREEN SET>
1.MULTI SCREEN
: NORMAL
QUAD POSITION SET
->
MULTI 9 POSITION SET
->
MULTI 16 POSITION SET
->
2.SEQUENCE SET
FULL : 5S
QUAD : 1S
MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET
->
3.MASK
: OFF
MASK SET
->
4.COLOR LEVEL SET
->
Example: Automatic switching of the full-screen display
every 5 seconds.
1
INTRODUCTION
Setting the interval and monitors for
automatic screen selection
EXIT/OSD
Setting the time period to switch the display on
the main monitor and monitor 2
Example: Setting the display interval of each camera’s
video for the main monitor and monitor 2.
1
Specify “TIME PERIOD A” and “TIME PERIOD B”.
2
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
Make timer settings for “TIME PERIOD
A” and “TIME PERIOD B” on the <TIME
PERIOD SET> screen. (JP.74)
NETWORK
OPERATION
<SCREEN SET>
1.MULTI SCREEN
: NORMAL
QUAD POSITION SET
->
MULTI 9 POSITION SET
->
MULTI 16 POSITION SET
->
2.SEQUENCE SET
FULL : 1S
QUAD : 1S
MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET
->
3.MASK
: OFF
MASK SET
->
4.COLOR LEVEL SET
->
MENU
OTHER
134
English
4
3
SCREEN SET
7
Turn the jog dial to select “4.SCREEN
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“T-1” flash for “TIME PERIOD”.
The <SCREEN SET> screen is displayed.
<MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET>
TIME PERIOD : T-1 (09:00 CH
01 02 03 04 05 06
MAIN MON. 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
MON. 2
1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
12:00)
07 08
1S 1S
1S 1S
CH
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MAIN MON. 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
MON. 2
1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
4
Turn the jog dial to select “FULL” for
“2.SEQUENCE SET” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
8
“1S” flashes for “FULL”.
The cursor moves to “1S” for “01” and “MAIN MON.”.
<SCREEN SET>
1.MULTI SCREEN
: NORMAL
QUAD POSITION SET
->
MULTI 9 POSITION SET
->
MULTI 16 POSITION SET
->
2.SEQUENCE SET
FULL : 1S
QUAD : 1S
MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET
->
3.MASK
: OFF
MASK SET
->
4.COLOR LEVEL SET
->
5
<MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET>
TIME PERIOD : T-1 (09:00 CH
01 02 03 04 05 06
MAIN MON. 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
MON. 2
1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
Turn the jog dial to set the interval to
“INDIV.” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
<SCREEN SET>
1.MULTI SCREEN
: NORMAL
QUAD POSITION SET
->
MULTI 9 POSITION SET
->
MULTI 16 POSITION SET
->
2.SEQUENCE SET
FULL : 5S
QUAD : 1S
MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET
->
3.MASK
: OFF
MASK SET
->
4.COLOR LEVEL SET
->
Sets time period T-1.
T-2
Sets time period T-2.
T-3
Sets time period T-3.
T-4
Sets time period T-4.
9
Turn the jog dial to select the channel to
be changed for “MAIN MON.” or
“MON.2” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
“1S” flashes.
On the DSR-5709P, set for cameras No. 01 through 09.
The <MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET> screen is displayed.
<MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET>
TIME PERIOD : T-1 (09:00 CH
01 02 03 04 05 06
MAIN MON. 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
MON. 2
1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
12:00)
07 08
1S 1S
1S 1S
12:00)
07 08
1S 1S
1S 1S
CH
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MAIN MON. 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
MON. 2
1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
CH
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MAIN MON. 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
MON. 2
1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
English
Description
‹ T-1
If the time period is set to “ALL DAY LONG”, the display is
fixed to “T-1 (00:00-24:00)”.
Turn the shuttle dial to select “MAIN/
MON. 2 MONITOR SET” and then turn
the shuttle dial clockwise.
<MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET>
TIME PERIOD : T-1 (09:00 CH
01 02 03 04 05 06
MAIN MON. 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
MON. 2
1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
12:00)
07 08
1S 1S
1S 1S
CH
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MAIN MON. 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
MON. 2
1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
Set the main monitor and monitor 2 display period for each
camera.
6
Turn the jog dial to select the time
period and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
135
4
SCREEN SET
10 Turn the jog dial to select “1S” to “30S”
Use the following procedure to set video from a specific
camera (including playback video) to be masked by a gray
pattern when it is not to be shown on a monitor screen.
After confirming this setting, the cursor moves one position to
the right.
12:00)
07 08
1S 1S
1S 1S
01
OPERATION
<MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET>
TIME PERIOD : T-1 (09:00 CH
01 02 03 04 05 06
MAIN MON. 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
MON. 2
1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
INTRODUCTION
Setting masks
or “OFF” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
CH
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MAIN MON. 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
MON. 2
1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
04
Example: Preventing the display of specific camera video
at a set period (as indicated by TIME PERIOD A and TIME
PERIOD B).
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
‹ 1S - 30S
Description
Channel not displayed.
1
Switching interval (seconds)
11 Use the same procedure to set other
channels.
SETTINGS
OFF
Make timer settings for “TIME PERIOD
A” and “TIME PERIOD B” on the <TIME
PERIOD SET> screen. (JP.74)
Specify “TIME PERIOD A” and “TIME PERIOD B”.
12 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
2
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
Press the [MENU] button.
NETWORK
CONTROL
MENU
EXIT/OSD
3
z When setting a number of time periods together, use the
jog dial to move the cursor to the next period after
completing step 11, and repeat steps 9 through 10.
z The time period for “T-1” through “T-4” changes to that of
“TIME PERIOD A” or “TIME PERIOD B” on the <TIME
PERIOD SET> screen.
Turn the jog dial to select “4.SCREEN
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
4
Turn the jog dial to select “MASK” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
OTHER
<SCREEN SET>
1.MULTI SCREEN
: NORMAL
QUAD POSITION SET
->
MULTI 9 POSITION SET
->
MULTI 16 POSITION SET
->
2.SEQUENCE SET
FULL : 1S
QUAD : 1S
MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET
->
3.MASK
: OFF
MASK SET
->
4.COLOR LEVEL SET
->
NETWORK
SETTINGS
“OFF” flashes.
136
NETWORK
OPERATION
The <SCREEN SET> screen is displayed.
English
4
5
SCREEN SET
Turn the jog dial to select “ON” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
The cursor moves to “MASK SET”.
<SCREEN SET>
1.MULTI SCREEN
: NORMAL
QUAD POSITION SET
->
MULTI 9 POSITION SET
->
MULTI 16 POSITION SET
->
2.SEQUENCE SET
FULL : 1S
QUAD : 1S
MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET
->
3.MASK
: ON
MASK SET
->
4.COLOR LEVEL SET
->
6
7
- 12:00)
06 07 08
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
CH
MAIN MON.
MON. 2
NETWORK
14
OFF
OFF
OFF
12
OFF
OFF
OFF
Sets time period T-3.
T-4
Sets time period T-4.
13
OFF
OFF
OFF
15
OFF
OFF
OFF
Turn the jog dial to select the channel to
be changed and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
“OFF” flashes.
On the DSR-5709P, set for cameras No. 01 through 09.
<MASK SET>
TIME PERIOD : T-1 (09:00
CH
01 02 03 04 05
MAIN MON. OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
MON. 2
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
NETWORK
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
16
OFF
OFF
OFF
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
- 12:00)
06 07 08
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
CH
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MAIN MON. OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
10 Turn the jog dial to select “ON” or
“T-1” flashes for “TIME PERIOD”.
8
Sets time period T-2.
T-3
9
<MASK SET>
TIME PERIOD : T-1 (09:00
CH
01 02 03 04 05
MAIN MON. OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
MON. 2
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
NETWORK
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
11
OFF
OFF
OFF
T-2
z Each camera can be set individually for the main monitor,
monitor 2 and network video.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
10
OFF
OFF
OFF
Sets time period T-1.
If the time period is set to “ALL DAY LONG”, the display is
fixed to “T-1 (00:00-24:00)”.
The <MASK SET> screen is displayed.
09
OFF
OFF
OFF
Description
‹ T-1
<MASK SET>
TIME PERIOD : T-1 (09:00
CH
01 02 03 04 05
MAIN MON. OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
MON. 2
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
NETWORK
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
- 12:00)
06 07 08
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
CH
MAIN MON.
MON. 2
NETWORK
14
OFF
OFF
OFF
09
OFF
OFF
OFF
10
OFF
OFF
OFF
11
OFF
OFF
OFF
12
OFF
OFF
OFF
13
OFF
OFF
OFF
15
OFF
OFF
OFF
“OFF” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
After confirming this setting, the cursor moves one position to
the right.
16
OFF
OFF
OFF
Turn the jog dial to select the time
period and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
After setting the period, the cursor moves to “OFF” for channel
“01” and “MAIN MON.”.
- 12:00)
06 07 08
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
CH
MAIN MON.
MON. 2
NETWORK
14
OFF
OFF
OFF
09
OFF
OFF
OFF
10
OFF
OFF
OFF
11
OFF
OFF
OFF
12
OFF
OFF
OFF
13
OFF
OFF
OFF
15
OFF
OFF
OFF
- 12:00)
06 07 08
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
CH
MAIN MON.
MON. 2
NETWORK
14
OFF
OFF
OFF
09
OFF
OFF
OFF
10
OFF
OFF
OFF
11
OFF
OFF
OFF
12
OFF
OFF
OFF
13
OFF
OFF
OFF
15
OFF
OFF
OFF
16
OFF
OFF
OFF
Description
‹OFF
Masking is disabled.
ON
Masking is enabled.
z When set to “ON”, the playback video is also masked. (As
a result, playback video is not visible.)
To play back video, repeat step 5 and set masking to
“OFF”.
11 Use the same procedure to set other
channels.
English
16
OFF
OFF
OFF
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
<MASK SET>
TIME PERIOD : T-1 (09:00
CH
01 02 03 04 05
MAIN MON. OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
MON. 2
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
NETWORK
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
<MASK SET>
TIME PERIOD : T-1 (09:00
CH
01 02 03 04 05
MAIN MON. OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
MON. 2
OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
NETWORK
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
137
4
SCREEN SET
12 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
4
EXIT/OSD
Press the [CAMERA SELECT] button for
the camera whose color level is to be
set and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
INTRODUCTION
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
“5” flashes.
<COLOR LEVEL SET>
-
CH01
5
Use the following procedure to adjust the color of video
displayed on monitors.
1
5
Turn the jog dial to select the “COLOR
- turn the
LEVEL” setting and then
shuttle dial clockwise.
SETTINGS
Setting the color level
COLOR LEVEL :
OPERATION
z When setting a number of time periods together, after
completing step 10, use the jog dial to select the next
period and then repeat the process from step 6.
z The time period for “T-1” through “T-4” changes to that of
“TIME PERIOD A” or “TIME PERIOD B” on the <TIME
PERIOD SET> screen.
z Network mask settings are valid only for the user
connecting to the network with ID1. Users connecting with
ID2, ID3 and ID4 are able to display all channels.
<COLOR LEVEL SET>
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
MENU
Turn the jog dial to select “4.SCREEN
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
Setting
1 - 10
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
Turn the jog dial to select “4.COLOR
LEVEL SET” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
EXIT/OSD
NETWORK
SETTINGS
The <COLOR LEVEL SET> screen is displayed.
<COLOR LEVEL SET>
OTHER
COLOR LEVEL :
Description
Manual adjustment to one of ten levels.
Light (1) to Dark (10)
Display is automatically in color when set
to 10.
NETWORK
OPERATION
6
CH01
5
[Settings] (The default setting is “5”)
The <SCREEN SET> screen is displayed.
3
COLOR LEVEL :
NETWORK
CONTROL
2
CH01
5
138
English
5
POWER LOSS/USED TIME
[EXIT/OSD] button
Main Menu
<MAIN MENU>
1.INITIAL SET
2.RECORD SET
3.GENERAL SET
4.SCREEN SET
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME
6.INITIALIZATION LOG
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS
8.ADVANCED MENU SET
MOVE:JOG
[MENU] button
Shuttle dial
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
[SHUTTLE
HOLD]
button
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Jog dial
3
Use the following procedure to check the date and time of
power losses, the amount of hard disk operation time and the
amount of power-on time.
1
Select “USED TIME” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
The <USED TIME> screen is displayed.
Press the [MENU] button.
(1)
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
(2)
(3)
(4)
MENU
<USED
INTERNAL UNIT DISK1
DISK2
POWER
F/W: M 0.12-00 / S
USED TIME
2
(5)
Turn the jog dial to select “5.POWER
LOSS/USED TIME” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
(1)
<POWER LOSS/USED
LOSS
03-02 00:05
----- --:------ --:------ --:------ --:------ --:------ --:------ --:-USED TIME
TIME>
RECOVER
03-02 06:37
----- --:------ --:------ --:------ --:------ --:------ --:------ --:-->
Check the date and time of power losses and the amount of
hard disk operation time.
:
:
:
:
:
00123H
-----H
-----H
-----H
00123H
z Press the [MENU RESET] button to clear the power loss
information and number of power losses.
(1) LOSS/RECOVER
Displays information in order for the eight most recent power
losses (i.e., the date and time of loss and recovery).
The number on the left is the number of power losses.
(Example: #001)
For all numbers above 999, the number “999” is displayed.
4
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The display returns to the normal screen.
EXIT/OSD
English
USE
USE
USE
USE
(1) DISK 1 USE
The hard disk 1 power usage duration is displayed.
(2) DISK 2 USE
The hard disk 2 power usage duration is displayed. If there is
only one hard disk, “------” is displayed.
(3) POWER
Displays the total amount of power-on time for the digital video
recorder.
(4) F/W
Displays the firmware version.
(5) EX-DISK1/EX-DISK2/EX-DISK3/EX-DISK4 USE,
POWER
Total usage time is shown for each hard disk when expanded.
The <POWER LOSS/USED TIME> screen is displayed.
POWER
#001
EX-DISK1
EX-DISK2
EX-DISK3
EX-DISK4
POWER
TIME>
USE : 00123H
USE : -----H
: 00123H
00.21-02
139
6
INITIALIZATION LOG
<MAIN MENU>
1.INITIAL SET
2.RECORD SET
3.GENERAL SET
4.SCREEN SET
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME
6.INITIALIZATION LOG
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS
8.ADVANCED MENU SET
Shuttle dial
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
OPERATION
MOVE:JOG
[MENU] button
INTRODUCTION
[EXIT/OSD] button
Main Menu
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Jog dial
Use the following procedure to display the eight most recent
entries in the initialization and re-recording log for the hard
disk.
Press the [MENU] button.
3
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The display returns to the normal screen.
MENU
2
SETTINGS
1
z “INITI.” is displayed when recording areas are changed.
EXIT/OSD
NETWORK
CONTROL
Turn the jog dial to select
“6.INITIALIZATION LOG” and then turn
the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <INITIALIZATION LOG> screen is displayed.
(1)
(3)
< INITIALIZATION LOG
TIME AREA
ACTION
--:-- ------- ( -------:-- ------- ( -------:-- ------- ( -------:-- ------- ( -------:-- ------- ( -------:-- ------- ( -------:-- ------- ( -------:-- ------- ( -------:-- ------- ( ------
(4)
>
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
USER
----------------------------------------------------------------
NETWORK
OPERATION
DATE
-------------------------------------
(2)
NETWORK
SETTINGS
(1) DATE/TIME
Displays the time and date of initialization and area resetting.
(2) AREA
Displays the recording of the target area of initialization or
area resetting.
z ALL
z RECORD
z ARCHIVE
(3) ACTION
Displays whether initialization (JP.122) or AREA FULL
RESET (JP.84) was selected.
z INITI.
z RESET
(4) USER ID
Displays the user ID of the user that performed initialization
and area resetting.
OTHER
140
English
7
COPY MENU SETTINGS
[EXIT/OSD] button
Main Menu
<MAIN MENU>
1.INITIAL SET
2.RECORD SET
3.GENERAL SET
4.SCREEN SET
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME
6.INITIALIZATION LOG
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS
8.ADVANCED MENU SET
MOVE:JOG
[MENU] button
Shuttle dial
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Jog dial
3
Use the following procedure to save menu settings or user ID
settings on a USB memory or to load settings from a USB
memory back onto the digital video recorder. These functions
make it easy to share the same settings on a number of
different digital video recorders.
Also connect to a network via a PC and load from or save to
the hard disk.
Turn the jog dial to select “SAVE
MENUS TO USB MEMORY” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <WARNING> screen is displayed.
<WARNING>
SAVE MENUS TO USB MEMORY !!
<COPY MENU SETTINGS>
CONTINUE?
DVR TYPE VER. SA16-00.02
SAVE MENUS TO USB MEMORY
NO
->
LOAD MENUS FROM USB MEMORY ->
COPY USER ID SETTINGS
: NO
COPY RECORDING AREA SETTINGS : NO
*IF YOU CHOOSE 'YES' FOR 'AREA SETTINGS',
HARD DISK WILL BE INITIALIZED !
4
Saving menu settings
Turn the jog dial to select “YES” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The saving process begins.
Use the following procedure to save menu settings to a USB
memory.
Insert a USB memory into a USB terminal.
1
Press the [MENU] button.
SAVING TO USB MEMORY!!
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
MENU
2
When this is completed, “SAVING FINISHED!” is displayed. A
file named “MENUCOPY.BIN” is created in the USB memory
directory.
Turn the jog dial to select “7.COPY
MENU SETTINGS” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
The <COPY MENU SETTINGS> screen is displayed.
English
141
7
COPY MENU SETTINGS
5
Use the following procedure to load menu settings saved on a
USB memory to the digital video recorder.
Turn the jog dial to select “LOAD
MENUS FROM USB MEMORY” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
INTRODUCTION
Loading menu settings
The <WARNING> screen is displayed.
<WARNING>
z When loading a menu setting file to the recorder, specify
whether recording area settings are to be copied.
Normally, “COPY RECORDING AREA SETTINGS” is set
to “NO”. If this is set to “YES”, the hard disk is initialized as
part of the loading process and all recorded data is lost.
z Only files from the same DVR TYPE VER No. model can
be loaded. When loading of a file that cannot be loaded is
attempted, an error message is displayed.
CONTINUE?
NO
6
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
OPERATION
1
LOAD MENUS FROM USB MEMORY !!
Turn the jog dial to select “YES” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The loading process starts.
SETTINGS
MENU
2
Turn the jog dial to select “7.COPY
MENU SETTINGS” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
When the load is completed, “SYSTEM INITIALIZING” is
displayed and the display returns to the camera video.
The <COPY MENU SETTINGS> screen is displayed.
NETWORK
CONTROL
3
NETWORK
OPERATION
Turn the jog dial to select “COPY USER
ID SETTINGS” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
“NO” flashes.
<COPY MENU SETTINGS>
DVR TYPE VER. SA16-00.02
SAVE MENUS TO USB MEMORY
->
4
NETWORK
SETTINGS
LOAD MENUS FROM USB MEMORY ->
COPY USER ID SETTINGS
: NO
COPY RECORDING AREA SETTINGS : NO
*IF YOU CHOOSE ^YES^ FOR ^AREA SETTINGS^,
HARD DISK WILL BE INITIALIZED !
Turn the jog dial to select “NO” or
“YES” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
OTHER
142
English
7
COPY MENU SETTINGS
5
Copying the recording area settings
Use the following procedure to copy recording area settings.
1
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <WARNING> screen is displayed.
<WARNING>
Press the [MENU] button.
SAVE MENUS TO USB MEMORY!!
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
CONTINUE?
MENU
NO
2
Turn the jog dial to select “7.COPY
MENU SETTINGS” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
6
The <COPY MENU SETTINGS> screen is displayed.
The cursor is displayed on “SAVE MENUS TO USB
MEMORY”.
The copying process begins.
When copying is completed, the display returns to the
previous screen.
<COPY MENU SETTINGS>
<COPY MENU SETTINGS>
SAVING FINISHED!!
DVR TYPE VER. SA16-00.02
SAVE MENUS TO USB MEMORY
SAVE MENUS TO USB MEMORY
->
Turn the jog dial to select “COPY
RECORDING AREA SETTINGS” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“NO” flashes.
<COPY MENU SETTINGS>
DVR TYPE VER. SA16-00.02
SAVE MENUS TO USB MEMORY
->
LOAD MENUS FROM USB MEMORY ->
COPY USER ID SETTIGS
: NO
COPY RECORDING AREA SETTINGS : NO
*IF YOU CHOOSE 'YES' FOR 'AREA SETTINGS',
HARD DISK WILL BE INITIALIZED !
4
Turn the jog dial to select “YES” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor appears on “SAVE MENUS TO USB MEMORY”.
<COPY MENU SETTINGS>
DVR TYPE VER. SA16-00.02
SAVE MENUS TO USB MEMORY
->
LOAD MENUS FROM USB MEMORY ->
COPY USER ID SETTIGS
: NO
COPY RECORDING AREA SETTINGS : NO
*IF YOU CHOOSE 'YES' FOR 'AREA SETTINGS',
HARD DISK WILL BE INITIALIZED !
English
->
LOAD MENUS FROM USB MEMORY ->
COPY USER ID SETTINGS
: NO
COPY RECORDING AREA SETTINGS : NO
*IF YOU CHOOSE 'YES' FOR 'AREA SETTINGS',
HARD DISK WILL BE INITIALIZED !
LOAD MENUS FROM USB MEMORY ->
COPY USER ID SETTIGS
: NO
COPY RECORDING AREA SETTINGS : NO
*IF YOU CHOOSE 'YES' FOR 'AREA SETTINGS',
HARD DISK WILL BE INITIALIZED !
3
Turn the jog dial to select “YES” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
143
8
ADVANCED MENU SET
[FUNC.] button
<MAIN MENU>
1.INITIAL SET
2.RECORD SET
3.GENERAL SET
4.SCREEN SET
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME
6.INITIALIZATION LOG
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS
8.ADVANCED MENU SET
Shuttle dial
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
OPERATION
MOVE:JOG
[EXIT/OSD] button
INTRODUCTION
[MENU] button
Main Menu
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Jog dial
3. CAMERA CONTROL SET (JP.150)
Set camera control when
<CAMERA CONTROL SET>
cameras with remote
operation capability are
1. PROTOCOL/ADDRESS SET
connected.
Configuration
The following settings can be made with <ADVANCED MENU
SET>.
MOVE:JOG
->
->
->
->
->
4. TIME ZONE/NTP SET (JP.154)
Use the Internet or an NTP
server on a LAN to
TIME ZONE
synchronize the time.
SELECT:SHUTTLE
<TIME ZONE SET>
GMT Dublin, Lisbon, London
CH-01
STATIC
STATIC
STATIC
<NTP SET>
SYNC. WITH NTP SERVER : OFF
NTP SERVER ADDRESS
: 0. 0. 0. 0
TIME TO SYNCHRONIZE : 01:00
<ROI SET>
QUALITY
AREA 1 : OFF
AREA 2 : OFF
AREA 3 : OFF
NETWORK
CONTROL
EFFECTIVE REC MODE : NORMAL REC
AREA SET
NETWORK
OPERATION
1. ROI SET (JP.145)
Set the Region of Interest
(ROI) to enable recording,
at different picture quality,
only of areas preset on the
monitor or areas where
motion is detected. Areas
where intruders are
detected, for example, can
be recorded at higher
picture quality.
SETTINGS
2. ALARM REC TRIGGER SET
<ADVANCED MENU SET>
1.ROI SET
2.ALARM NOTICE SET
3.CAMERA CONTROL SET
4.TIME ZONE/NTP SET
->
---->
NETWORK
SETTINGS
2. ALARM NOTICE SET (JP.149)
Receive notification by e<ALARM NOTICE SET>
mail when an alarm event
ALARM NOTICE
: OFF
or device malfunction
SMTP SERVER ADDRESS :
occurs.
USER MAIL ADDRESS :
This cannot be set from
SEND MAIL ADDRESS SET ->
the digital video recorder.
SUBJECT :
Set this on a PC
AUTHENTICATION
: NO USE
connected to the network.
POP3 SERVER ADDRESS :
USER ID
:
PASSWORD
:
OTHER
144
English
8
ADVANCED MENU SET
3
Setting ROI
Set the Region of Interest (ROI) to enable recording at
different picture qualities, only of areas preset on the monitor.
Enables recording at high picture qualities for areas where
motion is detected.
This function allows you to raise the quality level for the preset
ROI or lower the quality level for unnecessary areas without
changing the image size each time.
Turn the jog dial to select “1.ROI SET”
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <ROI SET> screen is displayed.
CH-01
STATIC AREA 1 :
STATIC AREA 2 :
STATIC AREA 3 :
<ROI SET>
QUALITY
OFF
OFF
OFF
EFFECTIVE REC MODE : NORMAL REC
Setting the ROI
There are three static areas in the ROI. The static areas are
fixed and preset.
Perform the following settings.
z QUALITY: Set for each of the three static areas in the ROI.
z EFFECTIVE MODE: Set to perform normal recording or
alarm recording.
z AREA SET: Set the location and size of each static area.
AREA SET
4
---->
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The camera number flashes.
CH-01
STATIC AREA 1 :
STATIC AREA 2 :
STATIC AREA 3 :
z Refer to “Setting ROI area” (JP.147) for static area
settings.
<ROI SET>
QUALITY
OFF
OFF
OFF
EFFECTIVE REC MODE : NORMAL REC
z If ROI settings overlap, the settings from the previous row
are prioritized.
1
AREA SET
5
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
MENU
---->
Turn the jog dial to select the camera
number for the camera to set ROI for
and turn the shuttle dial clockwise
twice.
The cursor moves to “QUALITY” for “STATIC AREA 1”, and
“OFF” flashes.
2
Turn the jog dial to select
“8.ADVANCED MENU SET” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
CH-01
STATIC AREA 1 :
STATIC AREA 2 :
STATIC AREA 3 :
The <ADVANCED MENU SET> screen is displayed.
<ROI SET>
QUALITY
OFF
OFF
OFF
EFFECTIVE REC MODE : NORMAL REC
AREA SET
English
145
---->
8
6
ADVANCED MENU SET
9
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“NORMAL REC” flashes.
The cursor moves to “STATIC AREA 2”.
CH-01
STATIC AREA 1 :
STATIC AREA 2 :
STATIC AREA 3 :
CH-01
STATIC AREA 1 :
STATIC AREA 2 :
STATIC AREA 3 :
<ROI SET>
QUALITY
MIN
OFF
OFF
Setting
‹OFF
10 Turn the jog dial to select the
---->
“EFFECTIVE REC MODE” setting and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
7
Description
The cursor moves to “AREA SET”.
Lowest quality
Low quality
Normal
(Same picture quality as outside ROI area)
HIGH
Fine
MAX
Best quality
CH-01
STATIC AREA 1 :
STATIC AREA 2 :
STATIC AREA 3 :
AREA SET
‹NORMAL REC
EFFECTIVE REC MODE : NORMAL REC
The cursor moves to “EFFECTIVE REC MODE”.
ROI is enabled during alarm recording.
NORMAL/
ALARM
ROI is enabled during normal and alarm
recording.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
<ROI SET>
QUALITY
MIN
LOW
HIGH
EFFECTIVE REC MODE : NORMAL REC
AREA SET
ROI is enabled during normal recording.
ALARM REC
NETWORK
OPERATION
---->
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
CH-01
STATIC AREA 1 :
STATIC AREA 2 :
STATIC AREA 3 :
Description
NETWORK
CONTROL
<ROI SET>
QUALITY
AREA 1 : MIN
AREA 2 : LOW
AREA 3 : HIGH
AREA SET
---->
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
8
<ROI SET>
QUALITY
MIN
LOW
HIGH
EFFECTIVE REC MODE : NORMAL REC
Use the same procedure to set the
“QUALITY” settings in “STATIC AREA
2” and “STATIC AREA 3”.
CH-01
STATIC
STATIC
STATIC
---->
SETTINGS
LOW
OPERATION
AREA SET
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
MIN
<ROI SET>
QUALITY
MIN
LOW
HIGH
EFFECTIVE REC MODE : NORMAL REC
EFFECTIVE REC MODE : NORMAL REC
AREA SET
INTRODUCTION
Turn the jog dial to select the
“QUALITY” setting and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
---->
OTHER
146
English
8
ADVANCED MENU SET
11 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
14 Turn the jog dial to move the cursor (the
orange †) to the lower right of the
position where an area is to be set and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <AREA SET> screen is displayed.
2
The cursor (the orange †) moves to the top left of frame 2.
1
2
1
3
CH-01
FUNC.
3
CH-01
z When “QUALITY” are all set to “OFF”, the <AREA SET>
screen is not displayed.
z The frame is not displayed for “STATIC AREA” numbers
with “QUALITY” set to “OFF”.
Turn the jog dial to move the cursor to the left or right.
Press the [FUNC.] button and turn the jog dial to move the
cursor up or down.
15 Set the areas in frame 2 and frame 3 in
Setting ROI area
the same way.
12 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “T-1”.
Area settings mode is activated and an icon appears in the
upper right part of the screen.
Icon
2
1
2
3
1
CH-01
3
CH-01
z Turn the shuttle dial counter-clockwise to return to the
previous operation.
z If areas coincide, the smaller area number is prioritized.
z Large ROI size decreases ROI effectiveness.
13 Turn the jog dial to move the cursor (the
orange †) to the upper left of the
position where an area is to be set and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
16 With the mark in the upper right corner
The cursor moves to the bottom right.
of the screen disappeared, turn the
shuttle counter-clockwise.
Area setting is completed and the display returns to the <ROI
SET> screen.
2
17 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
FUNC.
The normal display is restored.
3
EXIT/OSD
CH-01
Turn the jog dial to move the cursor to the left or right.
Press the [FUNC.] button and turn the jog dial to move the
cursor up or down.
English
147
8
ADVANCED MENU SET
INTRODUCTION
Confirming picture quality of ROI setting
Since the picture quality you set for each area is reflected
directly on the <AREA SET> screen, you can easily compare
the area of interest (ROI) with ordinary areas.
<AREA SET> screen
2
1
OPERATION
3
CH-01
Your new picture quality setting is applied to the actual
image displayed in the “STATIC AREA”.
SETTINGS
z The <AREA SET> screen displays an image in the
recording mode configured in “EFFECTIVE REC MODE”.
When it is set to “NORMAL/ALARM”, the screen displays
an image in normal recording mode.
z You cannot check the picture quality on the <AREA SET>
screen while recording is in progress or prealarm recording
is in effect.
NETWORK
CONTROL
NETWORK
OPERATION
NETWORK
SETTINGS
OTHER
148
English
8
ADVANCED MENU SET
(7) POP3 SERVER ADDRESS
Displays the POP3 server address.
(8) USER ID
Displays the user ID.
(9) PASSWORD
Displays the password.
Setting alarm notification
Use the following procedure to receive notification by e-mail
when an alarm event occurs while the digital video recorder is
connected to a network. Alarm notification cannot be set from
the digital video recorder.
Set this on a PC connected to the network. (JP.207)
The following section describes how to display the alarm
notification setting details.
4
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <SEND MAIL ADDRESS SET> screen is displayed.
z When alarm notification settings are performed on a
computer connected to the network, unavailable
characters are displayed as “*” on the digital video
recorder.
1
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is displayed.
MENU
2
5
Turn the jog dial to select “2.ALARM
NOTICE SET” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
EXIT/OSD
<ALARM NOTICE SET>
ALARM NOTICE
: OFF
SMTP SERVER ADDRES :
USER MAIL ADDRES
:
SEND MAIL ADDRESS SET ->
SUBJECT :
AUTHENTICATION
POP3 SERVER ADDRESS
USER ID
PASSWORD
: NO USE
:
:
:
(1) ALARM NOTICE
Displays whether or not an alarm notification is sent.
(2) SMTP SERVER ADDRESS
Displays the SMTP server address.
(3) USER MAIL ADDRESS
Displays the e-mail address from which the alarm notification
is sent.
(4) SEND MAIL ADDRESS SET
Displays the <SEND MAIL ADDRESS SET> screen.
(J step 4)
(5) SUBJECT
Displays the e-mail subject.
(6) AUTHENTICATION
Displays whether or not user authentication is performed.
English
(1)
(3)
(2)
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The normal display is restored.
The <ALARM NOTICE SET> screen is displayed.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
IMAGE
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
(1) USE
Displays whether or not an alarm notification is sent to the
recipient e-mail address.
(2) MAIL ADDRESS
Displays the e-mail address to which the alarm notification is
sent.
(3) IMAGE
Displays whether or not an alarm image is attached to the email.
Turn the jog dial to select
“8.ADVANCED MENU SET” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <ADVANCED MENU SET> screen is displayed.
3
<SEND MAIL ADDRESS SET>
USE MAIL ADDRESS
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
149
8
ADVANCED MENU SET
4
Settings are required when a remote control camera(s) is
connected with the digital video recorder.
Through making the connections by following the procedure
below, you can control a camera(s) in the full screen mode.
Turn the jog dial to select
“1.PROTOCOL/ADDRESS SET” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <PROTOCOL/ADDRESS SET> screen is displayed.
5
Turn the jog dial to select the camera
number corresponding to a connected
dome camera and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
“OFF” flashes for “PROTOCOL”.
On the DSR-5709P, cameras No. 01-09 are displayed.
the settings under “ALARM REC MODE SET” and
“PROTOCOL/ADDRESS SET”.
MENU
Turn the jog dial to select
“8.ADVANCED MENU SET” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
6
The <ADVANCED MENU SET> screen is displayed.
Turn the jog dial to select a protocol and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to the next camera number.
Turn the jog dial to select “3.CAMERA
CONTROL SET” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
The <CAMERA CONTROL SET> screen is displayed.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
<CAMERA CONTROL SET>
1. PROTOCOL/ADDRESS SET
->
2. ALARM REC TRIGGER SET
->
‹OFF
SANYO RS485
SANYO RS485
BBV COAX
BBV COAX
(Also supports AUX commands.)
PELCO COAX
PELCO COAX
2ND RS-485/422
2ND RS-485/422
COAX (H-SSP)
COAX (H-SSP)
OTHER
150
Description
No protocol
ADD.
----------------9600bps
NETWORK
SETTINGS
<PROTOCOL/ADDRESS SET>
CH PROTOCOL
ADD. CH PROTOCOL
01 SANYO RS-485 001
09 OFF
02 OFF
--10 OFF
03 OFF
--11 OFF
04 OFF
--12 OFF
05 OFF
--13 OFF
06 OFF
--14 OFF
07 OFF
--15 OFF
08 OFF
--16 OFF
2ND RS-485/422 PROTOCOL : OFF
NETWORK
OPERATION
3
ADD.
----------------9600bps
NETWORK
CONTROL
<PROTOCOL/ADDRESS SET>
CH PROTOCOL
ADD. CH PROTOCOL
01 OFF
--09 OFF
02 OFF
--10 OFF
03 OFF
--11 OFF
04 OFF
--12 OFF
05 OFF
--13 OFF
06 OFF
--14 OFF
07 OFF
--15 OFF
08 OFF
--16 OFF
2ND RS-485/422 PROTOCOL : OFF
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
2
SETTINGS
z If “ADDRESS” in the <RS-485 SET> screen (JP.121) is
set to between “001” and “008”, camera control settings
can be performed. Camera control settings are not
available if “ADDRESS” is set to “000” or between “009”
and “127”.
z Before configuring trigger actions, be sure to configure
ADD.
----------------9600bps
OPERATION
<PROTOCOL/ADDRESS SET>
CH PROTOCOL
ADD. CH PROTOCOL
01 OFF
--09 OFF
02 OFF
--10 OFF
03 OFF
--11 OFF
04 OFF
--12 OFF
05 OFF
--13 OFF
06 OFF
--14 OFF
07 OFF
--15 OFF
08 OFF
--16 OFF
2ND RS-485/422 PROTOCOL : OFF
Connections necessary for remote operation:
z Connect coaxial control cameras to the VIDEO terminal.
z Connect the Sanyo RS-485 control camera to the RS-485
(RJ-11) terminal.
z Connect another maker’s RS485/422 control camera to the
2ND RS485/422 terminal.
1
INTRODUCTION
Camera control settings
English
8
ADVANCED MENU SET
DVR/
RS-485
address
z “COAX” stands for coaxial control and the video signal and
camera control signal. This requires no further wiring for
signal control.
7
8
Use the same procedure to set the
connection channels of other dome
cameras.
When “2ND RS485/422” is selected for
“PROTOCOL”, turn the jog dial to select
“2ND RS485/422 PROTOCOL”, and turn
the shuttle clockwise.
<PROTOCOL/ADDRESS SET>
CH PROTOCOL
ADD. CH PROTOCOL
01 SANYO RS-485 001
09 OFF
02 BBV COAX
--10 OFF
03 PELCO COAX
--11 OFF
04 2ND RS-485/422 004
12 OFF
05 OFF
--13 OFF
06 OFF
--14 OFF
07 OFF
--15 OFF
08 OFF
--16 OFF
2ND RS-485/422 PROTOCOL : OFF
9
DVR1:001
ADD.
----------------9600bps
DVR2:002
Camera control
address
CH1
001
CH1
017
CH2
002
CH2
018
CH3
003
CH3
019
CH4
004
CH4
020
CH5
005
CH5
021
CH6
006
•
•
CH7
007
•
•
CH8
008
•
•
CH9
009
CH1
113
CH10
010
DVR8:008
CH2
114
CH11
011
CH3
115
CH12
012
CH4
116
CH13
013
CH5
117
CH14
014
•
•
CH15
015
CH15
127
CH16
016
CH16
000*1
10 Once the settings are completed on the
<PROTOCOL/ADDRESS SET> screen,
turn the shuttle dial counter-clockwise.
The display returns to the <CAMERA CONTROL SET>
screen.
ADD.
----------------9600bps
<CAMERA CONTROL SET>
z From the data speed options (2400/4800/9600bps) for the
protocol you select for “2nd RS485/422 PROTOCOL”,
select one that is compatible with the data speed of the
camera.
z Camera control address
The camera address is a fixed value and is as follows.
If a protocol other than SANYO RS-485 or 2ND RS485/
RS422 is selected, “---” is displayed for the cameral control
address.
On the DSR-5709P, CH1-CH9 are available.
English
DVR/
RS-485
address
*1 Cannot be operated from a VSP-9000 controller.
Turn the jog dial to select the protocol
to set and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
<PROTOCOL/ADDRESS SET>
CH PROTOCOL
ADD. CH PROTOCOL
01 SANYO RS-485 001
09 OFF
02 BBV COAX
--10 OFF
03 PELCO COAX
--11 OFF
04 2ND RS-485/422 004
12 OFF
05 OFF
--13 OFF
06 OFF
--14 OFF
07 OFF
--15 OFF
08 OFF
--16 OFF
2ND RS-485/422 PROTOCOL : OFF
Camera control
address
151
1. PROTOCOL/ADDRESS SET
->
2. ALARM REC TRIGGER SET
->
8
ADVANCED MENU SET
11 Turn the jog dial to select “2. ALARM
13 Turn the jog dial to select the
The <ALAMR TRIGGER SET> screen is displayed.
The cursor moves to the next “ACTION” field.
<ALARM REC TRIGGER SET>
ACTION
CH ACTION
OFF
09 --------OFF
10 --------OFF
11 --------OFF
12 ----------------13 ----------------14 ----------------15 ----------------16 ---------
CH
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
On the <ALARM REC TRIGGER SET> screen, you can
specify the interlocked operation of the camera when an alarm
is detected. You can configure the camera to automatically
change lens orientation, auto-pan or tour on alarm detection.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
‹OFF
PRESET
number, and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
“OFF” for “ACTION” flashes.
For DSR-5709P, the camera numbers from “01” to “09” are
displayed.
Moves the camera lens to the angle
corresponding to your selected preset
number.
PAN
Starts automatic panning.
TOUR
Starts tour.
SEQUENCE
Starts sequence.
z For “PRESET”, you can set “PRESET2-9” with DSR-5709P
and “PRESET2-16” with DSR-5716P.
z If a protocol is not set in the <PROTOCOL/ADDRESS
SET> screen, “------” is displayed for “ACTION” and no
value can be set.
14 Use the same procedure as above to set
the interlocked operation of other
cameras.
NETWORK
OPERATION
z In the case more than one camera has issued an alarm
simultaneously, some or all trigger actions may fail to
operate correctly because only one camera can be
operated at a time.
z Actually available actions depend on each camera. For
more information, refer to the camera's instruction manual.
NETWORK
CONTROL
<ALARM REC TRIGGER SET>
ACTION
CH ACTION
OFF
09 --------OFF
10 --------OFF
11 --------OFF
12 ----------------13 ----------------14 ----------------15 ----------------16 ---------
Description
No action triggered.
SETTINGS
12 Turn the jog dial to select a camera
CH
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
<ALARM REC TRIGGER SET>
ACTION
CH ACTION
OFF
09 --------OFF
10 --------OFF
11 --------OFF
12 ----------------13 ----------------14 ----------------15 ----------------16 ---------
OPERATION
CH
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
interlocked operation, and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
INTRODUCTION
REC TRIGGER SET” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
15 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
EXIT/OSD
NETWORK
SETTINGS
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
OTHER
152
English
8
ADVANCED MENU SET
Operating the camera with the digital video
recorder
How to Register Preset Positions
To register preset positions that are applied during camera
control, follow these steps:
1
Press the [FUNC.] button (1).
The FUNC. indicator lights up in blue to indicate that you are
now in camera control mode.
2
Set the camera lens orientation.
Adjust the lens to your desired orientation using the pan/tilt
functions.
3
1
Press and hold the [PRESET] button
(2) for about 3 seconds.
The FUNC. indicator lights up and camera operation mode is
activated.
The buzzer beeps twice and the button indicator flickers (at
4Hz) to indicate that you are now in preset registration mode.
4
Press the [FUNC.] button.
FUNC.
Press one of the [CAMERA SELECT]
buttons (3) to specify the channel
number for the camera.
2
Click the buttons to operate the camera.
21
3
z Each preset number is associated with a specific channel
number.
For example, CH02 corresponds to PRESET 2.
153
Operation
[MENU]
button
[MENU] button
Displays the camera menu
screen.
[ENTER]
button
[EXIT/OSD] button
Determines items on the
camera menu screen.
[QUAD] button
Press the [PRESET] button
and then the [CAMERA
SELECT] button to move to
a preset position.
[PRESET]
button
English
Button name in
normal mode
Button
The button stops flickering, and the camera lens orientation at
the time of button press is registered as the preset position.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 above to register the preset positions for
other cameras.
[AUTO PAN]
[MULTI] button
button
Enables auto panning
(refer to note)
[SEQUENCE]
[MON2] button
button
Enables automatic camera
selection (refer to note)
[TOUR]
button
[PLUS] button
Enables TOUR (refer to
note)
[ZOOMK]
button
[
Zooms out
[ZOOML]
button
[alarm
[AF] button
[PLAY/STOP]
button
Enables auto focus
[FOCUS]
button
[SHUTTLE HOLD]
button
Press the [FOCUS] button
and use [ZOOM ↑] or
[ZOOM ↓] button to manually
adjust the focus.
alarm] button
] button
Zooms in
[IRIS] button [STILL] button
Press the [IRIS] button and
use [ZOOM ↑] or [ZOOM ↓]
button to adjust the iris
(aperture).
PAN
Shuttle dial
Controls manual panning
TILT
Jog dial
Controls manual tilting
8
ADVANCED MENU SET
INTRODUCTION
Time zone/NTP setting
z Turn the shuttle dial during automatic panning, automatic
camera selection, or TOUR for manual panning and turn
the jog dial for manual tilt and to cancel automatic modes.
z Operation is only possible for one camera.
z When switching to another camera during automatic
panning, automatic camera selection, or TOUR, the
following operations are available only for the second
camera. Automatic panning, automatic camera selection,
and TOUR continue for the first camera.
z When an alarm occurs during camera operation, the CH
that the alarm occurred on is displayed on the screen and
camera operation mode is canceled.
z Depending on the connected camera, some functions do
not operate even when buttons are pressed.
Use the following procedure to synchronize the time using the
Internet or an NTP server on a LAN.
1
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is displayed.
MENU
OPERATION
2
Turn the jog dial to select
“8.ADVANCED MENU SET” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <ADVANCED MENU SET> screen is displayed.
SETTINGS
3
Turn the jog dial to select “5.TIME
ZONE/NTP SET” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
The <TIME ZONE SET> / <NTP SET> screen is displayed.
NETWORK
CONTROL
<TIME ZONE SET>
TIME ZONE
GMT Dublin, Lisbon, London
<NTP SET>
SYNC. WITH NTP SERVER : OFF
NTP SERVER ADDRESS
: 0. 0. 0. 0
TIME TO SYNCHRONIZE : 01:00
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“GMT Dublin, Lisbon, London” flashes.
5
Turn the jog dial to select the “TIME
ZONE” setting and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
<TIME ZONE SET>
TIME ZONE
GMT Dublin, Lisbon, London
NETWORK
SETTINGS
Set the time zone. Select the region where the digital video
recorder is installed.
The cursor moves to “SYNC. WITH NTP SERVER”.
NETWORK
OPERATION
4
OTHER
<NTP SET>
SYNC. WITH NTP SERVER : OFF
NTP SERVER ADDRESS
: 0. 0. 0. 0
TIME TO SYNCHRONIZE : 01:00
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
GMT-12 Eniwetok,
Kwajalein
154
Description
Greenwich Mean Time -12
hours, Eniwetok, Kwajalein
English
8
ADVANCED MENU SET
Setting
6
Description
GMT-11 Midway Island,
Samoa
Greenwich Mean Time -11
hours, Midway Island, Samoa
GMT-10 Hawaii
Greenwich Mean Time -10
hours, Hawaii
GMT-09 Alaska
Greenwich Mean Time -9
hours, Alaska
GMT-08 Pacific Time
Greenwich Mean Time -8
hours, Pacific Time
GMT-07 Arizona, Mountain
Time
Greenwich Mean Time -7
hours, Arizona
GMT-06 Central Time
Greenwich Mean Time -6
hours, Central Time
GMT-05 Eastern Time
Greenwich Mean Time -5
hours, Eastern Time
GMT-04 Atlantic Time
(Canada)
Greenwich Mean Time -4
hours, Atlantic Time (Canada)
GMT-03:30 Newfoundland
Greenwich Mean Time -3 hours
30 minutes, Newfoundland
GMT-03 Brasilia
Greenwich Mean Time -3
hours, Brasilia
GMT-02 Mid-Atlantic
Greenwich Mean Time -2
hours, Mid-Atlantic
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“OFF” flashes.
<TIME ZONE SET>
TIME ZONE
GMT Dublin, Lisbon, London
<NTP SET>
SYNC. WITH NTP SERVER : OFF
NTP SERVER ADDRESS
: 0. 0. 0. 0
TIME TO SYNCHRONIZE : 01:00
7
Turn the jog dial to select “ON” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “NTP SERVER ADDRESS”.
<TIME ZONE SET>
TIME ZONE
GMT Dublin, Lisbon, London
<NTP SET>
SYNC. WITH NTP SERVER : ON
NTP SERVER ADDRESS
: 0. 0. 0. 0
TIME TO SYNCHRONIZE : 01:00
GMT-01 Azores, Cap Verde Greenwich Mean Time -1 hour,
Is.
Azores
‹GMT Dublin, Lisbon,
London
English
Greenwich Mean Time, Dublin,
Lisbon, London
GMT+01 Amsterdam,
Berlin, Rome
Greenwich Mean Time +1 hour,
Amsterdam, Berlin, Rome
GMT+02 Athens, Istanbul,
Minsk
Greenwich Mean Time +2
hours, Athens, Istanbul, Minsk
GMT+03 Moscow,
Baghdad, Riyadh
Greenwich Mean Time +3
hours, Moscow, Baghdad,
Riyadh
GMT+03:30 Tehran
Greenwich Mean Time +3
hours 30 minutes, Tehran
GMT+04 Kabul, Baku,
Tbilisi
Greenwich Mean Time +4
hours, Kabul, Baku, Tbilisi
GMT+05 Islamabad,
Tashkent
Greenwich Mean Time +5
hours, Islamabad, Tashkent
GMT+05:30 Mumbai,
Kolkata
Greenwich Mean Time +5
hours 30 minutes, Mumbai,
Kolkata
GMT+06 Almaty, Dhaka
Greenwich Mean Time +6
hours, Almaty, Dhaka
GMT+07 Bangkok, Hanoi,
Jakarta
Greenwich Mean Time +7
hours, Bangkok, Hanoi, Jakarta
GMT+08 Beijing, Hong
Kong
Greenwich Mean Time +8
hours, Beijing, Hong Kong
GMT+09 Osaka, Sapporo,
Tokyo
Greenwich Mean Time +9
hours, Osaka, Sapporo, Tokyo
GMT+10 Canberra, Sydney
Greenwich Mean Time +10
hours, Canberra, Sydney
GMT+11 Magadan,
Solomon Is.
Greenwich Mean Time +11
hours, Magadan, Solomon Is.
GMT+12 Auckland,
Wellington
Greenwich Mean Time +12
hours, Auckland, Wellington
GMT+12 Fiji, Marshall Is.
Greenwich Mean Time +12
hours, Fiji, Marshall Is.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
ON
‹OFF
8
Description
To use NTP server
To not use NTP server
Set “NTP SERVER ADDRESS”.
(1) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
(2) Turn the jog dial to select the first number (0 to 255) and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise. (Also use the
[CAMERA SELECT] 0-9 buttons or the [QUAD] button (0)
to input.)
(3) Use the same procedure to enter the remaining numbers.
The cursor moves to “TIME TO SYNCHRONIZE”.
<TIME ZONE SET>
TIME ZONE
GMT Dublin, Lisbon, London
<NTP SET>
SYNC. WITH NTP SERVER : OFF
NTP SERVER ADDRESS
: 192.168.001.020
TIME TO SYNCHRONIZE : 01:00
155
8
9
ADVANCED MENU SET
INTRODUCTION
Turn the jog dial to select “TIME TO
SYNCHRONIZE” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
“01” flashes.
<TIME ZONE SET>
TIME ZONE
GMT Dublin, Lisbon, London
OPERATION
<NTP SET>
SYNC. WITH NTP SERVER : ON
NTP SERVER ADDRESS
: 192.168.001.020
TIME TO SYNCHRONIZE : 01:00
10 Set “TIME TO SYNCHRONIZE”.
SETTINGS
Set the time to synchronize. The time is synchronized with the
clock on the NTP server and updated each day at the
specified time.
Hours: Select from 01 to 23.
Minutes: Select 00, 10, 20, 30, 40, or 50.
NETWORK
CONTROL
Example: 10:30
(1) Turn the jog dial to select “10” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
“00” (minutes) flashes.
(2) Turn the jog dial to select “30” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
Default setting: 01:00 (Time is updated at 1 AM.)
<TIME ZONE SET>
TIME ZONE
GMT Dublin, Lisbon, London
<NTP SET>
SYNC. WITH NTP SERVER : ON
NTP SERVER ADDRESS
: 192.168.001.020
TIME TO SYNCHRONIZE : 10:30
NETWORK
OPERATION
11 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
EXIT/OSD
NETWORK
SETTINGS
OTHER
156
English
Manual for Remote Operation
by Network Connection
1
GETTING PREPARED
The digital video recorder can be remotely controlled from PCs when the unit is connected to a network.
Camera
1
DVR (Digital Video Recorder)
16
Switch
Switch
LAN cable
10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX
Category 5
1
15
PC/AT compatible
machine
Operations possible with PC control
Digital video recorder network
settings
z Menu settings, recording, playback, and other similar
operations are possible from the PC screen.
z A maximum of 15 PCs can be simultaneously connected to
a single DVR (Digital Video Recorder). However, the
maximum number may not be possible depending on the
NET conditions and the number of screens displayed.
(Example)
z Users with user level LV1: 12 PCs
z Users with user level LV2: 2 PCs
z Users with user level LV4: 1 PC
z Control of the DVR can be freely switched from the unit
itself to the PC and vice versa. Note that operation of the
unit is not affected by simply connecting a cable.
z In order to provide security for computer control, operations
are restricted according to the user level. (JP.197)
z When controlling the digital video recorder by computer
over the Internet or LAN, network settings such as IP
address settings are necessary.
See P.125 for more setting details.
z When a pre-existing network is being used, a check must
be carried out by that network’s administrator to confirm
that the set IP addresses do not coincide with other IP
addresses already in use.
Saving and playing back sound
z The dedicated application DVR Viewer2 (Ver. 1.0.0 or
later) must be installed in order to store or play back audio
on a networked PC or to play back video with audio stored
on a PC, USB memory or other storage media.
Please either install the software from the CD-ROM
included with this product or download it from our website
listed below.
z The JPEG2000 plug-in is required to view images.
Please download it from our website listed below.
z Settings for some functions such as live motion detection
cannot be made with Internet Explorer. To make further
detailed settings, use the dedicated software. Please
contact the dealer for details.
Sanyo website URL:
http://www.sanyosecurity.com
z You can also access the downloading website by clicking
the [Get JPEG2000 PLUG-IN] button on the control panel.
English
159
1
GETTING PREPARED
2
Click the [Security] tab.
INTRODUCTION
Installing DVR Viewer2
The [Security] screen is displayed.
See P.211 for installing and operating DVR Viewer2.
Setting Internet Options
After installing DVR Viewer2, use the following procedure to
make the Internet security settings.
1
OPERATION
Select [Internet Options...] from the
Internet Explorer [Tools] menu.
The [Internet Options] window is displayed.
Example: Windows XP
SETTINGS
3
Click [Custom Level...].
Confirm that [Run ActiveX controls and plug-ins] is set to
[Enable].
If this is not the case, click [Enable] for [Run ActiveX controls
and plug-ins] to configure this setting as shown below.
NETWORK
CONTROL
The [Security Settings] window is displayed.
NETWORK
OPERATION
NETWORK
SETTINGS
OTHER
This completes the Internet security setting procedure.
160
English
1
GETTING PREPARED
6
Minimum system requirements
Computer: PC/AT compatible machine
Operating system: Windows 98/98 SE/Me/NT 4.0/2000/XP
Browser: Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2 or later
Video: 65,000 colors, resolution 800 x 600 dpi or higher
Select [Use the following IP address:]
and then type in the IP address and the
subnet mask.
Recommended specifications
CPU: Pentium® 4 (2 GHz) or better
RAM: 256 MB minimum
Operating system: Windows 2000, XP, or later
Audio playback requirements
DirectX and compatible sound card
Speakers
TCP/IP settings
The following example applies to Windows XP.
Transmission control protocol/Internet protocol (TCP/IP) is the
standard protocol used for the Internet and intranets. If this
unit is to be used while connected to a network, specify a
TCP/IP to suit each operating system.
1
7
Click the [Network and Internet
Connections] icon in the [Control
Panel].
8
The [Network and Internet Connections] window is displayed.
2
Click [Network Connections].
z Ask the network administrator for details on the IP address,
subnet mask, default gateway and DNS settings.
Right-click on the LAN card (Ethernet
adapter) being used and then select
[Properties] from the pop-up menu.
Security settings
If using Outlook Express version 6 SP1 or later:
To receive mail with image attachments with the alarm
notification function, the following must be set.
The [General] tab in the [Local Area Connection Properties]
window is displayed.
4
Check that [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)]
is selected in the list of components
used by the Ethernet board displayed in
the [This connection uses the following
items:] box.
Select [Tools] J [Options...] J [Security] in order and uncheck
“Do not allow attachments to be saved or opened that could
potentially be a virus”.
It is recommended that anti-virus procedures be implemented
before changing these settings.
If [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)] is not selected, select it.
5
Click [Properties].
The [General] tab in the [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
Properties] window is displayed.
English
Click [OK].
This completes the TCP/IP settings.
The [Network Connections] window is displayed, and the
settings for the LAN card (Ethernet adapter) being used are
displayed in the [LAN or High-Speed Internet] column.
3
Check the settings, and then click [OK].
The display returns to the [Local Area Connection Properties]
window.
161
2
NETWORK CONTROL
1
INTRODUCTION
Controlling from a PC
z In the network settings (JP.125), if a value other than “80”
is set as the default port value, enter a colon (:) and then
the port number after the IP address.
For example, if the port number was set as “60001” you
should enter
http://192.168.0.1:60001/
Launch the web browser on the PC.
Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2 or later is supported.
These operating systems are supported: Windows 98, 98 SE,
Me, NT 4.0, 2000 and XP
Enter a password (for verification
purposes).
OPERATION
3
z If no web browser is installed on the PC, install Internet
Explorer before proceeding.
z If the Java Script run-time error message is displayed while
Internet Explorer is being used, modify that application’s
settings as follows:
(1) Select [Tools] J [Internet Options] J [Advanced] in
order.
(2) Uncheck [Display a notification about every script error]
from the [Advanced] screen, and check [Disable script
debugging].
A verification screen is displayed when accessed. Enter [User
name] and [Password] for verification purposes and click the
[OK] button.
If the password is incorrect, the password entry screen is
displayed again, prompting you to re-enter the password.
SETTINGS
NETWORK
CONTROL
z The following are default settings for user ID and
password.
User ID
4444
ID3
3333
ID2
2222
ID1
1111
Refer to P.117 for details on how to set user level and
authorization.
z Check “ON” for “Remember my password” to save [User
name] and [Password]. Verification will be carried out
automatically on subsequent occasions. Note, however,
that it may not be possible to save a password other than
that used for the default connection.
z Up to fifteen PCs can be connected simultaneously to a
single DVR. Users at LV3 and LV4 are restricted to one
PC, and users at LV2 are restricted to three PCs.
Enter the unit’s URL.
In the address bar of a browser, enter the IP address to
access the digital video recorder and press the [Enter] key.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
Example:
NETWORK
OPERATION
2
Password
ID4
When connecting the unit directly to the Internet (without a
router) set the fixed IP address received from the Internet
service provider.
OTHER
When creating a LAN and setting a private IP address on the
unit, the port forwarder settings must be completed for the
router. When setting the port forwarder, enter the WAN side
IP address in the URL.
Contact the network administrator for more details.
(Depending on the device, “Port forwarding” may be called
“Static IP Masquerade”, “Address translation”, “Port mapping”,
or “Virtual server”.)
162
English
2
NETWORK CONTROL
Disconnecting
1
z When the maximum number of PCs (15) is connected to
the digital video recorder and then an upper-level user
accesses the unit from a different PC, the most recent
lower-level user is automatically disconnected and priority
is given to the upper-level user.
An error message is displayed on the PC of the
disconnected user. (JP.164)
z If entry of an incorrect password is repeated or [Cancel] is
clicked, [AUTHENTICATION ERROR] displayed.
z If a user clicks a restricted button during computer control,
the password input screen is displayed to verify the
required user level.
4
Click the
button on the operation
screen of the PC.
The connection is cancelled and control rights are returned to
the unit.
z To forcibly cancel PC access from the unit, press and hold
the [SHUTTLE HOLD] button for at least 3 seconds.
z Access from the PC is not permitted for a period of 10
seconds after access is cancelled.
z The access connection is also cancelled and control rights
then switch back to the unit whenever communication with
the PC is not possible for a period of about 1 minute or
more.
z If the browser is closed without clicking the
button,
approximately 1 minute is required before reconnection is
possible.
Select a language and click [OK].
The operation screen is displayed and computer control is
now enabled.
Messages displayed when connected
Messages related to the switching of control or the network
connection status may be displayed on-screen at any time.
Display on the unit
„ When control rights are switched to the PC
“NETWORK CONTROL” is displayed on the monitor.
The “NETWORK CONTROL” message is displayed when
connected to a network, regardless of whether control is
performed from the PC or the digital video recorder
01-01-07 00:00:00 REC REPEAT EN A ALARM 0000000
z A connection may not be possible via a proxy server. In
this case, cancel the proxy settings.
z Due to certain PC performance levels and specifications, a
portion of the video may not be displayed. In this case, go
to [Tools] J [Internet Options] J [Temporary Internet Files]
J [Settings] in Internet Explorer, and then reduce [Amount
of disk space to use].
NETWORK CONTROL
02
z The “NETWORK CONTROL” message is not displayed
when the network control setting (JP.128) connection
display is set to “OFF” using the unit’s setting menu.
English
163
2
NETWORK CONTROL
„ When control rights are switched to the unit
INTRODUCTION
„ When connection to the network cannot be
made because the DVR is being operated
Whenever the
button on the operation screen of the PC is
clicked, access is cancelled and control rights switch back to
the unit. At the same time, the “NETWORK CONTROL”
message from the unit’s on-screen display changes to
“DISCONNECTED”.
z Once the message changes to “DISCONNECTED”, it can
be cleared by pressing any button on the unit.
DSR-5716
DIGITAL VIDEO RECORDER
THE UNIT IS NOT READY !
OPERATION
This screen is displayed in the following cases.
z Copying is made on the DVR unit.
z Menu is displayed on the DVR unit.
01-01-07 00:00:00 REC REPEAT EN A ALARM 0000000
„ When the number of users to be connected
exceeds the concurrent connection restriction
DISCONNECTED
DSR-5716
DIGITAL VIDEO RECORDER
THE UNIT IS BUSY !
„ Forced disconnection from the unit
When security lock is not turned ON, press and hold the
[SHUTTLE HOLD] button on the DVR for at least 2 seconds.
When access is forcibly cancelled in this way, the “NETWORK
CONTROL” message changes to “DISCONNECTED”.
z Access from the PC is not permitted for a period of 10
seconds after access is cancelled.
Display on the PC
„ When disconnected from the network
NETWORK
CONTROL
This screen is displayed in the following cases.
z Connection via ID1 is attempted when 15 computers are
already connected
z Connection via ID3 is attempted when ID4 user is already
connected
z Connection via ID3 is attempted when ID3 user is already
connected
z Connection via ID4 is attempted when ID4 user is already
connected
z Connection is attempted when users are already
connected to ID2, ID3 and ID4
SETTINGS
02
DSR-5716
DIGITAL VIDEO RECORDER
NETWORK
OPERATION
THE UNIT IS DISCONNECTED !
This screen is displayed in the following cases.
z Connection is forcibly terminated from the DVR unit.
z Connection is terminated manually by clicking the
disconnect button.
z Network settings are changed while LV1 or LV2 user is
connected to the network.
z User ID and password are changed while LV1 or LV2 user
is connected to the network.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
„ When network settings are changed
DSR-5716
DIGITAL VIDEO RECORDER
NETWORK DISCONNECTED !
PLEASE CONNECT TO THE NETWORK
WITH NEW SETTINGS !
OTHER
This screen is displayed in the following cases.
z Settings on the DVR unit are changed.
z Own User ID settings are changed.
164
English
3
OPERATION PANEL FUNCTIONS AND RESTRICTIONS
Operation panel
Playback buttons
5. Previous event (LV2/3/4)
Starts playback from the previous alarm event.
6. Next event (LV2/3/4)
Starts playback from the next alarm event.
1
7. Slower (LV2/3/4)
Playback speed is reduced by one setting.
8. Faster (LV2/3/4)
Playback speed is increased by one setting.
2
9. Reverse playback (LV2/3/4)
Starts playback of recorded images in the reverse direction.
10. Stop (LV2/3/4)
Stops playback and returns to live display.
3
4
11. Play (LV2/3/4)
Starts playback of recorded images.
10
5
6
12. Previous image (LV2/3/4)
Moves a still image back one frame.
7
8
13. Still (LV2/3/4)
Pauses the image during playback.
9
11
14. Next image (LV2/3/4)
Advances a still image forward one frame.
12
14
13
Search/Copy/Download buttons
15
17
15. Search (LV2/3/4)
Displays the search screen (i.e., setting screen).
16
19
16. Copy (by setting)
Displays the copy screen (i.e., setting screen).
18
20
17. Download (by setting)
Displays the download screen (i.e., setting screen).
21
22
Recording buttons
18. Record (LV3/4)
Starts normal recording.
19. Stop (LV3/4)
Stops normal recording.
23
20. Timer (LV3/4)
Activates timer standby mode when clicked while recording is
stopped. If clicked in Timer Standby mode, it deactivates this
mode.
Channel and screen selection buttons
1. Channel number
Displays the channel number selected using “Channel
selection”.
The DSR-5709P displays only nine channels.
Other buttons
21. Menu setting (LV4)
Displays the menu screen (i.e., setting screen).
2. Channel selection (LV1/2/3/4)
Selects a camera channel when displaying video on a full
screen.
The DSR-5709P displays only nine channels.
22. Disconnect (LV1/2/3/4)
Disconnects the PC from the network and switches control
rights to the unit.
3. Multi 9/16 screen display (LV1/2/3/4)
Click once to display 16 screens, and again to display 9
screens.
The DSR-5709P can only display video in nine screens.
23. [Get JPEG2000 PLUG-IN] button (LV1/2/3/4)
Accesses the website for downloading DVR Viewer2,
JPEG2000 Plug-in, etc.
4. Quad-screen display (LV1/2/3/4)
Click to display 4 screens.
* Entries in parentheses refer to user level restrictions for the
specific button. (JP.197)
English
165
3
OPERATION PANEL FUNCTIONS AND RESTRICTIONS
2
Operation is available when a camera with remote operation
capability is connected to the VIDEO terminal, RS-485
terminal, or 2ND RS485/422 terminal and settings are carried
out using camera control settings (JP.209).
Click each button to use a dome
camera.
INTRODUCTION
Camera operation panel
1
z Use the network control settings (JP.200) to set user
levels for camera operation.
z Camera controls are carried out in full screen display.
z Multiple users can simultaneously monitor and control the
same camera.
3
Click [CAMERA CONTROL].
4
In place of the operation panel on the left side of the screen,
camera operation panel is displayed.
7
10
LV1:0 LV2:0 LV3:0 LV4:1
USER ID ID4
SETTINGS
01-01-07 00: 36: 17
6
8
5
NORMAL RECORDING MODE RECORDING
ALARM RECORDING MODE STOP
LIVE
OPERATION
1
2
9
11
14
12
13
15
READ INTERVAL : 1
AUDIO
: OFF
SIZE
----
: 1
QUALITY
: 3
SAVE TO PC : OFF
NETWORK
CONTROL
16
01
CAMERA CONTROL
17
18
SET
1
19
20
1.
Channel number
Displays the channel number selected using “Channel
selection”.
The DSR-5709P displays only nine channels.
2.
Channel selection
Select a camera channel.
The DSR-5709P displays only nine channels.
3.
Pan/tilt
Adjust camera direction. Follow the chart below and
press directional buttons to adjust camera in eight
different directions.
When displaying camera internal menu, use for selecting
menu items.
Up
Right
Left
166
Down
OTHER
Lower left
Upper right
NETWORK
SETTINGS
Upper left
NETWORK
OPERATION
z When “AUDIO” is set to “ON” or when saving real-time to
PC, the [CAMERA CONTROL] button is not displayed.
Lower right
English
3
OPERATION PANEL FUNCTIONS AND RESTRICTIONS
4.
Menu set
Sets the camera internal menu item setting values.
5.
[MENU]
Displays camera internal menu screen.
3
6.
Control speed
Adjusts the operation speed for Pan and Tilt.
Sets a level between 1 and 7. Higher values correspond
to faster operation speed.
Camera operation panel changes to Normal operation panel.
7.
[ZOOM]
Activates zoom mode. (“ZOOM” turns green)
Use -/+ to zoom.
8.
[FOCUS]
Activates focus adjust mode. (“FOCUS” turns green)
Adjust focus with -/+.
9.
[IRIS]
Activates IRIS adjust mode. (“IRIS” turns green)
Adjust IRIS with -/+.
Finishing dome camera operation
10. -/+
Use when zooming, adjusting focus, and adjusting IRIS.
11. [AF]
Use auto-focus.
12. [SEQ]
Starts automatic camera selection. Press a different
operation button to switch to that operation.
13. [PAN]
Starts automatic panning. Press a different operation
button to switch to that operation.
14. [TOUR]
Starts the TOUR saved on the camera. Press a different
operation button to switch to that operation.
15. Preset access
Move camera into position set with preset number.
For preset numbers after 9, select from the drop-down list
and click [GO].
16. Preset register
Select a preset number from the drop-down list and click
Menu set to register the current camera position.
17. Record (LV3, LV4)
This button starts normal recording.
18. Record stop (LV3, LV4)
This button stops normal recording.
19. Timer (LV3, LV4)
This button activates timer standby mode when clicked
while recording is stopped. If clicked in Timer Standby
mode, it deactivates this mode.
20. Disconnect (LV1, 2, 3, 4)
This button disconnects the PC from the network and
switches control rights to the unit.
z When pan/tilt is pressed during automatic panning,
automatic camera selection or TOUR, manual pan/tilt
mode is entered and all automatic modes are cancelled.
English
167
Click [CAMERA CONTROL].
1
RECORDING IMAGES
Use the following procedures to store monitored images and
alarm images on the internal hard disk of the digital video
recorder.
Before recording images, make the necessary menu settings
to match the installation environment. (JP.184)
1
button on the operation
Stopping normal recording
Click the
panel.
button on the operation
Pre-alarm recording
1
Use the following procedure to automatically record monitored
images in accordance with timer settings. Note that timer
recording cannot operate during normal recording.
Click the
panel.
z The newest images for the preset duration are
automatically recorded and updated by overwriting.
z Pre-alarm recording is automatically terminated whenever
alarm recording starts, and it is automatically restarted as
alarm recording ends.
button on the operation
The unit enters standby mode for timer recording, and
recording then starts and stops automatically at the set times.
The current status of timer recording is displayed on-screen
with the message “TIMER STANDBY” or “TIMER
RECORDING”.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
z If “OLY AL-RC ON TMR” has been selected using the
“ALARM REC MODE SET” menu item (JP.192), it is not
necessary to click the
button on the operation panel to
set up standby mode.
3
NETWORK
OPERATION
2
Set the conditions for timer recording
using the “TIMER SET” screen.
(JP.191)
Set the conditions for “PRE-ALARM
RECORDING” using the “ALARM REC
MODE SET” screen. (JP.194)
NETWORK
CONTROL
Use the following procedure to set pre-alarm recording to
record video just before an alarm. Images can be viewed from
just before an alarm when alarm recording is played back.
Timer recording
1
SETTINGS
z Settings can be made to generate a buzzer sound on the
PC when an alarm occurs on the digital video recorder.
(JP.194)
z Click the
button on the PLAYBACK area on the
operation panel to stop the alarm during alarm recording.
Normal recording starts.
2
OPERATION
Use the following procedure to manually record live monitored
images.
Click the
panel.
Set the conditions for “ALARM
RECORDING” using the “ALARM REC
MODE SET” screen. (JP.192)
z Regardless of the unit’s current operation or status, alarm
recording starts automatically whenever an alarm is
detected.
z When the duration set for alarm recording ends, alarm
recording stops automatically.
Normal recording
1
INTRODUCTION
Alarm recording
When an alarm is detected via the ALARM IN terminal or a
motion sensor, the recording of alarm images starts
automatically.
Use the alarm recording settings (JP.192) to activate alarm
recording, or set the alarm recording not to be performed
during timer recording.
OTHER
To cancel timer recording, click the
button on the operation panel while
“TIMER STANDBY” is displayed.
168
English
2
WATCHING IMAGES
Monitored live images and recorded images can be viewed
upon demand.
Note that switching to live or playback images, modifying the
screen display and other similar operations have absolutely
no effect on timer recording and alarm recording.
The various ways of displaying live
images
Displays the current
channel (camera)
number while in full
screen display
Switching to live images during playback
Click the
button on the PLAYBACK area on the operation
panel. When playback finishes, the screen switches back to
the display of monitored live images.
[CHANNEL] button
Playing back recorded images
[QUAD] button
The following two methods are available for the playback of
images.
[MULTI] button
Changing channels (cameras)
1
Click the [CHANNEL] button for the
number to view.
The live image from the selected channel is displayed full
screen.
Buttons used
for playback
Activating quad-screen display
1
Image
specification
Click the [QUAD] button.
Displays the images from channels (cameras) 1-4.
Continue to click the [QUAD] button to cycle to 5-8, 9-12, and
13-16.
On the DSR-5709P, the images change in order of 1-4, 5-8, 93, etc.
Playback method
To activate full screen display, click on the image or click the
[CHANNEL] button.
Click the
button on the operation
panel to switch to play mode and begin
playback of images from the recording
area in the order in which they were
recorded.
When no images are z When recorded images are played
specified for playback
back for the first time or when a reset
is performed from the unit, playback
starts from the beginning of the
stored data.
z Any subsequent playback starts at
the last stop point.
Activating 9/16 screen display
The DSR-5709P can only display video in nine screens.
1
Click the [MULTI] button.
Multi 16 screen display is activated and all camera images
can be viewed.
2
z Use the search function to find the
required images from the data stored
in the recording areas of the hard
disk.
When images are
z When the image for playback has
specified for playback
been identified using search mode,
the play mode screen is
automatically displayed and the
specified image is played (JP.175).
Click the [MULTI] button again.
Multi 9 screen display is activated and the images from
channels (cameras) 1-9 are displayed.
3
Click the [MULTI] button again.
Multi 16 screen display is restored.
To activate full screen display, click on the image or click the
[CHANNEL] button.
z Video from each screen of the multi-screen display is
updated at a speed appropriate for its channel. The
updating speed is affected by network conditions.
English
169
2
WATCHING IMAGES
INTRODUCTION
Performing operations in play mode
Use the buttons on the operation panel.
OPERATION
Playback
Click the
button.
Adjusting the playback speed
button.
SETTINGS
During playback, click the
or
: Increases the playback speed.
: Decreases the playback speed.
Reverse playback
Click the
button.
Adjusting the reverse playback speed
NETWORK
CONTROL
During reverse playback, click the
or
: Increases the reverse playback speed.
: Decreases the reverse playback speed.
button.
Still image
button while
NETWORK
OPERATION
During playback, click the
button.
Playback pauses on the current image.
To return to normal play mode, click the
playback is paused.
Frame advance (forward/reverse)
While playback is paused, click the
or
: Advances a frame in the forward direction.
: Advances a frame in the reverse direction.
button.
Alarm skip
NETWORK
SETTINGS
During playback, click the
or
button.
The previous or next alarm image is displayed accordingly.
: Skips to the next alarm video.
: Skips to the previous alarm video.
Stopping playback
During playback, click the
button.
OTHER
170
English
2
WATCHING IMAGES
Live mode image (multi-screen display)
NORMAL RECORDING MODE STOP
ALARM RECORDING MODE STOP
LIVE
(7)
(9) (10)
(8)
(6)
01-01-07 00: 37: 58
LV1:0 LV2:0 LV3:0 LV4:1
USER ID ID4
01
02
HALL 4F 03
04
05
06
Play mode image (full-screen display)
(6)
(7)
(14) (11)
(8) (9)
(12)
(13)
NORMAL RECORDING MODE STOP
ALARM RECORDING MODE STOP
PLAY
01-01-07 00: 36: 20
A
SPEED
PLAYBACK AREA NORMAL
PLAY
01
07
08
READ INTERVAL : 1
09
SIZE : 1
(1)
(1)
QUALITY : 3
AUDIO
SET
(3)
(2)
‹1
480 × 360
4
960 × 720
2
640 × 480
5
1120 × 840
3
800 × 600
6
1,280 × 960
Setting
‹OFF
ON
4
English
SAVE TO PC : OFF
(2)
SET
(5)
Description
Does not output audio.
Outputs audio.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
‹5SEC
10SEC
15SEC
20SEC
30SEC
Screen indicating
the reading of
audio data
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Standard quality
: 1
If you set “ON” for “AUDIO”, then select audio delay (buffering
time).
Audio data is loaded to the computer (buffered) for a given
amount of time to ensure that there are no playback
interruptions. The playback audio is delayed when compared
with the originally recorded sound. The following set amounts
of time indicate the delay.
* Size for full screen monitoring.
(3) QUALITY (Default setting: 3)
Four levels of picture quality can be set for live images (live
mode only).
The recorded image is not displayed during playback.
2
----
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
‹3
SIZE
(4) AUDIO (Default setting: OFF)
Switches between ON and OFF for audio output.
Listen to the current audio from the device connected to the
AUDIO IN terminal while displaying live image.
Play audio from the device connected to the AUDIO IN
terminal at the time of recording while playing back a recorded
image.
Use the following procedures to adjust the images displayed
on screen.
To make an adjustment, select the adjustment setting from
the menu and then click [SET] from the pull-down menu on
the screen.
(1) READ INTERVAL (Default setting: 1)
Select one of five image display speeds.
Larger setting numbers correspond to higher speeds;
however, the actual speed depends on the speed of your
network connection.
* When “(4) AUDIO” is set to “ON”, “READ INTERVAL”
cannot be set.
(2) SIZE (Default setting: 1)
Select one of six image sizes.
Larger setting numbers correspond to larger image sizes.
Lowest quality
: OFF
(4)
Adjusting the image and audio
1
READ INTERVAL : 1
Fine
Best quality
171
Description
Set the audio delay (5, 10, 15, 20 or 30
seconds) to play audio.
In Play mode, the speed of fast-forward
and frame advance may be affected by
the network environment being used.
In addition, if the audio-data reading
screen appears frequently, the audio
delay (5, 10, 15, 20 or 30 seconds)
should be lengthened to match the
network environment.
If this screen continues to appear
frequently even when the delay time is 30
seconds, it indicates that audio playback
is not possible with the network
environment being used.
2
WATCHING IMAGES
(5) SAVE TO PC (Default setting: OFF)
Set to “ON” to save live images or playback images to a PC.
* Set only for full screen monitoring.
Display
Playback speed
PLAY
Forward
Normal
STILL
Paused
Paused
R.PLAY
Reverse
Normal
CUE
Forward
Fast-forward playback
REVIEW
Reverse
Fast-rewind playback
SLOW
Forward
Slow playback
R.SLOW
Reverse
Slow reverse playback
OPERATION
z A user level 2 (LV2) or better is required to play back
images.
z The user level required for saving images to a PC is set in
the user ID and network control settings. (JP.197, 128)
z To be able to play back audio, install “DVR Viewer2” for
storing and playing back audio (JP.211), and then set
“AUDIO” to “ON”.
z Playback is performed with priority given to audio, and as a
result, images may not be displayed for certain hardware
and software configurations.
z Audio playback is not available for quad screen or multi
screen (9/16 screen) display.
z Due to certain PC performance levels and specifications, a
portion of the video may not be displayed. In this case, go
to [Tools]J[Internet Options]J[Temporary Internet
Files]J[Settings] in Internet Explorer, and then reduce
[Amount of disk space to use].
z When playing back a recorded image that does not have
audio with “AUDIO” set to “ON”, the digital video recorder
begins buffering data and the status appears on the
screen. In this case, set “AUDIO” to “OFF”.
z When short recordings are repeated, the digital video
recorder begins buffering data and continues to display
that status. In this case, set “AUDIO” to “OFF”.
Playback
direction
INTRODUCTION
(12) SPEED (in the play mode screen only)
Displays the playback speed and direction.
(13) Load status of external expansion units
When video recorded by an expansion unit (S-ATA) or RAID
unit is played back via network, the operating conditions and
load status of other individual users are displayed:
: Playing back with the digital video recorder.
SETTINGS
: Playing back through network.
The color changes according to the load: blue (normal) J
yellow (caution) J red (warning).
Screen display items
NETWORK
OPERATION
(6) Image mode
LIVE: Live mode
PLAY: Play mode
(7) Time
Live mode: Displays the current time.
Play mode: Displays the recording time.
(8) NORMAL RECORDING MODE
Displays the current status for normal recording.
z STOP
z RECORDING
z TIMER STANDBY
z TIMER RECORDING
z AREA FULL (in recording area)
(9) ALARM RECORDING MODE
Displays the current status for alarm recording.
z STOP
z PRE ALARM RECORDING
z ALARM RECORDING
z AREA FULL (When recording area is full or automatic
alarm copying is being performed and the archive area
becomes full, “AREA FULL” is displayed.)
(10) Connection user
Displays the connection status for the various user levels
when a number of different users are connected.
Example: LV1: 4 LV2: 1 LV3: 1 LV4: 0
The user ID for the current user is displayed in red.
(11) PLAYBACK AREA (in the play mode screen only)
The type of recording is displayed for the playback image.
z ALARM (with alarm number displayed)
z PRE ALARM (with alarm number displayed)
z NORMAL
z ARCHIVE (with alarm number displayed)
NETWORK
CONTROL
(14) Audio recording display (for playback mode screen
only)
The letter “A” is displayed when playback video is
accompanied by audio data.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
OTHER
172
English
2
WATCHING IMAGES
5
Downloading live images to a PC
Click [BROWSE].
A dialog box for selecting the save location is displayed.
Select a suitable save location.
z To download video with audio to a PC, DVR Viewer2 must
be installed before the necessary settings can be made.
(JP.211)
z The user level required for downloading images is set in
the user ID and network control settings. (JP.197, 128)
1
Displays live image for users with
download authorization.
NORMAL RECORDING MODE STOP
ALARM RECORDING MODE STOP
LIVE
01-01-07 00: 40: 32
LV1:0 LV2:0 LV3:0 LV4:1
USER ID ID4
z Alternatively, enter the path directly into “DESTINATION
FOLDER”.
6
01
READ INTERVAL : 1
2
3
SIZE
: OFF
AUDIO
: 1
----
QUALITY
: 3
SAVE TO PC : OFF
CAMERA CONTROL
The setting menu closes and the screen returns to the display
for step 3 above.
The “DESTINATION FOLDER” location is displayed.
SET
Set “SAVE TO PC” to “ON”.
7
Click [SET].
NORMAL RECORDING MODE STOP
ALARM RECORDING MODE STOP
01-01-07 00: 00: 00
USER ID ID4
Click [START].
The saving process begins and the elapsed save time and
saving screen are displayed.
The elapsed save time is incremented as the save process
progresses.
The save setting items are displayed.
LIVE
Enter the save location and click the
[OK] button.
LV1:0 LV2:0 LV3:0 LV4:1
NORMAL RECORDING MODE STOP
ALARM RECORDING MODE STOP
LIVE
LV1:0 LV2:0 LV3:0 LV4:1
USER ID ID4
01-01-07 00: 47: 05
01
READ INTERVAL : 1
SIZE
: OFF
AUDIO
: 1
----
QUALITY
: 3
SAVE TO PC : ON
CAMERA CONTROL
01
SET
READ INTERVAL : 1
DURATION
: 01
HR : 00
MIN
DESTINATION FOLDER : C:\
AUDIO
: OFF
SIZE : 1
----
QUALITY
: 3
CAMERA CONTROL
SAVE TO PC : ON
BROWSE
DURATION
START
: 00:00:00
/ 00:06:00
DESTINATION FOLDER : C:\ My documents\1124
CANCEL
4
Set “DURATION”.
Elapsed save time
Use units of one hour and one minute to set the image
duration to save to PC.
English
SAVE IN PROGRESS
173
2
WATCHING IMAGES
„ To cancel a save operation
INTRODUCTION
Click [CANCEL].
NORMAL RECORDING MODE STOP
ALARM RECORDING MODE STOP
LIVE
LV1:0 LV2:0 LV3:0 LV4:1
USER ID ID4
01-01-07 00: 47: 05
OPERATION
01
READ INTERVAL : 1
: OFF
AUDIO
SIZE : 1
: 00:00:00
DURATION
QUALITY
----
: 3
CAMERA CONTROL
SAVE TO PC : ON
/ 00:06:00
DESTINATION FOLDER : C:\ My documents\1124
CANCEL
SETTINGS
8
SAVE IN PROGRESS
When saving is completed, click [OK]
on the pop-up window.
The final still image from the save process is displayed.
The setting menu closes and the screen returns to the display
for step 2 above.
Folders, as shown below, are created within the folder set in
step 5, and within these folders, images are stored with
numbers assigned automatically.
IMG00001
(1)
(2)
IMG00002
NETWORK
CONTROL
DVR00001
000001.JP2
000002.JP2
000200.JP2
000201.JP2
000202.JP2
000400.JP2
DVR00002
SOUND.WAV
(for audio-accompanied image)
IMG00001
000001.JP2
000002.JP2
IMG00002
NETWORK
OPERATION
IMGXXXXX
NETWORK
SETTINGS
000200.JP2
000201.JP2
000202.JP2
000400.JP2
IMGXXXXX
SOUND.WAV
(for audio-accompanied image)
(1) The folder “DVR00001” is created.
(2) Within this folder, folders are created in order beginning
with “IMG00001”. Images are stored in each folder.
OTHER
174
English
3
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO
Recorded video can be searched and played back using any
of six search modes.
Search menu
Basic operation
1
Search mode
Type of
recording
searched
In live mode (when playback is
stopped), click the
button on the
operation panel.
The “SEARCH” screen is displayed.
1
ALARM LOG
SEARCH
Alarm
recording
Search for alarm video by
specifying the date/time.
When the search is
completed, images can be
selected from ALARM
SEARCH or ALARM
THUMBNAIL SEARCH
and displayed in a list or as
thumbnails.
2
ALARM
SEARCH
Alarm
recording
Search and play back
alarm images from the
alarm event list.
3
ALARM
THUMBNAIL
SEARCH
Alarm
recording
Search and play back
alarm images using
thumbnails (small images).
4
TIME/DATE
SEARCH
Normal
recording and
alarm
recording
Search and play back
recorded images by date
and time.
5
ARCHIVE
AREA
SEARCH
Archive area
Search and play back
images stored (or copied)
to the archive area using
an image list.
6
MOTION
DETECTION
SEARCH
Normal
recording and
alarm
recording
Search and play back
recorded images of moving
objects detected in
accordance with motion
sensor settings.
SEARCH
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2
ALARM LOG SEARCH
ALARM SEARCH
ALARM THUMBNAIL SEARCH
TIME/DATE SEARCH
ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH
MOTION DETECTION SEARCH
Select and click the desired search
mode from the “SEARCH” screen.
The screen for the selected search mode is displayed.
3
Search for video using the search mode
screen.
See the following pages for more details regarding the
different search procedures.
4
Check the returned video using the
preview or thumbnail display and then
click the screen.
Play mode is activated and playback of the full video starts.
Still image, fast-forward and other similar operations can be
performed during playback. (JP.170)
English
Description
z It may take more than one minute to search video
depending on the size of the hard disk and/or stored data.
175
3
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO
z If “MONTH” is selected in step 2 above, each frame
represents one day. If “WEEK” is selected, four frames
represent one day. If “DAY” is selected, each frame
represents one hour. If “HOUR” is selected, each frame
represents two minutes.
z Click the [BACK] or [NEXT] button to shift the display one
page.
ALARM LOG SEARCH
(4)
(2)
MONTH
MOVE
01-10-05 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
(5)
A search is started, and when it is finished the frame color
changes in the following fashion.
Black: No recordings
Red: Alarm recording
4
Setting
PAGE NEXT
SEARCH:
ALARM
SEARCH
(7)
‹ALARM
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
TERM: Period
Date/time
Channel number
Selected type of recording searched
When “MONTH” is specified in “TERM”: Day
When “WEEK” is specified in “TERM”: Day of the week
When “DAY” is specified in “TERM”: Hour
When “HOUR” is specified in “TERM”: Minute
(6) PAGE: The month (week/day/time), along with previous
and next entries are displayed
(7) SEARCH: Search mode
The “ALARM THUMBNAIL SEARCH” screen
THUMBNAIL (JP.177) is displayed and the search results
are displayed using thumbnails.
Perform ALARM SEARCH (JP.177) or ALARM THUMBNAIL
SEARCH (JP.177).
5
Click “1. ALARM LOG SEARCH” on the
“SEARCH” screen.
Click the [SEARCH] button.
NETWORK
CONTROL
1
Description
The “ALARM SEARCH” screen (JP.177) is
displayed and the search results are displayed
in a list.
SETTINGS
(6)
Set “SEARCH” to the desired search
mode.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
16
BACK
OPERATION
(3)
(1)
TERM :
INTRODUCTION
1. ALARM LOG SEARCH
Use the following procedure to perform an alarm search or
alarm thumbnail search by defining the period (month, week,
day or time) of the alarm video.
The “ALARM LOG SEARCH” screen is displayed.
2
NETWORK
OPERATION
Set a time period for “TERM” and click
the [MOVE] button.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
Description
Displays one month.
WEEK
Displays one week.
DAY
Displays one day.
HOUR
Displays one hour.
3
NETWORK
SETTINGS
‹MONTH
Set the date and time.
Click the frame of the alarm recording search date.
OTHER
176
English
3
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO
2. ALARM SEARCH
3. ALARM THUMBNAIL SEARCH
Images recorded as alarm recordings are displayed in a list by
alarm numbers.
Accordingly, alarm images from the recording list can be
searched and played back.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(5)
(7)
All of the alarm images stored in the alarm recording area are
displayed as thumbnails (small images). Accordingly, you can
search and play back alarm images using their thumbnails.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(6) (8) (9)
ALARM THUMBNAIL SEARCH
ALARM SEARCH
BACK
NO
0000012
DATE TIME CH
03 - 06 12 : 01 01
0000011
03 - 06 11 : 57 01
0000010
03 - 06 11 : 57 04
0000009
03 - 04 11 : 56 04
0000008
03 - 02 11 : 55 04
0000007
03 - 02 11 : 53 01
0000006
03 - 02 11 : 52 01
0000005
03 - 01 22 : 51 01
BACK
PAGE NEXT
(4)
TOTAL ALARMS : 0000053
: 0000012
SEARCH
: -CHANNEL
SEARCH
0000009
0000008
0000007
0000006
0000005
0000004
SEARCH
PLEASE CLICK THE IMAGE TO PLAY.
(1) PAGE: Displays the previous and next 9 thumbnails
(2) SEARCH: Search by the alarm number
(3) CHANNEL: Search by the camera number
1
Click “3. ALARM THUMBNAIL SEARCH”
on the “SEARCH” screen.
z The newest alarm images with alarm numbers are
displayed in chronological order on the “ALARM
THUMBNAIL SEARCH” screen.
z A maximum of nine alarm events can be displayed as
thumbnails on a single screen.
z Click [BACK] or [NEXT] to display the thumbnail screen for
the previous or subsequent nine events accordingly.
z Setting the alarm number for “SEARCH” displays a new list
with the corresponding image displayed first.
z Setting the camera number for “CHANNEL” displays a new
list with the corresponding image displayed first.
Click “2. ALARM SEARCH” on the
“SEARCH” screen.
Select the alarm number of the image to
be played back from the alarm event
list.
2
z Clicking an alarm No. button displays a preview of the
corresponding alarm image.
z A maximum of eight alarm events can be displayed.
z Click [BACK] or [NEXT] to display the alarm event list for
the previous or subsequent eight events accordingly.
z Setting the alarm number for “SEARCH” displays a new list
with the corresponding image displayed first.
z Setting the camera number for “CHANNEL” displays
camera images as a list in order of recording date.
Click the thumbnail for the image to be
played back.
Full-screen playback starts from the point at which the alarm
was triggered.
Click the preview screen to play back
the image.
Full-screen playback starts from the point at which the alarm
was triggered.
English
0000010
(10)
An alarm event list is displayed in the “ALARM SEARCH”
screen with newer recordings displayed first.
3
CHANNEL : --
0000011
PLEASE CLICK THE IMAGE TO PLAY.
NO: Alarm number. Click to display preview
DATE/TIME: The alarm recording date
CH: The alarm recording camera number
PAGE: Display of the previous and next list from the top
list
(5) TOTAL ALARMS: The total number of alarm recordings
(6) SEARCH: Enter alarm number to display as list
(7) CHANNEL: Enter camera number to display as list
(8) [SEARCH] button: Search using the conditions from (6)
and (7); display as list
(9) PREVIEW ALARM NO: Current alarm number being
previewed
(10) Preview image: Click to start playback
2
SEARCH : 0000000
PREVIEW ALARM NO : 0000012
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
1
PAGE NEXT
0000012
177
3
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO
5. ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH
(1)
Use the following procedure to search and play back recorded
images stored (or copied) to the archive area.
(5)
(4) (1)
TIME/DATE SEARCH
(2)
(3)
CHANNEL
: --
SEARCH
: 01
(4)
01
TIME
00 : 35
00 : 35
-
2007
NO
01- 01 00 :36 01
0000003
01- 01 00 :36 01
35
0000004
01- 01 01 :48 01
PREVIEW
0000005
01- 02 01 :48 01
0000006
01- 03 01 :52 01
0000007
01- 03 01 :53 01
0000008
01- 03 01 :55 01
00
:
PREVIEW
(6) (9) (11)
(7) (10)
PAGE NEXT
CAPACITY TOTAL- 34594 MB
USED 0 MB
SEARCH : 0000001
CHANNEL : --
SEARCH
PREVIEW NO 0000001
PLEASE CLICK THE IMAGE TO PLAY.
SETTINGS
1
Click “4. TIME/DATE SEARCH” on the
“SEARCH” screen.
Click “5. ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH” on
the “SEARCH” screen.
Specify the camera number from the
“CHANNEL” pull-down menu.
2
Specify the recorded date and time of
the image to be played back from the
“SEARCH” pull-down menu.
Select the archive number of the image
to be played back from the stored image
list.
Click [PREVIEW].
When the search is completed, the image corresponding to
the specified date and time is played back.
3
z If no image exists for the specified date and time, the
image with the nearest recording date and time is
displayed.
Click the preview screen to play back
the image.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
z A preview of the corresponding stored image is displayed.
z A maximum of eight stored images can be displayed.
z Click [BACK] or [NEXT] to display the image list for the
previous or subsequent eight images accordingly.
z Setting the archive number for “SEARCH” displays a list
with the oldest corresponding image displayed first.
z Setting the camera number for “CHANNEL” displays a list
with the oldest corresponding image displayed first.
NETWORK
OPERATION
The “ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH” screen is displayed.
This screen contains a list of stored images displayed in order
from the earliest item.
NETWORK
CONTROL
NO: Number. Click to display preview
DATE/TIME: The recording date
CH: The recording camera number
PAGE: Display of the previous and next list from the top
list
(5) CAPACITY: Total archive area capacity
(6) CAPACITY: Used archive area capacity
(7) SEARCH: Enter number to display as list
(8) CHANNEL: Enter camera number to display as list
(9) [SEARCH] button: Search using the conditions from (7)
and (8); display as list
(10) PREVIEW NO: Current number being previewed
(11) Preview image: Click to start playback
The “TIME/DATE SEARCH” screen is displayed.
Full-screen playback starts.
Click the preview screen to play back
the image.
OTHER
5
(5)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1) RECORDING TOP: Displays the date and time of the
oldest recording
(2) RECORDING END: Displays the date and time of the
newest recording
(3) CHANNEL: Displays the camera number
(4) SEARCH: Set the recorded date and time of the image to
be played back
(5) [PREVIEW]: Preview display button
(6) PREVIEW: Displays a preview of the image
corresponding to the specified date and time
4
CH
0000002
PLEASE CLICK THE IMAGE TO PLAY.
3
TIME
01- 01 00 :36 01
BACK
2
DATE
0000001
(6)
1
(3) (8)
ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH
07
07
-
(2)
OPERATION
DATE
01 - 01 01 - 01 -
TOP
END
INTRODUCTION
4. TIME/DATE SEARCH
Use the following procedure to specify the recorded date and
time and play back the images.
Full-screen playback starts.
178
English
3
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO
1
6. MOTION DETECTION SEARCH
Use the following procedure to detect variations from
recorded images, using the motion sensor, as a result of the
presence of an intruder or the like, and to play back the
corresponding images.
(4)
Click “6. MOTION DETECTION
SEARCH” on the “SEARCH” screen.
The “MOTION DETECTION SEARCH” screen is displayed.
2
(6)
Specify the search area from the
“SEARCH FROM” pull-down menu.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
(1)
MOTION DETECTION SEARCH
SEARCH FROM :
‹ALARM
ALARM
(2)
CHANNEL
: --
(3)
START
END
: 01
: 01
(5)
Setting
- 01
- 09
- 2007
00
- 2007
12
FOUND !
: 40
: 40
A B C D E F G H I
J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A B C D E F G H
I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A B C D E F G H I
J
NORMAL
Searches only for normal
recording images.
ALARM AND NORMAL
Searches for alarm recording and
normal recording images.
ARCHIVE*1
Searches only for archive images.
SET
MOTION SENSOR SET
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A B C D E F G H
MOTION SENSOR LEVEL: OFF
*1 “ARCHIVE” can only be selected when “MODE” in
“ARCHIVE AREA” in the <RECORDING CONDITIONS
SET> screen is set to “AUTO ALARM COPY”. (JP.86)
3
I J
PREVIEW
PLEASE CLICK THE IMAGE TO PLAY.
(7)
4
(8)
“SEARCHING”
When motion-detection
images exist
“FOUND !”
When motion-detection
images do not exist
“IMAGES NOT FOUND !”
Specify the camera number for
detection from the “CHANNEL” pulldown menu.
Click [SET].
The date and time of the start and end of recording of motion
detection images are displayed in “START” and “END”
respectively.
(1) SEARCH FROM
Recording area to be used for motion detection searching
(2) CHANNEL
Channel or camera number to be used for motion detection
searching
(3) START/END
Date and time of the start and end of the area for motion
detection searching
(4) [SET] button
Detection condition settings
(5) Message box
Displays the results of searching for motion detection images.
When searching
Description
Searches only for alarm recording
images.
z Use “START” and “END” to refine the search range by
making date and time settings.
z The search results are displayed in a message box when
[SET] is clicked.
5
Set motion sensor detection conditions.
z Motion sensor positions
The motion sensor setting screen displays an 8 x 10
(height x width) grid of sensors. When one of these
sensors is clicked, the corresponding sensor setting mark
changes to red. If the same location in the grid is clicked
again, the motion sensor is deselected.
z Motion sensor sensitivity
Select the sensitivity from the pull-down menu. Lower
numbers correspond to higher levels of sensitivity.
(6) MOTION SENSOR SET
Screen for making motion sensor settings
(7) MOTION SENSOR LEVEL
Motion sensor sensitivity setting: OFF or 1 through 10
(Lower numbers correspond to higher levels of sensitivity.)
(8) [PREVIEW] button
Displays a preview of the motion detection image.
6
Click [PREVIEW].
A search is performed within the specified area for images in
which the motion sensor detected motion, and these images
are then listed in recording order on the preview screen.
7
Click the preview screen to play back
the image.
Full-screen playback starts.
Playback is performed in multiple screens, if no camera
number is specified.
English
179
4
SAVING (COPYING) RECORDED VIDEO
Use the following procedures to copy recorded images to the
archive area on the hard disk or to download images to a PC
or the like.
These functions can be used to save important images from
the recording areas.
2
z Copied data is stored one image at a time. Moving images
can be copied by setting the number of images required
from the first copied image.
Play back video stored in the recording
area.
SETTINGS
1
OPERATION
z In certain cases where network-busy is detected as a result
of the operating environment, the network may be forcibly
disconnected in order to protect DVR recording operations.
Furthermore, the network is forcibly disconnected in
response to commands to send a large amount of data in a
single operation (in particular, when 100 images or more
are to be saved), and in this case, the number of images
should be limited based on the hardware configuration in
question.
z When the archive area becomes full of images, download
these images to a USB memory or other storage media
and click [AREA FULL RESET] from the recording area
settings on the “MAIN MENU”. (JP.187)
z Can only save in full screen display. Cannot save for quadscreen or multi screen display.
INTRODUCTION
(1) Recording date and time of the video that is being played
back.
(2) PLAYBACK AREA: Type of video recording that is being
played back.
z ALARM z PRE ALARM z NORMAL z ARCHIVE
(3) MESSAGE: Displays a message when starting copy.
(Example: PLEASE WAIT!)
(4) UNIT: Select a method to specify the copy range (number
of pictures, time and events).
(5) AUDIO: Specify whether or not to copy audio.
(6) PICTURES (1-40000): Specify the number of sheets
when “PICTURES” is specified in “UNIT”.
(7) TIME: Specify hours, minutes and seconds when “TIME”
is specified in “UNIT”.
(8) EVNETS: Enter the number of events when “EVENT” is
specified in “UNIT”.
(9) COPY CH: Select a channel to copy.
(10) COPY TO: Fixed to “ARCHIVE AREA” (not selectable).
(11) [START] button: Starts copying.
(12) [CANCEL] button: Aborts copy.
Click the
button on the control
panel at the start of the video being
copied.
Video stops to provide a still picture.
3
(2)
Click the
panel.
button on the control
NETWORK
CONTROL
Copying to the archive area
The “COPY” screen is displayed.
4
(1)
Specify a value for “UNIT”.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(9)
(7)
(8)
Specifies the copy range as the number of
pictures.
TIME
Specifies the copy range as time (hours/
minutes/seconds).
EVENTS
Specifies the copy range as the number of
events.
(11)
5
(12)
Specify for “AUDIO”.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
z An event means a continuous record (or a recording unit
set by “DURATION” for the alarm recording).
z You can select “EVENTS” only when copying alarm
recording video.
(10)
NETWORK
OPERATION
‹PICTURES
Description
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
OFF
180
Also copies audio.
OTHER
‹ON
Description
Does not copy audio.
English
4
6
SAVING (COPYING) RECORDED VIDEO
Specify copy range as numeric values
according to the “UNIT” settings.
Downloading to a PC
Use the following procedure to download recorded images to
a PC.
[Settings]
Setting
Description
(2)
Enter the number of images to be copied starting
PICTURES
from the current still picture.
TIME
Specify the timeframe (hours/minutes/seconds)
starting from the current still picture.
EVENTS
Specify the number of events starting from the
current display (setting range: 1 to 99).
7
(1)
Specify “COPY CH”.
Check the channel(s) you want to copy. You can specify
multiple channels.
z ALL: Check all the channels.
z RESET: Uncheck all the channels.
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(9)
z The channel(s) that is currently displaying video is
automatically checked. It cannot be unchecked.
8
01-01-07 00: 36: 00
(7)
(8)
(10)
Click the [START] button.
(11)
Copying starts.
Once copy is completed, the result of copy is displayed in a
dialog box. To return to live display, click the [LIVE] button in
the dialog box.
(12)
(1) The recording date and time for the image currently being
played back
(2) PLAYBACK AREA: The type of recording for the image
currently being played back.
z ALARM z PRE ALARM z NORMAL z ARCHIVE
(3) MESSAGE: Displays the message displayed when
download starts (example: PLEASE WAIT!).
(4) UNIT: Select the method for specifying the copy range
(number of copies / time / number of events).
(5) AUDIO: Select whether or not to download audio.
(6) PICTURES (1-40000): Enter number of images when
“PICTURES” is specified in “UNIT”.
(7) TIME: Enter time (hrs/min/sec) when “TIME” is specified
in “UNIT”.
(8) EVENTS: Specify the number of events, when “EVENT”
is specified for “UNIT”.
(9) COPY CH: Select the channel(s) to copy.
(10) DESTINATION FOLDER: Specify the save destination
folder.
(11) [START]: Downloading begins.
(12) [CANCEL]: Downloading stops.
1
2
Play a recorded image.
Click the
button on the operation
panel at the start of the image to be
downloaded.
Playback of the image is paused.
3
Click the
panel.
button on the operation
The “DOWNLOAD” screen is displayed. (Refer to the screen
above.)
English
181
4
4
SAVING (COPYING) RECORDED VIDEO
9
Set “UNIT”.
Setting
Starts downloading.
The following message is displayed below the image when
downloading.
Description
‹PICTURES
Click [START].
INTRODUCTION
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Specify the number of images for download
number
Specify the time (hrs/min/sec) for download
number
EVENTS
Specify the download range as the number
of events.
0
% TIME [00:05:00]
ELAPSED TIME
: 00:00:00
DESTINATION FOLDER : C:\
CANCEL
SAVE IN PROGRESS
OPERATION
TIME
* The above screen is when “TIME” is set.
z An event means a continuous record (or a recording unit
set by “DURATION” for the alarm recording).
z You can select “EVENTS” only when copying video stored
in the archive area or alarm recording video.
5
Set “AUDIO”.
OFF
Description
DESTINATION
FOLDER
Display the path to the save destination
folder
CANCEL
Stop downloading.
The result of download is displayed in the dialog box. To
return to live display, click the [LIVE] button in the dialog box.
Also download audio.
Do not download audio.
01-01-07 00: 36: 21
MESSAGE
Setting
DOWNLOAD TO PC
PLAYBACK AREA NORMAL
: DOWNLOAD ABORTED !
DOWNLOADED PICTURES : 0
LIVE
Description
Enter the number of images to be downloaded
starting from the current still picture.
TIME
Specify the timeframe (hours/minutes/seconds)
starting from the current still picture.
(You can specify up to 99 hours, 59 minutes and
59seconds, but can not download more than
250,000 images.)
EVENTS
Specify the number of events starting from the
current display (setting range: 1 to 99).
NETWORK
OPERATION
PICTURES
NETWORK
CONTROL
Specify download range with numeric
values depending on settings for
“UNIT”.
[Settings]
Specify “COPY CH”.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
Check a channel you want to download. You can specify
multiple channels.
z ALL: Check all the channels.
z RESET: Uncheck all the channels.
z The channel that is displaying video is automatically
checked. You can not uncheck them.
8
Display the download time
DOWNLOAD
6
7
ELAPSED TIME
SETTINGS
‹ON
Display the download amount in %
10 When download is completed:
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
%
Set “DESTINATION FOLDER”.
OTHER
Enter the path to the save destination folder.
Click [BROWSE] to select from the folder tree.
182
English
1
SETTINGS
3
Before using the digital video recorder, settings should be
made for recording conditions, installation environment and
other similar factors. The corresponding menu items are
displayed in a three-level structure comprising main menus,
sub-menus and setting screens. (JP.184)
Click a sub-menu.
The setting screen is displayed.
A menu tree is displayed on the operation panel to show the
menu hierarchy.
Example: Click “1. CLOCK SET”.
Making menu selections
1
CLOCK SET
HARD DISK DIGITAL RECORDER
Click the
panel.
button on the operation
MAIN MENU
01
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
MENU
TREE
MAIN MENU
01
2007
1. INITIAL SET
1. CLOCK SET
2. SUMMER TIME SET
/EXT. CLOCK SET
3. HOLIDAY SET
MON
SET
RECORD
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
INITIAL SET
RECORD SET
GENERAL SET
SCREEN SET
POWER LOSS/USED TIME
INITIALIZATION LOG
COPY MENU SETTINGS
ADVANCED MENU SET
z Click a menu on the operation panel to display the submenu and a different setting screen.
z Pull-down menus
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
Click
PICTURE QUALITY
2
BASIC
NORMAL
: ENHANCED
FINE
: SUPER FINE
INDIV.
:
Click a menu on the “MAIN MENU”.
The corresponding sub-menu appears.
The main menu is displayed on the operation panel.
Example: Click “1. INITIAL SET”.
INITIAL SET
When a pull-down menu is clicked, a list of available
selections is displayed.
Select the required value.
HARD DISK DIGITAL RECORDER
MAIN MENU
MAIN
MENU
1. INITIAL SET
2. RECORD SET
3. GENERAL SET
4. SCREEN SET
5. POWER LOSS/USED TIME
6. INITIALIZATION LOG
7. COPY MENU SETTINGS
8. ADVANCED MENU SET
1. CLOCK SET
2. SUMMER TIME SET/EXT. CLO
3. HOLIDAY SET
4
5
Make the required settings.
Click the
panel.
button on the operation
The setting procedure is ended and the display returns to the
normal screen (monitoring image).
RECORD
z Menu screens are not displayed during playback. To
display a menu, stop playback, return to live mode and
then click the
button on the operation panel.
z You must be connected with user level 4 (LV4) to modify
settings.
z It is not possible to modify settings when the unit is
recording.
z Click a menu on the operation panel to display a different
sub-menu.
English
: ENHANCED
183
1
SETTINGS
Main menu
Sub menu
1. CLOCK SET
Setting items
z SUMMER TIME SET z EXT.CLOCK SET
P.185
3. HOLIDAY SET
z HOLIDAY SET
P.186
1. RECORDING AREA SET
z TOTAL CAPACITY z INTERNAL HDD z EXTERNAL HDD
z RECORDING AREA (AREA FULL RESET)
z ARCHIVE AREA (AREA FULL RESET)
P.187
z PICTURE QUALITY z AUDIO RECORDING z REC RATE
z REC PROGRAM GROUP
P.189
4. PROGRAM REC SET
z PROGRAM z SELECT INDIVIDUAL CAMERA RATE (FPS)
z NORMAL REC
P.190
5. TIMER SET
z WEEK z START z STOP z PROGRAM z FPS z SET
P.191
6. ALARM REC MODE SET
z ALARM RECORDING z PICTURE QUALITY z AUDIO RECORDING
z ALARM INTERLEAVE (REC RATE, DURATION)
z PRE- ALARM RECORDING (REC RATE, DURATION) z ALARM TRIGGER
P.192
1. DISPLAY SET
z DATE z TIME z QUALITY z AUDIO z ALARM COUNT z ALARM TYPE
z TITLE
P.195
2. BUZZER SET
z ALARM z DISK FULL z DISK ERROR z LOCK WARNING z KEY IN
z NON REC z DISK TEMPERATURE
P.195
3. SECURITY LOCK SET
z LOCK MODE z FREE ACCESS LEVEL z OPERATION AUTHORITY
z COPY z CAMERA CONTROL
P.196
4. USER ID SET
z USER ID z PASSWORD z LV
P.197
5. RS-485 SET
z DATA SPEED z STATUS INFO z ALARM INFO z ADDRESS
P.198
6. HDD SET
z DISK1 z DISK2 z EX-DISK1 z EX-DISK2 z EX-DISK3 z EX-DISK4
z MIRRORING z PLAYBACK DRIVE
P.198
7. NETWORK SET
z DHCP z IP ADDRESS z SUBNET MASK z GATEWAY z PORT
z NETWORK SPEED z DNS SERVER (PRIMARY, SECONDARY)
z HOST NAME z DOMAIN SUFFIX z MTU SIZE z MAC ADDRESS
P.199
P.200
z FULL z QUAD z MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET z TIME PERIOD z CH
z MAIN MONITOR z MON.2
P.202
2. MASK SET
z POWER z LOSS z RECOVER z INTERNAL HDD z EXTERNAL HDD
z FIRMWARE VER
P.204
6. INITIALIZATION
LOG
z DATE z TIME z AREA ACTION z USER ID
P.205
7. COPY
MENU
SETTNGS
z DVR TYPE VER. z SAVE MENUS TO PC
z LOAD MENUS FROM PC
(LOAD FILE, COPY USER ID SETTINGS, COPY RECORDING AREA
SETTINGS, COPY NETWORK SETTINGS)
P.206
1. ALARM NOTICE SET
z ALARM NOTICE z SSL z SMTP SERVER ADDRESS z PORT
z USER MAIL ADDRESS z SEND MAIL ADDRESS z USE
z MAIL ADDRESS z IMAGE z WARNING z SUBJECT z AUTHENTICATION
z POP3 SERVER ADDRESS z PORT z USER ID z PASSWORD
P.207
2. CAMERA CONTROL SET
z CH z PROTOCOL z ADD. z 2ND RS-485/422 PROTOCOL
P.209
3. TIME ZONE/NTP SET
z TIME ZONE z SYNC.WITH NTP SERVER
z NTP SERVER ADDRESS z TIME TO SYNCHRONIZE
z RENEWAL OF MANUAL OPERATION
P.210
*
OTHER
P.203
NETWORK
SETTINGS
z MASK z TIME PERIOD zCH zMAIN MONITOR zMON.2 zNETWORK
NETWORK
OPERATION
1. SEQUENCE SET
5. POWER
LOSS/
USED TIME
8. ADVANCED
MENU SET
NETWORK
CONTROL
3. NORMAL REC MODE SET
z NETWORK CONTROL z NETWORK STATUS z PICTURE QUARITY
8. NETWORK CONTROL SET z OPERATION AUTHORITY
z COPY/DOWNLOAD z CAMERA CONTROL
4. SCREEN
SET
P.188
SETTINGS
3. GENERAL
SET
OPERATION
P.185
2. RECORDING CONDITIONS z RECORDING AREA OVERWRITE z ARCHIVE AREA MODE
SET
z REMAINING DISK WARNING z AUTO DELETE
2. RECORD
SET
Reference
page
z CLOCK SET
2. SUMMER TIME SET/
1. INITIAL SET
EXT.CLOCK SET
INTRODUCTION
Menu structure
indicates the display of information only.
184
English
2
INITIAL SET
2. SUMMER TIME SET/EXT. CLOCK
SET
INITIAL SET
Setting the summer time
1. CLOCK SET
2. SUMMER TIME SET/EXT. CLOCK SET
3. HOLIDAY SET
1
Click the
button on the operation panel.
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
2
1. CLOCK SET
Click “1. INITIAL SET”.
The “INITIAL SET” screen is displayed.
Use the following procedure to set the time and date of the
digital video recorder. Be sure that the date and time are set
correctly at this time.
3
1
The “SUMMER TIME SET/EXT. CLOCK SET” screen is
displayed.
Click the
panel.
button on the operation
Click “2. SUMMER TIME SET/EXT.
CLOCK SET”.
SUMMER TIME SET/EXT. CLOCK SET
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
2
Click “1. INITIAL SET”.
The “INITIAL SET” screen is displayed.
3
SUMMER TIME SET
MODE : USE
WEEK
4
5
6
Click “1. CLOCK SET”.
8
TIME
LST
-
SUN
03
02
:
00
OFF :
LST
-
SUN
10
02
:
00
EXT. CLOCK SET
ADJUST TIME
7
The “CLOCK SET” screen is displayed.
MONTH
ON :
:
01:00
SAVE
CLOCK SET
4
01
- 01
- 2007
MON
00
4
: 00
Set “MODE” to “USE”.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
SET
Setting
5
NO USE
‹USE
4
5
Set the month, day, year and time.
The day of the week is set automatically based on the date.
5
6
Click [SET].
The clock is set.
z Recording mode may not operate if the clock is not set. In
this case, when the
button or
button is clicked,
the warning message “PLEASE SET THE CLOCK” is
displayed.
English
185
Description
Time is not automatically adjusted to summer
time.
Time is automatically adjusted to summer time.
For “ON”, set the date/time at which to
switch from standard time to summer
time.
For “OFF”, set the date/time at which to
switch from summer time to standard
time.
2
INITIAL SET
Use the following procedure to set specific days as holidays.
When a day is specified as a holiday, timer recording for that
day is performed as if it were a Sunday.
Dates such as national holidays and company holidays can be
set as holidays when you want those dates to have the same
security as Sundays.
Synchronized operations cannot be performed when the
clocks on the digital video recorder and the connected
peripheral devices differ. By setting the external clock as
described here, all devices connected to the clock adjust
terminal can be synchronized to the same time.
7
INTRODUCTION
3. HOLIDAY SET
Setting the external clock
1
Click the
panel.
button on the operation
OPERATION
For “ADJUST TIME”, set the time at
which the clocks are to be
synchronized.
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
When time signal is input through the “CLOCK IN” terminal on
the rear panel, the internal clock of the digital video recorder is
automatically adjusted according to the time signal.
2
Click “1. INITIAL SET”.
The “INITIAL SET” screen is displayed.
3
z If you use this function, connect the digital video recorder
to an external device that provides accurate time signal.
z If the time between the input time from the external signal
and the time set on the digital video recorder is 30 minutes
or longer, time adjustment does not take place.
z If you do not use this function, leave the initial setting
(OFF) unchanged to prevent malfunction.
The “HOLIDAY SET” screen is displayed.
SETTINGS
8
Click “3. HOLIDAY SET”.
HOLIDAY SET
4
Click [SAVE].
The setting is saved.
-
5
4
11
:
12
:
13
:
14
:
15
:
16
:
17
:
18
:
19
:
20
:
NETWORK
CONTROL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
SAVE
Specify the days to be treated as
holidays.
5
Click [SAVE].
The setting is saved.
186
Non-existent day
Day changed to
(last day of the
month)
2
30, 31
29
4, 6, 9, 11
31
30
OTHER
Month
NETWORK
SETTINGS
z If “DLY” is set using timer settings, timer recording on the
above-mentioned holidays is also performed in accordance
with daily settings. In other words, “DLY” includes Sundays
and is given priority over other settings.
z If a day is selected in February, April, June, September or
November that does not exist (see table below), this is
changed automatically to the last day of the month. No
distinction is made between leap years and normal
calendar years.
NETWORK
OPERATION
Left column: Day, Right column: Month
A maximum of 20 different days can be specified as holidays.
English
3
RECORD SET
3
RECORD SET
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Click “1. RECORDING AREA SET”.
The “RECORDING AREA SET” screen is displayed.
RECORDING AREA SET
RECORDING AREA SET
RECORDING CONDITIONS SET
NORMAL REC MODE SET
PROGRAM REC SET
TIMER SET
ALARM REC MODE SET
(1)
(2)
TOTAL CAPACITY
: 600 GB
INTERNAL HDD
: 300 GB
EXTERNAL HDD
: 300 GB
RECORDING AREA
1. RECORDING AREA SET
ARCHIVE AREA
The unit’s hard disk is separated into two independent
recording areas. Furthermore, five different recording modes
can be used for these two areas.
The memory capacity for each area is allocated as a
percentage. (Setting units: 1%)
Recording
area
Recording
mode
: 80%
AREA FULL RESET
: 20%
AREA FULL RESET
(3)
(1) Total capacity display
Displays the total capacity of the hard disk and the capacity of
all internal and expansion hard disks.
Recording method
Recording is performed by
manual operation of the
button on the operation panel.
Recording is performed
Timer
automatically for the time
Automatic
recording
period set with “2-5. TIMER
SET”.
Recording is performed
Recording Alarm
automatically when an alarm
Automatic
area
recording
is detected, as set with “2-6.
ALARM REC MODE SET”.
Automatic recording of images
before an alarm occurs, as set
with “PRE-ALARM RECORDING”
Pre-alarm
Automatic in “2-6. ALARM REC MODE
recording
SET”.
This function is used together
with alarm recording.
The required images are
copied from another recording
Archive
Copy
Manual
area and stored by manual
area
operation of the
button on
the operation panel.
Normal
Manual
recording
1
Click the
panel.
z You can install up to six hard disks by using an expansion
unit.
(2) Area-specific capacity display
Displays the capacity set by the unit for each recording area
as a percentage of the total capacity.
z Setting and modification of recording area capacities
cannot be made from a PC.
(3) Recording area reset
If the overwrite setting is “OFF”, recording automatically stops
when the corresponding recording area becomes full. In this
case, click [AREA FULL RESET] to overwrite from the
beginning of each area. (Jstep 4)
Reset is not required in the following cases and, therefore,
[AREA FULL RESET] is not displayed.
z When the overwrite setting is “ON”.
button on the operation
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
2
Click “2. RECORD SET”.
The “RECORD SET” screen is displayed.
English
187
3
RECORD SET
4
If “OVERWRITE” is set to “OFF” for recording conditions,
recording automatically stops when the recording areas
become full. In this case, AREA FULL RESET can be used to
overwrite previous recordings.
Set “OVERWRITE” for the “RECORDING
AREA” to “ON” or “OFF”.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
OFF
4
INTRODUCTION
AREA FULL RESET
Click [AREA FULL RESET] under
“RECORDING AREA”.
‹ON
Recording stops when a recording area becomes
full.
When a recording area becomes full, overwriting
from the beginning of this area starts
automatically.
OPERATION
To perform AREA FULL RESET for the archive area, click
[AREA FULL RESET] under “ARCHIVE AREA”.
Description
Setting the remaining-space warning level
When the overwrite setting for a recording area is “OFF”, the
unit can issue a warning as soon as the remaining space
reaches a specific level. (JP.195)
Use the following procedure to set the level at which the
warning is issued.
z When AREA FULL RESET is performed for “RECORDING
AREA”, the recordings in the recording area are
overwritten.
z When AREA FULL RESET is performed for “ARCHIVE
AREA”, the recordings in the archive area are overwritten.
Use the following procedure to set the permission for
overwriting to recording areas or the remaining-space warning
level.
Set “REMAINING DISK WARNING” to
the desired remaining-space warning
level.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
Setting overwriting permission for recording
areas
‹1 - 10
Click the
panel.
Setting AUTO DELETE
Use the following procedure to set the storage period for
recorded data. When the set period expires, the
corresponding data is automatically deleted.
button on the operation
6
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
Click “2. RECORD SET”.
Set “AUTO DELETE” to the desired
storage period.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
The “RECORD SET” screen is displayed.
Setting
3
Click “2. RECORDING CONDITIONS
SET”.
‹OFF
1 - 99
DAYS
The “RECORDING CONDITIONS SET” screen is displayed.
4
Set the storage period for recorded data from “1
DAY” to “99 DAYS” (full days).
Click [SAVE].
The setting is saved.
RECORDING AREA
OVERWRITE
: ON
ARCHIVE AREA
MODE
: MANUAL COPY
5
REMAINING DISK WARNING : 1
6
AUTO DELETE
%
: OFF
SAVE
OTHER
7
Auto delete is disabled.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
7
RECORDING CONDITIONS SET
Description
NETWORK
OPERATION
2
Description
Remaining-space warning level can be set from
1% to 10%.
NETWORK
CONTROL
When the recording areas become full, this setting dictates
whether recording stops or continues by overwriting the
recorded images currently stored on the hard disk.
1
SETTINGS
5
2. RECORDING CONDITIONS SET
188
English
3
RECORD SET
(2) Set the picture quality for each camera.
On the DSR-5709P, cameras No. 01-09 are displayed.
(3) Set “AUDIO RECORDING”, “REC RATE” and “REC
PROGRAM GROUP” (Jsteps 5 to 7).
(4) Click [SAVE].
3. NORMAL REC MODE SET
Use the following procedures to set conditions for normal
recording and timer recording.
Setting the picture quality for recording
Setting audio recording
Use the following procedure to set the picture quality for
normal recording.
1
Click the
panel.
Audio can be recorded together with images during normal
recording.
Note, however, that since this audio data is also stored in the
recording area, the recording time for this area decreases.
button on the operation
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
5
2
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Click “2. RECORD SET”.
Set “AUDIO RECORDING” to “ON” or
“OFF”.
The “RECORD SET” screen is displayed.
3
Setting
Audio is not recorded.
‹OFF
Click “3. NORMAL REC MODE SET”.
ON
The “NORMAL REC MODE SET” screen is displayed.
Description
Audio is recorded.
NORMAL REC MODE SET
Setting the recording rate
4
PICTURE QUALITY
5
6
7
Use the following procedure to set the recording rate for
normal recording.
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE
: A 12.5 FPS
6
( 166H )
REC PROGRAM GROUP : OFF
8
Set “REC RATE” to the desired
recording rate.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
SAVE
Setting
4
Description
A100, A50, A25, A16.67,
‹A12.5, A8.333, A6.25,
A5, A4.167, A3.571,
A3.125, A2.778, A2.5,
A2.273, A1.923, A1.667,
A1.471, A1.316, A1.19,
A1.087, A1
Recording is performed at the
selected recording rate (unit: FPS).
(Audio can be recorded.)
Fine
0.5, 0.333, 0.25, 0.2, 0.1,
0.05, 0.033
Recording is performed at the
selected recording rate (unit: FPS).
(Audio cannot be recorded.)
SUPER FINE
Super Fine
***
Recording rate is not set.
INDIV.
Picture quality is set for each camera.
Set “PICTURE QUALITY”.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
Description
BASIC
Basic
NORMAL
Normal
Enhanced
‹ENHANCED
FINE
The letter “A” is displayed in front of recording rates that can
be set for audio recording.
„ Setting the picture quality for each camera
(1) Set “PICTURE QUALITY” to “INDIV.”.
The “NORMAL REC MODE SET” screen is displayed.
z When only one camera is connected, recording is
performed at 25 FPS even if 50 or 100 FPS are set.
z When two or more cameras are connected and 50 or 100
FPS is set, the actual recording rate is roughly the
recording rate divided by the number of cameras.
(Example: When 8 cameras are connected and the
recording rate setting is 100 FPS, the actual recording rate
is 12.5 FPS)
z When mirroring or pre-alarm recording is set to “ON”,
recording rates that can be set are limited.
NORMAL REC MODE SET
(1)
(2)
(3)
PICTURE QUALITY
: INDIV.
01
EN
02
EN
03
EN
04
EN
05
EN
06
EN
07
EN
08
EN
09
EN
10
EN
11
EN
12
EN
13
EN
14
EN
15
EN
16
EN
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE
: A 12.5 FPS
( 166H )
REC PROGRAM GROUP : OFF
(4)
English
SAVE
189
3
RECORD SET
3
Click “4. PROGRAM REC SET”.
The “PROGRAM REC SET” screen is displayed.
PROGRAM REC SET
4
5
PROGRAM
7 : 1
8 : 1
10 : 1
11 : 1
12 : 1
13 : 1
14 : 1
15 : 1
16 : 1
OPERATION
6 : 1
9 : 1
NORMAL REC : 317H
Set “REC PROGRAM GROUP” to the
desired program group.
Setting
‹OFF
4
Description
P-2
P-3
Set “PROGRAM” to the desired
program group.
Setting
Program No. 1
Program No. 2
P-2
Program No. 2
Program No. 3
P-3
Program No. 3
P-4
Program No. 4
Program No. 4
5
For “SELECT INDIVIDUAL CAMERA
RATE (FPS)”, set the recording rate for
each camera.
Set the recording rate for the cameras from which video is to
be recorded.
Click [SAVE].
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
The setting is saved.
Setting
4. PROGRAM REC SET
Recording rate is not set.
25, 12.5, 6.25, 3.125, 1.563,
‹1, 0.5, 0.333, 0.25, 0.2,
0.1, 0.05, 0.033
Recording is performed at the
selected recording rate (unit:
FPS).
NETWORK
OPERATION
When monitoring a number of cameras connected to this
digital video recorder, a separate recording rate can be set for
each camera. In addition, video recorded from each camera
and the corresponding recording rates can be set in programs
with up to four patterns, thus facilitating the simple
specification of programs for TIMER SET and NORMAL REC
MODE SET menus.
Description
OFF
z For program recording, set recording rate per channel.
Recording rates that can be set per channel are
automatically calculated.
z When mirroring or pre-alarm recording is set to “ON”,
recording rates that can be set are limited.
button on the operation
Click “2. RECORD SET”.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
2
z The recording rates listed in pull-down menus vary
according to the connected channels.
The “RECORD SET” screen is displayed.
6
NETWORK
CONTROL
z Settings for program groups should be made separately on
the “PROGRAM REC SET” screen. (JP.190)
Click the
panel.
Description
P-1
SETTINGS
Program No. 1
SAVE
[Settings]
No program group is set.
P-1
P-4
1
5 : 1
6
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
8
: P-1
SELECT INDIVIDUAL CAMERA RATE (FPS)
1 : 1
2 : 1
3 : 1
4 : 1
z The recording rate for timer recording should be set
separately using the “TIMER SET” screen. (JP.191)
7
INTRODUCTION
Selecting setting values
Image resolution is determined by the product of picture
quality and recording rate.
The higher the picture quality and the faster the recording
rate, the better the image resolution; however, as higher
resolution requires more storage capacity, the recording time
decreases accordingly.
Click [SAVE].
z Set values are lost if a different window is selected without
clicking [SAVE].
190
English
OTHER
When the setting is completed, the normal recording time
associated with the setting is displayed for reference
purposes.
Use the above procedure to set up to four program patterns.
3
RECORD SET
5. TIMER SET
Use the following procedure to set timer operation duration and timer recording conditions on a day-specific basis.
(1)
(3)
(2)
(4)
(5)
(6)
TIMER SET
WEEK
(7)
(8)
START
Click the
panel.
PROGRAM
--
: --
OFF
A 12.5 FPS
OFF
MON
--
: --
--
: --
OFF
A 12.5 FPS
OFF
TUE
--
: --
--
: --
OFF
A 12.5 FPS
OFF
WED
--
: --
--
: --
OFF
A 12.5 FPS
OFF
THU
--
: --
--
: --
OFF
A 12.5 FPS
OFF
FRI
--
: --
--
: --
OFF
A 12.5 FPS
OFF
SAT
--
: --
--
: --
OFF
A 12.5 FPS
OFF
DLY
--
: --
--
: --
OFF
A 12.5 FPS
OFF
OFF
A 12.5 FPS
OFF
EXT
**
*
**
**
*
**
OVER 24H
For setting timer
recording spanning
more than 24 hours
SAVE
button on the operation
(8) EXT
Displays details set by an external timer. (These are not start
and stop time settings.)
Click “2. RECORD SET”.
z If “DLY” is set for any other day, all rows use this setting.
The “RECORD SET” screen is displayed.
3
SET
: --
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
2
FPS
--
5
1
STOP
SUN
5
Click “5. TIMER SET”.
Click [SAVE].
The “TIMER SET” screen is displayed.
The setting is saved.
4
„ Performing timer recording
Set timer recording conditions for
different days of the week.
Click the
(1) WEEK
Specifies the days of the week for timer recording. By using
multiple setting rows, it is possible to set up timer recording for
a number of different times during a single day.
(2) START
Specifies the time at which to start timer recording.
(3) STOP
Specifies the time at which to stop timer recording.
(4) PROGRAM
Specifies the program (P-1 through P-4) for program
recording. (JP.190)
(5) FPS
Specifies the recording rate. (JP.189)
Set to “***” for program recording.
“***” is displayed automatically when program recording is set
and [SAVE] is clicked.
(6) SET
Set to “ON” to enable timer recording.
Set to “OFF” to disable timer recording.
(7) DLY
Set the start and stop times, program, and recording rate and
set “SET” to “ON” to enable timer recording over the same
period each day.
English
button on the operation panel. (JP.165)
„ Overlapping of timer reservation times
z If timer settings overlap, recording is performed in the
following priority order.
Individual reservations
“DLY”
“EXT”
(High)
Priority
(Low)
z If a reservation for a particular day or a daily reservation
overlaps with each other, priority is given to that with the
earliest start time. If both have the same start time, priority
is given to that with the highest setting position in the
menu.
„ Setting a timer for over 24-hours continuous
recording
The bottom two lines (SAT, DLY) of the TIMER SET screen
are used to make settings for this type of recording.
(1) Click [OVER 24H] to switch the setting format.
(2) Set the day and time for the start of recording in the top
row.
(3) Set the day, time, program and recording rate for the end
of recording in the bottom row.
(4) Select “ON” for “SET” on the bottom row to specify timer
recording extending for over 24 hours.
191
3
RECORD SET
6. ALARM REC MODE SET
Use the following procedure to set the recording conditions for
alarm recording.
Use the following procedure to set the picture quality for alarm
recording.
5
Setting alarm recording
Setting
button on the operation
Click “2. RECORD SET”.
The “RECORD SET” screen is displayed.
3
BASIC
Basic
NORMAL
Normal
Enhanced
‹ENHANCED
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
2
Description
Click “6. ALARM REC MODE SET”.
OPERATION
Click the
panel.
Set “PICTURE QUALITY”.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Set the operation patterns and recording conditions to perform
alarm recording.
1
INTRODUCTION
Setting the picture quality for recording
FINE
Fine
SUPER FINE
Super Fine
INDIV.
Picture quality is set for each camera.
„ Setting the picture quality for each camera
SETTINGS
The “ALARM REC MODE SET” screen is displayed.
(1) Set “PICTURE QUALITY” to “INDIV.”.
The “ALARM REC MODE SET” screen is displayed.
ALARM REC MODE SET
ALARM REC MODE SET
ALARM RECORDING
:
OFF
PICTURE QUALITY
:
ENHANCED
6
7
8
10
11
AUDIO RECORDING
:
OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
:
ONLY
REC RATE :
REC RATE :
A 12.5 FPS
(2)
, DURATION:
:
20 SEC
9
5 SEC
12
***
, DURATION:
(3)
=>(813 ALARMS CAN BE RECORDED)
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
13
ALARM RECORDING
:
ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
:
INDIV.
05
EN
13
EN
01
EN
09
EN
02
EN
10
EN
03
EN
11
EN
04
EN
12
EN
AUDIO RECORDING
:
OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
:
ONLY
REC RATE :
A 12.5 FPS
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
14
SAVE
REC RATE :
(4)
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
‹OFF
Alarm recording is disabled.
Alarm recording is performed only
during timer recording.
AL-REC OFF TIMER
Alarm recording is performed only
during recording other than timer
recording.
OLY AL-RC ON TMR
Alarm recording is performed only in
the period set for timer recording
without timer recording actually
being performed.
, DURATION:
5 SEC
SAVE
OTHER
AL-REC ON TIMER
20 SEC
***
NETWORK
SETTINGS
Alarm recording is always
performed regardless of timer
recording or timer settings.
:
08
EN
16
EN
(2) Set the picture quality for each camera.
(3) Set “AUDIO RECORDING”, “ALARM INTERLEAVE”,
“REC RATE”, “DURATION”, “PRE-ALARM
RECORDING”, “REC RATE”, “DURATION” and “ALARM
TRIGGER” (Jsteps 6 to 13).
(4) Click [SAVE].
Description
ENABLED
, DURATION:
07
EN
15
EN
=>(981 ALARMS CAN BE RECORDED)
ALARM TRIGGER
:: ALARM
Set “ALARM RECORDING” to the
desired recording mode.
Setting
A 12.5 FPS
06
EN
14
EN
NETWORK
OPERATION
4
A 12.5 FPS
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
(1)
NETWORK
CONTROL
4
5
192
English
3
RECORD SET
Setting audio recording
z In the program mode, there is a time lag of approximately
up to one second between the alarm occurrence and start
of recording, depending on the setting values of the
recording rate.
Audio can be recorded together with images during alarm
recording. Note, however, that since this audio data is also
stored in the recording area, the recording time for this area
decreases.
6
8
Set “AUDIO RECORDING”.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
‹OFF
ON
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Description
Setting
Audio is not recorded.
0.5, 0.333, 0.25, 0.2, 0.1,
0.05, 0.033
Set “ALARM INTERLEAVE” to the
desired recording pattern.
z When only one camera is connected, recording is
performed at 25 FPS even if 50 FPS is set.
z When two or more cameras are connected and 50 FPS is
set, the actual recording rate is roughly the recording rate
divided by the number of cameras. (Example: When 4
cameras are connected and the recording rate setting is 50
FPS, the actual recording rate is 12.5 FPS)
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Description
‹ONLY
Video is recorded only from cameras with an
alarm occurring.
SW
Recording is switched between video from a
camera for which an alarm has occurred and
video from all connected cameras.
ALL
For all the connected cameras, video recording
starts at the same time when any one of the
cameras receives an alarm.
ONLY (P-1)
ONLY (P-2)
ONLY (P-3)
ONLY (P-4)
<“ONLY” program mode>
When a connected camera registered in the
program recording setting receives an alarm,
video recording starts at a recording rate
specified in the program.
z Specify the program you want to apply from
“P-1” to “P-4”.
z Audio recording is not available.
ALL (P-1)
ALL (P-2)
ALL (P-3)
ALL (P-4)
<“ALL” program mode>
When any one of the connected cameras
registered in the program recording setting
receives an alarm, video recording starts for all
the connected cameras at a recording rate
which was independently specified for each
connected camera in the program.
z Specify a program you want to apply from “P1 to P-4”.
z Audio recording is available only when any
one of the cameras has a recording rate of 1
FPS or more.
English
Recording is performed at the
selected recording rate (unit:
FPS). (Audio cannot be recorded.)
z The letter “A” is displayed in front of recording rates that
can be set for audio recording.
z If “ALARM INTERLEAVE (step 7)” is set to program mode,
you cannot select the recording rate.
“***FPS” is automatically displayed when you click the
[SAVE] button.
Setting the alarm interleave
Setting
Description
A50, A25, A16.67, ‹A12.5,
A8.333, A6.25, A5, A4.167,
Recording is performed at the
A3.571, A3.125, A2.778,
selected recording rate (unit:
A2.5, A2.273, A1.923,
FPS). (Audio can be recorded.)
A1.667, A1.471, A1.316,
A1.19, A1.087, A1
Audio is recorded.
z The settings for audio recording are restricted by the
settings for “ALARM INTERLEAVE (Step 7)” as follows:
ONLY/SW/ALL:
Audio recording is enabled when “REC RATE (Step 8)” is
set to 1 FPS or more.
ALL (P-1 – 4):
Audio recording is enabled when “REC RATE” for any one
of the program-registered cameras is set to 1 FPS or more.
ONLY (P-1 – 4):
Audio recording is disabled.
z If audio recording is unavailable due to restrictions,
“AUDIORECORDING” will be forcibly switched to “OFF”
when you click the [SAVE] button even if it is set to “ON”.
7
Set “REC RATE” to the desired
recording rate.
9
Set “DURATION” to the desired alarm
recording duration.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
193
Description
5SEC, 10SEC, ‹20SEC,
40SEC, 1MIN, 2MIN, 3MIN,
4MIN, 5MIN, 10MIN, 15MIN
Records for the set duration for
each alarm.
CC
Records while an alarm is
activated (Recording continues
for five seconds even if less than
five seconds).
3
RECORD SET
Setting alarm triggers
Use the following procedure to set the recording conditions to
be used for pre-alarm. (JP.168)
Use the following procedure to set the alarm triggers (i.e.,
launch signals), which function as operation conditions for
alarm recording.
10 Set “PRE-ALARM RECORDING” to
13 Set “ALARM TRIGGER” to the desired
“ON” or “OFF”.
launch signal for alarm recording.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
INTRODUCTION
Setting pre-alarm recording.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Description
Pre-alarm recording is disabled.
ON
Pre-alarm recording is enabled.
Setting
‹ALARM
SENSOR
Description
OPERATION
‹OFF
Starts recording when an external alarm is
activated.
Starts recording when a motion sensor is
activated.
Starts recording when both an external alarm
ALARM AND
and a motion sensor are activated
SENSOR
simultaneously.
z If “ALARM RECORDING” is set to “OFF”, the PRE-ALARM
RECORDING setting is displayed as “**” and cannot be
set.
11 Set “REC RATE” to the desired
Starts recording when an external alarm or a
motion sensor is activated independent of the
other.
SETTINGS
ALARM OR
SENSOR
recording rate.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
Recording is performed at the
selected recording rate (unit:
FPS).
The letter “A” is displayed in front of recording rates that can
be set for audio recording.
NETWORK
CONTROL
A100, A50, A25, A16.67,
‹A12.5, A8.333, A6.25,
A5, A4.167, A3.571,
A3.125, A2.778, A2.5,
A2.273, A1.923, A1.667,
A1.471, A1.316, A1.19,
A1.087, A1
z External alarm detection:
This is used to describe input of an external detection
signal from a door switch or the like to the unit’s ALARM IN
terminal.
z Motion sensor detection:
This refers to detection of motion on the monitor in
accordance with motion sensor settings.
z The motion sensor settings are made on the digital video
recorder.
Description
14 Click [SAVE].
The setting is saved.
NETWORK
OPERATION
NETWORK
SETTINGS
z When mirroring is set to "ON", configurable recording rates
are limited.
z When only one camera is connected, recording is
performed at 25 FPS even if 50 or 100 FPS are set.
z When two or more cameras are connected and 50 or 100
FPS is set, the actual recording rate is roughly the
recording rate divided by the number of cameras.
(Example: When 8 cameras are connected and the
recording rate setting is 100 FPS, the actual recording rate
is 12.5 FPS)
12 Set “DURATION” to the desired prealarm recording duration.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
OTHER
5SEC, 10SEC, 20SEC,
40SEC, ‹1MIN, 2MIN,
3MIN, 4MIN, 5MIN, 10MIN,
15MIN
Description
Records for the set duration.
194
English
4
GENERAL SET
5
GENERAL SET
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Click [SAVE].
The setting is saved.
DISPLAY SET
BUZZER SET
SECURITY LOCK SET
USER ID SET
RS-485 SET
HDD SET
NETWORK SET
NETWORK CONTROL SET
z These settings apply to information displayed on the
monitor connected to the unit, not to information displayed
on the PC monitor.
2. BUZZER SET
Use the following procedure to set a warning buzzer that
sounds when an alarm occurs or when the hard disk space
reaches remaining-space warning level.
1. DISPLAY SET
Set conditions for the display of data on the unit’s monitor by
selecting “ON” or “OFF” for each item.
1
1
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
Click the
panel.
button on the operation
2
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
2
3
Click “3. GENERAL SET”.
DISPLAY SET
DATE
TIME
(3)
QUALITY
(4)
AUDIO
(5)
ALARM TYPE
(7)
TITLE
5
(2) TIME
(3) QUALITY
(4) AUDIO
ALARM
COUNT
ALARM
TYPE
(7) TITLE
English
ON
ON
ALARM
: OFF
DISK FULL
: ON
DISK ERROR
: ON
LOCK WARNING
: ON
KEY IN
: OFF
NON REC
: OFF
DISK TEMPERATURE : ON
5
ON
:
:
4
ON
ON
SAVE
Default
setting
Default
setting
Description
OFF
Sounds a buzzer when an alarm
is detected.
(2) DISK FULL
ON
Sounds a buzzer when the
amount of data stored in each of
the hard disk recording areas
reaches the remaining-space
warning level (JP.188).
DISK
ERROR
ON
Sounds a buzzer when a harddisk error occurs.
ON
Sounds a buzzer when a
restricted operation button is
pressed during security lock.
Specifically, the buzzer sounds
twice with an interval of
approximately 0.5 seconds.
(5) KEY IN
OFF
Buzzer emits a key-operation
sound each time a button is
pressed.
(6) NON REC
OFF
Sounds a buzzer when recording
is stopped.
ON
Sounds a buzzer accompanied with
a warning message, when the
temperature has exceeded a given
value in the hard disk drive.
(1) ALARM
Description
ON
Displays the current date or
recording date.
ON
Displays the current time or
recording time.
ON
Displays the picture quality for
recording or playback.
ON
Displays the audio status during
recording or playback.
ON
Displays the number of recorded
alarms.
ON
Displays the alarm recording type.
z For alarm recording:
“ALARM” is displayed.
z For pre-alarm recording:
“PRE” is displayed.
ON
Select “ON” or “OFF” for each display item.
Item
Select “ON” or “OFF” for each display
item.
(1) DATE
(6)
:
:
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
SAVE
Item
(5)
ON
BUZZER SET
ALARM COUNT : ON
(6)
4
:
:
Click “2. BUZZER SET”.
(1)
(2)
The “DISPLAY SET” screen is displayed.
(1)
Click “3. GENERAL SET”.
The “BUZZER SET” screen is displayed.
Click “1. DISPLAY SET”.
(2)
button on the operation
The “GENERAL SET” screen is displayed.
The “GENERAL SET” screen is displayed.
3
Click the
panel.
(3)
(4)
(7)
Displays the camera title.
195
LOCK
WARNING
DISK
TEMPERATURE
4
5
GENERAL SET
Click [SAVE].
INTRODUCTION
3. SECURITY LOCK SET
The setting is saved.
User level functions can be displayed.
1
z These settings apply to the buzzer on the digital video
recorder. To sound a buzzer on the PC, refer to NOTE.
z Different settings cannot be used for the recorder and the
PC.
z When a buzzer sounds, press any button on the digital
video recorder to stop the buzzer.
z The “DISK TEMPERATURE” warning function does not
work with a RAID unit. Select “OFF” if you use hard disks
other than those designated by SANYO, as this function
may not properly work on them.
Click the
panel.
button on the operation
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
2
Click “3. GENERAL SET”.
3
OPERATION
The “GENERAL SET” screen is displayed.
Click “3. SECURITY LOCK SET”.
The “SECURITY LOCK SET” screen is displayed.
SECURITY LOCK SET
LOCK MODE
FREE ACCESS LEVEL
OPERATION AUTHORITY
: NO
: NORMAL
COPY
: LV2, 3, 4
CAMERA CONTROL
: LV2, 3, 4
Description
LOCK MODE
Displays the currently set lock mode (KEY/
PASSWORD/NETWORK)
FREE
ACCESS
LEVEL
Displays user levels that cannot use
password lock (NO/LV1/LV1,2/LV1,2,3)
when “LOCK MODE” is set for
“PASSWORD”
OPERATION
AUTHORITY
Displays whether default values are used
for user authorization, and whether to
change the authorization for copying to
external media or camera control
COPY
Displays user levels that have permission
to copy to external media when
“OPERATION AUTHORITY” is set for
“CHANGE”
CAMERA
CONTROL
Displays user levels with camera control
permission when “OPERATION
AUTHORITY” is set to “CHANGE”
NETWORK
OPERATION
Setting
NETWORK
CONTROL
To cancel the buzzer setting on the PC
z Delete the folder or file created in the above-mentioned
process, change the name of the audio file, or move it to a
different location on the hard disk.
z Press the
(Stop) button on the PLAYBACK area on
the operation panel to stop the buzzer on the PC.
: KEY
SETTINGS
To sound a buzzer on the PC
z Create a folder named “BUZZER” within the root directory
of the PC’s C drive.
z Within this folder, save the sound to be used as a buzzer in
.wav format and with the name “BUZZER.WAV”.
Example: C:\BUZZER\BUZZER.WAV
Once these settings have been made, whenever an alarm
occurs, the PC provides notification by playing the saved .wav
file.
* Only the first second of the saved audio file is played, and
for this reason, it is advisable to choose a file with suitable
audio in the first second. The use of large audio files is
discouraged.
* The PC buzzer only sounds when an alarm occurs. It does
not sound for errors such as disk full warning, disk error or
recording stop.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
OTHER
196
English
4
GENERAL SET
4
5
6
4. USER ID SET
Set a user ID and password to restrict operation of the digital
video recorder directly or through the network.
„ User levels and privileges
Select from the following four user levels.
Operation
privilege
LV1
Level
Monitoring
LV2
LV3
*1
7
Menu operation
Monitor control
Level 2
3
Level 3
4
Level 4
Click [SAVE].
z The “LV” setting registered on line 1 cannot be changed
from “4”. To change the level, register a separate user on a
different line.
Click the
panel.
button on the operation
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
Click “3. GENERAL SET”.
The “GENERAL SET” screen is displayed.
Click “4. USER ID SET”.
The “USER ID SET” screen is displayed.
USER ID SET
USER ID PASSWORD LV
4444
1 ID4
4
USER ID PASSWORD LV
9
--
2 ID3
3333
3
10
--
3 ID2
2222
2
11
--
4 ID1
1111
1
12
--
5
--
13
--
6
--
14
--
7
--
15
--
8
--
16
--
SAVE
English
2
3 users at LV2, LV3 and LV4
16 users including a user for the DVR (1 user
for the DVR)
Use the following procedure to set the user ID, password and
level.
The user ID must be between one and eight alphanumeric
characters, and the password between four and eight
alphanumeric characters.
Characters that can be entered: 0 to 9, A to Z
6
5
4
Level 1
1 user at LV3 or LV4
Registering a user
3
Description
1
The setting is saved.
3 users
16 users*2
*1 Masked video cannot be monitored.
*2 However, the maximum number may not be possible
depending on the NET conditions and the number of
screens displayed.
2
Set user level for “LV”.
Setting
LV4
Recording
1
Set “PASSWORD”.
[Settings]
Playback/
searching
Concurrent
connection
restriction
Set user ID for “USER ID”.
197
4
GENERAL SET
6. HDD SET
1
Click the
panel.
This screen displays information regarding the hard disk.
1
button on the operation
2
Click “3. GENERAL SET”.
button on the operation
Click “3. GENERAL SET”.
3
Click “5. RS-485 SET”.
OPERATION
The “GENERAL SET” screen is displayed.
The “GENERAL SET” screen is displayed.
3
Click the
panel.
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
2
INTRODUCTION
5. RS-485 SET
This screen displays settings relevant to the unit’s interfaces.
Settings cannot be changed.
Click “6. HDD SET”.
The “HDD SET” screen is displayed.
The “RS-485 SET” screen is displayed.
HDD SET
RS-485 SET
(1)
(1)
DISK 2
: 82 GB
DATA SPEED : 19200
STATUS INFO : OFF
ALARM INFO : OFF
ADDRESS
: 001
(2)
(3)
: 80 GB
EX - DISK 2 : 80 GB
EX - DISK 4 : 80 GB
EX - DISK 1 : 82 GB
EX - DISK 3 : 82 GB
SETTINGS
(2)
(3)
(4)
DISK 1
MIRRORING
: ON
PLAYBACK DRIVE : MASTER
SAVE
(1)
(2)
Description
DATA SPEED
Displays the communication speed.
STATUS INFO
Displays whether or not status
information is transmitted during
RS-232C/RS-485 communication.
ALARM INFO
Displays whether or not alarm
information is transmitted during
RS-232C/RS-485 communication.
(4)
ADDRESS
Displays the address.
Description
ON
Mirroring recording enabled.
OFF
Mirroring recording disabled.
(3) PLAYBACK DRIVE
This item indicates which of the hard drives is used to provide
video for playback when mirroring is turned on.
Setting
***
Description
NETWORK
SETTINGS
z Mirroring:
When the hard disk is expanded, the same video can be
recorded to both hard disks in a process known as
“mirroring”. Even if a problem occurs in the writing of video
data to one of the disks, it is possible to extract normal data
from the other disk when this function is turned on.
NETWORK
OPERATION
(3)
Setting
NETWORK
CONTROL
Item
(1) Hard disk capacity
Displays the total capacity of the hard disk.
If the hard disk is expanded, the capacity is displayed for each
disk.
(2) MIRRORING
Displays settings relevant to mirroring-type recording on the
digital video recorder.
Mirroring is disabled.
MASTER Playback data is read from master disk.
198
Playback data is read from slave disk.
OTHER
SLAVE
English
4
GENERAL SET
4
Item
Description
Set from the digital video recorder
whether the IP address is automatically
acquired from the DHCP server or
manually set. Set “ON” when using an IP
(1) DHCP
address acquired automatically from an
Internet service provider or a DHCP
server on a LAN, and set “OFF” when
using a fixed IP.
Select “OFF” for “DHCP” to set. Generally,
a private IP address is used when a fixed
IP address is set in a LAN (example:
(2) IP ADDRESS
192.168.0.0 - 192.168.255.255).
Be sure not to duplicate IP addresses
from other devices.
SUBNET
Select “OFF” for “DHCP” to set. The same
(3)
MASK
value is set throughout the LAN.
Select “OFF” for “DHCP” to set. Specifies
the IP address of the device (on the LAN
(4) GATEWAY
side) when linking a LAN to a WAN or
another type of network.
(5) PORT
Sets open port. Default value is “80”.
NETWORK
Sets restrictions for traffic in the LAN.
(6)
SPEED
Normally, this is set to “NO LIMIT”.
Set whether the DNS server IP address is
automatically acquired or manually set.
Generally this setting is “AUTO” when
DNS
“ON” is selected for “DHCP”. When the
(7)
SERVER
DNS server address is specified by
network administrator or Internet service
provider, select “MANUAL” and set
“PRIMARY” and “SECONDARY” below.
Set the primary address and the
secondary address.
PRIMARY
Set when “DNS SERVER” is set to
(8)
SECONDARY “MANUAL”. Set the DNS server address
specified by the network administrator or
Internet service provider.
(9) HOST NAME Set the host name.
DOMAIN
Set when specified by an Internet service
(10)
SUFFIX
provider.
Set MTU size. The default setting is “1500
(11) MTU SIZE
(ETHERNET)”.
z “***” is displayed and “PLAYBACK DRIVE” cannot be set
when only one hard disk is being used or when
“MIRRORING” is set to “OFF”.
z When this setting is made after expanding the hard disk,
the hard disks are initialized and all recorded video is lost.
If any important recordings are stored on the hard disks,
they should also be stored on a separate data storage
device before making this setting.
7. NETWORK SET
Network settings must be made in advance on the unit
whenever it is to be controlled via a network. Once this is
done, settings can then be changed from the controlling PC.
z Changing network-related settings
When these settings are modified, the connection is
cancelled and control rights are returned to the unit. To
reestablish the connection, reset the network settings on
the PC to match the modified settings on the unit.
1
Click the
panel.
button on the operation
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
2
Click “3. GENERAL SET”.
The “GENERAL SET” screen is displayed.
3
Click “7. NETWORK SET”.
The “NETWORK SET” screen is displayed.
(1)
(2)
(4)
(6)
(8)
DHCP
(3)
(5)
(7)
(9)
(10)
(11)
5
English
NETWORK SET
: ON
IP ADDRESS
:
192
. 168
. 0
. 1
SUBNET MASK
:
255
. 255
. 255
. 0
GATEWAY
:
0
. 0
. 0
. 0
PORT
:
80
NETWORK SPEED
: NO LIMIT
DNS SERVER
: AUTO
Change the settings as required.
Contact the network administrator for more details on setting
values.
PRIMARY
:
0
. 0
. 0
. 0
SECONDARY
:
0
. 0
. 0
. 0
HOST NAME
:
DOMAIN SUFFIX
:
MTU SIZE
: 1500 (ETHERNET )
MAC ADDRESS
: 08-00-7B-81-22-4C
SAVE
199
4
GENERAL SET
INTRODUCTION
8. NETWORK CONTROL SET
z If settings are changed during network control, the
connection is terminated.
z If settings are changed during network control, the
connection is terminated.
5
1
Click the
panel.
button on the operation
OPERATION
z If a value other than “80” is set as the default value for the
port, when specifying the URL, enter a colon (:) and then
the port number after the IP address.
For example, if the port number is set as “60001”, enter
http://192.168.0.1:60001/
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
Click [SAVE].
2
The setting is saved.
Click “3. GENERAL SET”.
The “GENERAL SET” screen is displayed.
3
Click “8. NETWORK CONTROL SET”.
The “NETWORK CONTROL SET” screen is displayed.
SETTINGS
NETWORK CONTROL SET
NETWORK CONTROL
: ON
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
OPERATION AUTHORITY
: CHANGE
COPY/DOWNLOAD
: LV3, 4
: LV2, 3, 4
CAMERA CONTROL
9
4
: ON
NETWORK STATUS
SAVE
Set “NETWORK STATUS” to “ON” or
“OFF”.
NETWORK
CONTROL
4
5
6
7
8
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
‹ON
OFF
Description
During network connection, the message
“NETWORK CONTROL” is displayed on the
monitor connected to the digital video recorder.
The message “NETWORK CONTROL” is not
displayed on the monitor connected to the digital
video recorder even during network connection.
NETWORK
OPERATION
Setting
NETWORK
SETTINGS
OTHER
200
English
4
5
GENERAL SET
Specify a value for “PICTURE QUALITY”
of live video which is received through
network.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
Description
BACIC (BA)
Basic picture quality
NORMAL (NO)
Normal picture quality
‹ENHANCED (EN)
Enhanced picture quality
FINE (FI)
Fine picture quality
SUPER FINE (SF)
Super fine picture quality
z If the recording rate for normal recording is set to “100
(FPS)”, video is transmitted in normal quality while
recording is in progress with the digital video recorder.
6
Set “OPERATION AUTHORITY” to
“NORMAL” or “CHANGE”.
If no changes are to be made to user privileges, select
“NORMAL” and go to step 8.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
‹NORMAL
CHANGE
7
Description
User privileges remain at the default
setting.
Allows changes to user privileges.
If “OPERATION AUTHORITY” is set to
“CHANGE”, set the level for “COPY/
DOWNLOAD”.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
Description
‹LV3, 4
Allows users at Level 3 or higher to
download live images.
LV4
Allows users at Level 4 or higher to
download live images.
8
If “OPERATION AUTHORITY” is set to
“CHANGE”, set the level for “CAMERA
CONTROL”.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
Description
‹LV2, 3, 4
Allows users at Level 2 or higher to control
cameras from the PC.
LV3, 4
Allows users at Level 3 or higher to control
cameras from the PC.
LV4
Allows Level 4 users to control cameras
from the PC.
9
Click [SAVE].
The settings are saved.
English
201
5
SCREEN SET
6
Click [SAVE].
The setting is saved.
Switching the main monitor and monitor 2
displays at a set time period
1. SEQUENCE SET
2. MASK SET
1
1. SEQUENCE SET
Set “FULL” to “INDIV.” on the
“SEQUENCE SET” screen.
Click the
panel.
SEQUENCE SET
button on the operation
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
2
MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET
TIME PERIOD : T1 ( 00:00 - 00:00 )
CH
01
02
03
1S
1S
MAIN MONITOR 1S
1S
1S
1S
MON.2
1S
1S
SAVE
06
07
08
1S
1S
1S
1S
1S
1S
1S
1S
11
12
13
14
15
16
1S
1S
1S
1S
1S
1S
1S
1S
1S
1S
1S
1S
Set “QUAD” to the desired quad-screen
display interval.
Set “TIME PERIOD” to the desired time
period.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
Description
‹T1
Time period T1
T2
Time period T2
T3
Time period T3
T4
Time period T4
Set “FULL” to the desired full-screen
display interval.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
Description
z The time period for “T1” through “T4” changes to that of
“TIME PERIOD A” or “TIME PERIOD B” on the <TIME
PERIOD SET> screen (JP.74).
z If the time period is set to “ALL DAY LONG”, the display is
fixed to “T-1 (00:00-24:00)”.
Display changes at a 1 second interval.
‹1S
2S - 30S
Display changes at a 2 to 30 second interval.
INDIV.
Set the period for each camera.
On the DSR-5709P, cameras No. 01-09 are displayed.
z The screen changes if “INDIV.” is selected. See “Switching
the main monitor and monitor 2 displays at a set time
period” (following) for the next operations.
5
5
2S - 30S
OTHER
6
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
‹1S
Select the switching interval for each
camera on monitor 2.
On the DSR-5709P, cameras No. 01-09 are displayed.
Set “QUAD” to the desired quad-screen
display interval.
Setting
Select the switching interval for each
camera on the main monitor.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
4
NETWORK
OPERATION
4
05
1S
SAVE
3
6
10
04
1S
NETWORK
CONTROL
: 1S
3
2
SEQUENCE SET
: 1S
: 1S
6
The “SEQUENCE SET” screen is displayed.
QUAD
: INDIV.
QUAD
CH
09
MAIN MONITOR 1S
1S
MON.2
Click “1. SEQUENCE SET”.
FULL
FULL
SETTINGS
The “SCREEN SET” screen is displayed.
4
5
1
2
4
5
Click “4. SCREEN SET”.
3
OPERATION
Use the following procedure to scroll through video from all
cameras at a specified interval.
The interval for automatic selection can only be set for full
screen and quad display.
1
INTRODUCTION
SCREEN SET
Click [SAVE].
The setting is saved.
Description
Display changes at a 1 second interval.
Display changes at a 2 to 30 second interval.
202
English
5
SCREEN SET
2. MASK SET
Use the following procedure to mask unneeded video on the
monitor screen with a gray pattern.
1
Click the
panel.
button on the operation
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
2
Click “4. SCREEN SET”.
The “SCREEN SET” screen is displayed.
3
Click “2. MASK SET”.
The “MASK SET“ screen is displayed.
On the DSR-5709P, cameras No. 01-09 are displayed.
MASK SET
(1)
MASK
:
OFF
(2)
TIME PERIOD
:
T1 ( 00:00 - 00:00 )
(3)
CH
01
MAIN MONITOR OFF
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
MON.2
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
NETWORK
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
CH
09
MAIN MONITOR OFF
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
MON.2
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
NETWORK
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
5
4
SAVE
Set the following functions as required.
Item
Description
(1) MASK
Turns masking on or off.
(2) TIME PERIOD
Select a time period, from T1 to T4.
(If the time period is set to “ALL DAY
LONG” on the digital video recorder, the
display is fixed to “T-1 (00:00-24:00)”.)
(3) CH
Turns masking on or off for each channel
on the main monitor, monitor 2 and
network video.
5
Click [SAVE].
The setting is saved.
z Network mask settings are valid only for the user
connecting to the network with LV1. Users connecting with
LV2, LV3 and LV4 are able to display all channels.
English
203
6
POWER LOSS/USED TIME
INTRODUCTION
1. POWER LOSS/USED TIME
Use the following procedure to check date and time of power
losses, the amount of power-on time, and time of use for hard
disk.
1
Click the
panel.
button on the operation
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
OPERATION
2
Click “5. POWER LOSS/USED TIME”.
The “POWER LOSS/USED TIME” screen is displayed.
(1)
SETTINGS
(2)
(3)
Description
(2) INTERNAL HDD
Displays the power usage duration for
each disk.
FIRMWARE
VER
NETWORK
OPERATION
(1) POWER
Displays the number of power losses
(#007) and the date and time of
occurrence and recovery for the eight
most recent power losses.
(3)
NETWORK
CONTROL
Item
Displays the firmware version.
z The maximum number of power losses displayed is “999”.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
OTHER
204
English
7
INITIALIZATION LOG
INITIALIZATION LOG
Use the following procedure to check the records for hard-disk
initialization and area resetting.
1
Click the
panel.
button on the operation
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
2
Click “6. INITIALIZATION LOG”.
The “INITIALIZATION LOG” screen is displayed.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
INITIALIZATION LOG
DATE
04 - 06
04 - 06
04 - 06
26 - 05
-- - --- - --- - --- - --
Item
TIME
17 : 01
17 : 00
17 : 00
11 : 24
-- : --- : --- : --- : --
AREA
ACTION
RECORD(INIT.)
RECORD(RESET)
ARCHIVE(INIT.)
ARCHIVE(RESET)
-------------(----------)
-------------(----------)
-------------(----------)
-------------(----------)
USER ID
ID4
ID4
ID4
ID4
-----------------------------
Description
(1) DATE
Displays the date of initialization and
area resetting.
(2) TIME
Displays the time of initialization and
area resetting.
(3) AREA, ACTION
Displays the area in question and the
corresponding operation content.
(4) USER ID
Displays the user ID of the user that
performed initialization and area
resetting.
z The eight most recent records for initialization and area
resetting are displayed.
English
205
8
COPY MENU SETTINGS
LOADING MENU SETTINGS
1
Click the
panel.
INTRODUCTION
SAVING MENU SETTINGS
Use the following procedure to save menu settings to a PC.
Load menu settings saved on a computer to the digital video
recorder.
Also set whether to load user ID settings (JP.197) or network
settings (JP.199).
button on the operation
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
2
Click “7. COPY MENU SETTINGS”.
The “COPY MENU SETTINGS” screen is displayed.
1
Click the
panel.
OPERATION
z Recording area settings (JP.83) can also be loaded but
hard disk initialization is required.
button on the operation
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
3
2
Click “7. COPY MENU SETTINGS”.
SETTINGS
The “COPY MENU SETTINGS” screen is displayed.
3
3
Click [SAVE].
The save confirmation dialog is displayed.
Specify the save destination folder and
save.
NETWORK
CONTROL
4
3
5
6
Select whether to load network settings
with “COPY NETWORK SETTINGS”.
Select whether to load recording area
settings with “COPY RECORDING
AREA SETTINGS”.
Click [LOAD].
The loading process begins.
The network is disconnected and the digital video recorder
restarts.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
7
Select whether to load user ID settings
with “COPY USER ID SETTINGS”.
NETWORK
OPERATION
4
Click the [BROWSE] button and specify
the file that the menu is saved in.
OTHER
206
English
9
ADVANCED MENU SET
ADVANCED MENU SET
1. ALARM NOTICE SET
2. CAMERA CONTROL SET
3. TIME ZONE/NTP SET
1. ALARM NOTICE SET
Use the following procedure to receive notification by e-mail when an alarm event or device malfunction occurs while the digital
video recorder is connected to a network. To set this function, make the necessary e-mail settings.
1
Click the
panel.
3
button on the operation
Click “1. ALARM NOTICE SET”.
The “ALARM NOTICE SET” screen is displayed.
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
2
Click “8. ADVANCED MENU SET”.
The “ADVANCED MENU SET” screen is displayed.
4
5
6
6
7
8
11
13
14
15
15
16
17
4
5
Set “ALARM NOTICE” to “ON”.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
Alarm notification is disabled.
ON
Alarm notification is enabled.
English
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Description
‹OFF
Set “SSL” to “ON” or “OFF”.
Setting
‹OFF
ON
207
Description
Transmits without using SSL.
Transmits using SSL.
9
6
ADVANCED MENU SET
z If you use the “WARNING” function, specify “ON” for
“ALARM NOTICE” in Step 4.
z Since “USE” in Step 8 applies to alarm notification, it does
not affect the setting for “WARNING”. A warning
notification mail message is sent normally when “ON” is set
for it.
For “PORT”, specify a port number (0 to 65535) for use in
SMTP (transmission). (Default setting: 25)
7
Set “USER MAIL ADDRESS” to the email address from which notifications
are sent.
12 Use the same procedure to set the email addresses of other e-mail
recipients.
Specify “ON” or “OFF” for “USE” under
“SEND MAIL ADDRESS”.
Up to eight recipient e-mail addresses can be set.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
Alarm notification is disabled.
ON
Alarm notification is enabled.
notification e-mail.
14 Set “AUTHENTICATION” to select
whether authentication is to be
performed.
Enter the recipient’s e-mail address
under “MAIL ADDRESS”.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
10 Set “IMAGE” to “ON” or “OFF”.
Setting
‹NO USE
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
‹OFF
Description
An alarm image is not attached to the e-mail.
An alarm image is attached to the e-mail.
Description
User authentication is not performed.
POP3
POP3 (POP before SMTP) authentication is
performed.
SMTP
SMTP authentication is performed.
15 If “POP3” is selected for
11 Specify “ON” or “OFF” for each item
“AUTHENTICATION”, you need to
specify “POP3 SERVER ADDRESS” and
“PORT”.
under “WARNING”.
You can configure the main unit to send warning notification
mail messages when the following problems are detected in
the functionality and operation of the main unit.
You can configure the warning notification feature the same
way as the alarm notification feature. All settings default to
“OFF”; turning “ON” an item causes the main unit to send
warning mail when the corresponding condition is detected.
z HDD:
When abnormal condition has occurred in the hard disk
drive, or when the hard disc temperature has risen to
70 degrees or more.
z V. LOSS:
The video signal is disconnected.
z FAN:
The fan is faulty.
z NON REC:
The DVR has stopped recording.
z FULL:
Any one of the recording areas on the hard disk has
reached the “remaining-space” warning level or has
become full.
z POWER:
The power has turned off and back on again.
NETWORK
CONTROL
ON
SETTINGS
9
13 Set “SUBJECT” to the subject of the
Description
‹OFF
OPERATION
8
INTRODUCTION
Set up “SMTP SERVER ADDRESS” and
“PORT”.
For “PORT”, specify a port number (0 to 65535) for use in
POP 3 (reception). (Default setting: 110)
“AUTHENTICATION”, you need to
specify “USER ID” and “PASSWORD”.
17 Click [SAVE].
NETWORK
OPERATION
16 If “POP3” or “SMTP” is selected for
The setting is saved.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
z The digital video recorder supports the following SMTP
authentication:
• CRAM-MD5 • LOGIN
208
English
OTHER
z For the digital video recorder to perform authentication, the
provider must have authentication settings made. Make the
authentication settings after confirming the type of
authentication supported by the connected provider.
9
ADVANCED MENU SET
5
2. CAMERA CONTROL SET
Set when cameras with remote operation capability are
connected.
Perform the following connections and set camera control to
use in full screen display.
Connections necessary for remote operation:
z Connect coaxial control cameras to the VIDEO terminal.
z Connect the Sanyo RS-485 control camera to the RS-485
terminal (RJ-11).
z Connect the other companies’ RS485/422 control camera
to the 2ND RS485/422 terminal.
1
Click the
panel.
When “SANYO RS-485” or “2ND RS-485/422” is specified as
the protocol, the address is displayed automatically.
6
button on the operation
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
‹OFF
Click “8. ADVANCED MENU SET”.
PRESET
The “ADVANCED MENU SET” screen is displayed.
3
Click “2. CAMERA CONTROL SET”.
The “CAMERA CONTROL SET” screen is displayed.
The DSR-5709P displays only nine channels.
6
5
In “ACTION”, specify the interlocking
operation of the camera when an alarm
is detected.
You can configure the camera to automatically change lens
orientation, auto-pan or tour on alarm detection.
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
2
The address (000 to 127) is displayed in
“ADD”.
Description
No action triggered.
Moves the camera lens to the angle
corresponding to your selected preset
number.
PAN
Starts automatic panning.
TOUR
Starts tour.
SEQUENCE
Starts sequence.
z For “PRESET”, you can set “PRESET2-9” with DSR-5709P
and “PRESET2-16” with DSR-5716P.
4
z Actually available actions depend on each camera. For
more information, refer to the camera's instruction manual.
7
8
8
10
9
Set “PROTOCOL” to the protocol
corresponding to the dome camera.
Description
No protocol
10 Click [SAVE].
SANYO RS-485
SANYO RS-485
The setting is saved.
BBV COAX
BBV COAX
(Also supports AUX commands.)
‹OFF
English
Set “DATA SPEED”.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
‹9600bps, 4800bps, 2400bps
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
Set “2ND RS-485/422 PROTOCOL”.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
‹OFF, BBV, KALATEL, PELCO, SENSORMATIC
9
4
Use the same procedure to set the other
channels.
PELCO COAX
PELCO COAX
2ND RS-485/422
2ND RS-485/422
COAX (H-SSP)
COAX (H-SSP)
209
9
ADVANCED MENU SET
Setting
Description
Greenwich Mean Time +1 hour,
Amsterdam, Berlin, Rome
GMT+02 Athens, Istanbul,
Minsk
Greenwich Mean Time +2
hours, Athens, Istanbul, Minsk
GMT+03 Moscow,
Baghdad, Riyadh
Greenwich Mean Time +3
hours, Moscow, Baghdad,
Riyadh
GMT+03:30 Tehran
Greenwich Mean Time +3
hours 30 minutes, Tehran
GMT+04 Kabul, Baku,
Tbilisi
Greenwich Mean Time +4
hours, Kabul, Baku, Tbilisi
GMT+05 Islamabad,
Tashkent
Greenwich Mean Time +5
hours, Islamabad, Tashkent
TIME ZONE/NTP SET
GMT+05:30 Mumbai,
Kolkata
Greenwich Mean Time +5
hours 30 minutes, Mumbai,
Kolkata
4
TIME ZONE
GMT+06 Almaty, Dhaka
Greenwich Mean Time +6
hours, Almaty, Dhaka
5
6
7
SYNC. WITH NTP SERVER : OFF
GMT+07 Bangkok, Hanoi,
Jakarta
Greenwich Mean Time +7
hours, Bangkok, Hanoi, Jakarta
GMT+08 Beijing, Hong
Kong
Greenwich Mean Time +8
hours, Beijing, Hong Kong
GMT+09 Osaka, Sapporo,
Tokyo
Greenwich Mean Time +9
hours, Osaka, Sapporo, Tokyo
GMT+10 Canberra, Sydney
Greenwich Mean Time +10
hours, Canberra, Sydney
GMT+11 Magadan,
Solomon Is.
Greenwich Mean Time +11
hours, Magadan, Solomon Is.
GMT+12 Auckland,
Wellington
Greenwich Mean Time +12
hours, Auckland, Wellington
GMT+12 Fiji, Marshall Is.
Greenwich Mean Time +12
hours, Fiji, Marshall Is.
Use the following procedure to synchronize the time using the
Internet or an NTP server on a LAN.
1
Click the
panel.
button on the operation
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
2
Click “8. ADVANCED MENU SET”.
The “ADVANCED MENU SET” screen is displayed.
3
Click “4. TIME ZONE/NTP SET”.
The “TIME ZONE/NTP SET” screen is displayed.
NTP SERVER ADDRESS0
:
TIME TO SYNCHRONIZE
: 01
. 0
0
. 0
. 0
: 00
RENEWAL OF MANUAL OPERATION
RENEWAL
8
Set “TIME ZONE”.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
Description
Greenwich Mean Time -12
hours, Eniwetok, Kwajalein
GMT-11 Midway Island,
Samoa
Greenwich Mean Time -11
hours, Midway Island, Samoa
GMT-10 Hawaii
Greenwich Mean Time -10
hours, Hawaii
GMT-09 Alaska
Greenwich Mean Time -9
hours, Alaska
GMT-08 Pacific Time
Greenwich Mean Time -8
hours, Pacific Time
GMT-07 Arizona, Mountain
Time
Greenwich Mean Time -7
hours, Arizona
GMT-06 Central Time
Greenwich Mean Time -6
hours, Central Time
8
GMT-05 Eastern Time
Greenwich Mean Time -5
hours, Eastern Time
The setting is saved.
GMT-04 Atlantic Time
(Canada)
Greenwich Mean Time -4
hours, Atlantic Time (Canada)
GMT-03:30 Newfoundland
Greenwich Mean Time -3 hours
30 minutes, Newfoundland
GMT-03 Brasilia
Greenwich Mean Time -3
hours, Brasilia
GMT-02 Mid-Atlantic
Greenwich Mean Time -2
hours, Mid-Atlantic
5
6
7
Set “SYNC. WITH NTP SERVER” to
“ON”.
Set “NTP SERVER ADDRESS”.
Set the synchronization time with “TIME
TO SYNCHRONIZE”. (10 minute
intervals)
NETWORK
SETTINGS
Click [SAVE].
NETWORK
OPERATION
GMT-12 Eniwetok,
Kwajalein
NETWORK
CONTROL
4
SAVE
SETTINGS
: GMT Dublin, Lisbon, London
OPERATION
GMT+01 Amsterdam,
Berlin, Rome
INTRODUCTION
4. NTP SET
z Click [RENEWAL] to manually update the time.
OTHER
GMT-01 Azores, Cap Verde Greenwich Mean Time -1 hour,
Is.
Azores
‹GMT Dublin, Lisbon,
London
Greenwich Mean Time, Dublin,
Lisbon, London
210
English
1
DVR VIEWER2
Before Using DVR Viewer2
“DVR Viewer2” is a playback-only application software to support digital video recorders.
Use this section as your guide to DVR Viewer2 instead of the instruction manual provided in a separate volume when you use DVR
Viewer2 to play back the video and sound saved on an external medium such as a computer hard disk, USB memory, CD-R/RW, or
DVD+R/RW.
z Operating Environment
z Internet Option Settings
Environment to be used
• CPU: Pentium® IV (2 GHz) or higher
• RAM: 256 MB or more (512 MB or more recommended)
• Compatible OS: Windows 2000/XP
• Compatible machines: PC/AT machines operating with
the above OS
• Display: Color (XGA 65536-color or higher recommended)
• Audio: Sound card and speakers compatible with DirectX
• Available languages: English or Japanese
• Supported formats: JPEG2000 (image), WAV (sound)
Once the “DVR Viewer2” is fully installed, select Internet
Explorer, [Tools] → [Internet Options] → [Security].
If you click the [Custom Level] in the [Security] setting screen,
the [Security Settings] dialog pops up. Enable the “ActiveX
controls plug-ins”.
z Running and Quitting Viewer
1 Running DVR Viewer2.
To run Viewer, double click the shortcut icon on the desktop
or choose [Programs] → [SANYO] → [DVR Viewer2] →
[DVR Viewer2] from the start menu.
z Installing the Viewer Software
Follow the procedure below to install the software before
using it.
1 Insert the included CD-ROM in the computer CD-ROM
drive.
Or, if you have downloaded the latest release of DVR
Viewer2, decompress the compressed installation file.
z You can download the most recent version of the software
from our homepage.
Homepage address
http://www.sanyosecurity.com
2 Double click the installer icon.
The installer runs.
3 Select the language to be used for install and the
install destination following the instructions of the
installer.
The software starts installing.
4 Click [Finish] once the install is complete.
Once the “DVR Viewer2” is fully installed, a shortcut icon
appears on the desktop.
2 To quit Viewer.
To quit Viewer, click [Exit] from the file menu or click the
( ) button situated in the top-right corner of the screen.
z When writing data from the DVR onto a USB memory or a
CD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW, “DVR Viewer2” is copied to the
save destination.
z If an earlier version of Viewer software is installed on the
computer, before installing the present software, uninstall
the earlier version using [Add or Remove Programs] under
the control panel.
English
211
1
DVR VIEWER2
INTRODUCTION
Structure of the Screen and the Function of each Section
Running the Viewer software will result in the initial screen of the Viewer being displayed.
1
2
OPERATION
3
4
1 Menu bar
2 Toolbar
Frequently used command bars are deployed.
This is the basic menu of the Viewer software. Click each
menu to display the breakdown of each command.
1
2
SETTINGS
Initial screen
1 2 3
4
5
3
To display the [Open] dialog.
To save playback still images in the bitmap format.
To print playback still images.
To switch the display pattern of the screen (1/4/9/
16 screen).
5 To display the version of the Viewer software.
1 File menu
Open:
The [Open] dialog is displayed.
Save:
To save playback still images.
Print:
NETWORK
CONTROL
1
2
3
4
3 Viewer screen
The images of the loaded image files are displayed.
Right clicking on the screen will display the context menu,
which allows you to select the display pattern of the screen
(1/4/9/16 screen) and the display channel.
Title Input:
To display the dialog that allows you to input the title of the
print image.
Exit:
4 Viewer operating panel
To quit the Viewer software.
It operates the playback of the images that are displayed on
the Viewer screen. (Refer to P215)
2 View menu
Toolbar:
NETWORK
OPERATION
To print playback still images.
To show/hide the toolbar.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
Status bar:
To show/hide the status bar.
Camera Title:
To show/hide the camera title.
Date Display Format:
To set the date display format. (Refer to P216)
Time Display Position:
OTHER
You can position the date and time display (bottomright/top-right/top-left/bottom-left) on the playback
images.
Image:
To specify the display pattern of the screen (1/4/9/16
screen). (Refer to P214)
3 Help
To display the version of the Viewer software.
212
English
1
DVR VIEWER2
4
Opening Image Files
The image files are not displayed when the Viewer Software is
run. Specify and open the playback file through the procedure
below.
1
Click
Verify the displayed folder and click
[OK].
The image file loads.
in the toolbar.
Or, click “Open” in the file menu.
The [Open] dialog is displayed.
5
2
Click
Screen display
The first image of the loaded file is initially displayed on full
screen.
.
The [Browse for Folder] dialog is displayed.
01 09/29/2005 16:28:24
3
Specify the folder in which the images
are saved and click [OK].
Refer to the appropriate pages for details about the operations
of the Viewer Screen.
z Switching the display pattern (1/4/9/16 screen) of the
playback images (Refer to P214)
z Selecting the channels displayed on each screen (Refer to
P214)
z Operating panel functions (Refer to P215)
The folder specified in the [Open] dialog is displayed.
English
213
1
DVR VIEWER2
Selecting the Channel Displayed on
the Screen
The image display pattern can be selected from 4 patterns: full
screen, quad screen, 9 screen, 16 screen using the toolbar
button.
INTRODUCTION
Switching the Display Pattern of the
Screen
Right clicking the Viewer screen will display the context menu.
Clicking the channel you want to display within the context
menu will switch the channel display.
When using the quad screen, the number of the channels
being viewed is displayed in [Channel] of the operating panel.
Toolbar
Example: Displaying channel number 10 in the top
right screen
OPERATION
SETTINGS
01 09/29/2005 16:28:24
01 09/29/2005 16:28:24
Full screen
02 09/29/2005 16:28:23
03 09/29/2005 16:28:23
04 09/29/2005 16:28:23
NETWORK
CONTROL
01 09/29/2005 16:28:24
Channel display of the displayed image
Quad screen
02 09/29/2005 16:28:24
03 09/29/2005 16:28:24
04 09/29/2005 16:28:24
9 screen
02 09/29/2005 16:28:24
03 09/29/2005 16:28:24
04 09/29/2005 16:28:24
NETWORK
SETTINGS
01 09/29/2005 16:28:23
NETWORK
OPERATION
01 09/29/2005 16:28:23
(Context Menu)
z The channel being currently displayed is checked on the
specified channel.
z Unchecking a channel results in the images of that channel
not being displayed but at least one image display is
necessary for each screen pattern, therefore all the images
on the screen cannot be turned off.
z The channel number of the image data that is not being
saved is not displayed in the context menu.
z Multiple channels cannot be selected.
z The images of each channel are played back
correspondingly.
Even when switching the displayed channel, if there is no
image data at the current point of playback, no images will
be displayed.
16 screen
OTHER
z The display pattern can also be selected from the menu
bar or from the context menu displayed on the screen.
z On the 4/9/16 screen, double clicking on a specific image
will display it on full screen.
214
English
1
DVR VIEWER2
Functions of the Viewer Operating Panel
The audio and image functions of the Viewer screen can be operated.
(Viewer Operating Panel)
1
2
3
4
1 Playback slide bar
The time stamp (recording date and time) of the start and
stop point of the playback file are displayed at both ends of
the slide bar.
Sliding the slide bar knob allows you to move the playback
point.
6
7
4 Audio adjusting section
Allows you to turn on/off and adjust the volume of the audio
playback when a playback file contains audio data.
z Clicking the knob or sliding the knob while clicking it
displays the number of the image of the video being
displayed, on the cursor.
z Clicking a position that differs from the current playback
point using the slide bar will move the playback point by
one percent of the total number of images.
1
2
1 Clicking the button turns the audio playback on and
off.
2 Sliding the knob allows you to adjust the audio
volume to 10 levels.
2 Operating buttons
Buttons that can be selected are black, buttons that are
currently in function are green.
: Rewinds to the previous image when the image is
on pause.
z Be sure to stop playback before you turn on/off audio
playback.
z Audio playback is only available when you are in the full
screen layout.
: Pauses the playback.
: Forwards to the next image when the image is on
pause.
5 Channel display
The number of the playback channel of the images being
displayed is shown on full screen and quad screen.
: If the slide bar knob is positioned to the right of the
start point, the video can be played in reverse.
6 Time and date display
The time stamp (recording date and time) of the images
being viewed is displayed.
: If the slide bar knob is positioned to the left of the
stop point, the video can be played in sequence.
7 Image number display
The number of the “current image and the total number of
images” is displayed.
3 Playback speed adjusting section (Initial setting: 3)
Allows you to adjust the playback speed to 10 levels by
sliding the slide bar knob.
z Set the playback speed while playback is stopped.
z When playing back audio, audio is played back at the rate
at which it was recorded regardless of the [Playback
Speed] set.
English
5
215
1
DVR VIEWER2
Setting the Date and Time Display
Format
To save or print the image currently being displayed, switch to
“Full screen display” and perform the following operations.
Clicking the “Date Display Format” will display the [Date
Display Format] dialog. Set the format and delimiter and click
[OK].
Saving images
Click
INTRODUCTION
Saving and Printing Images
in the toolbar or “Save” in the File menu.
OPERATION
The save dialog appears.
Specify the destination folder and file and click [OK]. The
image on the Viewer screen is saved in the bitmap format.
Printing Images
SETTINGS
Click
menu.
3
1
in the toolbar or click “Print” in the File
2
The print dialog appears.
Set the printing conditions and click [OK]. The image on the
Viewer screen is printed full size.
Selections:
‹ MM/dd/yyyy (Month/Day/Year)
dd/MM/yyyy (Day/Month/Year)
yyyy/MM/dd (Year/Month/Day)
Displaying a Title on the Image that is Printed
NETWORK
CONTROL
1 Display format (‹ indicates default setting)
To set the date display format.
2 Delimiter (‹ indicates default setting)
Click “Title Input” in the File menu.
3 Sample
When you change the display format or delimiter, the
sample (preview) is updated with the new settings.
NETWORK
OPERATION
Selections: / (‹Slash), - (Hyphen), . (Period)
The “Title Input” dialog appears. Type the title to be printed in
the input box and click [OK]. The title is displayed at the bottom
of the image when it is printed.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
z The ten most recent input titles are saved which allows you
to choose a title using the pull down menu.
OTHER
216
English
2
INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS
RS-485 specifications
Data format
Mode
Asynchronous
Character length
8 bits
Data transmission
speed
2,400, 4,800, 9,600, 19,200 bps
Parity check
None
Stop bit
1 bit
Communication protocol
A proprietary Sanyo protocol (SSP: Security Serial Protocol)
is used. Use of a special controller for operation is
recommended. To obtain this controller, contact a Sanyo
service center.
English
217
2
INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS
INTRODUCTION
DVR/VCR command table
The table below shows the commands supported by the digital video recorder.
Left digit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Right digit
0
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
5
6
6
7
8
7
8
9
9
ACK
B
C
NAK
PLAY
SHIFTI
SHIFTK
SHIFTJ
SHIFTL
SHIFT+
/RP UP
SHIFT/RP DOWN
MENU
SECURITY
LOCK ON
SECURITY
LOCK OFF
SEARCH
SETTINGS
A
TIMER
ON/OFF
OPERATION
0
GROUP SET
GROUP
CHECK
GROUP
CLEAR
D
E
F
STILL
B
C
NETWORK
CONTROL
STOP
Left digit
8
9
A
D
E
F
Right digit
0
FULL 1
ALARM
SEARCH
1
FULL 2
ALARM SCAN
MULTI
QUAD
PLUS 1
FULL 3
FULL 4
FULL 5
5
ZOOM
FULL 6
6
MPX STATUS
SENSE
FULL 7
7
SEQUENCE
FULL 8
8
MONITOR2
FULL 9
STATUS
SENSE
MAIN MONITOR
MODE
CLOCK
DOWNLOAD
FULL 10
ALARM RESET
FULL 11
B
FULL 12
FF/ALARM F
C
FULL 13
REW/ALARM R
COPY
FULL 14
E
OSD/EXIT
FULL 15
F
FULL 16
REC
REC/DUB
REQUEST
RS-485
SEND START
RS-485
RCV CMF.
STATUS LOG1
218
REC STOP
English
OTHER
D
CAMERA
CONTROL
(MPX)
CAMERA
SWITCH
NETWORK
SETTINGS
9
A
NETWORK
OPERATION
2
3
4
CLOCK
ADJUST
MENU
RESET
3
Specifications
Specifications
Product name
Product number
Digital video recorder with multiplexer function
DSR-5716P (16 channels), DSR-5709P (9 channels)
Hard disk capacity
Can be expanded using 80, 160, 250, 300 or 500 GB hard disk (sold separately)
Television system
Image compression
Audio compression method
Recording resolution
Conforms to PAL format
JPEG2000
PCM
720 x 288 (fields)
Recording type
Picture quality
Field recording
5 levels (Basic, Normal, Enhanced, Fine, Super Fine)
Recording rate
Recording areas
Magnification
28 levels (100 to 0.033 FPS)
Recording area, Archive area
x2 digital zoom using the [ZOOM] button
Alarm log search, Alarm search, Alarm thumbnail search, Time/date search
Archive area search, Motion detection search, Bookmark search
Search modes
Date/clock settings
Date and time positions
Camera title display
Memory backup
Day, Month, Year (last two digits), Hours, Minutes, Seconds
2 position; upper and lower (display may also be turned off)
Each channel; up to 10 alphanumeric characters and symbols (display may also be turned off)
Approximately 30 days (for 48 hours of electrification)
Video input terminal
Video output terminal
VBS/VS 1.0 V (p-p), 75 Ω, BNC (DSR-5716P: x16, DSR-5709P: x9)
Through output of each video input, BNC (DSR-5716P: x16, DSR-5709P: x9)
Main monitor output terminal
Monitor 2 output terminal
VGA output
VBS 1.0 V (p-p), 75 Ω, BNC (x1)
VBS 1.0 V (p-p), 75 Ω, BNC (x1)
Dsub-15 pin
Audio input terminal
Audio output terminal
−8 dBs, 47 kΩ, unbalanced RCA (x2)
−8 dBs, 1 kΩ, unbalanced RCA (x1)
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX, RJ-45 (x1)
Compatible protocol: UDP, TCP/IP, HTTP server, NTP, SMTP, DHCP
LAN terminal
Terminals
RS-485/422 terminal
USB terminal
RJ-11 (x2) (with a termination switch)
Internal USB 2.0 x 2 (front terminal prioritized)
Remote control input terminal
Alarm input terminals
Two-wire voltage control (x2)
No-volt contacts (with a pulse width of 100 ms or more) (DSR-5716P: x16, DSR-5709P: x9)
Alarm output terminal
Relay (DC24V MAX. 1A /AC125V MAX. 0.3A)
Sensor alarm output terminals
Alarm reset input terminal
Open collector, Low level active (Max. 25 mA) (DSR-5716P: x16, DSR-5709P: x9)
No-volt contacts (with a pulse width of 100 ms or more) (x1)
Non rec out terminal
Clock adjust input terminal
Normal 5V DC, Low level active (x1)
No-volt contacts (with a pulse width of 100 ms or more) (x1)
Clock adjust output terminal
Warning output terminal
Normal recording area disk full
warning output terminal
OUTPU1, OUTPUT2
Open collector, Low level active (Max. 25 mA)
Normal 5V DC, Low level active (x1)
External timer input terminal
Normal 5V DC, Low level active (x1)
Normal 5V DC, Low level active (x1)
Expandable slot
No-volt contacts (with a pulse width of 100 ms or more) (x1)
Option SCSI board (Ultra 160 SCSI), Option S-ATA board
Power supply voltage
Current consumption
120 to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
720 mA
Allowable operating temperature
Allowable operating humidity
5 – 40ºC
10 – 80%
Dimensions
Weight
Accessories
420 (W) x 86 (H) x 364.5 (D) mm (Not including protruding areas or rubber pads)
5.5 kg without HDD, 6.1 kg with HDD, 6.7 kg with 2 HDDs
Power cord (x1), Power cord tie (x1)
Note that product appearance and specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
English
219
10
86
364.5
420
364.5
NETWORK
CONTROL
NETWORK
OPERATION
NETWORK
SETTINGS
OTHER
English
220
SETTINGS
86
OPERATION
DSR-5709P
420
INTRODUCTION
10
Specifications
3
Dimensions
Units: mm
DSR-5716P
3
Specifications
Table of recording rates and times
The recording time can be changed by modifying the recording rate and the recording picture quality.
The following table provides reference values for picture quality and recording rate when video is recorded to the recording area of the
hard disk.
z Recording days may change for different recorded videos.
„ Example: Recording to a 300 GB hard disk; internal HDD 300GB*1 (99%-usage)
Recording rate
FPS (field/sec)
100
50
25
16.67
12.5
8.333
6.25
5
4.167
3.571
3.125
2.778
2.5
2.273
1.923
1.667
1.471
1.316
1.19
1.087
1
0.5
0.333
0.25
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.033
BASIC
12 KB
NORMAL
16 KB
Recording time
ENHANCED
24 KB
2.20
4.45
8.95
13.45
17.95
26.91
35.91
44.91
53.87
62.87
71.87
80.83
89.83
98.79
116.79
134.75
152.70
170.66
188.66
206.62
224.58
449.20
673.83
898.41
1123.04
2246.08
4492.20
6738.33
1.70
3.41
6.83
10.29
13.70
20.58
27.45
34.33
41.20
48.08
54.95
61.83
68.66
75.54
89.29
103.04
116.79
130.50
144.25
158.00
171.75
343.50
515.25
687.04
858.79
1717.58
3435.20
5152.83
1.16
2.33
4.66
7.00
9.33
14.00
18.66
23.33
28.00
32.66
37.37
42.04
46.70
51.37
60.70
70.04
79.41
88.75
98.08
107.41
116.79
233.58
350.37
467.16
583.95
1167.95
2335.95
3503.91
FINE
32 KB
SUPER FINE
40 KB
0.87
1.75
3.50
5.29
7.04
10.58
14.12
17.66
21.20
24.75
28.29
31.83
35.37
38.91
46.00
53.08
60.16
67.20
74.29
81.37
88.45
176.95
265.41
353.91
442.41
884.83
1769.66
2654.50
0.70
1.41
2.83
4.25
5.66
8.54
11.37
14.20
17.08
19.91
22.75
25.62
28.45
31.33
37.00
42.70
48.41
54.12
59.79
65.50
71.20
142.41
213.62
284.83
356.08
712.16
1424.33
2136.54
„ Example: Recording to a 500 GB hard disk; internal HDD 500GB*1 (99%-usage)
Recording rate
FPS (field/sec)
100
50
25
16.67
12.5
8.333
6.25
5
4.167
3.571
3.125
2.778
2.5
2.273
1.923
1.667
1.471
1.316
1.19
1.087
1
0.5
0.333
0.25
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.033
(Unit: day)
(Unit: day)
BASIC
12 KB
NORMAL
16 KB
Recording time
ENHANCED
24 KB
FINE
32 KB
SUPER FINE
40 KB
3.79
7.58
15.20
22.83
30.45
45.70
60.95
76.20
91.45
106.70
121.91
137.16
152.41
167.66
198.16
228.66
259.12
289.62
320.12
350.58
381.08
762.20
1143.33
1524.41
1905.54
3811.08
7622.20
11433.33
2.87
5.79
11.62
17.45
23.29
34.95
46.62
58.25
69.91
81.58
93.25
104.91
116.54
128.20
151.54
174.83
198.16
221.45
244.79
268.08
291.41
582.87
874.29
1165.75
1457.16
2914.37
5828.75
8743.12
1.95
3.95
7.91
11.87
15.83
23.75
31.70
39.62
47.54
55.45
63.41
71.33
79.25
87.16
103.04
118.87
134.75
150.58
166.45
182.29
198.16
396.33
594.50
792.70
990.87
1981.75
3963.54
5945.33
1.50
3.00
6.00
9.00
12.00
18.00
24.00
30.00
36.00
42.00
48.04
54.04
60.04
66.04
78.04
90.04
102.08
114.08
126.08
138.08
150.12
300.25
450.37
600.50
750.66
1501.33
3002.66
4504.04
1.20
2.41
4.83
7.25
9.66
14.50
19.33
24.16
29.00
33.83
38.66
43.50
48.33
53.16
62.83
72.50
82.16
91.83
101.50
111.16
120.83
241.66
362.50
483.33
604.16
1208.37
2416.79
3625.20
: Area where audio recording is possible (when recording audio, the recording time is shorter than that shown above.)
English
221
3
Specifications
„ Example: Recording to 2600 GB hard disks; internal HDD 300GB*2 + external HDD 500GB*2 (99%-usage)
Recording rate
FPS (field/sec)
14.91
30.00
60.16
90.41
120.58
181.00
241.41
301.66
362.08
422.50
482.91
543.33
603.50
663.91
784.75
905.41
1026.25
1146.83
1267.66
1388.33
1509.16
3018.50
4527.66
6037.08
7546.25
15092.66
30185.41
45278.16
10.16
20.50
41.00
61.50
82.00
123.00
164.16
205.16
246.16
287.16
328.41
369.41
410.41
451.41
533.58
615.58
697.83
779.83
862.00
944.00
1026.25
2052.50
3078.75
4105.16
5131.41
10262.91
20526.08
30789.16
SUPER FINE
40 KB
7.75
15.50
31.00
46.58
62.08
93.16
124.25
155.33
186.41
217.50
248.75
279.83
310.91
342.00
404.16
466.33
528.66
590.75
652.91
715.08
777.41
1554.91
2332.33
3109.83
3887.50
7775.00
15550.00
23325.16
6.25
12.50
25.00
37.50
50.00
75.08
100.08
125.08
150.16
175.16
200.16
225.25
250.25
275.33
325.33
375.41
425.50
475.58
525.58
575.66
625.75
1251.50
1877.25
2503.00
3128.83
6257.83
12515.83
18773.91
„ Example: Recording to 4000 GB hard disks; internal HDD 500GB*2 + external HDD 750GB*4 (99%-usage)
(Unit: day)
Recording rate
FPS (field/sec)
23.25
46.75
93.75
140.75
187.58
281.58
375.41
469.16
563.16
657.00
751.00
844.83
938.58
1032.58
1220.41
1408.00
1595.83
1783.58
1971.41
2159.16
2346.83
4693.91
7040.91
9388.00
11735.00
23470.08
46940.16
70410.25
15.75
31.75
63.66
95.58
127.50
191.33
255.25
319.08
382.91
446.75
510.66
574.50
638.33
702.00
829.75
957.41
1085.16
1212.83
1340.58
1468.08
1595.83
3191.83
4787.83
6383.75
7979.75
15959.50
31919.25
47879.00
SUPER FINE
40 KB
12.00
24.16
48.33
72.50
96.66
145.00
193.33
241.66
290.00
338.33
386.75
435.25
483.58
531.91
628.58
725.25
822.00
918.83
1015.50
1112.16
1208.91
2418.00
3627.08
4836.16
6045.16
12090.50
24181.16
36271.91
9.58
19.33
38.83
58.33
77.83
116.66
155.66
194.50
233.50
272.33
311.33
350.16
389.16
428.16
506.00
583.83
661.66
739.50
817.33
895.16
973.00
1946.16
2919.33
3892.50
4865.66
9731.41
19462.91
29194.41
OTHER
30.58
61.16
122.58
184.00
245.41
368.25
490.91
613.75
736.58
859.25
982.00
1104.83
1227.50
1350.33
1595.83
1841.50
2086.91
2332.41
2578.08
2823.50
3069.00
6138.25
9207.50
12276.50
15345.75
30691.50
61383.25
92075.00
FINE
32 KB
NETWORK
SETTINGS
NORMAL
16 KB
NETWORK
OPERATION
100
50
25
16.67
12.5
8.333
6.25
5
4.167
3.571
3.125
2.778
2.5
2.273
1.923
1.667
1.471
1.316
1.19
1.087
1
0.5
0.333
0.25
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.033
BASIC
12 KB
Recording time
ENHANCED
24 KB
NETWORK
CONTROL
19.58
39.25
78.75
118.25
157.75
236.66
315.66
394.66
473.58
552.58
631.41
710.33
789.33
868.25
1026.25
1184.16
1341.91
1499.83
1657.83
1815.58
1973.50
3947.25
5921.00
7894.50
9868.25
19736.50
39473.25
59210.00
FINE
32 KB
SETTINGS
NORMAL
16 KB
OPERATION
100
50
25
16.67
12.5
8.333
6.25
5
4.167
3.571
3.125
2.778
2.5
2.273
1.923
1.667
1.471
1.316
1.19
1.087
1
0.5
0.333
0.25
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.033
BASIC
12 KB
INTRODUCTION
(Unit: day)
Recording time
ENHANCED
24 KB
: Area where audio recording is possible (when recording audio, the recording time is shorter than that shown above.)
222
English
3
Specifications
Table of recording rate settings
This table indicates recording times for pre-alarm recording, and it should be used when this type of recording is being carried out.
Recording rate FPS
(field/sec)
100
50
25
16.67
12.5
8.333
6.25
5
4.167
3.571
3.125
2.778
2.5
2.273
1.923
1.667
1.471
1.316
1.19
1.087
1
0.5
0.333
0.25
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.033
(Note 1)
(Note 2)
(Note 3)
Normal recording rate
(Note1)
(Note3)
(Note3)
Alarm recording rate
(Note3)
Pre-alarm recording rate
(Note2)
(Note3)
(Note3)
When mirroring or pre-alarm recording is set to “ON”, recording rates that can be set are limited.
When mirroring is set to “ON”, recording rates that can be set are limited.
Cannot be set when only one camera is connected.
Recording rate FPS
(field/sec)
25
12.5
6.25
3.125
1.563
1
0.5
0.333
0.25
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.033
OFF
Program recording rate
(Note4)
(Note 4)
(Note)
When mirroring or pre-alarm recording is set to “ON”, recording rates that can be set are limited.
For program recording, set recording rate per channel. Recording rates that can be set per channel are automatically
calculated.
Recording rates that cannot be selected
English
223
3
Specifications
Recording rate
FPS (field/sec)
5s
(5s)
10 s
(10s)
Recording time (Display of time on menu screens s: seconds m: minutes)
20 s
40 s
60 s
120 s
180 s
240 s
300 s
500 s
(20s)
(40s)
(1 m)
(2 m)
(3 m)
(4 m)
(5 m)
(10 m)
INTRODUCTION
Table of pre-alarm recording times
900 s
(15 m)
100
50
25
OPERATION
16.67
12.5
8.333
6.25
5
4.167
3.571
SETTINGS
3.125
2.778
2.5
2.273
1.923
1.667
1.563
NETWORK
CONTROL
1.471
1.316
1.19
1.087
1
Default setting, Recording rate: 12.5 FPS, Recording time: 1 min.
NETWORK
OPERATION
When setting alarm durations using a menu, settings are restricted to those available for the selected recording rate.
Similarly, when setting recording rates, the setting range is restricted to that available for the selected duration. For example, if the
alarm duration is set to 5 seconds, the recording rate can be set between 100 FPS and 12.5 FPS.
When setting fast recording rates, it may be necessary to first of all change the alarm duration setting.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
OTHER
224
English
3
Specifications
Terminal board specifications
Input/output terminals
Signal level
Input/output circuit
5V
Open
ground
input
Alarm input
[No-volt contacts]
R1
R2
10k
Q2
2SA1576
Terminal
0V
1k
100ms or more
R6
Open
Sensor alarm output
[Open collector/1kΩ, Low
level active (max: 10mA
1/10W)]
R3
1k
R5
10k
C1
1000p
IC
LC87F2832AU
IC
LC87F2832AU
0V
Detect motion
sensor
R8
1k
Stop alarm
recording
Terminal
4.7k
Q2
2SC4081
R7
10k
+5V
4.7k
CTL4,5 Remote control input
(JP.17)
[Two-wire voltage control]
Remote
control
terminal
1k
Sub micro
processor
5V
CTL6 Clock adjust input
[No-volt contacts]
Open
ground
input
100k
10k
1k
Terminal
0V
IC
74HC597
100ms or more
R6
Open
CTL7 Clock adjust output
[Open collector/1kΩ, Low
level active]
CTL8 External timer input
[No-volt contacts]
R8
10k
Approx. 1 second
1k
Q3
2SC4081
R7
10k
5V
Open
ground
input
1k
Terminal
0V
100ms or more
English
Terminal
IC
LC87F2832AU
225
100k
10k
IC
74HC597
3
Specifications
Input/output terminals
Signal level
Input/output circuit
INTRODUCTION
5V
CTL9 Alarm reset input
[No-volt contacts]
Open
ground
input
100k
10k
1k
IC
74HC597
Terminal
0V
100ms or more
CTL10 Warning output
[DC5V/5.7kΩ, Active Low]
IC
LC87F2832AU
0V
Warning conditions established
(HDD error, FAN error detected)
R
10k
R
4.7k
R
1k
Terminal
Q
2SC4081
R
10k
SETTINGS
5V
5V
CTL11 Normal recording
area disk full warning output
[DC5V/5.7kΩ, Active Low]
IC
LC87F2832AU
0V
R
10k
R
1k
Terminal
Q
2SC4081
R
10k
NETWORK
CONTROL
Warning conditions established
(no space in normal recording area)
R
4.7k
5V
5V
IC
LC87F2832AU
0V
R
10k
Stop recording
1k
Terminal
Q
2SC4081
R
10k
IC
LC87F2832AU
0V
Warning conditions established
(no space in archive area)
R
10k
R
4.7k
R
Q
2SC4081
R
10k
1k
Terminal
NETWORK
SETTINGS
Open
OTHER
CTL14 Alarm output
[Relay DC24V MAX. 1A
AC125V MAX. 0.3A
Normally open]
R
5V
5V
CTL13 Backup remaining
amount/ Timer recording
output
[DC5V/5.7kΩ, Active Low]
R
4.7k
NETWORK
OPERATION
CTL12 Non rec output/
VIDEO LOSS
[DC5V/5.7kΩ, Active Low]
OPERATION
5V
5V
0V
Start alarm Finish alarm
recording
recording
226
English
4
MENU SETTING SEQUENCE
INITIAL SET (→P.66)
<INITIAL SET>
1.LANGUAGE/CLOCK SET
2.CAMERA DETECT
3.TITLE SET
4.HOLIDAY SET
5.TIME PERIOD SET
MOVE:JOG
RECORD SET (→P.76)
<RECORD SET>
1.NORMAL REC EASY SET
2.RECORDING AREA SET
3.RECORDING CONDITIONS SET
4.NORMAL REC MODE SET
5.PROGRAM REC SET
6.TIMER SET
7.ALARM REC MODE SET
8.ALARM OPERATION SET
->
->
->
->
->
MOVE:JOG
SELECT:SHUTTLE
LANGUAGE/CLOCK SET (→P.19)
<LANGUAGE/LANGUE/SPRACHE/IDIOMA>
ENGLISH
<CLOCK SET>
01-01-2007 MON 00:00:00
<SUMMER TIME SET>
MODE
:
USE
WEEK MONTH TIME
ON LST-SUN
03
02:00
OFF LST-SUN
10
02:00
<EXT.CLOCK SET>
ADJUST. TIME
01:00
CAMERA DETECT (→P.69)
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
MOVE:JOG
SELECT:SHUTTLE
NORMAL REC EASY SET (→P.77)
RECORDING DURATION BASE
->
REC RATE BASE
->
CAMERA DETECT
CONTINUE?
NO
->
GEN
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
<GENE
1.DISPLAY SET
2.BUZZER SET
3.SECURITY LOCK
4.RS-485 SET
5.HDD SET
6.NETWORK SET
7.NETWORK CONTR
SELECT:SHUTTLE
MOVE:JOG
RECORDING DURATION BASE (→P.77)
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
REC RATE
CAUTION !
CONNECT CAMERA AND SET TIME
BEFORE SETUP
RECORDING AREA SET (→P.82)
S
DISP
<RECORDING DURATION BASE>
RECORDING DURATION : -- DAYS
TIMER RECORDING(DLY) : OFF
START --:-- STOP --:-PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
<NORMAL REC EASY SET>
<RECORDING AREA SET>
TOTAL CAPACITY
:
INTERNAL HDD
:
EXTERNAL HDD
:
RECORDING AREA
:
AREA FULL RESET ->
ARCHIVE AREA
:
AREA FULL RESET ->
<WARNING>
<MAIN MENU>
1.INITIAL SET
2.RECORD SET
3.GENERAL SET
4.SCREEN SET
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME
6.INITIALIZATION LOG
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS
8.ADVANCED MENU SET
DATE
QUAL
ALAR
TITL
NO V
:2
: ---- FPS/CAM
CONT
O
O
REC RATE BASE (→P.79)
BUZ
<REC RATE BASE>
REC RATE
: ---- FPS/CAM
TIMER RECORDING (DLY) : OFF
START --:-- STOP --:-PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
1200GB
500GB
700GB
80 %
20 %
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
RECORDING DURATION
: 1
: ---- DAYS
CAUTION: WHEN THE AREA SETTING IS CHANGED,
THE WHOLE AREA WILL BE INITIALIZED !
TITLE SET (→P.70)
CAMERA NO.01
SECU
RECORDING CONDITIONS SET (→P.85)
<TITLE SET>
<RECORDING CONDITIONS SET>
RECORDING AREA
OVERWRITE
: ON
ARCHIVE AREA
MODE
: MANUAL COPY
L
O
01
REMAINING DISK WARNING : 1%
AUTO DELETE
U
: OFF
LV1:LI
HOLIDAY SET (→P.71)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
<HOLIDAY
-----------------------------------------
SET>
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
-----------------------------------------
TIME PERIOD SET (→P.72)
<TIME PERIOD SET>
TIME PERIOD
T-1
T-2
T-3
T-4
TIME PERIOD A 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00
TIME PERIOD B 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00
SELECT TIME PERIOD
SEQUENCE
MASK
MOTION/ROI SENSOR
TIME PERIOD A
TIME PERIOD A
TIME PERIOD A
RS-4
NORMAL REC MODE SET (→P.88)
<NORMAL REC MODE
PICTURE QUALITY
PICTURE QUALITY SET
AUDIO RECORDING
REC RATE : 12.5 FPS
REC PROGRAM GROUP
SET>
: ENHANCED
->
: OFF
( 166H)
: OFF
HDD
PROGRAM REC SET (→P.90)
<PROGRAM REC SET>
DISK 1
EX-DISK
EX-DISK
DIS
CAUT
MIR
PLA
PROGRAM : P-1
SELECT INDIVIDUAL CAMERA RATE (FPS)
01:1
02:1
03:1
04:1
05:1
06:1
07:1
08:1
09:1
10:1
11:1
12:1
13:1
14:1
15:1
16:1
NORMAL REC :
57H
TIMER SET (→P.92)
WEEK
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
DLY
EXT
START
--:---:---:---:---:---:---:---:-*****
<TIMER SET>
STOP PROGRAM
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
*****
OFF
FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
ALARM REC MODE SET (→P.98)
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: ***
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
SET
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ALARM OPERATION SET (→P.108)
PICTURE QUALITY SET (→P.99)
CHANNEL
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
NORMAL REC EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN
ALARM REC EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN
CHANNEL
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
NORMAL REC EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN
ALARM REC EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN
MOTION SENSOR SET (→P.105)
<ALARM OPERATION SET>
ALARM RETRIGGER
: OFF
MAIN MON. DISPLAY
ALARM PRIORITY
MON.2 DISPLAY
NETW
<PICTURE QUALITY SET>
DHCP
IP AD
SUBNE
GATEW
PORT
NETWO
DNS S
MTU S
MAC A
NETW
NETWO
NET
PIC
OPERA
COP
CAM
: FULL
: LAST
: NC
USER
CH01
English
227
T-1
LEVEL : OFF
MODE : A
LV1:LI
4
MENU SETTING SEQUENCE
Continued
<GENERAL SET>
1.DISPLAY SET
2.BUZZER SET
3.SECURITY LOCK SET
4.RS-485 SET
5.HDD SET
6.NETWORK SET
7.NETWORK CONTROL SET
MOVE:JOG
SCREEN SET (→P.132)
<SCREEN SET>
1.MULTI SCREEN
: CHANGE
QUAD POSITION SET
->
MULTI 9 POSITION SET
->
MULTI 16 POSITION SET
->
2.SEQUENCE SET
FULL : 1S
QUAD : 1S
MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET
->
3.MASK
: OFF
MASK SET
->
4.COLOR LEVEL SET
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
SELECT:SHUTTLE
POWER
#001
<POWER LOSS/USED
LOSS
03-02 00:05
----- --:------ --:------ --:------ --:------ --:------ --:------ --:-USED TIME
TIME>
RECOVER
03-02 06:37
----- --:------ --:------ --:------ --:------ --:------ --:------ --:-->
OPERATION
CONTROL OUT
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 2
:
:
:
:
POWER LOSS/USED TIME (→ P.139)
QUAD POSITION SET (→P.132)
DISPLAY SET (→P.112)
<DISPLAY SET>
DATE
: ON TIME
QUALITY
: ON AUDIO
ALARM COUNT : ON ALARM TYPE
TITLE
: ON VIDEO LOSS
NO VIDEO
: ON
INTRODUCTION
GENERAL SET (→P.111)
MAIN MON.
QUAD1
01 02
03 04
ON
ON
ON
ON
QUAD2
05 06
QUAD3
09 10
QUAD4
13 14
07 08
11 12
15 16
MON.2
QUAD1
QUAD2
QUAD3
QUAD4
01 02
05 06
09 10
13 14
03 04
07 08
11 12
15 16
CHECK THE MAIN MON.SCREEN ->
CHECK THE MON.2 SCREEN ->
: NON REC
: ARCHIVE FULL
BUZZER SET (→P.114)
MULTI 9 POSITION SET (→P.132)
SETTINGS
<BUZZER SET>
ALARM
: OFF
DISK FULL
: ON
DISK ERROR
: ON
LOCK WARNING
: ON
KEY IN
: OFF
NON REC
: OFF
DISK TEMPERATURE: ON
MAIN MON.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
CHECK THE MAIN MON.SCREEN ->
SECURITY LOCK SET (→P.115)
OPERATION AUTHORITY
COPY
CAMERA CONTROL
USER ID SET
: NORMAL
: LV2,3,4
: LV2,3,4
->
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
USER ID SET (→P.117)
<USER
USER ID PASSWORD LV
ID4----- 4444---- 4
ID3----- 3333---- 3
ID2----- 2222---- 2
ID1----- 1111---- 1
-------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY,
ID SET>
| USER ID PASSWORD LV
| -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
RS-485 SET (→P.120)
MULTI 16 POSITION SET (→P.132)
MAIN MON.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
NETWORK
CONTROL
<SECURITY LOCK SET>
LOCKMODE
: KEY
FREE ACCESS LEVEL
: NO
CHECK THE MAIN MON.SCREEN ->
MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET (→P.134)
<RS-485 SET>
DATA SPEED
: 19200
STATUS INFO
: OFF
ALARM INFO
: OFF
ADDRESS
: 001
<MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET>
TIME PERIOD : T-1 (09:00 CH
01 02 03 04 05 06
MAIN MON. 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
MON. 2
1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
12:00)
07 08
1S 1S
1S 1S
HDD SET (→P.122)
<HDD SET>
DISK 1
: 250GB <- DISK 2
EX-DISK 1 : 250GB <- EX-DISK 2
EX-DISK 3 : 250GB <- EX-DISK 4
DISK INITIALIZE
CAUTION : ALL RECORDING WILL BE
MIRRORING
: OFF
PLAYBACK DRIVE : ***
06 07 08
EN EN EN
EN EN EN
4 15 16
EN EN EN
EN EN EN
: 250GB
: 250GB
: 250GB
->
ERASED!
<MASK SET>
TIME PERIOD : T-1 (09:00
CH
01 02 03 04 05
MAIN MON. OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
MON. 2
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
NETWORK
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
- 12:00)
06 07 08
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
CH
MAIN MON.
MON. 2
NETWORK
14
OFF
OFF
OFF
10
OFF
OFF
OFF
11
OFF
OFF
OFF
12
OFF
OFF
OFF
13
OFF
OFF
OFF
15
OFF
OFF
OFF
16
OFF
OFF
OFF
COLOR LEVEL SET (→P.138)
NETWORK SET (→P.125)
<COLOR LEVEL SET>
<NETWORK SET>
DHCP
: OFF
IP ADDRESS
: 192.168. 0. 1
SUBNET MASK
: 255.255.255. 0
GATEWAY
: 0. 0. 0. 0
PORT
: 00080
NETWORK SPEED
: NO LIMIT
DNS SET
->
MTU SIZE
: 1500(ETHERNET)
MAC ADDRESS
:08-00-7B-81-22-4C
CH01
COLOR LEVEL :
5
OTHER
T (→P.105)
09
OFF
OFF
OFF
NETWORK
SETTINGS
ET (→P.99)
MASK SET (→P.136)
NETWORK
OPERATION
CH
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MAIN MON. 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
MON. 2
1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
NETWORK CONTROL SET (→P.128)
<NETWORK CONTROL SET>
NETWORK CONTROL
: ON
NETWORK STATUS
: ON
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
OPERATION AUTHORITY
: NORMAL
COPY/DOWNLOAD
: LV3,4
CAMERA CONTROL
: LV2,3,4
USER ID SET
MODE : A
->
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
228
English
4
MENU SETTING SEQUENCE
INITIALIZATION LOG (→P.140)
DATE
-------------------------------------
< INITIALIZATION LOG
TIME AREA
ACTION
--:-- ------- ( -------:-- ------- ( -------:-- ------- ( -------:-- ------- ( -------:-- ------- ( -------:-- ------- ( -------:-- ------- ( -------:-- ------- ( -------:-- ------- ( ------
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
COPY MENU SETTINGS (→P.141)
<COPY MENU SETTINGS>
>
USER
----------------------------------------------------------------
DVR TYPE VER. SA16-04.00
SAVE MENUS TO USB MEMORY ->
LOAD MENUS FROM USB MEMORY ->
COPY USER ID SETTINGS
: NO
COPY RECORDING AREA SETTINGS : NO
*IF YOU CHOOSE 'YES' FOR 'AREA SETTINGS',
HARD DISK WILL BE INITIALIZED !
ADVANCED MENU SET (→P.144)
<ADVANCED MENU SET>
1.ROI SET
2.ALARM NOTICE SET
3.CAMERA CONTROL SET
4.TIME ZONE/NTP SET
MOVE:JOG
->
->
->
->
SELECT:SHUTTLE
ROI SET (→P.145)
CH-01
STATIC AREA 1 :
STATIC AREA 2 :
STATIC AREA 3 :
AREA SET (→P.147)
<ROI SET>
QUALITY
OFF
OFF
OFF
2
1
EFFECTIVE REC MODE : NORMAL REC
3
AREA SET
---->
CH-01
ALARM NOTICE SET (→P.149) SEND MAIL ADDRESS SET (→P.149)
<ALARM NOTICE SET>
ALARM NOTICE
: OFF
SMTP SERVER ADDRESS :
USER MAIL ADDRESS :
SEND MAIL ADDRESS SET ->
SUBJECT :
AUTHENTICATION
POP3 SERVER ADDRESS
USER ID
PASSWORD
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
: NO USE
:
:
:
<SEND MAIL ADDRESS SET>
USE MAIL ADDRESS
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
IMAGE
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
CAMERA CONTROL SET (→P.150) PROTCOL/ADDRESS SET (→P.150)
<CAMERA CONTROL SET>
1. PROTOCOL/ADDRESS SET
->
2. ALARM REC TRIGGER SET
->
TIME ZONE/NTP SET (→P.154)
<TIME ZONE SET>
TIME ZONE
GMT Dublin, Lisbon, London
<NTP SET>
SYNC. WITH NTP SERVER : OFF
NTP SERVER ADDRESS
: 0. 0. 0. 0
TIME TO SYNCHRONIZE : 01:00
English
229
<PROTOCOL/ADDRESS SET>
CH PROTOCOL
ADD. CH PROTOCOL
01 OFF
--09 OFF
02 OFF
--10 OFF
03 OFF
--11 OFF
04 OFF
--12 OFF
05 OFF
--13 OFF
06 OFF
--14 OFF
07 OFF
--15 OFF
08 OFF
--16 OFF
2ND RS-485/422 PROTOCOL : OFF
ADD.
----------------9600bps
ALRAM REC TRIGGER SET (→P.152)
CH
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
<ALARM REC TRIGGER SET>
ACTION
CH ACTION
OFF
09 --------OFF
10 --------OFF
11 --------OFF
12 ----------------13 ----------------14 ----------------15 ----------------16 ---------
OpenSSL License
The following license is applied to OpenSSL.
INTRODUCTION
LICENSE ISSUES
==============
The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of
the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit.
See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style
Open Source licenses. In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL
please contact [email protected]
OpenSSL License
---------------
NETWORK
CONTROL
NETWORK
OPERATION
NETWORK
SETTINGS
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected])
All rights reserved.
OTHER
/*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
SETTINGS
Original SSLeay License
-----------------------
OPERATION
/* ====================================================================
* Copyright (c) 1998-2003 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
*
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
*
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
*
the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
*
distribution.
*
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this
*
software must display the following acknowledgment:
*
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
*
for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)”
*
* 4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to
*
endorse or promote products derived from this software without
*
prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
*
[email protected]
*
* 5. Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL”
*
nor may “OpenSSL” appear in their names without prior written
*
permission of the OpenSSL Project.
*
* 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
*
acknowledgment:
*
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
*
for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)”
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ‘‘AS IS’’ AND ANY
* EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
* PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR
* ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
* NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
* ====================================================================
*
* This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
* ([email protected]). This product includes software written by Tim
* Hudson ([email protected]).
*
*/
This package is an SSL implementation written
by Eric Young ([email protected]).
The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as
the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions
apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,
lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation
included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms
except that the holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]).
230
English
OpenSSL License
* Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in
* the code are not to be removed.
* If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution
* as the author of the parts of the library used.
* This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or
* in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
*
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
*
must display the following acknowledgement:
*
“This product includes cryptographic software written by
*
Eric Young ([email protected])”
*
The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library
*
being used are not cryptographic related :-).
* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from
*
the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
*
“This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected])”
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ‘‘AS IS’’ AND
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
* SUCH DAMAGE.
*
* The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or
* derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be
* copied and put under another distribution licence
* [including the GNU Public Licence.]
*/
English
231
INDEX
A
L
Alarm is cancelled ........................................................110
ALARM LOG SEARCH ................................................176
Alarm log search ............................................................38
ALARM NOTICE SET ..................................................207
ALARM REC MODE SET ............................................192
Alarm recording .................................................... 30, 168
ALARM SEARCH ........................................................177
Alarm search ..................................................................39
ALARM THUMBNAIL SEARCH ...................................177
Alarm thumbnail search .................................................42
Alarm triggers ..............................................................104
Archive area ...................................................................21
ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH ..........................................178
AUTO DELETE ..............................................................87
Automatic camera selection ...........................................25
LOAD MENUS FROM USB MEMORY ....................... 206
M
Making network control settings .................................. 128
Making NTP settings ................................................... 154
MASK SET .................................................................. 203
MIRRORING ............................................................... 198
Monitor 2 ....................................................................... 26
MONITORING VIDEO FROM A CAMERA ................. 169
MOTION DETECTION SEARCH ................................ 179
Motion detection search ................................................ 47
N
NETWORK CONTROL ............................................... 162
NETWORK SET .......................................................... 199
Network settings .......................................................... 125
NORMAL REC MODE SET ........................................ 189
Normal recording ........................................................... 29
Normal recording easy setup ........................................ 77
B
Basic connections ..........................................................13
Bookmarking video while playing ...................................34
BUZZER SET ..............................................................195
O
C
Operating display .......................................................... 18
overwrite permission ..................................................... 84
CAMERA CONTROL SET ...........................................209
Camera control settings ...............................................150
Changing recording areas .............................................83
CLOCK SET ................................................................185
COPY MENU SETTINGS ............................................206
Copying to a CD-R/RW or DVD±R/±RW .......................57
Copying to a USB memory ............................................54
Copying to the archive area .........................................180
Copying video to the archive area .................................53
P
Playing enlarged video .................................................. 36
Playing on multi 9 or multi 16 screens .......................... 35
Playing video on a full screen ....................................... 32
Playing video on quad screens ..................................... 35
POWER LOSS/USED TIME ....................................... 139
Pre-alarm recording ..............................................30, 168
PRECAUTION ................................................................. 1
PROGRAM REC SET ................................................. 190
D
Detecting cameras .........................................................69
DISPLAY SET ..............................................................195
Downloading to a PC ...................................................181
DVR VIEWER2 ............................................................211
R
RECORD SET ............................................................... 76
Recording area .............................................................. 21
RECORDING AREA SET ........................................... 187
RECORDING CONDITIONS SET ............................... 188
Recording pattern ........................................................ 100
Resetting menu items ................................................... 64
E
Enlarging video ..............................................................24
EXT. CLOCK SET setting ............................................185
External clock setting .....................................................68
S
G
Saving user settings .................................................... 141
Searching within the archive area ................................. 46
SEQUENCE SET ........................................................ 202
Setting alarm notification ............................................. 149
Setting alarm recording ................................................. 98
Setting camera titles ...................................................... 70
Setting data display ..................................................... 112
Setting display for video loss ....................................... 113
Setting holidays ............................................................. 71
Setting masks .............................................................. 136
Setting normal recording ............................................... 88
Setting program recording ............................................. 90
Setting recording conditions .......................................... 85
Setting ROI .................................................................. 145
GENERAL SET ............................................................111
H
HDD SET .....................................................................198
HOLIDAY SET .............................................................186
How to Register Preset Positions ................................153
I
INITIALIZATION LOG ..................................................140
Initializing the hard disk ...............................................122
232
English
INDEX
Setting RS-485 ............................................................120
Setting the buzzer ........................................................114
Setting the color level ..................................................138
Setting the interval and monitors for automatic screen
selection .......................................................................134
Setting the language ......................................................19
Setting the security lock ...............................................115
Setting the summer time ................................................67
Setting the time ..............................................................20
Setting time periods .......................................................72
Setting user ID .............................................................117
SUMMER TIME SET ...................................................185
T
TIME/DATE SEARCH ..................................................178
Time/date search ...........................................................44
TIMER ............................................................................29
Timer recording ............................................................168
TIMER SET ..................................................................191
Timer settings ................................................................92
U
USER ID SET ..............................................................197
User level ................................................... 117, 131, 197
V
Viewing on a full screen .................................................22
Viewing on multi 9 or multi 16 screens ..........................24
Viewing on quad screens ...............................................23
Viewing still images .......................................................34
English
233
SANYO Electric Co., Ltd.
Printed on recycled paper
1AC6P1P3155-L8HBP/XE, L8HBQ/XE (0207TR-SY)
Printed in Japan
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement